User'S Manual: Sysdrive 3G3Fv

Cat. No.
I516-E1-05
USER’S MANUAL
SYSDRIVE 3G3FV
High-function General-purpose Inverter
Thank you for choosing this SYSDRIVE 3G3FV-series product. Proper use and
handling of the product will ensure proper product performance, will length
product life, and may prevent possible accidents.
Please read this manual thoroughly and handle and operate the product with care.
1. To ensure safe and proper use of the OMRON Inverters, please read this USER’S MANUAL (Cat.
No. I516-E1) to gain sufficient knowledge of the devices, safety information, and precautions be-
fore actual use.
2. The products are illustrated without covers and shieldings for closer look in this USER’S MANU-
AL. For actual use of the products, make sure to use the covers and shieldings as specified.
3. This USER’S MANUAL and other related user’s manuals are to be delivered to the actual end
users of the products.
4. Please keep this manual close at hand for future reference.
5. If the product has been left unused for a long time, please inquire at our sales representative.
NOTICE
1. This manual describes the functions of the product and relations with other products. You
should assume that anything not described in this manual is not possible.
2. Although care has been given in documenting the product, please contact your OMRON
representative if you have any suggestions on improving this manual.
3. The product contains potentially dangerous parts under the cover. Do not attempt to open
the cover under any circumstances. Doing so may result in injury or death and may damage
the product. Never attempt to repair or disassemble the product.
4. We recommend that you add the following precautions to any instruction manuals you pre-
pare for the system into which the product is being installed.
Precautions on the dangers of high-voltage equipment.
Precautions on touching the terminals of the product even after power has been
turned off. (These terminals are live even with the power turned off.)
5. Specifications and functions may be changed without notice in order to improve product
performance.
Items to Check when Unpacking

Check the following items when removing the product from the package:
Has the correct product been delivered (i.e., the correct model number and speci-
fications)? Check the nameplate as shown below.
Inverter model
Input specification
Output specification
Has the product been damaged in shipping?

Are any screws or bolts loose?
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified
operator and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual.
Always heed the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in
injury to people or damage to property.
! DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death
or serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
! WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death
or serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
! Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor
or moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References

All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when
it refers to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name
of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products,
often means “word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PC” means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation
for anything else.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different
types of information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.
 OMRON, 1996
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because
OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual
is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Never-
theless, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for dam-
ages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
General Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the SYSDRIVE Inverters and peripheral
devices.
This manual may include illustrations of the product with protective covers removed in order
to describe the components of the product in detail. Make sure that these protective covers
are on the product before use.
Consult your OMRON representative when using the product after a long period of storage.
! WARNING Do not touch the inside of the Inverter. Doing so may result in electrical shock.
! WARNING Operation, maintenance, or inspection must be performed after turning OFF the
power supply, confirming that the CHARGE indicator (or status indicators) are OFF,
and after waiting for the time specified on the front cover. Not doing so may result in
electrical shock.
! WARNING Do not damage, pull on, apply stress to, place heavy objects on, or pinch the cables.
Doing so may result in electrical shock.
! WARNING Do not touch the rotating parts of the motor under operation. Doing so may result in
injury.
! WARNING Do not modify the product. Doing so may result in injury or damage to the product.
! Caution Do not store, install, or operate the product in the following places. Doing so may
result in electrical shock, fire or damage to the product.
Locations subject to direct sunlight.
Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the
specifications.
Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
Locations subject to exposure to combustibles.
Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
Locations subject to shock or vibration.
! Caution Do not touch the Inverter radiator, regenerative resistor, or Servomotor while the
power is being supplied or soon after the power is turned OFF. Doing so may result in
a skin burn due to the hot surface.
! Caution Do not conduct a dielectric strength test on any part of the Inverter. Doing so may
result in damage to the product or malfunction.
! Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the fol-
lowing locations. Not doing so may result in equipment damage.
Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields and magnetic fields.
Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
Locations close to power supplies.
Transportation Precautions
! Caution Do not hold by front cover or panel , instead, hold by the radiation fin (heat sink) while
transporting the product. Doing so may result in injury.
! Caution Do not pull on the cables. Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunc-
tion.
! Caution Use the eye-bolts only for transporting the Inverter. Using them for transporting the
machinery may result in injury or malfunction.
Installation Precautions
! WARNING Provide an appropriate stopping device on the machine side to secure safety. (A
holding brake is not a stopping device for securing safety.) Not doing so may result in
injury.
! WARNING Provide an external emergency stopping device that allows an instantaneous stop of
operation and power interruption. Not doing so may result in injury.
! Caution Be sure to install the product in the correct direction and provide specified clear-
ances between the Inverter and control panel or with other devices. Not doing so
may result in fire or malfunction.
! Caution Do not allow foreign objects to enter inside the product. Doing so may result in fire or
malfunction.
! Caution Do not apply any strong impact. Doing so may result in damage to the product or
malfunction.
Wiring Precautions
! WARNING Wiring must be performed only after confirming that the power supply has been
turned OFF. Not doing so may result in electrical shock.
! WARNING Wiring must be performed by authorized personnel. Not doing so may result in
electrical shock or fire.
! WARNING Be sure to confirm operation only after wiring the emergency stop circuit. Not doing
so may result in injury.
! WARNING Always connect the ground terminals to a ground of 100 Ω or less for the 200-V AC
class, or 10 Ω or less for the 400-V AC class. Not connecting to a proper ground may
result in electrical shock.
! Caution Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in
external wiring. Not doing so may result in fire.
! Caution Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as the AC power sup-
ply voltage. An incorrect power supply may result in fire, injury, or malfunction.
! Caution Connect the Braking Resistor and Braking Resistor Unit as specified in the manual.
Not doing so may result in fire.
! Caution Be sure to wire correctly and securely. Not doing so may result in injury or damage to
the product.
! Caution Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block. Not doing so may result in
fire, injury, or damage to the product.
! Caution Do not connect an AC power to the U, V, or W output. Doing so may result in damage
to the product or malfunction.
Operation and Adjustment Precautions

! WARNING Turn ON the input power supply only after mounting the front cover, terminal covers,
bottom cover, Operator, and optional items. Not doing so may result in electrical
shock.
! WARNING Do not remove the front cover, terminal covers, bottom cover, Operator, or optional
items while the power is being supplied. Doing so may result in electrical shock or
damage to the product.
! WARNING Do not operate the Operator or switches with wet hands. Doing so may result in
electrical shock.
! WARNING Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the
machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm. Doing so may result in injury.
! WARNING Do not come close to the machine immediately after resetting momentary power
interruption to avoid an unexpected restart (if operation is set to be continued in the
processing selection function after momentary power interruption is reset). Doing so
may result in injury.
! WARNING Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP Key on the Operator
is valid only when function settings are performed. Not doing so may result in injury.
! WARNING Be sure to confirm that the RUN signal is turned OFF before turning ON the power
supply, resetting the alarm, or switching the LOCAL/REMOTE selector. Doing so
while the RUN signal is turned ON may result in injury.
! Caution Be sure to confirm permissible ranges of motors and machines before operation
because the Inverter speed can be easily changed from low to high. Not doing so
may result in damage to the product.
! Caution Provide a separate holding brake when necessary. Not doing so may result in injury.
! Caution Do not perform a signal check during operation. Doing so may result in injury or dam-
age to the product.
! Caution Do not carelessly change settings. Doing so may result in injury or damage to the
product.
Maintenance and Inspection Precautions

! WARNING Do not touch the Inverter terminals while the power is being supplied.
! WARNING Maintenance or inspection must be performed only after turning OFF the power
supply, confirming that the CHARGE indicator (or status indicators) is turned OFF,
electrical shock.
! WARNING Maintenance, inspection, or parts replacement must be performed by authorized

personnel. Not doing so may result in electrical shock or injury.
! WARNING Do not attempt to take the Unit apart or repair. Doing either of these may result in
electrical shock or injury.
! Caution Carefully handle the Inverter because it uses semiconductor elements. Careless
handling may result in malfunction.
! Caution Do not change wiring, disconnect connectors, the Operator, or optional items, or
replace fans while power is being supplied. Doing so may result in injury, damage to
the product, or malfunction.
Warning Labels
Warning labels are pasted on the product as shown in the following illustration. Be sure to
follow the instructions given there.
Warning Labels
Contents of Warning
Checking Before Unpacking
Checking the Product
On delivery, always check that the delivered product is the SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Inverter that you
ordered.
Should you find any problems with the product, immediately contact your nearest local sales
representative.
Checking the Nameplate

Inverter model 3G3FV-A2001
Input specifications
Output specifications
Checking the Model

3G3FV-A2037-CUE
Specifications
Maximum applicable motor capacity
Voltage class
Installation type
Series name: 3G3MV Series
Specifications
None Japanese model
-E English model
-CE Model conforming to EN standards
-CUE Model conforming to EN and UL/cUL
standards
Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity
004 0.4 kW
007 0.75 kW
015 1.5 kW
022 2.2 kW
037 3.7 kW
055 5.5 kW
075 7.5 kW
110 11 kW
150 15 kW
185 18.5 kW
220 22 kW
300 30 kW
370 37 kW
450 45 kW
550 55 kW
750 75 kW
11K 110 kW
16K 160 kW
18K 185 kW
22K 220 kW
30K 300 kW
Voltage Class
2 Three-phase 200-V AC input (200-V class)
4 Three-phase 400-V AC input (400-V class)
Installation Type
A Panel-mounting (IP10 min.) or closed wall-mounting models
C Closed wall-mounting models (IP00 min.)
Checking for Damage

Check the overall appearance and check for damage or scratches resulting from transportation.
Checking the Accessories

Note that this manual is the only accessory provided with the 3G3MV. Set screws and other necessary
parts must be provided by the user.
About this Manual
This manual is divided into the chapters described in the following table. Information is organized by
application area to enable you to use the manual more efficiently.
Chapter Contents
Chapter 1 Overview Describes features and nomenclature. Also describes new functions.
Chapter 2 Installation Provides information required for system design, such as product
dimensions, installation dimensions, peripheral device design
information, and peripheral device selection information.
Chapter 3 Preparing for Operation Describes nomenclature, Digital Operator procedures, such as key
operations, for operating and monitoring Inverters, and mode contents
and configuration.
Chapter 4 Trial Operation Describes the method for controlling operation through a Digital
Operator to perform trial operation of the system.
Chapter 5 Basic Operation Describes basic Inverter control functions for users not familiar with
Inverters. The functions that must be understood to drive a motor with
an Inverter are described. Each of the four control modes of the
3G3FV-series Inverters is described in order alone with the settings
required for all modes and individual modes. Refer to the information
for all control modes and then to items required for the control mode
you will be using.
Chapter 6 Advanced Operation Describes all of the functions provided by the Inverter. These functions
will enable more advanced applications, and includes functions that
will improve motor control through the Inverter, such as
responsiveness (torque characteristics), increasing speed accuracy,
PID control, torque limits, torque controls, overtorque detection,
protective functions, and other functions. Each of the four control
modes of the 3G3FV-series Inverters is described in order alone with
the characteristics of each mode and fountains common to all modes.
Refer to the information for all control modes and then to items
required for the control mode you will be using.
Chapter 7 List of Parameters Lists basic information on Inverter parameters as a reference for users
already familiar with Inverter operation. Parameters are listed in order
with the page numbers of further information for easy reference.
Chapter 8 Maintenance Operations Provides maintenance, inspection, fault analysis, and troubleshooting
information required to deal with problems that may occur during
operation.
Chapter 9 Specifications Provides Inverter specifications, as well as the specifications and
dimensions of peripheral devices.
Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
WARRANTY
OMRON’s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for
a period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING
NON–INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE
PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR
STRICT LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on
which liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON’S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to
the combination of products in the customer’s application or use of the products.
At the customer’s request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the
uses listed may be suitable for the products:
• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions
or uses not described in this manual.
• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND
INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user’s programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be
changed without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish
key specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative
at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and
does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON’s test conditions, and the users
must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON
Warranty and Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
How to Change the Digital Operator Display from
Japanese to English
If the Digital Operator displays messages in Japanese, change to the English mode using
the following steps.
(This manual provides descriptions for the English mode.)
Power ON
<Ć3J=3 <Z2
U1Ć01= 0.00 HZ
FV* S0D^>]@8 *
D^W2L^ S0D^
FV* S0D^>]@8 * 9^]:^>]@8 A1Ć00= 1 **

6]7.3>/C2 FN]:^ FN]:^
A1Ć00= 0
English
Entry Accepted
** Main Menu **
Operation Select Language
English
Table of Contents
Chapter 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-2 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-3 New Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-3-1 Software Ver. VSG101040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-3-2 Software Ver. VSG101043 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1-3-3 Software Ver. VSG101113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1-3-4 Software Ver. VSG101114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Chapter 2. Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-1-1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-1-2 Installation Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-2 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-2-1 Removing and Mounting the Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-2-2 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2-2-3 Standard Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2-2-4 Wiring Around the Main Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2-2-5 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2-2-6 Installing and Wiring PG Speed Control Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Chapter 3. Preparing for Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-1 Using the Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-2 Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-3 Operation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3-4 Initialize Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3-5 Program Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3-6 Auto-tuning Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3-7 Modified Constants Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
3-8 Operation Mode Selection Key and Local/Remote Selection Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Chapter 4. Trial Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4-1 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-2 Operation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-2-1 Power Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-2-2 Checking the Display Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-2-3 Initializing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-2-4 Setting Input Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-2-5 Auto-tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-2-6 No-load Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-2-7 Actual Load Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Chapter 5. Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5-1 Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-1-1 Setting the Access Level and Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-1-2 Frequency Reference Settings from Control Circuit Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-1-3 Frequency Reference Settings from Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-1-4 Run Source and Responsiveness Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Table of Contents
5-1-5 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5-1-6 Disabling Reverse Operation (b1-04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5-1-7 Selecting the Stopping Method (b1-03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5-1-8 Multi-function Input Settings (H1-01 through H1-06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5-2 Open-loop Vector Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5-2-1 Auto-tuning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5-2-2 Auto-tuning Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5-3 V/f Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5-3-1 Setting the Motor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5-3-2 V/f Pattern Selection (E1-03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5-4 Flux Vector Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5-4-1 PG Speed Control Card Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5-4-2 Setting the Zero-speed Operation Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5-4-3 Auto-tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5-4-4 Speed Loop (ASR) Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
5-4-5 Adjusting Speed Control Loop (ASR) Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5-5 V/f Control with PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
5-5-1 Setting the Motor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
5-5-2 V/f Pattern Selection (E1-03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
5-5-3 PG Speed Control Card Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5-5-4 Speed Loop (ASR) Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5-5-5 Adjusting Speed Control Loop (ASR) Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Chapter 6. Advanced Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6-1 Open-loop Vector Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-1-1 Summary of Open-loop Vector Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-1-2 Torque Limit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-1-3 Adjusting Speed Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6-1-4 Setting Magnetic Flux Characteristics for Open-loop Vector Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6-1-5 Operation for Saturated Output Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6-1-6 Startup Torque Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6-1-7 Selecting Auto-tuning Carrier Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6-1-8 Setting/Adjusting Motor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6-2 Normal V/f Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6-2-1 Summary of V/f Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6-2-2 Energy-saving Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-2-3 Hunting-prevention Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6-2-4 Setting Motor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6-3 Flux Vector Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6-3-1 Summary of Flux Vector Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6-3-2 Droop Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6-3-3 Zero-servo Function (Position-lock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6-3-4 Torque Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6-3-5 Speed/Torque Control Switching Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6-3-6 Torque Limit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6-3-7 Setting/Adjusting Motor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6-3-8 Operation for Saturated Output Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6-3-9 Selecting Auto-tuning Carrier Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6-4 V/f Control With PG Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
6-4-1 Summary of V/f Control With PG Feedback Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
6-4-2 Energy-saving Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
6-4-3 Hunting-prevention Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Table of Contents
6-4-4 Setting Motor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
6-5 Common Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
6-5-1 Summary of Common Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
6-5-2 Application Parameters (b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
6-5-3 Tuning Parameters (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
6-5-4 Reference Parameters (d) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
6-5-5 Motor Parameters (E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
6-5-6 Option Parameters (F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
6-5-7 External Terminal Functions: H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
6-5-8 Protective Functions: L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
6-5-9 Operator Parameters: o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110
Chapter 7. Parameter Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7-1 Initialize Mode Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-2 Program Mode Parameter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7-2-1 Application Group: b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7-2-2 Tuning Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7-2-3 Reference Parameters List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7-2-4 Motor Constant Parameter Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
7-2-5 Options Parameter Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7-2-6 Terminal Parameter Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
7-2-7 Protection Parameter Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
7-2-8 Operator Parameter Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
Chapter 8. Maintenance Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8-1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8-1-1 Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8-1-2 Minor Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8-1-3 Operation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8-2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8-3 Maintenance and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Chapter 9. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9-1 Inverter Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9-2 Option Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Chapter 10. Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

10-1 Notes on Using the Inverter for a Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-1

1
Chapter 1
Introduction
1-1 Function
1-2 Nomenclature
1-3 New Functions
Introduction Chapter 1
1-1 Functions
The general-purpose SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Inverter provides full current vector control
based on advanced control logic. An auto-tuning function allows for easy vector control.
The Digital Operator’s display area features a 2-line by 16-character liquid crystal dis-
play. Parameters can be displayed in up to seven languages, including Japanese. The
parameter settings and monitor items can be understood at a glance, providing an inter-
active feel during operation.
1-2
SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Inverter Models
• The following 200- and 400-V class 3G3FV Inverter models are available.
• A total of 21 types of Inverters are available for maximum applicable motor capacities of 0.4 to 300 kW.
Voltage class Protective structure Maximum applied motor capacity Model
200-V class NEMA1 type

yp 0.4 kW 3G3FV-A2004
( h
(3-phase)) 0.75 kW 3G3FV-A2007
1.5 kW 3G3FV-A2015
2.2 kW 3G3FV-A2022
3.7 kW 3G3FV-A2037
5.5 kW 3G3FV-A2055
7.5 kW 3G3FV-A2075
11 kW 3G3FV-A2110
15 kW 3G3FV-A2150
Open
p chassis type
yp 18.5 kW 3G3FV-B2185
22 kW 3G3FV-B2220
30 kW 3G3FV-B2300
37 kW 3G3FV-B2370
45 kW 3G3FV-B2450
55 kW 3G3FV-B2550
75 kW 3G3FV-B2750-E
400-V class NEMA1 type

yp 0.4 kW 3G3FV-A4004
( h
(3-phase)) 0.75 kW 3G3FV-A4007
1.5 kW 3G3FV-A4015
2.2 kW 3G3FV-A4022
3.7 kW 3G3FV-A4037
5.5 kW 3G3FV-A4055
7.5 kW 3G3FV-A4075
11 kW 3G3FV-A4110
15 kW 3G3FV-A4150
Open
p chassis type
yp 18.5 kW 3G3FV-B4185
22 kW 3G3FV-B4220
30 kW 3G3FV-B4300
37 kW 3G3FV-B4370
45 kW 3G3FV-B4450
55 kW 3G3FV-B4550
75 kW 3G3FV-B4750-E
110 kW 3G3FV-B411K-E
1-3
Selection of Modes for Vector Control and V/f Control

• The 3G3FV has the following four control modes.
Open-loop vector control (without PG*) [Factory default]
Flux vector control (with PG)
V/f control (without PG)
V/f control (with PG)
*PG stands for “pulse generator” (encoder).
• Vector control is a method for removing interferences with magnetic flux and torque, and controlling
torque according to references. Current vector control independently controls magnetic flux current
and torque current by simultaneously controlling the motor’s primary current and its phases. This al-
lows smooth rotation and high torque, along with accurate speed and torque control, at very low
speeds.
• Vector control can be replaced from the conventional V/f control system. If the motor parameter re-
quired for vector control is unknown, it can be set automatically with the auto-tuning function.
• The respective control modes are effective for the following applications:
Open-loop vector control (without PG): General variable speed drive
Flux vector control (with PG): Simple servo-drive, high-precision speed control, torque control
V/f control (without PG): Conventional Inverter control mode. Used for multiple drives.
V/f control (with PG): Simple speed feedback control
• The control characteristics for each mode are shown in the following table.
Vector control V/f control
Without PG With PG Without PG With PG
Speed control range 1:100 1:1,000 1:40 1:40
Speed control precision ±0.2% ±0.02% ±2 to 3% ±0.03%
Starting torque 150% at 1 Hz 150% at 0 Hz 150% at 3 Hz
Auto-tuning Function
• This function is valid with vector control.
• The motor parameters are set automatically just by entering the motor’s rating plate value. This fea-
ture allows flux vector control to operate accurately with virtually any normal AC induction motor
regardless of the supplier.
Torque Control
• This function is valid with flux vector control (with PG).
• Torque is controlled by taking multi-function analog input signals as torque references.
• Switching is possible between torque control and speed control.
V/f Pattern Settings

• This function is valid for V/f control.
• Select a V/f pattern according to the application from among the 15 preset V/f patterns.
1-4
• Custom V/f pattern can be set.
Frequency References
• The following five types of frequency references can be used to control the output frequency of the
Inverter.
Numeric input from the Digital Operator
Voltage input within a range from 0 to 10 V
Voltage input within a range from 0 to ±10 V (With minus voltage, rotation is in the opposite direc-
tion of the run command.)
Current input within a range from 4 to 20 mA
Input by Optional Card
The Inverter can be set to use any of the above types by designating it with parameters.
• A maximum of eight frequency references can be registered in the Inverter. Including inching, this
enables multi-step speed operation with up to nine speed steps via remote multi-step reference
inputs.
PID Control
• The Inverter has a PID control function, enabling easy follow-up control.
• Follow-up control is a control method in which the Inverter varies the output frequency to match the
feedback value from the sensor with the set target value.
• Follow-up control can be applied to a variety of control operations, depending on the contents
detected by the sensor.
• PID control is available for the following applications.
Speed control: With a speed sensor, such as a tacho-generator, the Inverter regulates the
rotation speed of the motor regardless of the load of the motor or synchro-
nizes the rotation speed of the motor with that of another motor.
Pressure control: With a pressure sensor, the Inverter performs constant pressure control.
Flow-rate control: By sensing the flow rate of a fluid, the Inverter performs precise flow-rate
control.
Temperature control: With a temperature sensor, the Inverter performs temperature control by
fan speed.
Zero-servo Control
• This function is valid with vector control (with PG).
• Even at a motor speed of zero (0 Hz), a torque of 150% of the motor’s rated torque can be generated
and the average servomotor holding power (stopping power) can be obtained.
Speed Control By Feedback

• This function is valid with PG.
• An optional PG Speed Control Card be used to enable feedback control for speeds, thereby improving
speed control accuracy.
1-5
Dwell Function
• By holding the output frequency for a constant time during acceleration and deceleration, acceleration
and deceleration can be performed without stepping out even when driving a motor with a large start-
up load.
Low Noise (0.4- to 160-kW Models)

• The output transistor of the Inverter is an IGBT (insulated gate bipolar transistor). Using a sine-wave
PWM method with a high-frequency carrier, the motor does not generate metallic noise.
Monitor Function
• The following items can be monitored with the Digital Operator.
Frequency reference, output frequency, output current, motor speed, output voltage reference,
main-circuit DC voltage, output power, torque reference, status of input terminals, status of output
terminals, operating status, total operating time, software number, speed deviation value, PID feed-
back value, fault status, fault history, etc.
• All types of data can be monitored even with multi-function analog output.
Seven-language Digital Operator (from Software Ver. VSG101113)

• Application as a global inverter is enabled by displays in Japanese, English, French, German, Italian,
Spanish, or Portuguese.
• The Digital Operator area utilizes a 16-character x 2-line liquid crystal display. Parameter setting items
and monitor display can be easily read in any of seven languages to operate the Inverter in a conversa-
tional style.
Harmonic Countermeasures (0.4- to 160-kW Models)

• DC reactors (optional) can be connected to 0.4- to 15-kW models.
• Models of 18.5 to 160 kW have a built-in DC reactor.
Parameter Hierarchy and Three Types of Access Levels

• The 3G3FV has a number of parameters for carrying out the various functions. These parameters are
classified into hierarchical levels to make them easier to use. The levels are as follows, from top to
bottom: Mode  Group  Function  Parameter.
Level name Contents
Mode Classified according to operation
Operation mode: For operating the Inverter. (All kinds of monitoring
are possible.)
Initialize mode: For selecting the language displayed at the Digital
Operator, setting access levels, and initializing.
Program mode: For setting parameters for operation.
Auto-tuning mode: For automatic calculation or setting motor
parameters. (Only under the vector control mode.)
Modified constants mode: For setting or referencing parameters
changes after shipping.
Group Classified by application.
Function Classified by function.
Parameter Individual parameter settings.
1-6
• The 3G3FV allows the following three kinds of access levels to be set in order to further simplify pa-
rameter setting. (An access level is a range of parameters that can be set or referenced.)
Quick-start: Sets/reads parameters required for trial operation. [Factory setting]
Basic: Sets/reads parameters that are commonly used.
Advanced: Sets/reads all the parameters that can be used.
• In general, press the Enter Key to move from an upper to a lower level. This varies somewhat, howev-
er, according to the access level, as shown in the following diagram. For the Quick-start access level,
which has few parameters that can be set, pressing the Enter Key jumps directly to the Parameter
level; whereas for the Advanced access level, which has many, pressing the Enter Key first leads to
the Group level.
[Mode] [Group] [Function] [Parameter]
MENU
Operation mode b Application b1 Sequence b1-01 Reference source
ADVANCED b1-02 Run source
Initialize mode BASIC QUICK-START b1-03 Stopping method
b2 DC braking b2-01 Zero speed level

Program mode
b2-02 DC injection braking current
Auto-tuning b3 Speed search b3-01 Beginning speed search

mode b3-02 Speed search operation current
Modified
constants mode c Tuning C1 Accel/Decel C1-01 Accel Time 1
C1-02 Decel Time 1
1-7
1-2 Nomenclature
Panel
Protection cover (top and bottom)
Mounting hole
Heat sink
Digital Operator
Front cover
Terminals
1-8
Terminals (with Front Cover Removed)
Example: 200-V Class Inverter with 0.4-kW Output
Control
circuit
terminals
Main circuit
terminals
Power input Braking Resistor Motor output
1-9
Digital Operator
Operation Mode Indicators
DRIVE: Lit when in operation mode.

FWD: Lit when there is a forward command input.
REV: Lit when there is a reverse command input.
SEQ: Lit when the forward/reverse command from
the control circuit terminal is enabled.
REF: Lit when the frequency reference from
control circuit terminals 13 and 14 is enabled.
Data Display
Two-line LCD that displays data for monitoring,

parameter names, and set values with 16 charac-
ters per line.
Keys
Execute operations such as setting parameters,

monitoring, JOG, and auto-tuning.
Key Name Function

Operation Mode Switches between Operator and parameter setting (run command and
Selection Key frequency reference). This key can be enabled or disabled with a
parameter setting (o2-02).
Menu Key Displays each mode.
Escape Key Returns to the status before the Enter Key is pressed.
Jog Key Enables JOG operation when the 3G3FV is in operation with the
Digital Operator.
Forward/Reverse Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the 3G3FV is in
Rotation Selection Key operation with the Digital Operator.
Reset/Digit Selection Selects digits for parameter settings. Also acts as the reset key when
Key an fault has occurred. (see note)
Increment Key Selects modes, groups, functions, parameter names, and set values.
This key increases numbers when pressed.
Decrement Key Selects modes, groups, functions, parameter names, and set values.
This key decreases numbers when pressed.
Enter Key Enters modes, functions, parameters, and set values after they are
set.
Run Key Starts the 3G3FV running when the 3G3FV is in operation with the
Digital Operator.
Stop Key Stops the 3G3FV running. This key can be enabled or disabled with a
parameter setting (o2-02) in operation with the control circuit terminal.
Note For safety reasons, the reset operation will not function when a forward or reverse run command
is being input. Use the reset after turning OFF the run command.
1-10
1-3 New Functions
The following software versions have been implemented for the 3G3FV Series to add
and upgrade functions.
August 1996: Software Ver. VSG101032 (S1032)
April 1997: Software Ver. VSG101040 (S1040)
Sept. 1998: Software Ver. VSG101043 (S1043)
The software version can be confirmed using the 5-digit number display for the FLASH
ID for U1-14.
This section describes the new functions and improvements for each software version.
Refer to Chapter 5 Basic Operation and Chapter 6 Advance Operation.
1-3-1 Software Ver. VSG101040
CompoBus/D (DeviceNet) Communications Card

The CompoBus/D Communications Card can be used to connect the Inverter to a DeviceNet network.
The following function additions and improvements were made to support this new functionality.
CompoBus/D Addition to the Frequency Reference Selection (Parameter b1-01)

A function was added to Frequency Reference Selection so that the Inverter frequency reference can
be input via DeviceNet communications.
CompoBus/D Addition to the Run Source Selection (Parameter b1-02)

A function was added to Run Source Selection so that the Inverter run command can be input via Devi-
ceNet communications.
Communications External Fault Input (Parameters F9-01 to F9-03)

A function was added to support an external fault input from DeviceNet communications to stop the
Inverter when an error occurs. Sequence settings and operation designation for errors for the commu-
nications external fault input have been added.
Two-motor Switching Control

A function was added to enable switching control between two motors using one Inverter. The following
function additions were made to support this new functionality.
Control Mode Setting Second Motor (Parameter E3-01)

A control mode setting was added so that the second motor can be set to a different mode.
Note The control mode setting was limited to 0 (V/f control without PG) or 2 (open-loop vector control), but
was changed in system version VSG101043 to support all control modes 0 to 3.
V/f Pattern Settings for Second Motor (Parameters E4-01 to E4-06)

V/f pattern settings were added so that the second motor can be set to a different pattern.
1-11
Parameter Settings for Second Motor (Parameters E5-01 to E5-06)
Parameter settings were added so that different parameters can be set for the second motor.
Inverter Output Noise Reduction

The noise output by 400-V class Inverters was reduced to reduce the affect on peripheral devices and
conform to EN standards. The following function improvements were added to support noise reduction.
Default Setting Change for Carrier Frequency (Parameters C6-10 to C6-03)

The default carrier frequency setting for 400-V class Inverters was changed for the reduction of output
noise.
Inverter Overload Function Change (OL2 Detection)

The Inverter overload detection function was changed because the Inverter’s rated output current
would be reduced if it was set higher than the carrier frequency.
Note If an Inverter overload is detected before a motor overload (0L1), lower the Inverter’s carrier fre-
quency setting.
Operation Selection after Switching to Remote Mode (Parameter b1-07)

Operation can be switched between Digital Operator and the frequency reference (b1-01) and between
Digital Operator and the run command (b1-01) by setting the local/remote selection using the Digital
Operator’s operation mode selection key or multi-function inputs (H1-01 to H1-06). The new function
can be used to enable or disable run commands when switching between the two forms of operation.
Note If the run command is enabled when switching operation, the Inverter can start operation immedi-
ately after switching operation. You must take appropriate safety measures when using this func-
tion.
PG Disconnection Detection (PGO) Detection Time Setting (Parameter

F1-14)
A setting for PG disconnection (PGO) was added so that the detection time can be adjusted.
New Functions for Multi-function Inputs 1 to 6 (H1-01 to H1-06)

The following functions were added to the multi-function inputs.
• Sample/hold function for the analog frequency reference (setting: 1E)
• PID control integral reset (setting: 30)
Constant Output Area Settings for Flux Vector Control (E1-11 to E1-13)
Settings were added to enable controlling V/f characteristics to compensate voltage increases caused
by motor impedance when special motors, such as constant power-output motors and machine tool
shaft motors, are used in the constant output area.
Vector Control Adjustment Settings (C3-05, C5-08, C8-09, C8-30)

Adjustment functions were added for vector control.
1-12
CompoBus/D Communications Improved

The following functions were added for DeviceNet communications using a CompoBus/D Communica-
tions Card.
Network Reference/Network Control Support (CompoBus/D Communications

Remote I/O)
A function was added to switch between inputting the Inverter frequency reference and a run command
using CompoBus/D communications from remote I/O. The Network Reference Bit can be turned ON
and OFF to switch between the method set for the frequency reference selection (b1-01) and a fre-
quency reference from communications. In the same way, the Network Control Bit can be turned ON
and OFF to switch between the method set for the run source selection (b1-02) and a run command
from communications.
Selection of Operation for Communications Errors (Parameter F9-06)

A setting was added to select the operation of the Inverter when a communications error is detected.
The selection can be made according to the application, e.g., a deceleration stop, free-run stop, contin-
uing operation, etc.
Torque Limit/Torque Reference Operation Selection via Communications

(Parameter F9-05)
A function was added to set the torque limit and torque reference (for torque control) from communica-
tions. This enables controlling torque operation from communications when the vector with PG control
mode is used.
Note The CompoBus/D Communications Card does not support the torque limit/torque reference func-
tion. Leave this function disabled.
V/f Control with PG and Flux Vector Control for Two-motor Switching
Control (Parameter E3-01)
Settings were added for V/f Control with PG and Flux Vector Control to the control modes for the second
motor, enabling feedback control of 2 motors with 1 Inverter.
Note 1. Wiring for the pulse generator or encoder must be switched between the two motors.
Note 2. Use a pulse generator with the same specifications for both motors. (There is only one group
of parameters for the pulse generator.)
Motor Parameter Autotuning (Parameter C8-30)

An autotuning function was added to autotune the motor parameters for special motors.
Ground Fault Protection Operation Selection (Parameter: L8-10)

A setting was added to enabled and disable ground fault protection so that it can be disable when
required by the application.
1-13
Improved English Messages

The English messages displayed on the Digital Operator when the language is set to English (A1-00 =
0) have been improved.
Messages in 7 Languages
Application as a global inverter is enabled by displays in Japanese, English, French, German, Italian,
Spanish, or Portuguese.
Low-speed Rotation Inconsistencies Greatly Reduced

Improvements in the current detector for vector control and in the responsiveness of current control
have greatly reduced torque ripple. This greatly reduces the low-speed inconsistencies for the 3G3FV
Series.
Better Motor Speed Control Accuracy (Parameter C3-06)

Previously the motor speed control accuracy for vector control was greatly reduced when the limit of
Inverter’s voltage output was approached (a voltage greater than that of the input power supply cannot
be output). If the new output voltage control method is used, the output voltage will be controlled so that
the limit will not be reached, thus maintaining speed accuracy. The linear characteristic of torque control
has also been improved.
Note The current may increase by about 10% when this function is used. Be sure to select an Inverter
with ample output current capacity.
Improved Motor Parameter Autotuning

A new method has been added for autotuning to produce greater accuracy.
Improved PID Control

Additions have been made to PID control to increase the range of possible applications.
PID Control Reverse Characteristics (Parameter b5-09)

Previously, only positive characteristic PID control, in which the feedback value increases when the
Inverter’s output frequency increases, was possible. In addition to this, reverse characteristic PID con-
trol is now possible, in which the feedback value decreases when the Inverter’s output frequency
increases.
Frequency Reference + PID Control (Parameters b5-01 and b5-10)

A control method using the frequency reference and PID control has been added between the previous
frequency reference or PID control. This is ideal for applications in which the target speed is set, but fine
adjustments need to be made with PID control (such as tension control).
Reverse Motor Control for PID Control (Parameter b5-11)

Motor rotation in only one direction was possible for previous PID control, but a reverse control setting
has been added to produce rotation in the reverse direction when the PID control result is negative.
1-14
Feedback Loss Detection for PID Control (Parameters b5-12 to b5-14)
A function has been added to detect the loss of the feedback signal (e.g., as a result of line disconnec-
tion) and specify the operation when an error is detected.
PID Control Target Value Added to Multi-function Inputs (Parameters H3-05 and
H3-09)
A function was added so that both the analog frequency reference and the PID control target value can
be input as analog signals for frequency reference + PID control.
PID Integral Hold Added to Multi-function Inputs (Parameters H1-01 to H1-06)

A function was added to hold the the calculated integral value for PID control.
Jump Frequencies Added to PID Control (Parameters d3-01 to d3-04)

The setting disabled frequencies (jump frequencies) have been enabled for PID control. This function
can be used to avoid frequency ranges that cause machine vibration during PID control.
Motor Startup Responsiveness Improved

Compensation functions have been added to ensure faster motor startup.
Startup Torque Compensation Function for Open-loop Vector Control (Parameters

C4-03 to C4-05)
A startup torque compensation function has been added to ensure faster startup for open-loop vector
control. If this function is used, high torque can be output immediately after startup to enable better con-
trol of lifting and lowering operations for large machines with high friction or cranes.
Note This function cannot be used during regenerative condition or when using a second motor.
Magnetic Flex Compensation (Parameter b2-08)

Large-capacity motors have large electrical constants, and time is required to develop magnetic flex in
the motor after power has been turned ON. To improve this situation, a magnetic flex compensation
function has been added to the startup DC braking function, enabling magnetic flex to be built up in the
motor during DC braking.
Braking Function with Stall Prevention during Deceleration (Parameter

L3-04)
Even if regenerative energy is handled using a Braking Resistor or Braking Resistor Unit, overvoltages
(OV) can be detected during rapid deceleration. A stall prevention function for deceleration has been
added to the braking function (regeneration processing) to limit voltages when main circuit overvoltages
are likely to be detected, thus enabling faster braking without overvoltage detection.
Inverter Overload (OL2) Protection Selection for Low-speed Operation

(Parameters L8-17 and L8-19)
An Inverter overload protection operation selection has been added to protect from overcurrent dam-
age at low speeds. This function allows the best protection to be selected according to the application.
1-15
Protection Setting for Motors for Vector Control (Parameter E1-02)

A special protection setting has been provided for vector-control motors, which have high resistance to
overloads even at low speeds.
Bias Function for Analog Monitor Cards (Parameters F4-05 and F4-06)
A bias function has been added to the analog output from Analog Monitor Cards to enable adjusting the
offset voltage.
NC Contact Emergency Stop Function for Multi-function Inputs

(Parameters d3-01 to d3-04)
An NC contact emergency stop function has been added to the previous NO function.
Bias Function for Reverse Motor Control for Multi-function Inputs

(Parameters H3-05 and H3-09)
A function has been added for reverse motor operation by establishing a frequency bias 2 (setting: D)
for the multi-function inputs that causes reverse operation when the sum of the bias values is negative.
Run Command Selection Outside of Drive Mode (Parameter b1-08)

A function has been added to enable or disable run command inputs in mode other than Drive Mode,
e.g., Program Mode or Initialize Mode.
Note If this function is used, a run command can be input and Inverter operation stared even when
adjusting parameters in Program Mode. Proper safety measures must be taken to prevent dan-
gerous situations.
Motor Core Loss Adjustment for Torque Compensation (Parameter

E2-10)
A motor core loss setting has been added to enable fine adjustment of torque compensation (totally
automatic torque boast) in V/f control without PG and V/f control with PG control modes.
Changes in Default Settings and Setting Ranges

The defaults and setting ranges for the following parameters have been changed for applications.
Cumulative Operation Time Display Change (Parameter o2-07)

Previously 0 was display when the default value was set for the cumulative operation time, but this has
been changed to display the current cumulative operation time as the default.
New Parameter Setting Ranges

Parameter Parameter name Applicable Previous setting New setting
number Inverters range range
E2-06 Motor leakage inductance All Inverters 0% to 30% 0% to 40%
E5-06 Motor 2 leakage inductance All Inverters 0% to 30% 0% to 40%
L2-03 Minimum baseblock time All Inverters 0.0 to 5.0 s 0.1 to 5.0 s
L8-02 Inverter overheat detection pre- All Inverters 50 to 110°C 50 to 130°C
alarm level
1-16
New Parameter Default Setting
Parameter Parameter name Applicable Previous setting New setting
number Inverters range range
L2-04 Voltage restart time Inverters of 0.6 s 1.0 s
55 kW or larger
PG Speed Deviation Detection Function Upgrade (F1-04)

This function has been changed so that the conditions can be selected for speed deviation (DEV) detec-
tion. Either of the following two conditions can be selected by means of an F1-04 parameter setting.
Detect only when the frequency reference matches the output frequency (within the range set in
L4-02).
Detect only when the frequency reference matches the PG feedback speed (within the range set
in L4-02).
1-17
2
Chapter 2
Installation
2-1 Mounting
2-2 Wiring
Installation Chapter 2
2-1 Mounting
2-1-1 Dimensions
3G3FV-A2004/-A2007/-A2015/-A2022/-A2037
3G3FV-A4004/-A4007/-A4015/-A4022/-A4037
External Dimensions Mounting Dimensions
Two, 5.5 dia. Four, M5
Voltage
g class Model 3G3FV- Dimensions (mm)
D
200-V A2004/A2007/A2015 160
A2022/A2037 180
400-V A4004/A4007 160
A4015/A4022/A4037 180
2-2
3G3FV-A2055/-A2075/-A4055/-A4075

Two, 7 dia. Four, M6
3G3FV-A2110/-A2150/-A4110/-A4150
20 (see note)
Note *The dashed lines apply only to the A2150.
2-3
3G3FV-B2185/-B2220/-B4185/-B4220/-B4300/-B4450
Four, M6
Voltage
H H1 D1
200-V B2185/B2220 450 435 174.5
400-V B4185/B4220 450 435 174.5
B4300/B4370/B4450 625 610 175
2-4
3G3FV-B2300/-B2370/-B2450/-B2550/-B4550/-B4750-E
Voltage
W H W1 H1
200-V B2300B2370 425 675 320 650
B2450/B2550 475 800 370 775
400-V B4550/B4750-E 455 820 350 795
2-5
3G3FV-B2750-E/-B411K-E/-B416K-E
Two, 14 dia.
Four, M12
Voltage
D D2 W2
200-V B2750-E 400 max. 158 695
400-V B411K-E 375 max. 130 695
B416K-E 400 max. 158 695
2-6
3G3FV-B418K-E/-B422K-E
Six, 14 dia.
Six, M12
3G3FV-B430K-E
Six, 14 dia. Six, M12
2-7
Two, 4 dia.
Panel face
Panel cutout
(for cables)
39
16
125
8 8
Front side of panel Back side of panel
4 27 18.8 30 min.
2-1-2 Installation Conditions
Cautions and Warnings

! WARNING Provide an appropriate stopping device on the machine side to secure safety. (A
holding brake is not a stopping device for securing safety.) Not doing so may result in
injury.
! WARNING Provide an external emergency stopping device that allows an instantaneous stop of
operation and power interruption. Not doing so may result in injury.
! Caution Be sure to install the product in the correct direction and provide specified clear-
ances between the Inverter and control panel or with other devices. Not doing so
may result in fire or malfunction.
! Caution Do not allow foreign objects to enter inside the product. Doing so may result in fire or
malfunction.
! Caution Do not apply any strong impact. Doing so may result in damage to the product or
malfunction.
2-8
Direction and Dimensions

• Install the Inverter on a vertical surface so that the characters on the nameplate are oriented upward.
• When installing the Inverter, always provide the following installation space to allow normal heat dis-
sipation from the Inverter.
W = 30 mm min. 120 mm min. Air
Inverter Inverter Inverter Side
W W W
120 mm min. Air
Installation Site
• Install the Inverter under the following conditions.
NEMA1 Type
Ambient temperature for operation: –10 to 40°C
Humidity: 90% RH or less (no condensation)
Open Chassis Type

Ambient temperature for operation: –10 to 45°C
Humidity: 90% RH or less (no condensation)
Note A protection cover is attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter. Be sure to remove the
protection covers before installing the 200- or 400-V Class Inverter that has an output of 15 kW
or less to a panel.
• Install the Inverter in a clean location free from oil mist and dust. Alternatively, install it in a totally en-
closed panel that is completely shielded from floating dust.
• When installing or operating the Inverter, always take special care so that metal powder, oil, water, or
other foreign matter does not get into the Inverter.
• Do not install the Inverter on inflammable material such as wood.
Ambient Temperature Control

• To enhance operation reliability, the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme
temperature rises.
• If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment such as a box, use a cooling fan or air conditioner
to maintain the internal air temperature below 45°C.
2-9
Protecting Inverter from Foreign Matter During Installation

• Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal power produced by drilling.
• Upon completion of installation, always remove the cover from the Inverter. Otherwise, ventilation will
be affected, causing the Inverter to overheat.
2-10
2-2 Wiring

! WARNING Wiring must be performed only after confirming that the power supply has been
turned OFF. Not doing so may result in electrical shock.
! WARNING Wiring must be performed by authorized personnel. Not doing so may result in
electrical shock or fire.
! WARNING Be sure to confirm operation only after wiring the emergency stop circuit. Not doing
so may result in injury.
! WARNING Always connect the ground terminals to a ground of 100 Ω or less for the 200-V AC
class, or 10 Ω or less for the 400-V AC class. Not connecting to a proper ground may
result in electrical shock.
! Caution Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in
external wiring. Not doing so may result in fire.
! Caution Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as the AC power sup-
ply voltage. An incorrect power supply may result in fire, injury, or malfunction.
! Caution Connect the Braking Resistor and Braking Resistor Unit as specified in the manual.
Not doing so may result in fire.
! Caution Be sure to wire correctly and securely. Not doing so may result in injury or damage to
the product.
! Caution Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block. Not doing so may result in
fire, injury, or damage to the product.
! Caution Do not connect an AC power to the U, V, or W output. Doing so may result in damage
to the product or malfunction.
2-11
2-2-1 Removing and Mounting the Front Cover
Remove the front cover to wire the terminals. Remove the Digital Operator from the front
cover before removing the front cover. For models of 15 kW or less (both 200-V and
400-V class), do not remove or mount the front cover without first removing the Digital
Operator; otherwise the Digital Operator may malfunction due to imperfect contact.
Removing the Cover (Models of 15 kW or Less)

• Removing the Digital Operator
Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator in the arrow 1 direction to unlock the Digital Opera-
tor and lift the Digital Operator in the arrow 2 direction to remove the Digital Operator as shown in the
following illustration.
• Removing the Front Cover

Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the arrow 1 directions and lift the bottom of the cover
in the arrow 2 direction to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration.
2-12
• Mounting the Front Cover
Mount the front cover to the Inverter by taking in reverse order to the steps to remove the front cover
after wiring the terminals.
Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover, otherwise Digital
Operator may malfunction due to imperfect contact.
Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part
of the front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut.
Mounting the Digital Operator

• Hook the Digital Operator on clicks A of the front cover in the arrow 1 direction as shown in the follow-
ing illustration.
• Press the Digital Operator in the arrow 2 direction until it snaps shut with clicks B.
Clicks A
Clicks B
Note Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator or mount or remove the front cover using methods
other than those mentioned above, otherwise the Inverter may malfunction due to imperfect con-
tact or break.
Removing the Front Cover of Inverters with 18.5-kW Output or More

• The front cover can be removed without removing the Digital Operator from the Inverter provided that
the Inverter model is one with an output of 18.5 kW or more.
• Loosen the four screws of the front cover and move the front cover slightly upwards to remove the front
cover.
2-13
2-2-2 Terminals
Terminal Block Configuration (200-V Class with 0.4-kW Output)
Control
circuit
terminals
Main circuit
terminals
Power input Braking Resistor Motor output
2-14
Main Circuit Terminals
200-V Class
Model 3G3FV- A2004 to A2075 A2110 to A2150 B2185 to B2220 B2300 to B2750-E
Maximum 0.4 to 7.5 kW 11 to 15 kW 18.5 to 22 kW 30 to 75 kW
applied motor
capacity
L1 (R) Power supply
pp y input
p terminals,, 3-phase,
p , 200 to 230 VAC,, 50/60 Hz
L2 (S)
L3 (T)
T1 (U) Motor output
p , 200 to 230 VAC ((correspond
p to input
p voltage)
g )
T2 (V)
T3 (W)
B1 Braking
g Resistor Unit ---
B2 connection
i terminals
i l
+ 1 DC reactor DC reactor DC power supply ---
connection terminal connection terminal input terminal
( + 1- + 2) ( + 1- + 2) ( + 1- – )
+ 2
DC power supply DC power supply Braking Unit
input terminal input terminal connection terminal
– ( + 1- – ) ( + 1- – ) ( + 3- – ) Braking Unit
Brakingg Unit connection terminal
connection terminal ( + 3- – )
+ 3 --- See note 1
( + 3- – )
s --- Coolingg fan p
power See note 2
r supply
l input
i terminal
i l
s200 ---
s400
Ground the terminal at a resistance of less than 100 Ω.
Note 1. Don’t connect a DC power supply. Otherwise, equipment trouble may occur.
Note 2. These are the cooling fan power supply and control circuit power supply input terminals.
2-15
400-V Class
Model 3G3FV- A4004 to A4150 B4185 to B4450 B4550 to B416K-E B418K-E to
B430K-E
Maximum 0.4 to 15 kW 18.5 to 45 kW 55 to 160 kW 185 to 300 kW
applied motor
capacity
L1 (R) Power supply
pp y input
p , 380 to 460 VAC,, 50/60 Hz
L2 (S)
L3 (T)
T1 (U) Motor output
p , 380 to 460 VAC ((correspond
p to input
p voltage)
g )
T2 (V)
T3 (W)
B1 Braking
g Resistor Unit ---
B2 connection
i terminals
i l
+ 1 DC reactor DC power supply --- DC power supply
connection terminal input terminal input terminal
( + 1- + 2) ( + 1- – ) ( + 1- – )
+ 2 DC power supply Braking Unit ---
input terminal connection terminal
– ( + 1- – ) ( + 3- – ) Braking Unit Braking Unit
co ec o terminal
connection e a co ec o terminal
connection e a
+ 3 --- ( + 3- – ) ( + 3- – )
See note 1 See note 1
s Coolingg fan p
power --- ---
r supply
l input
i terminal
i l See notes 2,, 3 See notes 2,, 3
s200 ---
s400
Ground the terminal at a resistance of less than 10 Ω.
Note 1. Don’t connect a DC power supply. Otherwise, equipment trouble may occur.
Note 2. These are the cooling fan power supply and control circuit power supply input terminals.
Note 3. When 200-V is used, input 200 to 230 VAC from r – s200. When 400-V is used, input 380 to
460 VAC from r – s400.
Control Circuit Terminals for All 3G3FV Models

Symbol Name Function Signal level
Input
p 1 Forward/Stop Forward at ON. Stops at OFF. Photocoupler
p
2 Reverse/Stop Reverse at ON. Stops at OFF. 24 VDC,
VDC 8 mA A
3 Multi-function contact input 1 Set by parameter H1-01 (external fault a).
4 Multi-function contact input 2 Set by parameter H1-02 (fault reset).
5 Multi-function contact input 3 Set by parameter H1-03 (multi-step refer-
ence 1).
6 Multi-function contact input 4 Set by parameter H1-04 (multi-step refer-
ence 2).
7 Multi-function contact input 5 Set by parameter H1-05 (jog frequency ref-
erence)
8 Multi-function contact input 6 Set by parameter H1-06 (external base-
block N.O.)
11 Sequence input common Common for 1 to 8.
2-16
Symbol Name Function Signal level
Input 15 Frequency reference power supply 15-VDC power supply for frequency refer- 15 VDC
(15 VDC) ence. (±10%), 20 mA
max.
33 Frequency reference power supply –15-VDC power supply for frequency refer- –15 VDC
(–15 VDC) ence. (±10%), 20 mA
max.
13 Frequency reference input (voltage) Frequency reference voltage input terminal 0 to 10 VDC (In-
Either 0 to +10 V or 0 to ±10 V can be se- put impedance:
lected as the parameter (H3-01). 20 kΩ)
0 to ±10 V (In-
put impedance:
20 kΩ)
14 Frequency reference input (current) Current input terminal for frequency refer- 4 to 20 mA (In-
ence. put impedance:
250 kΩ)
16 Multi-function analog input Set by parameter H3-05. 0 to 10 VDC (In-
put impedance:
20 kΩ)
0 to ±10 V (In-
put impedance:
20 kΩ)
17 Frequency reference input common Common for analog input signal. ---
12 Shielded wire connection ground Shielded terminal for sequence input, fre- ---
quency reference input.
Output 9 Multi-function contact output Set by parameter H2-01 (during running). Contact output
(SPST-NO)
30 VDC, 1 A
10 Multi-function contact output common max.
250 VAC, 1 A
max.
25 Multi-function output 1 Set by parameter H2-02 (zero speed Open collector
detection). ou pu
output
26 Multi-function output 2 Set by parameter H2-03 (agree output ref- 48 V, 50 mA
erence detection). max.
27 Multi-function output 1 and 2 common Common for terminals, 25, 26.
18 Fault output (NO condition) When fault occurs: Contact output
Terminals 18 to 20: Closed (SPDT)
19 Fault output (NC condition) Terminals 19 to 20: Open 30 VDC, 1 A
max.
20 Fault output common 250 VAC, 1 A
max.
Output 21 Multi-function analog output 1 Set by parameter H4-01. (Output frequen- 0 to ±10 VDC
cy: 0 to ±10 V/±100% frequency) ((±5%),
5%), 0 to
o
23 Multi-function analog output 2 Set by parameter H4-01. (Output current: 10 VDC
C (±5%),
5 V/Inverter rated current) 2 mA max.
22 Multi-function analog output common Common for analog output.
Note The settings shown in parentheses in the “Function” column for multi-function inputs 1 to 6, multi-
function contact outputs, and multi-function outputs 1 and 2 indicate default settings.
2-17
2-2-3 Standard Connection Diagram
Main Circuit Terminal Connections
3G3FV-A2004 to A2075, A4004 to A4150

DC reactor (optional) Braking Resistor Unit (optional)
L1 (R) T1 (U)
L2 (S) T2 (V)
L3 (T) T3 (W)
3-phase 200 VAC
(400 VAC)
Note: Be sure to remove the short bar before connecting a DC reactor.
3G3FV-A2110 to A2150
Braking Resistor Unit (optional)
DC reactor (optional)
Braking Unit (optional)
L1 (R) T1 (U)
L2 (S) T2 (V)
L3 (T) T3 (W)
3-phase VAC
(200 VAC)
Note: Be sure to remove the short bar before connecting a DC reactor.
2-18
3G3FV-B2185 to B2220, B4185 to B4450
L1 (R) T1 (U)
L2 (S) T2 (V)
L3 (T) T3 (W)
3-phase 200 VAC
(400 VAC) (See note 2)
Note: The DC reactor is built in.
3G3FV-B2300 to B2550
L1 (R) T1 (U)
L2 (S) T2 (V)
L3 (T) T3 (W)
3-phase 200 VAC
(See note 1)
(See note 2)
Note 1. For 200-V class, 30 to 75 kW (B2300 to B2750-E) and 400-V class, 55 to 300 kW (B4550 to
B430K), input the control circuit power supply from r–s. (For others, create the control power
supply internally from the main circuit DC power supply.)
Note 2. The r–L1 (R) and s–L2 (S) terminals are short-circuited for shipping.
2-19
3G3FV-B2750-E
L1 (R) T1 (U)
L2 (S) T2 (V)
L3 (t) T3 (W)
3-phase 200 VAC r (See note 1)
(400 VAC) s (See note 2)
Note 1. For 200-V class, 30 to 75 kW (B2300 to B2750-E) and 400-V class, 55 to 300 kW (B4550-E to
B430K-E), input the control circuit power supply from r–s. (For others, create the control pow-
er supply internally from the main circuit DC power supply.)
Note 2. The r–L1 (R) and s–L2 (S) terminals are short-circuited for shipping.
3G3FV-B4550 to B416K-E
L1 (R)
L2 (S) T1 (U)
L3 (T) T2 (V)
3-phase 400 VAC (See note 1) T3 (W)
(See note 2)
Note 2. The r–L1 (R) and s (s400)–L2 (S) terminals are short-circuited for shipping.
2-20
3G3FV-B418K-E to B430K-E
L1 (R) T1 (U)
L2 (S) T2 (V)
L3 (t) T3 (W)
3-phase 200 VAC r (See note 1)
(400 VAC) s200
s400 (See note 2)
Note: Models of 185 to 300 kW can not use the DC reactor.
Note 2. The r–L1 (R) and s (s400)–L2 (S) terminals are short-circuited for shipping.
2-21
Control Circuit Terminal Connections (All Models)
Forward/stop
Fault output (NO)
Reverse/stop
Fault output (NC)
Multi-function contact input 1
Fault output common

Multi-function contact output
Multi-function contact
Multi-function contact input 5 output common
Multi-function output 1
Sequence input common
Multi-function output 2
Frequency reference power supply +15 V
Multi-function output
Frequency reference power supply –15 V common
Frequency reference input (voltage) Multi-function analog output 1
Frequency reference input (current) Voltmeter

Multi-function
Multi-function analog input
analog output 2
Voltmeter
Frequency reference input common
Multi-function analog
Note Variable resistors for frequency ref- output common
erences must be 2 kΩ, 1/4 W min.
Wiring Example
Run switch
Stop switch (NO)
(NC)
Run command
(Operates when the run switch is closed.)
Stop command
(Stops when the stop switch is open.)
Forward/Reverse command
(Multi-function input)
11
Sequential input common
Note Wiring methods for 3G3FV--CUE (-CE) Inverters are sometimes different. Always check wiring
methods in the Installation Manual (I530 and I520).
2-22
2-2-4 Wiring Around the Main Circuit
System reliability and noise resistance are affected by the wiring method used. There-
fore, always follow the instructions given below when connecting the Inverter to periph-
eral devices and other parts.
Wire Size and Round Solderless Terminal

For the main circuit and ground, always use 600-V polyvinyl chloride (PVC) cables.
If the cable is long and may cause voltage drops, increase the wire size according to the cable length.
2-23
Wire Sizes
Voltage class Model Terminal Terminal Wire
screw thickness
(mm2)
200-V Class 3G3FV-A2004 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, B1, B2, T1, T2, T3 M4 2 to 5.5
3G3FV-A2007 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, B1, B2, T1, T2, T3 M4 2 to 5.5
3.5 to 5.5
3G3FV-A2022 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, B1, B2, T1, T2, T3 M4 3.5 to 5.5
3G3FV-A2037 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, B1, B2, T1, T2, T3 M4 5.5
3G3FV-A2055 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, B1, B2, T1, T2, T3 M5 8
5.5 to 8
3G3FV-A2075 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, B1, B2, T1, T2, T3 M5 8
5.5 to 8
3G3FV-A2110 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, (+)3, T1, T2, T3 M6 22
8
3G3FV-A2150 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, (+)3, T1, T2, T3 M8 30
M6 8
3G3FV-B2185 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, (+)3, T1, T2, T3 M8 30
14
r, s M4 0.5 to 5.5
3G3FV-B2220 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, (+)3, T1, T2, T3 M8 38
14
r, s M4 0.5 to 5.5
3G3FV-B2300 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)3, T1, T2, T3 M10 100
M8 22
r, s M4 0.5 to 5.5
3G3FV-B2370 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)3, T1, T2, T3 M10 60 x 2P
M8 22
r, s M4 0.5 to 5.5
3G3FV-B2450 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)3, T1, T2, T3 M10 60 x 2P
M8 22
r, s M4 0.5 to 5.5
3G3FV-B2550 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)3, T1, T2, T3 M10 60 x 2P
M8 30
r, s M4 0.5 to 5.5
2-24

screw thickness
(mm2)
200-V Class 3G3FV-B2750-E L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)3, T1, T2, T3 M12 100 x 2P
M8 50
r, s M4 0.5 to 5.5
Note The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°C.

screw thickness
(mm2)
400-V Class 3G3FV-A4004 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, B1, B2, T1, T2, T3 M4 2 to 5.5
3.5 to 5.5
3G3FV-A4055 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, B1, B2, T1, T2, T3 M4 3.5 to 5.5
3G3FV-A4075 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, B1, B2, T1, T2, T3 M5 5.5
3G3FV-A4110 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, B1, B2, T1, T2, T3 M5 8 to 14
M6 8
3G3FV-A4150 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, B1, B2, T1, T2, T3 M5 8 to 14
M6 8
3G3FV-B4185 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, (+)3, T1, T2, T3 M6 14
M8 8
r, s M4 0.5 to 5.5
3G3FV-B4220 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, (+)3, T1, T2, T3 M6 22
M8 8
r, s M4 0.5 to 5.5
3G3FV-B4300 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, (+)3, T1, T2, T3 M8 22
8
r, s M4 0.5 to 5.5
3G3FV-B4370 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, (+)3, T1, T2, T3 M8 30
14
r, s M4 0.5 to 5.5
2-25

screw thickness
(mm2)
400-V Class 3G3FV-B4450 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, (+)3, T1, T2, T3 M8 50
14
r, s M4 0.5 to 5.5
3G3FV-B4550 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)3, T1, T2, T3 M10 100
M8 22
r, s200, s400 M4 0.5 to 5.5
3G3FV-B4750-E L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)3, T1, T2, T3 M10 60 x 2P
M8 22
r, s200, s400 M4 0.5 to 5.5
3G3FV-B411K-E L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)3, T1, T2, T3 M10 60 x 2P
M8 30
r, s200, s400 M4 0.5 to 5.5
3G3FV-B416K-E L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)3, T1, T2, T3 M12 100 x 2P
M8 50
r, s200, s400 M4 0.5 to 5.5
3G3FV-B418K-E L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)3, T1, T2, T3 M16 325 x 2P
M8 50
r, s200, s400 M4 0.5 to 5.5
M8 60
r, s200, s400 M4 0.5 to 5.5
M8 60
r, s200, s400 M4 0.5 to 5.5
Note The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°C.
2-26
Round Solderless Terminals and Tightening Torque
Wire thickness Terminal Size Tightening
(mm2) screw torque (Nm)
0.5 M4 1.25-4 1.2
0.75 M4 1.25-4 1.2
1.25 M4 1.25-4 1.2
2 M4 2-4 1.2
M5 2-5 2.0
M6 2-6 2.5
M8 2-8 6.0
3.5/5.5 M4 5.5-4 1.2
M5 5.5-5 2.0
M6 5.5-6 2.5
M8 5.5-8 6.0
8 M5 8-5 2.0
M6 8-6 2.5
M8 8-8 6.0
14 M6 14-6 2.5
M8 14-8 6.0
22 M6 22-6 2.5
M8 22-8 6.0
30/38 M8 38-8 6.0
50/60 M8 60-8 6.0
M10 60-10 10.0
80 M10 80-10 10.0
100 100-10 10.0
100 M12 100-12 14.0
150 15012 14.0
200 200-12 14.0
325 M12 x 2 325-12 14.0
M16 325-16 25.0
Note Determining Wire Size

Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated volt-
age.
Line voltage drop is calculated as follows:

Line voltage drop (V) + Ǹ3 x wire resistance (Ω/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10–3
2-27
Wiring on the Input Side of the Main Circuit
Installing a Molded-case Circuit Breaker

Always connect the power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) and power supply via a molded case
circuit breaker (MCCB) suitable to the Inverter.
• Install one wiring circuit breaker per Inverter.
• Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1.5 to 2 times the Inverter’s rated current.
• For the MCCB’s time characteristics, be sure to consider the Inverter’s overload protection (one min-
ute at 150% of the rated output current).
• If the MCCB is to be used in common among multiple Inverters, or other devices, set up a sequence
such that the power supply will be turned OFF by a fault output, as shown in the following diagram.
Inverter
Power
supply
3-phase/
Single-phase
200 V AC
3-phase
400 V AC
(See note.)
19
Fault output (NC)
20
Note Use a 400/200 V transformer for a 400-V model.
Installing a Ground Fault Interrupter

Inverter outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated.
In general, a leakage current of approximately 100 mA will occur for each Inverter (when the power
cable is 1 m) and approximately 5 mA for each additional meter of power cable.
Therefore, at the power supply input area, use a special-purpose breaker for Inverters, which detects
only the leakage current in the frequency range that is hazardous to humans and excludes high-fre-
quency leakage current.
• For the special-purpose breaker for Inverters, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity
amperage of at least 10 mA per Inverter.
• When using a general leakage breaker, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity amperage
of 200 mA or more per Inverter and with an operating time of 0.1 s or more.
2-28
Installing a Magnetic Contactor
If the power supply of the main circuit is to be shut off because of the sequence, a magnetic contactor
can be used instead of a molded-case circuit breaker.
When a magnetic contactor is installed on the primary side of the main circuit to stop a load forcibly,
however, the regenerative braking does not work and the load coasts to a stop.
• A load can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side.
Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor, however, may cause the Inverter to break
down. To maintain the service life of the Inverter’s internal relays and electrolytic capacitors, it is rec-
ommended that this operation be performed no more than once every 30 minutes.
• When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator, automatic operation cannot be performed
after recovery from a power interruption.
• When using the Braking Resistor Unit, be sure to arrange a sequence in which the thermal relay of the
Unit turns the magnetic contactor OFF.
Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block

Input power supply can be connected to any terminal on the terminal block because the phase
sequence of input power supply is irrelevant to the phase sequence (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3).
Installing an AC Reactor
If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (660 kW or more) or the phase
advance capacitor is switched, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit,
causing the converter unit to break down.
To prevent this, install an optional AC reactor on the input side of the Inverter.
This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.
Installing a Surge Absorber

Always use a surge absorber or diode for the inductive loads near the Inverter. These inductive loads
include magnetic contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoid, and magnetic brakes.
2-29
Installing a Noise Filter on the Power Supply Side
The Inverter’s outputs utilize high-speed switching, so noise may be transmitted from the Inverter to the
power line and adversely affect other devices in the vicinity. It is recommended that a Noise Filter be
installed at the Power Supply to minimize this noise transmission. Conversely, noise can also be re-
duced from the power line to the Inverter.
Wiring Example 1
Input Noise Filters
Simple Input Noise Filter: 3G3EV-PLNFD
Input Noise Filter: 3G3IV-PFN
EMC-conforming Input Noise Filter: 3G3FV-PFS
Power
supply 3G3FV
Noise
Filter SYSDRIVE
SYSMAC or
other control
device
Note Use a noise filter designed for Inverters. A general-purpose noise filter will be less effective and
may not reduce noise.
Calculating the Inverter Input Power Supply Capacity

The following formula can generally be used to calculate the input power supply capacity for the
Inverter. Always select an Inverter with more than sufficient capacity.
Input power supply capacity [kVA] =
Motor output [kW]/(Motor efficiency x Inverter efficiency x Inverter input power factor)
Normal motor efficiency = 0.8, Normal inverter efficiency = 0.9, Inverter input power factor = 0.65 to 0.9
Note The Inverter’s input power factor will vary with the impedance of the power supply facilities. Use
0.9 when using an AC reactor and 0.65 when not using an AC reactor.
For the input current, divide the input power supply capacity by the input voltage. Assuming the Invert-
er’s resistance to overloads to be 150%, the calculated value can be multiplied by 1.5.
Example for 3-phase 200 V: 1.5 x input power supply capacity/(p3 x 200 V)
Example for single-phase 200 V: 1.5 x input power supply capacity/200 V
Wiring on the Output Side of Main Circuit
Connecting the Terminal Block to the Load

Connect output terminals T1 (U), T2 (V), and T3 (W) to motor lead wires T1 (U), T2 (V), and T3 (W),
respectively. Check that the motor rotates forward with the forward command. Switch over any two of
the output terminals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the forward com-
mand.
2-30
Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals
Never connect a power supply to output terminals T1 (U), T2 (V), and T3 (W). If voltage is applied to the
output terminals, the internal circuit of the Inverter will be damaged.
Never Short or Ground Output Terminals

If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Invert-
er casing, an electric shock or grounding will occur. This is extremely hazardous. Also, be careful not to
short the output wires.
Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor or Noise Filter

Never to connect a phase advance capacitor or LC/RC noise filter to the output circuit. Doing so may
result in damage to the Inverter or cause other parts to burn.
Do Not Use an Electromagnetic Switch or Magnetic Contactor

Do not connect an electromagnetic switch or magnetic contactor to the output circuit. If a load is con-
nected to the Inverter during running, an inrush current will actuate the overcurrent protective circuit in
the Inverter.
Installing a Thermal Relay

This Inverter has an electronic thermal protection function to protect the motor from overheating. If,
however, more than one motor is operated with one Inverter or multi-polar motor is used, always install a
thermal relay (THR) between the Inverter and the motor and set n033 to 0 (no thermal protection).
In this case, program the sequence so that the magnetic contactor on the input side of the main circuit is
turned off by the contact of the thermal relay.
Installing a Noise Filter on Output Side

Connect a noise filter to the output side of the Inverter to reduce radio noise and induction noise.
Power 3G3FV
supply
SYSDRIVE Noise filter
Induction
noise Radio noise
Signal line
Controller AM radio
Induction Noise: Electromagnetic induction generates noise on the signal line, causing the controller
to malfunction.
Radio Noise: Electromagnetic waves from the Inverter and cables cause the broadcasting radio
receiver to make noise.
2-31
Countermeasures Against Induction Noise
As described previously, a noise filter can be used to prevent induction noise from being generated on
the output side. Alternatively, cables can be routed through a grounded metal pipe to prevent induction
noise. Keeping the metal pipe at least 30 cm away from the signal line considerably reduces induction
noise.
Power 3G3FV Metal pipe
supply
SYSDRIVE
30 cm min.
Signal line
Controller
Countermeasures Against Radio Interference

Radio noise is generated from the Inverter as well as the input and output lines. To reduce radio noise,
install noise filters on both input and output sides, and also install the Inverter in a totally enclosed steel
box. The cable between the Inverter and the motor should be as short as possible.
Steel box
Power 3G3FV Metal pipe

supply
Noise SYSDRIVE Noise
filter filter
Cable Length between Inverter and Motor

As the cable length between the Inverter and the motor is increased, the floating capacity between the
Inverter outputs and the ground is increased proportionally. The increase in floating capacity at the In-
verter outputs causes the high-frequency leakage current to increase, and this may adversely affect
peripheral devices and the current detector in the Inverter’s output section. To prevent this from occur-
ring, use a cable of no more than 100 meters between the Inverter and the motor. If the cable must be
longer than 100 meters, take measures to reduce the floating capacity by not wiring in metallic ducts, by
using a separate cable for each phase, and so on.
Also adjust the carrier frequency according to the cable length between the Inverter and the motor, as
shown in the table below.
Cable length 50 m max. 100 m max. More than 100 m
Carrier frequency 15 kHz max. 10 kHz max. 5 kHz max.
(Set value: C06-01) (15.0) (10.0) (5.0)
(Set value: C06-02) (15.0) (10.0) (5.0)
(Set value: C06-02) (0) (0) (0)
2-32
Note The carrier frequency setting range varies depending on the Inverter capacity.
200-V class, 18.5 kW max.; 400-V class, 30 kW max.: 0.4 to 15.0 kHz
200-V class, 22 to 75 kW; 400-V class, 37 to 160 kW: 0.4 to 10.0 kHz
400-V class, 185 to 300 kW: 0.4 to 2.5 kHz
Single-phase Motors Cannot Be Used

The Inverter is not suited for the variable speed control of single-phase motors.
Single-phase motors are either capacitor start motors or split-phase start motors. (The method for de-
termining rotation direction at startup is different.) If a capacitor start motor is used, the capacitor may be
damaged by a sudden electric discharge caused by Inverter output. If a split-phase start motor is used,
the starting coil may burn because the centrifugal switch does not operate.
Ground Wiring
• Always use the ground terminal of the 200-V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100 Ω and
that of the 400-V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10 Ω.
• Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as welding machines or power tools.
• Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and mini-
mize the length of the ground wire.
Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode
and the ground terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unsta-
ble.
• When using more than one Inverter, be careful not to loop the ground wire.
2-33
Countermeasures against Harmonics

With the continuing development of electronics, the generation of harmonics from industrial machines
has been causing problems recently. Refer to the following for the definition of harmonics (i.e., harmonic
currents with voltages) and countermeasures against the generation of harmonics from the Inverter.
Harmonics (Harmonic Currents with Voltages)

• Definition
Harmonics consist of electric power produced from AC power and alternating at frequencies that are
integral multiples of the frequency of the AC power.
The following are the harmonic frequencies of a 60- or 50-Hz commercial power supply.
Second harmonic: 120 (100) Hz
Third harmonic: 180 (150) Hz
Second harmonic (120 Hz)

Basic frequency
(60 Hz)
Third harmonic (180 Hz)
• Problems Caused by Harmonics Generation

The waveform of the commercial power supply will be distorted if the commercial power supply con-
tains excessive harmonics.
Machines with such a commercial power supply will malfunction or generate excessive heat.
Basic frequency (60 Hz) Third harmonic (180 Hz)
Distorted current
waveform
Causes of Harmonics Generation

• Usually, electric machines have built-in circuitry that converts commercial AC power supply into DC
power. Such AC power, however, contains harmonics due to the difference in current flow between AC
and DC.
• Obtaining DC from AC using Rectifiers and Capacitors
DC voltage is obtained by converting AC voltage into a pulsating one-side voltage with rectifiers and
smoothing the pulsating one-side voltage with capacitors. Such AC current, however, contains har-
monics.
2-34
• Inverter
The Inverter as well as normal electric machines has an input current containing harmonics because
the Inverter converts AC into DC.
The output current of the Inverter is comparatively high. Therefore, the ratio of harmonics in the output
current of the Inverter is higher than that of any other electric machine.
Voltage
Time
Rectified
Voltage
Time
Smoothed
Voltage
Time
Current
A current flows into the capacitors. The
current is different from the voltage in
waveform. Time
Countermeasures with Reactors against Harmonics Generation

• DC/AC Reactors
The DC reactor and AC reactor suppress harmonics and currents that change suddenly and greatly.
The DC reactor suppresses harmonics better than the AC reactor. The DC reactor used with the AC
reactor suppresses harmonics more effectively.
The input power factor of the Inverter is improved by suppressing the harmonics in the input current of
the Inverter.
Note 18.5- to 160-kW Inverters have a built-in DC reactor.

185- to 300-kW Inverters cannot use a DC reactor.
• Connection
Connect the DC reactor to the internal DC power supply of the Inverter after shutting off the power
supply to the Inverter and making sure that the charge indicator of the Inverter turns off.
! WARNING Do not touch the internal circuitry of the Inverter in operation, otherwise an electric
shock or a burn injury may occur.
2-35
• Wiring Method
With DC Reactor
DC reactor
(optional)
200 VAC (400 V)

L1 (R) T1 (U)
L2 (S) T2 (V)
L3 (T) T3 (W)
3G3FV
Note Be sure to remove the short bar on terminals +1 and +2 before connecting the DC reactor.
With DC and AC Reactors
DC reactor
(optional)
200 VAC (400 V)

L1 (R) T1 (U)
L2 (S) T2 (V)
L3 (T) T3 (W)
AC reactor
(optional) 3G3FV
Note Be sure to remove the short bar on terminals +1 and +2 before connecting the DC reactor.
• Reactor Effects
Harmonics are effectively suppressed when the DC reactor is used with the AC reactor as shown in
the following table.
Harmonic suppres-
pp Harmonic generation rate (%)
sion
i method
h d 5th har- 7th har- 11th 13th 17th 19th 23th 25th
monic monic harmon- harmon- harmon- harmon- harmon- har-
ic ic ic ic ic monic
No reactor 65 41 8.5 7.7 4.3 3.1 2.6 1.8
AC reactor 38 14.5 7.4 3.4 3.2 1.9 1.7 1.3
DC reactor 30 13 8.4 5 4.7 3.2 3.0 2.2
DC and AC reactors 28 9.1 7.2 4.1 3.2 2.4 1.6 1.4
2-36
Connecting the Braking Resistor

• Connect the braking resistor as shown in the following diagram.
• When using a Braking Resistor Unit, set L8-01 to “1” (i.e., overheating protection of the braking resis-
tor) and set L3-04 to “0” (i.e., no decelerating stall prevention) or “2” (i.e., braking with stall prevention).
Inverter Braking resistor
! Caution The braking resistor’s connection terminals are B1 and B2. Do not connect any other
terminals. Connecting any terminals other than B1 or B2 can cause the resistor to
overheat, resulting in damage to the equipment.
Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit

• Connect the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit to the Inverter as shown in the following diagrams.
• Set L8-01 to “0” (i.e., no overheating protection of the braking resistor) and L3-04 to “0” (i.e., no decel-
erating stall prevention) or “2” (i.e., braking with stall prevention) before using the Inverter with the
Braking Resistor Unit connected.
Note 1. Set L8-01 to “1” before operating the Inverter with the braking resistor without thermal relay
trip contacts.
Note 2. The Braking Resistor Unit cannot be used and the deceleration time cannot be shortened by
the Inverter if L3-04 is set to “1” (i.e., decelerating stall prevention).
• To prevent the Unit from overheating, make a power supply sequence as shown below or connect the
thermal relay trip output of the Unit to the external fault input terminal of the Inverter to interrupt the
running of the Inverter.
200-V Class with 0.4- to 7.5-kW Output and 400-V Class with 0.4- to 15-kW Output
Braking Resistor Unit
Inverter Thermal relay

trip contact
2-37
200-V Class with 11-kW-or-more Output and 400-V Class with 18.5-or-more Output
Braking Unit Braking Resistor Unit
Inverter Thermal relay

trip contact
N
Thermal relay trip contact
Connecting Braking Units in Parallel

When connecting two or more Braking Units in parallel, use the wiring and connectors shown in the
following diagram. There are connectors for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a Master or
Slave. Select “Master” for the first Braking Unit only; select “Slave” for all other Braking Units (i.e., from
the second Unit onwards).
Thermal Thermal Thermal

relay trip relay trip relay trip
contact contact contact
Braking Braking Braking
Resistor Resistor Resistor
Unit Unit Unit
Inverter Braking Unit #1 Braking Unit #2 Braking Unit #3
Thermal Thermal Thermal

relay trip relay trip relay trip
contact contact contact
2-38
Power Supply Sequence
Power
supply L1 (R)
200-V class: Three-phase, 200 to
230 VAC (50/60 Hz) L2 (S)
400-V class: Three-phase, 380 to
460 VAC (50/60 Hz) L3 (T)
(See note)
Inverter
Note Use a transformer with 200- and 400-V outputs for the power supply of the 400-V Inverter.
2-2-5 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

A control signal line must be 50 m maximum and separated from power lines. The fre-
quency reference must be input to the Inverter through twisted-pair wires.
Wire Size and Round Solderless Terminals

Use thick wires to prevent voltage drops if the wires are long.
Wires for All Inverter Models

Terminal Terminal Wire thickness (mm2) Type
screw
1 to 11, 13 to 33 M3.5 Stranded wire: 0.5 to 1.25 Shielded, twisted-pair wire
Single wire: 0.5 to 1.25 Shielded,
polyethylene-covered vinyl
polyethylene-covered,
12 (G) M3.5 0.5 to 2 sheath cable
Round Solderless Terminals for Ground Terminal

Wire thickness Terminal Size Screw torque
(mm2) screw (N m)
0.5 M3.5 1.25 to 3.5 0.8
0.75 1.25 to 3.5
1.25 1.25 to 3.5
2 2 to 3.5
Considerations When Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

• Wire control signal lines separately from the main circuit lines and other power lines.
• Wire control circuit terminals 9, 10, 18, 19, and 20 (contact outputs) separately from terminals 1 to 8,
21, 22, 23, 25, 26, 27, 33, and 11 to 17.
• Connect shielded wire to terminal 12(G).
• Insulate the shielded areas with tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment.
2-39
2-2-6 Installing and Wiring PG Speed Control Cards

PG Speed Control Cards are used for executing speed control using a pulse generator (PG). There are
four types of PG speed control, as shown below. Select the type that fits the application and control
method.
3G3FV-PPGA2: A-phase (single) pulse input for open collector output, special-purpose V/f control
3G3FV-PPGB2: A/B-phase pulse input for open collector output, special-purpose vector control
3G3FV-PPGD2: A-phase (single) pulse input, line driver input, special-purpose V/f control
3G3FV-PPGX2: A/B/Z-phase pulse input, line driver input, special-purpose vector control
Installing a PG Speed Control Card

1. Turn off the main-circuit power supply, and leave it off for at least one minute before removing the
front cover of the Inverter (or at least three minutes for Inverters of 30 kW or more). Check to be sure
that the CHARGE light is OFF.
2. Insert the spacer (which is provided) into the spacer hole in the Inverter’s mounting base. For Invert-
ers of 3.7 kW or less, there are two adjacent holes. Insert the spacer into the 7CN hole. The spacer
cannot be easily removed if inserted into the wrong hole. Be very careful to insert the spacer into the
correct hole, and in the proper direction.
3. Referring to the enlarged illustration in the following diagram, align the PG Speed Control Card with
the catch position as shown by (1) and (2) and fit it precisely to the Option-A connector. Then pass
the spacer through the spacer hole at the Card. (Refer to illustration A.) Check to be sure that it is
precisely aligned with the 4CN position, and snap it into the proper position.
Option A mounting spacer

PG Speed Control Card Spacer mounting hole (Accessory: SRNT41028-9)
Control
4CN board Inverter mounting base
Option-A
Connector
Option C Inverter mount-

2CN ing base Spacer mounting hole
Option-C
Connector PG Speed
Control Card
Spacer
Mounting
3CN Option D base side
Option-D Option A side
Connector
Spacer mounting
Front Enlargement Side
2-40
PG Speed Control Card Terminal Blocks
3G3FV-PPGA2 (For V/f With PG Feedback Mode Only)

Terminal No. Contents Specifications
TA1 1 Power supply
pp y for pulse
p generator
g 12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.
2 0 VDC (GND for power supply)
3 +12-V/open collector switching Terminal for switching between12-V voltage
terminal input and open collector input.
input For open
4 collector input, short across 3 and 4.
5 Pulse input terminal H: +4 to 12 V; L: +1 V max. (Maximum
response frequency: 30 kHz)
6 Pulse input common
7 Pulse motor output
p terminal 12 VDC (±10%), 20 mA max.
8 Pulse monitor output common
TA2 (E) Shielded-wire connection terminal ---
3G3FV-PPGB2 (For Flux Vector Control Mode Only)

TA1 1 Power supply
pp y for pulse
p generator
g 12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.
3 A-phase pulse input terminal H: +8 to 12 V; L: +1 V max. (Maximum
5 B-phase pulse input terminal H: +8 to 12 V; L: +1 V max. (Maximum
TA2 1 A-phase
p monitor output
p terminal Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.
2 A-phase monitor output common
3 B-phase
p monitor output
p terminal Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.
4 B-phase monitor output common
3G3FV-PPGD2 (For V/f With PG Feedback Mode Only)

TA1 1 Power supply
pp y for pulse
p generator
g 12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max. (see note)
3 5 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max. (see note)
4 Pulse input + terminal Line driver input
p ((RS-422 level input)
p )
5 Pulse input – terminal M i
Maximum response ffrequency: 300 kH
kHz
6 Common terminal ---
7 Pulse monitor output + terminal Line driver output
p (RS-422
( level output)
p )
8 Pulse monitor output – terminal
Note 5 VDC and 12 VDC cannot be used at the same time.
2-41
3G3FV-PPGX2 (For Flux Vector Control Mode Only)
TA1 1 Power supply
pp y for pulse
p generator
g 12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max. (see note)
3 5 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max. (see note)
4 A-phase + input terminal Line driver input
p ((RS-422 level input)
p )
5 A-phase – input terminal M i
Maximum response ffrequency: 300 kH
kHz
6 B-phase + input terminal
7 B-phase – input terminal
8 Z-phase + input terminal
9 Z-phase – input terminal
10 Common terminal 0 VDC (GND for power supply)
TA2 1 A-phase + output terminal Line driver output
p (RS-422
( level output)
p )
2 A-phase – output terminal
3 B-phase + output terminal
4 B-phase – output terminal
5 Z-phase + output terminal
6 Z-phase – output terminal
7 Control circuit common Control circuit GND
TA3 (E) ---
Note 5 VDC and 12 VDC cannot be used at the same time.
2-42
Wiring a PG Speed Control Card
3G3FV-PPGA2 (For V/f With PG Feedback Mode Only)

Three-phase,
200 VAC (400 VAC) 3G3FV
E6B2-CWZ3E Encoder
L1 T1
L2 T2
L3 T3
+12-V power supply
0-V power supply
12-V voltage output

(A/B phase)
Pulse 0 V
Pulse monitor output
Three-phase,
200 VAC (400 VAC) 3G3FV
E6B2-CWZ3C Encoder
L1 T1
L2 T2
L3 T3
+12-V power supply
0-V power supply
Open collector output

(A/B phase)
Pulse 0 V
Note 1. Twisted-pair shielded wire must be used for signal lines.

Note 2. Do not use the pulse generator’s power supply for anything other than the pulse generator
(encoder). Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
Note 3. The length of the pulse generator’s wiring must not be more than 30 meters.
2-43
I/O Circuit Configuration
+12 V
PG power +12 V Pulse input
supply +12 V 0V
1K 1K
+12 V
+12 V 0 V
Pulse
2K 2K
monitor
Pulse input output
3K
0V
3.9 K
0V
Note When connecting to a voltage-output-type PG (encoder), select a PG with an output impedance

of no more than 3 kΩ.
3G3FV-PPGB2 (For Flux Vector Control Mode Only)

Three-phase 200 VAC
(400 VAC) Encoder
L1 T1
L2 T2
L3 T3
3G3FV-PPGB2
Power supply +12 V
Power supply 0 V
Power supply +12 V
A-phase pulse output
Power supply +12 V
B-phase pulse output
A-phase pulse
monitor output
B-phase pulse
monitor output

2-44
I/O Circuit Configuration
PG power +12 V
supply +12 V
Division rate circuit
0V A-phase pulse
A-phase monitor output
pulse input A-phase
pulses
B-phase pulse
monitor output
B-phase B-phase
pulse input pulses
Forward output pulses

A-phase pulses
B-phase pulses
Note When connecting to a voltage-output-type PG (encoder), select a PG that has an output imped-
ance with a current of at least 12 mA to the input circuit photocoupler (diode). The E6B2-CWZ3E
cannot be used.
3G3FV-PPGD2 (For V/f With PG Feedback Mode Only)
Three-phase Encoder
200 VAC (400 VAC)
L1 T1
L2 T2
L3 T3
3G3FV-PPGD2
Power supply 0 V
Power supply 5 V
Pulse output + (A/B phase)
Pulse output –
(A/B phase)

2-45
3G3FV-PPGX2 (For Flux Vector Control Mode Only)
Three-phase
200 VAC (400 VAC) Encoder
L1 T1
L2 T2
L3 T3
3G3FV-PPGX2
Power supply 0 V
Power supply 5 V
A-phase pulse output +
A-phase pulse output –
B-phase pulse output +
B-phase pulse output –
Z-phase pulse output +
Z-phase pulse output –
A-phase pulse monitor

output
B-phase pulse monitor
output
Z-phase pulse monitor
output
Note 1. Shielded, twisted-pair wire must be used for signal lines.

Wiring PG Speed Control Card Terminal Blocks

Use no more than 30 meters of wiring for PG (encoder) signal lines and no more than 50 meters for
3G3FV-PPGD2 and 3G3FV-PPGX2, and keep them separate from power lines. Use shielded, twisted-
pair wire for pulse input and pulse output monitor wire, and connect the shield to the shielded wire con-
nection terminal.
Wires for All Inverter Models

Terminal Terminal Wire thickness (mm2) Type
screw
Pulse generator power supply --- Stranded wire: 0.5 to 1.25 Shielded, twisted-pair wire
Pulse input terminal Single wire: 0.5 to 1.25 Shielded, polyethylene-cov-
Pulse monitor output terminal ered, vinyl sheath cable
Shielded wire connection M3.5 0.5 to 2
terminal
2-46
Solderless Terminals for Control Circuit Terminals
The use of solderless terminals for the control circuit terminals is recommended because solderless
terminals are easy to connect securely.
d1 dia. Wire thickness Model d1 d2 Manufacturer
0.5 mm2 A1 0.5-8WH 1.00 2.60 Phoenix Contact
0.75 mm2 A1 0.75-8GY 1.20 2.80
1 mm2 A1 1-8RD 1.40 3.00
1.5 mm2 A1 1.5-8BK 1.70 3.50
d2 dia.
Note Do not solder wires with the control circuit terminals if wires are used instead of solderless termi-
nals. Wires may not contact well with the control circuit terminals or the wires may be discon-
nected from the control circuit terminals due to vibration if the wires are soldered.
Round Solderless Terminal Sizes and Screw Torque

Wire thickness (mm2) Terminal screw Size Screw torque (N m)
0.5 M3.5 1.25 to 3.5 0.8
0.75 1.25 to 3.5
1.25 1.25 to 3.5
2 2 to 3.5
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Wiring Method
1. Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slotted screwdriver.
2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.
3. Tighten the terminal screws firmly.
Note 1. Always separate the control signal line from the main circuit cables and other power cables.
Note 2. Do not solder the wires to the control circuit terminals. The wires may not contact well with the
control circuit terminals if the wires are soldered.
Note 3. The end of each wire connected to the control circuit terminals must be stripped for approxi-
mately 7 mm.
Note 4. Use a shielded wire for the ground terminal.
2-47
Note 5. Insulate the shield with tape so that the shield will not touch any signal line or device.
Thin-slotted screwdriver
Blade of screwdriver
Control circuit
terminal block
Strip the end for 7 mm if

no solderless terminal is
used. Solderless terminal or 3.5 mm max.
wire without soldering Blade thickness: 0.6 mm max.
Wires
Note 6. Tighten the screws to a tightening torque of 0.5 to 0.6 Nm. The terminal block may be dam-
aged if the tightening torque is too strong, and malfunctions and short-circuits may result if the
tightening torque is too weak.
Selecting the Number of PG (Encoder) Pulses
3G3FV-PPGA2/-PPGB2
• The maximum response frequency is 30 kHz.
• Taking into consideration the encoder pulse deviation (phase difference: 90 ±45°) and the waveform
when the cable is long, select a smaller number of pulses than the ones shown in the following table.
Motor’s maximum speed (r/min) 1,800 1,500 900
Number of encoder pulses (p/r) 500 600 1,00
Maximum encoder frequency (kHz) 15 15 15
3G3FV-PPGD2/-PPGX2
• The maximum response frequency is 300 kHz.
• When the encoder pulse deviation (phase difference: 90 ±45°) is taken into consideration, the number
of encoder pulses can be calculated by means of the following formula:
60 x maximum response frequency (300,000 Hz)

Number of encoder pulses [p/r] x
2 x motor’s maximum rotation speed (r/min)
• If the motor’s maximum speed is less than 4,000 r/min, an encoder of 1,000 to 2,000 p/r is recom-
mended. Even if an encoder with higher than required resolution is selected, it will not improve the
speed control range or precision.
2-48
3
Chapter 3
Preparing for Operation

3-1 Using the Digital Operator
3-2 Modes
3-3 Operation Mode
3-4 Initialize Mode
3-5 Program Mode
3-6 Auto-tuning Mode
3-7 Modified Constants Mode
3-8 Operation Mode Selection Key and
Local/Remote Selection Input
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
3-1 Using the Digital Operator
Operation Mode Indicators
DRIVE: Lit when in operation mode.

FWD: Lit when there is a forward command input.
REV: Lit when there is a reverse command input.
SEQ: Lit when the forward/reverse command from
the control circuit terminal is enabled.
REF: Lit when the frequency reference from
control circuit terminals 13 and 14 is enabled.
Data Display
Two-line LCD that displays data for monitoring, pa-

rameter names, and set values with 16 characters
per line.
Keys
Execute operations such as setting parameters,

monitoring, JOG, and auto-tuning.
Key Name Function

Operation Mode Switches between Operator and parameter setting (run command and
Selection Key frequency reference). This key can be enabled or disabled with a
parameter setting (o2-02).
Menu Key Displays each mode.
Escape Key Returns to the status before the Enter Key is pressed.
Jog Key Enables JOG operation when the 3G3FV is in operation with the
Digital Operator.
Forward/Reverse Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the 3G3FV is in
Rotation Selection Key operation with the Digital Operator.
Reset/Digit Selection Selects digits for parameter settings. Also acts as the reset key when
Key an fault has occurred. (See note.)
Increment Key Selects modes, groups, functions, parameter names, and set values.
This key increases numbers when pressed.
Decrement Key Selects modes, groups, functions, parameter names, and set values.
This key decreases numbers when pressed.
Enter Key Enters modes, functions, constants, and set values after they are set.
Run Key Starts the 3G3FV running when the 3G3FV is in operation with the
Digital Operator.
Stop Key Stops the 3G3FV running. This key can be enabled or disabled with a
parameter setting (o2-02) in operation with the control circuit terminal.
Note For safety reasons, the Reset Key cannot be used when a run command (forward/reverse) is be-
ing input. Turn OFF the run command before attempting to reset.
3-2
3-2 Modes
This section describes the 3G3FV’s various parameter setting and monitoring modes.
Inverter Modes
• The SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Inverter’s parameters and monitoring functions have been organized in
groups, so it is easier to make settings and read data. These function groups are known as modes.
• The 3G3FV is equipped with 5 modes, as shown in the following table.
Mode Primary function(s)
Operation mode The Inverter can be run in this mode.
Use this mode when monitoring values such as frequency references or output
current, displaying fault information, or displaying the fault history.
Initialize mode Use this mode when selecting the language displayed on the Digital Operator,
selecting the access level for setting/reading parameters, selecting the control mode,
or initializing the parameters.
Program mode Use this mode when setting/reading the parameters required for operation. The
program-mode functions are subdivided into the following groups:
Application: Operation mode selection, DC control, speed search, etc.
Tuning: Acceleration/deceleration times, S-curve characteristics, carrier
frequencies, etc.
Reference: Settings related to frequency control
Motor: V/f characteristics and motor parameters
Option: Settings for Optional Cards
Terminal: Settings for sequential I/O and analog I/O
Protection: Settings for the motor and inverter protection functions
Operator: Selects the Digital Operator’s display and key functions
Auto-tuning (Usable only with the vector control mode)
mode Use this mode when running a motor with unknown motor parameters in the vector
control mode. The motor parameters are calculated and set automatically.
Modified Use this mode to set/read parameters that have been changed from their factory-set
constants mode values.
Switching Modes
• Once the Unit has been put into operation mode by pressing the Menu Key, the Increment and Decre-
ment Keys can be pressed to switch to other modes.
• Press the Enter Key to set/read the parameters in each mode.
3-3
• Press the Escape Key to return to the mode display from the parameter display.
All modes/parameters status Power ON
• Operation mode Monitor (Frequency reference value)
** Main Menu ** Frequency Ref

Operation U1Ć01= 60.00 HZ
• Initialize mode Operator display language selection

** Main Menu ** Select Language
Initialize English
Frequency reference input method

• Programming mode selection (see note 2)
** Main Menu ** Reference Source

Programming Operator
• Auto-tuning mode (see note 1) Auto-tuning (Rated voltage setting)
** Main Menu ** Rated Voltage

AutoĆTuning 200.0 VAC
Display parameters changed from

• Modified constants mode factory settings
** Main Menu ** Reference 1

Modified Consts d1Ć01= 60.00 HZ
Note 1. Auto-tuning mode will be displayed only when vector control mode has been selected. (The
factory setting is for open-loop vector control.)
Note 2. The actual display depends on the parameter access level setting (A1-01).
3-4
Parameter Access Level

The SYSDRIVE 3G3FV’s has three access levels which divide the various parameters based on their
usage, as shown below. The access level restricts which parameters can be set or displayed.
Level Function
Quick-start Allows setting/reading of parameters required for test runs. (factory-set)
Basic Allows setting/reading of general-purpose parameters.
Advanced Allows setting/reading of all parameters.
Set the access level in initialize mode with parameter A1-01.
Changing the Access Level from Quick-start to Basic

Key sequence Display Explanation
** Main Menu ** Displays operation mode.
Operation
** Main Menu ** Displays initialize mode.
Initialize
Select Language Puts the Unit in initialize mode.
English
Access Level Switches to the access level parameter.
Quick Start
A1Ć01= 2 *** Displays the access level parameter setting.
Quick Start
A1Ć01= 3 Changes the access level setting to “BASIC.”
Basic Level
Writes the new parameter setting.
Entry Accepted
Access Level Returns to the access level parameter display.
Basic Level
3-5
The following diagram shows this procedure in flowchart format.
** Main Menu **
Operation
** Main Menu ** Select Language

Initialize English
Access Level A1Ć01= 2 ***

Quick Start QuickĆStart
A1Ć01= 3
Basic Level
Access Level
Basic Level Entry Accepted
Setting Parameters in Each Access Level

• The displays in program mode differ for each access level. (There is no difference in other modes.)
• This section provides the procedure to change the acceleration time to 20 s in each access level. The
acceleration time (C1-01) is a parameter in program mode.
• If the new parameter setting is not written to the Unit (by pressing the Enter Key) within one minute
after starting the procedure, the display will automatically revert to the original parameter setting. In
this case, the procedure must be started again.
3-6
Parameter Setting Levels (Partial)
MENU Operation mode
Initialize mode
Program mode Application b1 Sequence b1-01 Reference source
b1-02 Run source
Parameter to be changed
b1-03 Stopping method
Tuning C1 Accel/Decel C1-01 Accel Time 1
Reference C2 S-Curve Acc/Dec C1-02 Decel Time 1
Setting the Parameter in the Quick-start Access Level

The parameter level will be displayed when the Enter Key is pressed at the program mode display.
Operation
2 times ** Main Menu ** Displays program mode.
Programming
Reference Source Puts the Unit in program mode.
Terminals Displays the b1-01 Reference source selection.
Run Source Displays the b1-02 Run source selection.
Terminals
Stopping Method Displays the b1-03 Stopping method selection.
Ramp to Stop
Accel Time 1 Displays C1-01 Acceleration time 1.
c1Ć01= 10.0 Sec
Accel Time 1 Selects the parameter so that the leading 0 flashes.
0010.0 Sec (The digit that can be changed flashes.)
2 times Accel Time 1 Moves the cursor so that the “1” digit flashes.
0010.0 Sec
Accel Time 1 Changes the 1 to a 2.
0020.0 Sec
Writes the new setting.
Entry Accepted
--- Accel Time 1 Returns to the C1-01 Acceleration time 1 display.
c1Ć01= 20.0 Sec
** Main Menu ** Returns to the program mode display.
Programming
3-7
Setting the Parameter in the Basic Access Level
The function level will be displayed when the Enter Key is pressed at the program mode display.
Operation
Programming
Function b1 Puts the Unit in program mode.
Sequence Displays the b1 Sequence function selection.
Function b2 Displays the b2 DC Braking function selection.
DC Braking
Function C1 Displays the C1 Accel/Decel function selection.
Accel/Decel
c1Ć01= 10.0 Sec
0010.0 Sec
0020.0 Sec
Entry Accepted
c1Ć01= 20.0 Sec
Function C1 Returns to the program mode display.
Accel/Decel
3-8
Setting the Parameter in the Advanced Access Level
The group level will be displayed when the Enter Key is pressed at the program mode display.
Operation
Programming
Group b Puts the Unit in program mode.
Application Displays the Group b Application group selection.
Group C Displays the Group C Tuning group selection.
Tuning
Function C1 Displays the C1 Accel/Decel function selection.
Accel/Decel
c1Ć01= 10.0 Sec
0010.0 Sec
0020.0 Sec
Entry Accepted
c1Ć01= 20.0 Sec
Function C1 Returns to the C1 Accel/Decel function selection.
Accel/Decel
3-9
3-3 Operation Mode
Operation mode is the mode in which the Inverter can run. When running the Inverter,
press the Enter Key from the operation mode display to bring up the monitor display. Run
commands can’t be received from any other display. Once the Unit is running, it can be
switched to other modes.
Many parameters can’t be changed when the Inverter is running. Refer to Chapter 7
Parameter Lists for details.
Bring up monitor displays such as the frequency reference, output frequency, output
current, and output voltage as well as fault information and the fault history in operation
mode.
3-10
Operations in Operation Mode
All modes/parameters status Power ON
Operation mode Frequency reference setting/display

** Main Menu ** Frequency Ref
Operation U1Ć01= 0.00 HZ
Output frequency display

Output Freq
U1Ć02= 0.00 HZ
Output current display

Output Current
U1Ć03= 0.00 A
Output voltage display

Output Voltage
U1Ć06= 0.0 VAC
Function selection U2 (fault trace)

Function U2
Contents of fault trace
Fault Trace
Function selection U3
(fault history)
Function U3
Fault History Contents of fault history
Function selection U1 (Monitor)

Function U1
Various monitors
Monitor
3-11
Conditions for Monitoring

The following tables show the items that can be monitored in operation mode. The table’s “Valid access
levels” column indicates whether an item can be monitored in a particular access level and control
mode. The codes in this column have the following meanings.
Q: These items can be monitored in all access levels. (Quick-start, Basic, and Advanced)
B: These items can be monitored in the Basic and Advanced access levels.
A: These items can be monitored in the Advanced access level only.
X: These items cannot be monitored in the control mode shown.
The output signal levels for multi-function analog outputs shown in the table are for a gain of 100.0 and a
bias of 0.00.
Status Monitor
Item Display
p y Function Output
p signal
g Min. Valid access levels
l
levels
l ffor Units
U it V/f V/f Open Flux
multi-function w/PG Vec- Vec-
analog outputs tor tor
U1-01 Frequency Ref Monitors/sets the frequency reference 10 V: 0.01 Q Q Q Q
value. Max. frequency Hz
The display units can be set with param- (0 to ±10 V possible)
eter o1-01.
U1-02 Output Freq Monitors the output frequency. 10 V: 0.01 Q Q Q Q
Max. frequency Hz
The display units can be set with param-
eter o1-01. (0 to ±10 V possible)
U1-03 Output Current Monitors the output current. 10 V: Rated current 0.1 A Q Q Q Q
(0 to +10 V output)
U1-04 Control Method Shows which control mode is set. Can’t be output. --- Q Q Q Q
U1-05 Motor Speed Monitors the motor speed. 10 V: 0.01 X Q Q Q
Max. frequency Hz
(0 to ±10 V possible)
U1-06 Output Voltage Monitors the Inverter’s internal output 10 V: 200 (400) VAC 0.1 V Q Q Q Q
voltage reference value.
(0 to +10 V output)
U1-07 DC Bus Voltage Monitors the DC voltage of the Inverter’s 10 V: 400 (800) VDC 1V Q Q Q Q
internal main circuit.
(0 to +10 V output)
U1-08 Output kWatts Monitors the output power. (This is an in- 10 V: 0.1 Q Q Q Q
ternally detected value.) Max. motor capacity kW
U1-09 Torque Reference Monitors the internal torque reference 10 V: Rated torque 0.1% X X Q Q
value when vector control is used.
U1-10 Input Term Sts Shows the ON/OFF status of inputs. Can’t be output. --- Q Q Q Q
(Input terminal U1-10=00000000
status)
1: Terminal 1 ON
1: Terminal 2 ON
1: Terminal 3 ON
1: Terminal 4 ON
1: Terminal 5 ON
1: Terminal 6 ON
1: Terminal 7 ON
1: Terminal 8 ON
3-12
Item Display Function Output signal Min. Valid access levels
levels for Units V/f V/f Open Flux
U1-11 Output Term Sts Shows the ON/OFF status of outputs. Can’t be output. --- Q Q Q Q
(Output terminal U1-11=00000000
status)
1: Terminals 9–10 ON
1: Terminal 25 ON
1: Terminal 26 ON
Not used. (always 0)
1: Terminals 18/19–20
ON
U1-12 Int Ctl Sts 1 Shows the Inverter’s operating status. Can’t be output. --- Q Q Q Q
(Internal control U1-12=00000000
status)
1: Running
1: Zero-speed level
1: Reverse
1: Reset input ON
1: F.ref/F.out agree
1: Inverter ready
1: Minor fault detected
1: Major fault detected
U1-13 Elapsed Time Monitors the Inverter’s elapsed operating Can’t be output. 1 hr Q Q Q Q
time.
The initial value and running/power-on
time selection can be set with parameters
o2-07 and o2-08.
U1-14 FLASH ID Manufacturer’s ID number Can’t be output. --- Q Q Q Q
U1-15 Term 13 Level Monitors the input voltage of the frequen- 10 V: 100% (10 V) 0.1% B B B B
cy reference (voltage).
(Terminal 13 input (0 to ±10 V possible)
voltage level) An input of 10 V corresponds to 100%.
U1-16 Term 14 Level Monitors the input current of the frequen- 10 V: 100% (20 mA) 0.1% B B B B
cy reference (current).
(Terminal 14 input (0 to +10 V output)
current level) An input of 20 mA corresponds to 100%.
U1-17 Term 16 Level Monitors the input voltage of the multi- 10 V: 100% (10 V) 0.1% B B B B
function analog input.
(Terminal 16 input (0 to ±10 V possible)
voltage level) An input of 10 V corresponds to 100%.
U1-18 Mot SEC Current Monitors the calculated value of the mo- 10 V: Rated current 0.1% B B B B
tor’s secondary current (Iq). The motor’s
(0 to +10 V output)
rated current corresponds to 100%.
U1-19 Mot EXC Current Monitors the calculated value of the mo- 10 V: Rated current 0.1% X X B B
tor’s excitation current (Id). The motor’s
(0 to +10 V output)
rated current corresponds to 100%.
U1-20 SFS Output Monitors the output frequency after a soft 10 V: 0.01 A A A A
start. The display shows the frequency Max. frequency Hz
without the correction from compensation
functions such as slip compensation.
U1-21 ASR Input Monitors the input to the speed control 10 V: 0.01 X A X A
loop. The max. frequency corresponds to Max. frequency %
100%.
U1-22 ASR Output Monitors the output from the speed con- 10 V: Rated current 0.01 X A X A
trol loop. The motor’s rated current corre- %
sponds to 100%.
U1-23 Speed Deviation Monitors the speed deviation within the 10 V: 0.01 X A X A
speed control loop. The max. frequency Max. frequency %
corresponds to 100%.
U1-24 PID Feedback Monitors the feedback value when PID 10 V: 0.01 A A A A
control is used. The input for the max. Max. frequency %
frequency corresponds to 100%.
3-13
Item Display Function Output signal Min. Valid access levels
levels for Units V/f V/f Open Flux
U1-25 DI-16 Reference Monitors the reference value from a Can’t be output. --- A A A A
3G3FV-PDI16H2 Digital Command Card.
The value will be displayed in binary or
BCD depending on parameter F3-01.
U1-26 Voltage Ref (Vq) Monitors the Inverter’s internal voltage 10 V: 200 (400) VAC 0.1 V X X A A
reference value for the motor’s secon-
dary current control.
U1-27 Voltage Ref (Vd) Monitors the Inverter’s internal voltage 10 V: 200 (400) VAC 0.1 V X X A A
reference value for the motor’s excitation
current control.
U1-28 CPU ID Manufacturer’s CPU software ID number Can’t be output. 0.1 V A A A A
U1-32 ACR(q) Output Monitor’s the current control output value 10 V: 100% 0.1% X X A A
for the motor’s secondary current.
U1-33 ACR(d) Output Monitor’s the current control output value 10 V: 100% 0.1% X X A A
for the motor’s excitation current.
U1-34 OPE Detected Displays the first constant number for Can’t be output. --- A A A A
which an OPE error was detected.
U1-35 Zero Servo Pulse Multiplies the number of PG pulses by Can’t be output. 1 X X X A
four to display the movement width at the
zero servo stop point.
U1-36 PID Input PID reference + PID reference bias – PID 10 V: 0.01 A A A A
feedback value Max. frequency %
The max. frequency corresponds to
100%.
U1-37 PID Output PID control output 10 V: 0.01 A A A A
The max. frequency corresponds to Max. frequency %
100%.
U1-38 PID Setpoint PID reference + PID reference bias 10 V: 0.01 A A A A
The max. frequency corresponds to Max. frequency %
100%.
3-14
Fault Trace
Item Display
p y Function Output
p signal
l
levels
l for
f Units
U2-01 Current Fault Information on the current fault Can’t be output.
p --- Q Q Q Q
U2-02 Last Fault Information on the last fault --- Q Q Q Q
U2-03 Frequency Ref Frequency reference value when the “last 0.01 Q Q Q Q
fault” occurred. Hz
U2-04 Output Freq Output frequency when the “last fault” oc- 0.01 Q Q Q Q
curred. Hz
U2-05 Output Current Output current when the “last fault” occurred. 0.1 A Q Q Q Q
U2-06 Motor Speed Motor speed when the “last fault” occurred. 0.01 X Q Q Q
Hz
U2-07 Output Voltage Output voltage when the “last fault” occurred. 0.1 V Q Q Q Q
U2-08 DC Bus Voltage The main circuit DC voltage when the “last 1V Q Q Q Q
fault” occurred.
U2-09 Output kWatts Output power when the “last fault” occurred. 0.1 Q Q Q Q
kW
U2-10 Torque Reference Torque reference when the “last fault” oc- 0.1% X X Q Q
curred. (The rated torque = 100%.)
U2-11 Input Term Sts Input terminal status when the “last fault” oc- --- Q Q Q Q
curred. (Same format as U1-10.)
U2-12 Output Term Sts Output terminal status when the “last fault” --- Q Q Q Q
occurred. (Same format as U1-11.)
U2-13 Inverter status Inverter operating status when the “last fault” --- Q Q Q Q
occurred. (Same format as U1-12.)
U2-14 Elapsed time Elapsed operating or power-on time when the 1 hr Q Q Q Q
“last fault” occurred.
Fault History
Item Display
p y Function Output
p signal
l
levels
l for
f Units
U3-01 Last Fault Information on the last fault. Can’t be output.
p --- Q Q Q Q
U3-02 Fault Message 2 Information on the 2nd to last fault. --- Q Q Q Q
U3-03 Fault Message 3 Information on the 3rd to last fault. --- Q Q Q Q
U3-04 Fault Message 4 Information on the 4th to last fault. --- Q Q Q Q
U3-05 Elapsed Time 1 Elapsed running or power-on time when the 1 hr Q Q Q Q
last fault occurred.
2nd to last fault occurred.
3rd to last fault occurred.
4th to last fault occurred.
3-15
Monitoring at Startup
• In operation mode, the frequency reference, output frequency, output current, and output voltage can
be monitored immediately if the default settings are being used. One of these four values, the output
voltage, can be changed to a different value. When a value other than the output voltage is to be moni-
tored, set that value’s number in parameter o1-01 (user monitor selection).
• When the power is turned on, the frequency reference will appear in the Unit’s data display if the de-
fault settings are being used. Any one of the four values monitored at startup (frequency reference,
output frequency, output current, or the value set in parameter o1-01) can be selected to appear when
the power is turned on. The value that appears at startup is determined by parameter o1-02 (Power-
On Monitor).
• Parameters o1-01 and o1-02 can be changed in the Basic or Advanced access levels. These parame-
ters can be changed during operation.
User Monitor Selection (Parameter o1-01)
Use parameter o1-01 to select the values that will be monitored at startup.
Use the last two digits from the “U1 Monitor” list (U1-) to select a value. For example, the torque
reference is U1-09, so input 9 to select the torque reference.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
g Units Default Valid access levels
number range setting V/f V/f with Open Loop Flux
Control PG Vector Vector
o1-01 User Monitor Sel 4 to 28 --- 6 Basic or Advanced
The following example shows how to change parameter o1-01 so that the output power is monitored at
startup instead of the output voltage.
Operation
** Main Menu ** Displays program mode.
Programming
Function b1 Puts the Unit in program mode.
Sequence
Function o1 Displays function selection o1.
2 times
Monitor Select
User Monitor Sel Puts the Unit in function selection o1. (Monitor Select)
Output Voltage
o1Ć01= 6 *** Displays the parameter setting for o1-01.
Output Voltage
2 times o1Ć01= 8 *** Sets the parameter to output power.
Output kWatts
Entry Accepted
User Monitor Sel Returns to the Monitor Select display.
Output kWatts
Note In this example, the setting is changed in the Basic access level.
Power-On Monitor (Parameter o1-02)
Use parameter o1-02 to indicate which value will be displayed when the Unit is started.
A setting of 1 indicates the frequency reference, 2 indicates the output frequency, 3 indicates the output
current, and 4 indicates the value set in parameter o1-01.
3-16
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
o1-02 Power-On 1 to 4 --- 1 Basic or Advanced
Monitor
The following example shows how to change parameter o1-02 so that the output current is displayed at
startup. (The procedure continues from the end of the previous example.)
User Monitor Sel Monitor Select display (See the previous example.)
Output kWatts
PowerĆOn Monitor Displays the Power-On Monitor display.
Frequency Ref
o1Ć02= 1 *** Displays the parameter setting for o1-02.
Frequency Ref
2 times O1Ć02= 3 Sets the parameter to output current.
Output Current
Entry Accepted
PowerĆOn Monitor Returns to the Power-On Monitor display.
Output Current
Function o1 Returns to the function selection o1 display.
Monitor Select
Programming
Note In this example, the setting is changed in the Basic access level.
3-17
3-4 Initialize Mode
The initialize mode is used to select the language displayed by the Unit, the access level,
and the control mode; it is also used to initialize the Unit’s parameters.
Selecting the Display Language

Use parameter A1-00 to select the language displayed by the Unit. Messages can be displayed in 0:
English, 1: Japanese, 2: German, 3: French, 4: Italian, 5: Spanish, or 6: Portuguese. This parameter is
not initialized by the initialize operation and it can be changed during operation.
Note The language that is set will be indicated on the display.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
A1-00 Select Language 0 to 6 --- 0 Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
Example
The following example shows how to change parameter A1-00 so that Japanese is displayed instead of
English.
Operation
Initialize
English (Select Language display)
A1Ć00= 0 Displays the parameter setting for A1-00.
English
A1Ć00= 1 *** Sets the display language to Japanese.
FN]:^
<^.3=3 67:P6] Writes the new setting.
9^]:^ >]@8 Returns to the Select Language display.

FN]:^
Setting the Access Level

Use parameter A1-01 to select the parameter access level. This level determines which parameters
can be displayed and changed. (The parameters which can be displayed and changed also depend
upon the control mode being used.) This parameter can be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
A1-01 Access Level 0 to 4 --- 2 Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
3-18
Access Level Settings
Setting Name Function
0 Operation Only This setting allows operation mode and initialize mode to be displayed or
changed. Use this setting to prevent parameter settings from being changed.
1 User Level This setting allows only the user-selected parameters (up to 32) to be displayed
or changed. Select the desired parameters as “User Parameters” in parameters
A2-01 through A2-32.
2 Quick-start This setting allows the parameters required to start the Inverter (about 25) to be
displayed or changed.
3 Basic This setting allows the commonly used parameters to be displayed or changed.
4 Advanced This setting allows all parameters to be displayed or changed.
Setting the Control Mode

Use parameter A1-02 to select one of the four control modes. This parameter is not initialized by the
initialize operation and it cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
A1-02 Control Method 0 to 3 --- 2 Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
Control Mode Settings
0 V/f Control V/f control without pulse generator (normal V/f control)
1 V/f w/PG Fdbk V/f control with pulse generator (V/f control using a PG Speed Control Card)
2 Open Loop Vector Vector control without pulse generator
(Vector control using the Inverter’s internal speed information)
3 Flux Vector Vector control with pulse generator
(Vector control using a PG Speed Control Card)
Control Mode Characteristics
Characteristic V/f Control V/f w/PG Fdbk Open Loop Vector Flux Vector
Basic control method Voltage/frequency Voltage/frequency Current vector con- Current vector con-
control (open loop) control with speed trol without PG trol with PG
compensation
Speed detector Not required Required Not required Required
(pulse generator) (pulse generator)
Optional Speed Not required 3G3FV-PPGA2 or Not required 3G3FV-PPGB2 or
Detectors 3G3FV-PPGD2 3G3FV-PPGX2
Speed control range 1:40 1:40 1:100 1:1,000
Starting torque 150%/3 Hz 150%/3 Hz 150%/1 Hz 150%/0 Hz
Speed control ±2 to 3% ±0.03% ±0.2% ±0.02%
precision
Torque limit Not possible Not possible Possible Possible
Torque control Not possible Not possible Not possible Possible
Example applications • Multiple motors • Simple speed • Variable speed • Simple servo
feedback control drive applications drives
• Precision speed
control
• Torque control
3-19
Example
The following example shows how to change parameter A1-02 to select Flux Vector control (vector con-
trol with pulse generator).
Operation
Initialize
2 times Control Method Displays the Control Method display.
Open Loop Vector
Open Loop Vector
A1=02 3 Changes the setting to Flux Vector.
Flux Vector
Entry Accepted
Control Method Returns to the Control Method display.
Flux Vector
Initializing the Parameters

Use parameter A1-03 to initialize the parameters. This parameter cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
number range setting V/f V/f Open Loop Flux
Control with PG Vector Vector
A1-03 Init Parameters 0, 1110, --- 0 Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
2220, or
3330
Initialize Parameters Settings

Setting Function
0 Returns to the Initialize display without initializing any parameters.
1110 Initializes the parameters to the user settings.
This function initializes the parameters to values that have been recorded as user settings. To record
the user settings, change the parameters to the desired values and then set parameter o2-03 (User
Defaults) to 1. (The 1110 function is disabled when parameter o2-03 is 0.)
2220 2-wire sequential initialization (Initializes the parameters to the factory settings.)
3330 3-wire sequential initialization
Example of Wiring for 2-wire Sequential Operation
Forward rotation/Stop
Reverse rotation/Stop
11
3-20
Example of Wiring for 3-wire Sequential Operation
Run switch
Stop switch (NO)
(NC)
Run command
Stop command
5
Forward/Reverse rotation command
(Multi-function input 3)
11
Note 1. The default settings of the multi-function inputs are different from the default settings of the
2-wire sequence.
Note 2. When setting a 3-wire sequence, the operation can be started and stopped with an automati-
cally resetting pushbutton switch.
Initialization Example
The following example shows how to initialize parameters with the 2-wire sequence (factory settings).
Operation
Initialize
3 times Init Parameters Displays the Initialize display.
No Initialize
A1Ć03= 0 *** Displays the parameter setting for A1-03.
No Initialize
A1Ć03= 2220 Changes the setting to 2-wire Initialization.
2Ćwire Initial
Entry Accepted
Init Parameters Returns to the Initialize display.
No Initialize
Write-protect Passwords
Use parameters A1-04 and A1-05 to write-protect the initialize-mode parameters. Parameters A1-01
through A1-03 and A2-01 through A2-32 can be displayed but not changed if the contents of A1-04 and
A1-05 don’t match. These parameters cannot be changed during operation.
To write-protect the initialize-mode parameters, set the password in A1-05 after inputting the desired
values in A1-01 through A1-03 and A2-01 through A2-32. Parameter A1-05 can be displayed by dis-
playing A1-04 and pressing the Menu Key while pressing the Reset Key. (A1-05 can’t be displayed with
the usual key sequences.)
It will be possible to change the initialize-mode parameters again when the password is written to
A1-04.
3-21
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
A1-04 Enter Password 0000 to --- 0 Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
9999
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
A1-05 Select Password 0000 to --- 0 Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
9999
Password Setting Example
The following example shows how to set the password to “1000.”

Operation
Initialize
4 times Enter Password Displays the Enter Password display.
A1Ć04= 0
+ Select Password Press and hold the Reset Key and then press the
A1Ć05= 0 Menu Key to display A1-05.
Select Password Selects the parameter so that the leading 0 flashes.
0000 (The digit that can be changed flashes.)
Select Password Changes the password to 1000.
1000
Entry Accepted
Select Password Returns to the Select Password display (A1-05).
A1Ć05= 1000
Enter Password Returns to the Enter Password display (A1-04).
A1Ć04= 0
User Parameters
Parameters A2-01 through A2-32 specify the parameters that can be displayed and changed when the
access level parameter (A1-01) is set to 1. Parameters A2-01 through A2-32 can be changed only in the
Advanced access level and cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
numbers range setting V/f V/f Open Loop Flux
A2-01 to User parameter 1 to b1-01 to --- --- Advanced
A2-32 User parameter 32 o2-08
3-22
The following restrictions apply to setting/displaying parameters when the access level is set to the user
level.
Mode Accessible parameters
Operation The Quick-start level parameters can be displayed.
Initialize The Quick-start level parameters can be set or displayed.
Program Only the parameters specified in A2-01 through A2-32 can be set or displayed.
Auto-tuning The parameters cannot be displayed.
Modified constants The parameters cannot be displayed.
Setting Example
The following example shows how to specify parameter C1-01 (Acceleration time 1) in user parameter
A2-01 and set the access level to the user level.
Operation
Initialize
Function A2 Displays the User Parameters display.
User Parameters
User Param 1 Displays the parameter setting for A2-01.
A2Ć01= ĆĆĆĆĆ
User Param 1 Selects the parameter so that the leading digit flashes.
ĆĆĆĆĆ (The digit that can be changed flashes.)
2 times User Param 1 Sets the first digit to “C.”
C1Ć01 (At this point the other digits will be displayed.)
2 times User Param 1 Moves the cursor to the third digit.
C1Ć01
7 times User Param 1 Sets the last digits to “08.”
C1Ć08
Entry Accepted
User Param 1 Returns to the parameter setting for A2-01.
A2Ć01= C1Ć08
Function A2 Returns to the User Parameters display.
User Parameters
2 times Access Level Displays the Access Level display.
Advanced Level
ADVANCED
2 times A1Ć01= 1 Changes the setting to “User Level.”
User Level
Entry Accepted
Access Level Returns to the Access Level display.
User Level
** Main Menu ** Returns to the initialize mode display.
Initialize
3-23
Note The access level can be set to “User Level” after at least one parameter has been specified in
A2-01 through A2-32. The “User Level” selection won’t appear as an option for parameter A1-01
unless a parameter has been specified in A2-01 through A2-32.
Initialize Mode Parameter Levels (Reference)

MENU Operation mode
Initialize mode Select Language
Program mode Access Level
Control Method
Initialize Parameters
Enter Password
User Parameters A2-01 User Parameter 1
A2-02 User Parameter 2
A2-32 User Parameter 32
These parameters can be displayed and changed

only in the Advanced access level.
3-24
3-5 Program Mode
The Inverter parameters can be set in program mode. The parameters which can be dis-
played and changed depend on the access level and control mode that are being used.
Refer to the following table to determine if a parameter can be changed.
Parameter Groups
An “OK” in the control mode column indicates that the parameter can be changed in that control mode.
Group
p Function Comments Control mode
V/f V/f Open-loop Flux
w/PG Vector Vector
Application
pp b1 Sequence Settings such as the reference input method OK OK OK OK
b2 DC Braking DC braking function settings OK OK OK OK
b3 Speed Search Speed search function settings OK OK OK OK
b4 Delay Timers Timer function settings OK OK OK OK
b5 PID Control PID control settings OK OK OK OK
b6 Reference Hold Accel/deceleration time dwell function settings OK OK OK OK
b7 Droop Control Droop control (speed drop) settings --- --- --- OK
b8 Energy Saving Terminal input energy-saving control settings OK OK --- ---
b9 Zero Servo Stop in the position loop --- --- --- OK
Tuning
g C1 Accel/Decel Acceleration/deceleration time settings OK OK OK OK
C2 S-Curve Acc/Dec S-curve characteristics for accel/decel times OK OK OK OK
C3 Motor-Slip Comp Slip compensation function settings OK OK OK OK
C4 Torque Comp Torque compensation function settings OK OK OK ---
C5 ASR Tuning Speed control loop parameter settings --- OK --- OK
C6 Carrier Freq Carrier frequency settings OK OK OK OK
C7 Hunting Prev Hunting prevention function for V/f control OK OK --- ---
C8 Factory Tuning Adjustment for open-loop vector control --- --- OK ---
Reference d1 Preset Reference Operator frequency reference settings OK OK OK OK
d2 Reference Limits Frequency upper and lower limit settings OK OK OK OK
d3 Jump Frequencies Prohibited frequency settings OK OK OK OK
d4 Sequence Hold for analog frequency reference OK OK OK OK
d5 Torque Control Parameter settings for torque control --- --- --- OK
Motor E1 V/f Pattern Sets the motor’s V/f characteristics. OK OK OK OK
E2 Motor Setup Sets the motor parameters. OK OK OK OK
E3 Control Method 2 Sets the control method of motor 2. OK OK OK OK
E4 V/f Pattern 2 Sets the V/f pattern of motor 2. OK OK OK OK
E5 Motor Setup 2 Motor setup for motor 2. OK OK OK OK
Options
p F1 PG Option Setup Parameter settings for a PG Card --- OK --- OK
F2 AI-14 Setup Parameter settings for an Analog Reference Card OK OK OK OK
F3 DI-08, 16 Setup Parameter settings for a Digital Reference Card OK OK OK OK
F4 AO-08, 12 Setup Parameter settings for an Analog Monitor Card OK OK OK OK
F5 Not used (DO-02) Not Used. ((Do not change
g these settings.)
g ) --- --- --- ---
F6 Not used (DO-08)
F7 PO-36F Setup Parameter settings for a Pulse Monitor Card. OK OK OK OK
F8 SI-F/G Setup SYSMAC BUS Interface card setup. OK OK OK OK
F9 CP-916 Setup CompoBus/D (DeviceNet) communications card OK OK OK OK
setup.
3-25
Group Function Comments Control mode
w/PG Vector Vector
Terminal H1 Digital Inputs Function selection for multi-function inputs OK OK OK OK
H2 Digital Outputs Function selection for multi-function outputs OK OK OK OK
H3 Analog Inputs Function selection for analog inputs OK OK OK OK
H4 Analog Outputs Function selection for analog outputs OK OK OK OK
H5 Serial Com Setup Not Used. (Do not change these settings.) --- --- --- ---
Protection L1 Motor Overload Overload protection settings and selection OK OK OK OK
L2 PwrLoss Ridethru Selects the power-loss processing method. OK OK OK OK
L3 Stall Prevention Stall prevention settings and selection OK OK OK OK
L4 Ref Detection Frequency detection settings and selection OK OK OK OK
L5 Fault Restart Fault restart function settings OK OK OK OK
L6 Torque Detection Overtorque detection settings and selection OK OK OK OK
L7 Torque Limit Torque limit settings (vector control only) --- --- OK OK
L8 Hdwe Protection Overheating and phase loss protection settings OK OK OK OK
Operator
p o1 Monitor Select Selects the display and setting methods. OK OK OK OK
o2 Key Selections Key function selection and other parameters OK OK OK OK
Setting Parameters in Program Mode

The parameters that can be displayed and changed will vary depending on the access level that has
been set.
In the Quick-start level, the first parameter (b1-01) will be displayed when the Enter Key is pressed at the
program mode display. In the Basic level, the first function (b1) will be displayed when the Enter Key is
pressed at the program mode display. In the Advanced level, the first group (b) will be displayed when
the Enter Key is pressed at the program mode display.
For setting examples, refer to Setting Parameters in Each Access Level on page 3-6.
3-26
MENU
Operation mode b Application b1 Sequence b1-01 Reference Source
ADVANCED b1-02 Run Source
BASIC QUICK-START b1-03 Stopping Method

Initialize mode
b2 DC braking b2-01 Zero speed Level

Program mode b2-02 DC Inj Current
Auto-tuning b3 Speed search b3-01 Spd Srch at Start

mode
b3-02 Spd Srch Current
Modified constants
mode c Tuning C1 Accel/Decel C1-01 Acceleration time 1
C1-02 Deceleration time 1
C2 S-curve C2-01 SCrv Acc @ Start

characteristic setting
C2-02 SCrv Acc @ End
C3 Motor-slip C3-01 Slip Comp Gain

compensation
d Reference d1 Frequency d1-01 Preset reference 1

reference presetting
d1-02 Preset reference 2
d2 Frequency d2-01 Ref Upper Limit

upper/lower limit
d2-02 Ref Lower Limit
d3 Jump frequency d3-01 Jump Freq 1
E Motor E1 V/F pattern E1-01 Input Voltage

setting
E1-02 Motor Selection
E2 Motor setup E2-01 Motor Rated FLA
F Options F1 PG Speed F1-01 PG Pulses/Rev

Control Card
H Terminal H1 Multi-function H1-01 Terminal 3 Sel

input
H2 Multi-function H2-01 Terminal 9 Sel
output
L Protection L1 Motor protection L1-01 MOL Fault Select
L2 instantaneous power L1-02 MOL Time Const

failure compensation
o Operator o1 Display/setting o1-01 User Monitor Sel

selection
o1-02 Power-On Monitor
o2 Function o2-01 Local/Remote Key

selection
o2-02 Oper Stop Key
Note The above parameter levels are simplified levels used mainly in programming operation.
3-27
3-6 Auto-tuning Mode
The auto-tuning function automatically tunes and sets the required motor parameters
when operating in the open-loop or flux vector control modes.
When the rated voltage, rated current, rated frequency, rated rotational frequency, and
number of poles listed on the motor’s nameplate have been input and the Run Key is
pressed, the motor parameters calculated from these values are written to E1-01
through E2-08 automatically.
The auto-tuning mode won’t be displayed if V/f control has been selected.
Precautions for Auto-tuning Operation

! Caution Do not connect a load to the motor when performing auto-tuning. Doing so may re-
sult in personal injury or equipment damage.
• The Inverter’s auto-tuning function automatically determines the motor parameters while a servo sys-
tem’s auto-tuning function determines the size of a load, so these auto-tuning functions are funda-
mentally different.
• If a load is connected when auto-tuning is performed, not only will incorrect motor parameters be re-
corded, but the motor may operate erratically resulting in dangerous conditions such as loads falling
from vertical axis motors. Never perform auto-tuning with a load connected to the motor.
3-28
Auto-tuning Operation Example

Operation
3 times ** Main Menu ** Displays auto-tuning mode.
AutoĆTuning
Rated Voltage Displays the rated voltage.
200.0 VAC
Rated Voltage When changing the rated voltage, press the Enter Key
200.0 VAC again to enter input mode. (The digits will flash.)
Rated Voltage Use the Reset, Up Arrow and Down Arrow Keys to
200.0 VAC change the rated voltage setting.
Entry Accepted
Rated Voltage Returns to the rated voltage display.
200.0 VAC
Rated Current Displays the rated current.
1.90 A Follow the procedure used to change for the rated volt-
age when changing this setting.
Rated Frequency Displays the rated frequency.
60.0 Hz Follow the procedure used to change for the rated volt-
Rated Speed Displays the rated speed.
1750 RPM Follow the procedure used to change for the rated volt-
Number of Poles Displays the number of poles.
4 Follow the procedure used to change for the rated volt-
Select Motor 1/2 Displays the motor selection.
1 (Selection of motor 1 parameter or motor 2 parameter)
Tuning Ready ? Displays a confirmation prompt for the start of the
Press RUN key auto-tuning function. (The lower line will flash.)
Tune Proceeding Starts the auto-tuning function.
HZ A (The upper line will flash.)
Tune Successful Indicates the completion of auto-tuning.
** Main Menu ** Returns to the operation mode display.

Operation
3-29
3-7 Modified Constants Mode
The modified constants mode is used to display or change parameters that have been
changed from their factory-preset values.
When any parameters have been changed in program mode (b1-01 through o2-08),
pressing the Enter Key in modified constants mode will cause these parameters to be
displayed. (The initialize-mode parameters won’t be displayed.)
Modified Constants Mode Operations

• In the following example, parameters C1-01 (acceleration time 1) and d1-01 (preset reference 1) have
been changed from their factory settings.
• The settings for these two parameters are displayed and the setting for d1-01 is changed from
“60.00 Hz” to “30.00 Hz.”

Operation
** Main Menu ** Displays modified constants mode.
Modified Consts
Accel Time 1 Displays acceleration time 1 (C1-01).
c1Ć01= 20.0 Sec
Frequency Ref 1 Displays frequency reference 1 (d1-01).
d1Ć01= 60.00 Hz
Frequency Ref 1 Pressing Enter allows the setting to be changed.
060.00 Hz (The leading digit will flash.)
Frequency Ref 1 Changes the setting to “30.00 Hz.”
030.00 Hz
Entry Accepted
Frequency Ref 1 Returns to the frequency reference 1 display.
d1Ć01= 30.00 Hz
** Main Menu ** Returns to the modified constants mode display.
Modified Consts
3-30
3-8 Operation Mode Selection Key and Local/Remote

Selection Input
The operation mode of the Inverter can be changed using the Operation Mode Selection Key on the
Digital Operator. Using this key, it is possible to switch between the two operation modes shown below.
The same kind of switching is also possible with control circuit terminals set using the multi-function
input parameters 1 to 6 (set value: 2 (local/remote selection input).
Operation mode Description Contents
Remote Inverter operates according to control Operation will be determined by the
signals from a higher level control following settings.
system. Frequency reference selection: b1-01
Run source selection: b1-02
Local Inverter operates alone in order to check Run commands: RUN/STOP Key on
operation directly related to the Inverter. Digital Operator.
Frequency reference: Value set with the
Digital Operator.
Note Operates as if b1-01 and b1-02
were set to “0.”
Note 1. The operation mode will always be Remote Mode when power is supplied. Therefore, to start
operation immediately after power is supplied, set b1-01 and b1-02 to the required settings in
advance.
Note 2. If b1-01 and b1-02 are set to 0, there is no difference in the two modes.
Note 3. Frequencies set from the Digital Operator using the speed setting will be entered in frequency
reference parameters 1 to 8 (d1-01 to d1-08) or the inching frequency reference parameter
(d1-09) regardless of whether the mode is Remote Mode or Local Mode.
Note 4. Multi-function inputs 1 to 6 will be enabled regardless of whether the mode is Remote Mode or
Local Mode. The following settings, however, will be disabled in Local Mode:
Stop command (3-wire sequence selection); Set value: 0
Note 5. For safety reasons, run signals input while changing from Local Mode to Remote Mode are
usually ignored. Input the run signal again after the mode has changed. It is possible, how-
ever, to stop such run signals being ignored by setting the Local/Remote Key selection
parameter (b1-07) to 1. If this setting is made, when the mode changes from Local Mode to
Remote Mode, the Inverter will start running immediately. Take steps to ensure the safety of
the system for such operation.
3-31
4
Chapter 4
Trial Operation
4-1 Procedure
4-2 Operation Example
Trial Operation Chapter 4

! WARNING Turn ON the input power supply only after mounting the front cover, terminal covers,
bottom cover, Operator, and optional items. Not doing so may result in electrical
shock.
! WARNING Do not remove the front cover, terminal covers, bottom cover, Operator, or optional
items while the power is being supplied. Not doing so may result in electrical shock or
damage to the product.
! WARNING Do not operate the Operator or switches with wet hands. Doing so may result in
electrical shock.
! WARNING Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the
machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm. Doing so may result in injury.
! WARNING Do not come close to the machine immediately after resetting momentary power
interruption to avoid an unexpected restart (if operation is set to be continued in the
processing selection function after momentary power interruption is reset). Doing so
may result in injury.
! WARNING Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP Key on the Operator
is valid only when function settings are performed. Not doing so may result in injury.
! WARNING Be sure confirm that the RUN signal is turned OFF before turning ON the power
supply, resetting the alarm, or switching the LOCAL/REMOTE selector. Doing so
while the RUN signal is turned ON may result in injury.
! Caution Be sure to confirm permissible ranges of motors and machines before operation
because the Inverter speed can be easily changed from low to high. Not doing so
may result in damage to the product.
! Caution Provide a separate holding brake when necessary. Not doing so may result in injury.
! Caution Do not perform a signal check during operation. Doing so may result in injury or dam-
age to the product.
! Caution Do not carelessly change settings. Doing so may result in injury or damage to the
product.
4-2
4-1 Procedure
1. Installation and Mounting
Install the Inverter according to the installation conditions. Refer to page 2-2. Ensure that the instal-
lation conditions are met.
2. Wiring and Connection
Connect to the power supply and peripheral devices. Refer to page 2-11. Select peripheral devices
which meet the specifications and wire correctly.
3. Power Connection
Carrying out the following pre-connection checks before turning on the power supply:
Always ensure that a power supply of the correct voltage is used and that the power input terminal
(L1, L2, L3) is wired correctly.
200-V class: 3-phase 200 to 230 VDC, 50/60 Hz
Make sure that the Motor output terminal (T1, T2, T3) and the Motor are connected correctly.
Ensure that the control circuit terminals and the control device are wired correctly. Make sure that
all control terminals are turned OFF.
When using a PG Speed Control Card, ensure that it is wired correctly.
Set the motor to no-load status, (not connected to the mechanical system).
Having conducted the above checks, connect the power supply.
4. Check the Display Status
Check to be sure that there are no faults in the Inverter.
If the display at the time the power is connected is normal, it will read as follows:
Data Display: Frequency Ref
When an fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed. In that case, refer to Section 8
Maintenance Operations.
5. Initializing Parameters
Initialize the parameters.
6. Setting the Input Voltage
Set the Inverter input voltage (E1-01) to the correct voltage. (At the same time, set the short pin for
the 400-V class models of 18.5 KW or larger.)
7. Auto-tuning
Execute auto-tuning in the open-loop vector control mode.
When auto-tuning is executed, motor parameters are set automatically.
When this is not possible using auto-tuning, switch to V/f control mode and set the V/f pattern.
8. No-load Operation
Start the no-load motor using the Digital Operator.
Set the frequency reference using the Digital Operator and start the motor using key sequences.
9. Actual Load Operation
Connect the mechanical system and operate using the Digital Operator.
When there are no difficulties using the no-load operation, connect the mechanical system to the
motor and operate using the Digital Operator.
4-3
10. Operation
Basic Operation: Operation based on the basic settings required to start and stop the Inverter. Refer
to page 5-2.
Applied Operation: Operation which uses PID control or other functions. Refer to page 6-1.
For operation within standard parameters select “Basic Operation.”
To use the various applied functions such as, direct current control braking, speed search, timer,
S-curve acceleration/deceleration, slip correction, torque compensation, drip control, position
lock, and torque control, select “Applied Operation” in combination with “Basic Operation.”
4-4
4-2 Operation Example
4-2-1 Power Connection
Checkpoints before Connecting the Power Supply

• Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage.
• Make sure that the Motor output terminal (T1, T2, T3) and the Motor are connected correctly.
• Ensure that the control circuit terminal and the control device are wired correctly. Set all control circuit
terminals to OFF.
• When using a PG Speed Control Card, ensure that it is wired correctly.
• Set the motor to no-load status, (not connected to the mechanical system).
Connecting the Power Supply

• Having conducted the above checks, connect the power supply.
4-2-2 Checking the Display Status

• If the display at the time the power is connected is normal, it will read as follows:
Normal Frequency Ref
U1Ć01= 0.00 HZ
The frequency reference monitor is displayed in the data display section.
• When an fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed. In that case, refer to Section 8
Maintenance Operations.
Fault UV
Under Voltage
The display will differ depending on the type of fault.
4-5
4-2-3 Initializing Parameters

• Initialize the parameters using the following procedure. (Returns to default settings).
• To initialize the parameters, set “2220” in A1-03 (Initialize).
• After initialization the access level is set to Quick-start (A1-01). The following table shows the setting
method for Quick-start.
Frequency Ref Frequency reference display.
U1Ć01= 0.00 Hz
Operation
Initialize
English
3 times Initialize Displays the Initialize display.
Select
A1Ć03= 0 *** Displays the parameter setting for A1-03.
Select
A1Ć03= 2220 Changes the setting to 2-wire Initialization.
2Ćwire Initial
Writes the set values. “Entry Accepted” is displayed for
Entry Accepted approximately 0.5 seconds.
Initialize Returns to the Initialize display.
Select
** Main Menu ** Returns to the initialize mode display.
Initialize
4-2-4 Setting Input Voltage

• Set the input voltage of the Inverter (E1-01) according to the current voltage. This parameter cannot
be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E1-01 Input Voltage 155 to VAC 200 (400) Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
255
(310 to
510)
Note The setting range, or the default settings and in indicated in parentheses and indicate values for
the 400-V class.
4-6
• The following is a setting example for a 200-V class Inverter with an input voltage of 230 V.
Operation
** Main Menu ** Displays program mode.
Programming
Frequency Ref Puts the Unit in program mode.
Terminal
10 times Input Voltage Displays the input voltage setting display.
E1Ć01= 200 VAC
Input Voltage Press to change data. (The leading digit will flash).
200 VAC
Input Voltage Causes the + to flash.
200 VAC
3 times Input Voltage Set to “3”
230 VAC
The set values are overwritten. “Entry Accepted” is
Entry Accepted displayed for approximately 0.5 seconds.
Input Voltage Returns to the input voltage display. Check that the
E1Ć01= 230 VAC data has been updated.
Programming
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Short Pin (400-V Class Inverter of
18.5 kW or More)
Set the power supply voltage short pin when setting the parameter (E1-01). Insert the short pin into the
voltage connector nearest to the actual power supply voltage.
It is factory-set to the 440-V connector when shipped.
380 V 400/415 V 440 V 460 V
Note 1. The above figure is the 400-V class Inverter (18.5 to 45 kW).
Note 2. Be sure to turn off the power supply switch and wait for at least one minute (three minutes for
models larger than 30 kW) before removing the front panel and setting the pin.
4-7
4-2-5 Auto-tuning
Auto-tuning Operation
• Execute auto-tuning and the motor parameters are set automatically.
** Main Menu ** Displays program mode
Programming
** Main Menu ** Displays auto-tuning mode.
AutoĆTuning
Rated Voltage Displays the rated voltage. (see note)
200.0 VAC
Rated Current Displays the rated current. (see note)
1.90A
Rated Frequency Displays the rated frequency. (see note)
60.0 HZ
Rated Speed Displays the rated speed. (see note)
1750 RPM
Number of Poles Displays the number of poles. (see note)
4
Select Motor 1/2 Displays the motor selection.
1 (Selections other than “1” can’t be made.)
Tuning Ready ? Displays a confirmation prompt for the start of the
Press RUN key auto-tuning function. (The lower line will flash.)
Tune Proceeding Starts the auto-tuning function.
HZ A (The upper line will flash.)
Indicates the completion of auto-tuning.
Tune Successful
Operation
Note When the values displayed and the motor parameters differ, set each value separately. The set-
ting method is as follows. (An operation example for changing the motor parameters current to
1.60 A.
Rated Current
1.90A Displays the rated current.
Rated Current When changing the set values, press the Enter Key and the digit to
001.90A change will flash.
Rated Current Press the Reset/Digit Selection Key three times to make the digit
001.90A for changes flash.
Rated Current Press the Decrement Key and set to 001.60 A.

001.60A
Press the Enter Key to overwrite the set values. “Entry Accepted”
Entry Accepted
will be displayed for approximately 0.5 seconds.
Rated Current Returns to the rated current display.

1.60A
• When auto-tuning has been executed correctly, the parameters (E1-01 to E2-08) will be automatically
overwritten.
4-8
Setting the V/f Pattern

• When auto-tuning has not been executed correctly (i.e., when “Tune Aborted” is displayed), switch the
control mode to “V/f control” and set the V/f pattern.
• Procedure for changing the control mode.

Operation
Initialize
Select Language Puts the Unit in initialize mode. (Select Language
English display)
2 times Control Method Press the Up Arrow Key and the control mode select is
Open Loop Vector displayed.
A1Ć02= 2 Control mode select (A1-02) is displayed.
Open Loop Vector
2 times A1Ć02= 0 Selects open-loop vector control.
V/f Control
Entry Accepted The set values are overwritten.
Control Method Returns to the control mode select display.

V/f Control
Operation
• Set the control mode to “V/f control,” and then set the following three items. These parameters cannot
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E1-05 Max Voltage 0.0 to VAC 200.0 Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
255.0 (400.0)
(0.0 to
510.0)
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E1-06 Base Frequency 0.0 to Hz 60.0 Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
400.0
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E2-01 Motor Rated FLA 10 to A See Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
200% note 2
(See
note 1)
Note 1. Inverter rated current ratio.

Note 2. The default setting for rated current differs according to the type of Inverter.
4-9
• Check the values on the motor nameplate and set each of the parameters.
E1-05 Maximum voltage (VMAX): Sets the motor rated voltage.
E1-06 Base frequency (FA): Sets the motor rated frequency.
E2-01 Motor rated FLA: Sets the motor rated current.
• The setting procedure for these three parameters is as follows.
Operation
Programming
Reference Source Puts the Unit in program mode.
Terminal
14 times Max Voltage Press the Up Arrow Key to display the maximum
E1Ć05= 200.0 V voltage. (see note)
Base Frequency Displays the maximum voltage frequency. (see note)
E1Ć06= 60.0 HZ
5 times Motor Rated FLA Press the Up Arrow Key to display the rated current.
E2Ć01= 1.90 A (see note)
Operation
Note When there are discrepancies between the displayed values and the rated values, set each value
separately.
4-2-6 No-load Operation

• Operate the Digital Operator in with the motor in the no-load state (not connected to the mechanical
system).
Setting the Frequency Reference

• Set the frequency reference on the frequency reference monitor in the operation mode.
• The following is an operation example with the frequency reference set to 10 Hz.
Operation
Frequency Ref Puts the Unit in operation mode and displays the
U1Ć01= 0.00 HZ frequency reference.
Frequency Ref Switches operation to the Digital Operator. (SEQ, REF
U1Ć01= 6.00 HZ and LED indicators turn OFF.)
Frequency Ref Sets the frequency reference.
006.00 HZ
2 times Frequency Ref The first position flashes.
006.00 HZ
4 times Frequency Ref Set to 010.00 Hz.
010.00 HZ
Entry Accepted The set values are overwritten.
Frequency Ref Returns to the frequency reference display.

010.00 HZ
4-10
Operation Using the Digital Operator

• Press the Run Key. The motor will start to rotate. (forward rotation)
• Press the Forward/Reverse Key. The motor will rotate in the reverse direction.
• Press the Stop Key. The motor will stop. (The operation LED indicator will keep flashing until the motor
stops.)
• The frequency reference can be changed, even during operation. When this is done, the frequency
reference is changed as soon as the Enter Key is pressed to input the set values.
• If the Jog Key is pressed when the Unit is stopped, it will rotate by the jog frequency (default setting: 6.0
Hz) only while the Key is being pressed.
Checking the Operating Status

• After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no vibration or
abnormal sound from the motor.
• Check that no faults have occurred in the Inverter during operation.
4-2-7 Actual Load Operation

• After checking the operation with the motor in no-load status, connect the mechanical system and
operate with an actual load.
Connecting the System

• After confirming that the motor has stopped completely, connect the mechanical system.
• Be sure to tighten all the screws when fixing the motor axis in the mechanical system.
Operation using the Digital Operator

• In case a fault occurs during operation, make sure the Stop Key on the Digital Operator is easily acces-
sible.
• Use the Digital Operator in the same way as no-load operation.
• First set the frequency reference to a low speed of one tenth the normal operating speed.
Checking Operating Status

• Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at
slow speed, increase the frequency reference.
• After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no vibration or
abnormal sound from the motor. Check the monitor display to ensure that the U1-03 (output current) is
not becoming excessive.
4-11
5
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
5-1 Common Settings
5-2 Open-loop Vector Control
5-3 V/f Control
5-4 Flux Vector Control
5-5 V/f Control with PG
Basic Operation Chapter 5
This section explains the basic settings required to operate and stop the Inverter. The
parameter settings described here will be sufficient for simple Inverter operations.
After the basic settings common to all of the control modes are introduced, the basic set-
tings specific to each control mode will be explained. Read the common settings first and
then skip to the explanation for the control mode that will be used.
Even when your application requires special functions such as torque control or PID
control, make these basic settings first and then skip to the explanations of those special
functions. (Refer to Chapter 6 Advanced Operation.)
5-1 Common Settings
5-1-1 Setting the Access Level and Control Mode
Setting the Access Level (A1-01)

Parameter A1-01 is used to select the parameter access level. This level determines which parameters
can be displayed and changed. This parameter can be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
A1-01 Access Level 0 to 4 --- 2 Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
Access Level Settings
The control mode setting also affects which parameters can be displayed and changed.
0 Operation Only This setting allows the operation mode and initialize mode to be displayed or
changed. Use this setting to prevent parameter settings from being changed.
1 User Level This setting allows only the user-selected parameters (up to 32) to be displayed
or changed. Select the desired parameters as “User Parameters” in parameters
A2-01 through A2-32.
2 Quick-start This setting allows the parameters required to start the Inverter (about 25) to be
displayed or changed.
3 Basic This setting allows the commonly used parameters to be displayed or changed.
4 Advanced This setting allows all parameters to be displayed or changed.
Note The parameters required for basic operation can be displayed and changed in the Basic level, but
this section also describes parameters that can be set only in the Advanced level, so set the ac-
cess level to Advanced.
Example
The following example shows how to change parameter A1-01 from Quick-start to Advanced.
Operation
Initialize
5-2

Access Level Displays the Access Level (A1-01).
Quick Start
A1-01= 2 *** Displays the parameter setting for A1-01.
Quick-Start
2 times A1-01= 4 Changes the setting to Advanced.
Advanced
Entry Accepted
Access Level Returns to the Access Level display.
Advanced Level
Setting the Control Mode (A1-02)

Parameter A1-02 is used to select one of the four control modes. This parameter is not initialized by the
initialize operation and it cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
A1-02 Control Method 0 to 3 --- 2 Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
Control Mode Settings

0 V/f Control V/f control without pulse generator (normal V/f control)
1 V/f w/PG Fdbk V/f control with pulse generator (V/f control using a PG Speed Control Card)
2 Open Loop Vector Vector control without pulse generator
(Vector control using the Inverter’s internal speed information)
3 Flux Vector Vector control with pulse generator
(Vector control using a PG Speed Control Card)
5-3
Control Mode Characteristics
Characteristic V/f Control V/f w/PG Fdbk Open Loop Vector Flux Vector
Basic control method Voltage/frequency Voltage/frequency Current vector con- Current vector con-
control (open loop) control with speed trol without PG trol with PG
compensation
Speed detector Not required Required Not required Required
(pulse generator) (pulse generator)
Optional Speed Not required 3G3FV-PPGA2 or Not required 3G3FV-PPGB2 or
Detectors 3G3FV-PPGD2 3G3FV-PPGX2
Speed control range 1:40 1:40 1:100 1:1,000
Starting torque 150%/3 Hz 150%/3 Hz 150%/1 Hz 150%/0 Hz
Speed control preci- ±2 to 3% ±0.03% ±0.2% ±0.02%
sion
Torque limit Not possible Not possible Possible Possible
Torque control Not possible Not possible Not possible Possible
Example applications • Multiple motors • Simple speed • Variable speed • Simple servo
feedback control drive applications drives
• Precision speed
control
• Torque control
Note Vector control has a greater starting torque and more precise speed control than V/f control, so
use of vector control is recommended whenever possible. Use V/f control in the following types of
applications:
When several motors are being operated

When special motors such as submersible motors or spindle motors are being used
(Situations in which auto-tuning cannot be used.)
When operation is being coordinated with an older inverter control system
5-1-2 Frequency Reference Settings from Control Circuit

Terminals
These settings are required when inputting analog voltage or current signals from the control circuit
terminals.
Frequency Reference Selection (b1-01)

Parameter b1-01 is used to select the reference source; it cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b1-01 Reference Source 0 to 4 --- 1 Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
5-4
Reference Source Settings
Setting Name Reference source
0 Operator Digital Operator
1 Terminals Control circuit terminals (analog inputs)
2 Serial Com Not used. (Do not set.)
3 Option PCB Optional Card (CompoBus/D Communications Card, SYSMAC BUS I/F Card,
Analog Command Card, or Digital Command Card)
4 EWS Not used. (Do not set.)
Note 1. The frequency reference is input from the control circuit terminals (external terminals), so set
b1-01 to 1.
Note 2. The source specified for the frequence reference is used as frequency reference 1 in multi-
stage control. If the frequence reference source is set to a control terminal, the frequence ref-
erence analog input from the control terminal will take priority and the frequency for d1-01 will
be ignored. (The frequency for d1-01 will be used, however, if operation is switched to local
mode using the operation mode selection key.)
Note 3. Regardless of the frequency source, the values set for frequency reference parameters 2 to 8
(d1-02 to d1-08) and the inching frequency reference parameter (d1-09) will be enabled.
Frequency Reference: Terminal 13 Voltage Input (H3-01)

The frequency reference (voltage) is valid when parameter b1-01 has been set to 1. Parameter H3-01 is
used to set the voltage range for the frequency reference (voltage) signal. This parameter cannot be
changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
H3-01 Term 13 Signal 0 or 1 --- 0 Basic or Advanced
Terminal 13 Signal Level Settings

0 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 10 VDC input
1 –10 to 10 VDC –10 to 10 VDC input
(A negative voltage is a command for rotation in the opposite direction.)
Frequency Reference: Terminal 14 Current Input (H3-08 and H3-09)

Terminal 14 must be set to “frequency reference” with parameter H3-09 in order to use terminal 14 as
the frequency reference terminal; the “frequency reference” setting is 1F. Neither H3-08 nor H3-09 can
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
H3-09 Terminal 14 Sel 1 to 1F --- 1F Advanced
After setting parameter H3-09, set terminal 14’s signal level with H3-08. The frequency reference (cur-
rent) is valid when parameter b1-01 has been set to 1.
5-5
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
H3-08 Term 14 Signal 0 to 2 --- 2 Advanced
2 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA input
Note When the terminal is being used as a voltage input terminal (setting 0 or 1), jumper J1 must be
disconnected on the control board. (See the following diagram.) The terminal’s input resistor will
be destroyed if the terminal is used for a voltage input with jumper J1 connected.
• When frequency references are being input simultaneously from both the voltage terminal 13 and the
current terminal 14, the final reference value will be the sum of the two references that are input.
• To switch the frequency reference input between the voltage terminal 13 and the current terminal 14,
set a value of 1F in any one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01 through H1-06). The voltage terminal 13
will be used when this multi-function input is OFF and the current terminal 14 will be used when this
multi-function input is ON.
• The following diagram shows the location of jumper J1 on a 200-V Class, 0.4-kW Unit.
Jumper wire
Control
circuit
terminals
Main circuit
terminals
Frequency Reference: Terminal 16 Voltage Input (H3-04 and H3-05)

This function is useful when switching between two analog inputs. When using this multi-function input
(terminal 16) as the frequency reference terminal, first set the multi-function analog input’s function to
“Auxiliary Reference” by setting parameter H3-05 to “0.” (Neither H3-04 nor H3-05 can be changed dur-
ing operation.)
5-6
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
H3-05 Terminal 16 Sel 0 to 1F --- 1F Basic or Advanced
After setting H3-05 to “0,” set any one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01 through H1-06) to a value of 3
(Multi-step Reference 1). When a multi-function analog input has been set to “Auxiliary Reference,” it is
treated as “frequency reference 2” during multi-step operation, so it can’t be used unless Multi-step Ref-
erence 1 has been set.
Set terminal 16’s signal level with H3-04.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting

Adjusting the Analog Inputs

There are three parameters used to adjust the analog inputs: the gain and bias (set separately for each
input) and the filter time constant (a single value for all of the inputs).
The gain and bias can be adjusted separately for each analog input (terminals 13, 14, and 16).
• Gain: Set the frequency corresponding to a 10 V (20 mA) input as a percentage of the maximum.
(The maximum frequency set in E1-04 is 100%.)
• Bias: Set the frequency corresponding to a 0 V (4 mA) input as a percentage of the maximum.
(The maximum frequency set in E1-04 is 100%.)
Set terminal 13’s gain and bias with H3-02 and H3-03. (Both settings can be changed during operation.)
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
H3-02 Terminal 13 Gain 0.0 to % 100.0 Basic or Advanced
1,000.0
H3-03 Terminal 13 Bias –100.0 % 0.0 Basic or Advanced
to 100.0
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
H3-10 Terminal 14 Gain 0.0 to % 100.0 Advanced
1,000.0
H3-11 Terminal 14 Bias –100.0 % 0.0 Advanced
to 100.0
5-7
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
H3-06 Terminal 16 Gain 0.0 to % 100.0 Basic or Advanced
1,000.0
H3-07 Terminal 16 Bias –100.0 % 0.0 Basic or Advanced
to 100.0
Gain and Bias Chart
Frequency
reference
Max.frequency Gain
100
Max.frequency Bias
100
0V 10 V
(4 mA) (20 mA)
Note Use the current values shown in parentheses when current input has been selected.
The first-order lag’s digital filter can be set for all three analog inputs (frequency reference (voltage),
frequency reference (current), and multi-function analog input) with parameter H3-12. This setting is
effective when there are sudden changes or noise in the analog input signal. Responsiveness de-
creases as the setting increases.
The filter time constant cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
H3-12 Filter Avg Time 0.00 to s 0.00 Advanced
2.00
5-1-3 Frequency Reference Settings from Digital Operator
Selecting the Frequency Reference Source (b1-01)

Parameter b1-01 is used to select the reference source; it cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b1-01 Reference Source 0 to 4 --- 1 Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
5-8
Reference Source Settings
Setting Name Reference source

1 Terminals Control circuit terminals (analog inputs)
3 Option PCB Optional Card (CompoBus/D Communications Card, SYSMAC BUS I/F Card,
Analog Command Card, or Digital Command Card)
Note 1. The frequency reference is input from the Digital Operator, so set b1-01 to 0.
Note 2. The source specified for the frequence reference is used as one of the frequency references
in multistage control. If the frequence reference source is set to the Digital Operator, the fre-
quence reference for d1-01 will be used and analog frequency reference (voltage/current)
input from the control terminal will be ignored. (The frequency for d1-01 will also be used if
operation is switched to local mode using the operation mode selection key.)
Note 3. Regardless of the frequency source, the values set for frequency reference parameters 2 to 8
(d1-02 to d1-08) and the inching frequency reference parameter (d1-09) will be enabled.
Setting the Frequency Reference Units (o1-03)

Parameter o1-03 is used to set the units for setting and displaying the frequency reference; it cannot be
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
o1-03 Display Scaling 0 to --- 0 Basic or Advanced
39,999
Display Unit Settings
Setting Function
0 0.01 Hz units
1 0.01 % units (The maximum frequency is 100%.)
2 to 39 r/min units (Set the number of poles)
40 to 39,999 Sets a particular value for the maximum frequency.

This number is the 4-digit setting without the decimal point.

This number indicates the location of the decimal point. (How many digits
there are after the decimal point.)
For example, set o1-03 to “12000” when you want to display “200.0” for the maximum
frequency.
Note When the 40 to 39,999 range is used, any scale can be set for the reference frequency.
For example, the frequency reference can be set or displayed in units such as mm/s or m/min to
coincide with a machine’s linear operating speed.
5-9
Presetting Frequency Reference Values (d1-01 through d1-09)

Parameters d1-01 through d1-08 contain preset reference values 1 through 8. The setting range for all
of the values is 0 to the max. frequency. These 8 parameters can be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
d1-01 Reference 1 0 to max. o1-03 6.00 Hz Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
d1-05 Reference 5 0 to max. o1-03 0.00 Hz Basic or Advanced
Note 1. The units for these values are set in o1-03.

Note 2. The frequency reference’s initial value and set value will change when o1-03 is changed.
For example, if preset reference 1 is set to 6.00 Hz and o1-03 is changed to 1 (0.01% units),
the setting for preset reference 1 will become 10.00%.
Note 3. When using preset references 2 through 8, be sure to set Multi-Step Reference 1, 2, and 3 in
the multi-function inputs (H1-01 through H1-06) as required.
When using the Jog function, set the jog frequency reference in parameter d1-09. The setting range for
this value is 0 to the max. frequency. This parameter can be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
d1-09 Jog Reference 0 to max. o1-03 6.00 Hz Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
Note 1. When performing the Jog operation from an external terminal, set the multi-function inputs
(H1-01 through H1-06) to “Jog Frequency Reference,” “Forward Jog,” or “Reverse Jog” as
required.
Note 2. The multi-function input setting is unnecessary when performing the Jog operation from the
Operator.
5-1-4 Run Source and Responsiveness Settings
Selecting the Run Source (b1-02)

Parameter b1-02 is used to select the source of the run command; it cannot be changed during opera-
tion. When a control circuit terminal (external terminal) is set, the Unit operates with 2-wire forward/stop
and reverse/stop control. (When the Unit has been initialized for a 3-wire control or a multi-function input
is set to “0” (3-wire control), the Unit operates with 3-wire run, stop and forward/reverse control.)
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b1-02 Run Source 0 to 4 --- 1 Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
5-10
Run Source Settings
Setting Name Run source
1 Terminals Control circuit terminals (external terminals)
3 Option PCB Optional Card (CompoBus/D Communications Card or SYSMAC BUS I/F
Card)
Setting Control Input Responsiveness (b1-06)

Parameter b1-06 is used to set the responsiveness of the control inputs (forward/reverse and multi-
function inputs); it cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b1-06 Cntl Input Scans 0 or 1 --- 1 Advanced
Settings
0 2mS – 2 Scans Two scans every 2 ms (Use when connecting transistor outputs.)
1 5mS – 2 Scans Two scans every 5 ms (Use when connecting contact outputs or switches.)
Note Set the responsiveness to match the type of control inputs being used. Use a setting of “1” if there
is even one contact input.
5-1-5 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Settings
Acceleration/Deceleration Time Units (C1-10)

Parameter C1-10 is used to set the units for the acceleration and deceleration time settings in C1-01
through C1-08. Setting C1-10 to “0” allows the acceleration and deceleration times to be set very pre-
cisely, but reduces the maximum time setting from 6000.0 s to 600.00 s.
This parameter cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
C1-10 Acc/Dec Units 0 or 1 --- 1 Advanced
Settings
0 0.01 Seconds Sets the acceleration/deceleration time units to 0.01 seconds.
1 0.1 Seconds Sets the acceleration/deceleration time units to 0.1 seconds.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time Settings (C1-01 through C1-08)

Parameters C1-01 through C1-08 set the acceleration and deceleration times individually.
5-11
The acceleration time is the time required to go from 0% to 100% of the maximum frequency and the
deceleration time is the time required to go from 100% to 0% of the maximum frequency.
Four acceleration times and four deceleration times can be set. When using acceleration/deceleration
times 2 through 4, set “Multi-Accel/Decel 1” or “Multi-Accel/Decel 2” in the multi-function inputs (H1-01
through H1-06).
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
number range (See
(S setting V/f V/f with Open Loop Flux
note 1.) Control PG Vector Vector
C1-01 Acceleration time 1 0.0 to 6000.0 s 10.0 Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
C1-02 Deceleration time 1 0.0 to 6000.0 s 10.0 Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
C1-03 Acceleration time 2 0.0 to 6000.0 s 10.0 Basic or Advanced
C1-04 Deceleration time 2 0.0 to 6000.0 s 10.0 Basic or Advanced
C1-05 Acceleration time 3 0.0 to 6000.0 s 10.0 Advanced
C1-06 Deceleration time 3 0.0 to 6000.0 s 10.0 Advanced
C1-07 Acceleration time 4 0.0 to 6000.0 s 10.0 Advanced
C1-08 Deceleration time 4 0.0 to 6000.0 s 10.0 Advanced
Note 1. The setting range for the acceleration/deceleration times depends upon the setting in C1-10
(Acc/Dec Units). The table shows the setting range when the factory setting is used for C1-10.
If C1-10 is set to “0,” the setting range will be 0.00 to 600.00 s.
Note 2. Parameters C1-01 through C1-04 can be changed during operation, but C1-05 through
C1-08 cannot.
Emergency Stop Time Setting (C1-09)

Parameter C1-09 sets the deceleration time that will be used when an emergency stop signal is input or
a fault is detected; it can be changed during operation. The deceleration time is the time required to go
from 100% to 0% of the maximum frequency.
When using an emergency stop input, set a multi-function input (H1-01 through H1-06) to “Fast-Stop.”
The emergency stop time is effective for the following faults. Set a stopping method for each.
• Inverter overheating (OH) pre-alarm: Set in L8-03.
• Pulse generator faults: Set in F1-02 through F1-04.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
number range (See
note.) Control PG Vector Vector
C1-09 Fast Stop Time 0.0 to 6000.0 s 10.0 Basic or Advanced
Note The setting range for the emergency stop deceleration time depends upon the setting in C1-10
(Acc/Dec Units). The table shows the setting range when the factory setting is used for C1-10. If
C1-10 is set to “0,” the setting range will be 0.00 to 600.00 s.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time Switching Frequency (C1-11)

When the acceleration/deceleration time switching frequency is set in C1-11, the acceleration and de-
celeration times will be changed automatically as the frequency passes the set level. This parameter
cannot be changed during operation.
5-12
The “Multi-Accel/Decel 1” and “Multi-Accel/Decel 2” inputs will have priority when “Multi-Accel/Decel 1”
and “Multi-Accel/Decel 2” have been set in the multi-function inputs (H1-01 through H1-06).
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
number range (See
C1-11 Acc/Dec SW Freq 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0 Advanced
Output
frequency
Acc/Dec Time Switching Frequency

(C1-11)
Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1 (C1-01 and C1-02) are used when the output frequency ≥ C1-11
Acceleration/Deceleration Time 4 (C1-07 and C1-08) are used when the output frequency < C1-11
5-1-6 Disabling Reverse Operation (b1-04)

Parameter b1-04 is used to enable and disable reverse command inputs. This parameter can be set to
“1” to disable reverse operation when necessary. This parameter cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b1-04 Reverse Oper 0 or 1 --- 0 Basic or Advanced
Settings

0 Reverse Enabled Allows reverse operation.
1 Reverse Disabled Prohibits reverse operation.
5-1-7 Selecting the Stopping Method (b1-03)

Parameter b1-03 sets the stopping method used when a stop command is input. This parameter cannot
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b1-03 Stopping Method 0 to 3 --- 0 Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
5-13
Settings
Only settings 0 and 1 can be used with Flux Vector control.
0 Ramp to Stop Deceleration stop
1 Coast to Stop Free-run stop
2 DC Injection to Stop DC braking stop: Stops faster than free-run, without regenerative operation.
3 Coast w/Timer Free-run stop with timer: Run commands are ignored during deceleration
time.
The following diagrams show the operation of each stopping method. The “deceleration time” in the
diagrams refers to the selected deceleration time. (Deceleration times 1 through 4 are set with
C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, and C1-08.)
w Deceleration Stop (b1-03 = 0)
Run command Note 1. Decelerates to a stop at a rate set with the
selected deceleration time.
Output frequency Note 2. If the run command turns back ON during
Deceleration time deceleration, deceleration will be stopped
DC braking as soon as the run command turns ON and
Excitation level (b2-01) the motor will be accelerated at the speci-
fied frequency.
DC braking time at stop (b2-04)
w Free-run Stop (b1-03 = 1)

Run command
Output frequency The inverter output is shut OFF

when the stop command is input
and the run command goes OFF.
Note 1. After the stop command is input, run commands are ignored until the minimum base-
block time (L2-03) has elapsed.
Note 2. Do not input the run command again until the motor has slowed down sufficiently. If
the run command turns ON, the motor will rapidly decelerate to a low frequency, and
a main circuit overvoltage (OV) or overcurrent (OC) will be detected. If necessary,
use a timed free-run stop and set the deceleration time to a value large enough to
ensure sufficient deceleration (restarting is not possible during the deceleration
time). Use one of the multi-function inputs 1 to 6 (H1-01 to H1-06) for a speed search,
find the speed during the free-run stop, and ensure that acceleration is smooth.
5-14
w DC Braking Stop (b1-03 = 2)
(DC Injection)
Note: After the stop command is input and the minimum baseblock
time (L2-03) has elapsed, DC braking is applied and the motor
stopped. The DC braking time depends upon the output fre-
Run command quency when the stop command is input and the “DC braking
time at stop” setting in b2-04, as shown in the graph below.
Output frequency DC braking
DC braking time
Min. baseblock time (L2-03)

DC braking time
Note: Lengthen the min. baseblock time (L2-03) when an over-

current (OC) occurs during stopping. When the power to Output frequency
an induction motor is turned off, the counter-electromotive when the stop
force generated by the residual magnetic field in the mo- command is input
(Max. frequency)
tor can cause an overcurrent to be detected when DC
braking is applied.
w Free-run Stop with Timer (b1-03 = 3)
Note: After the stop command is input, run commands

are ignored until the time t0 has elapsed. The time
t0 depends upon the output frequency when the
Run command stop command is input and the deceleration time.
Time
Output frequency Deceleration

time
Output frequency
when the stop
command is input
(Max. frequency)
5-1-8 Multi-function Input Settings (H1-01 through H1-06)

Parameters H1-01 through H1-06 set the multi-function inputs in accordance with the application. Thes-
e 6 parameters cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
number range setting (S
(See V/f V/f with Open Loop Flux
H1-01 Terminal 3 Sel 0 to 77 --- 24 Basic or Advanced
H1-03 Terminal 5 Sel 0 to 77 --- 3 (0) Basic or Advanced
Note The default settings in parentheses are the default values when the Unit is initialized for 3-wire
sequence control with A1-03.
5-15
The parameter settings which are used most often are explained below. Refer to Chapter 6 Advanced
Operation or the parameter tables for details on the other settings.
Setting “0”: 3-wire Control (forward/reverse command)
Setting “3” to “6”: Multi-step References 1 through 3 and Jog Reference
Setting “7” and “1A”: Multi-Accel/Decel Time Selector 1 and 2
Setting “15”, “17”: Fast-Stop (emergency stop)
Setting “12” and “13”: Forward and Reverse Jog Commands
Setting “1F”: Terminal 13/14 Switch
Setting “0”: 3-wire Control (Forward/Reverse Command)

When a value of “0” is set for any one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01 through H1-06), 3-wire control
is established and the multi-function input terminal for which “0” was set becomes the forward/reverse
command terminal. When the Unit is initialized for 3-wire sequence control with A1-03 (a setting of
3330), multi-function input 3 (terminal 5) becomes the input terminal for the forward/reverse command.
Wiring Example
Run switch
Stop switch (NO)
(NC)
Run command
Stop command
Forward/Reverse command
(Multi-function input)
11
Timing Chart
50 ms min.
Run command ON/OFF (Either is possible.)
Stop command OFF (Stop)
Forward/Reverse command OFF (Forward) ON (Reverse)
Motor speed
Stop Forward Reverse Stop Forward
5-16
Setting “3” to “6”: Multi-step References 1 through 3 and Jog Reference
Eight frequency references and one jog reference can be used in the 3G3FV. Set “Multi-step Reference
1, 2, and 3” and “Jog Frequency Reference” in multi-function inputs, and change the status of these
inputs to switch between these 9 frequency references.
Setting Function
3 Multi-step Reference 1 (Also used for main-speed/auxiliary-speed switching when “Auxiliary
Reference” is set in multi-function analog input H3-05.)
4 Multi-step Reference 2
5 Multi-step Reference 3
6 Jog frequency reference (This setting has higher priority than the multi-step references.)
The following table shows which frequency is selected by each possible combination of multi-step and
jog reference settings.
Multi-step Reference Jog
g Selected frequency
q y
1 2 3 Reference
R f
OFF OFF OFF OFF Reference 1: d1-01 (main-speed frequency, see note 1)
ON OFF OFF OFF Reference 2: d1-02 (auxiliary-speed frequency, see note 2)
OFF ON OFF OFF Reference 3: d1-03
ON ON OFF OFF Reference 4: d1-04
OFF OFF ON OFF Reference 5: d1-05
ON OFF ON OFF Reference 6: d1-06
OFF ON ON OFF Reference 7: d1-07
ON ON ON OFF Reference 8: d1-08
--- --- --- ON Jog reference: d1-09
Note 1. Reference 1 is selected when b1-01 is set to “0” (Operator) and the analog input (terminal 13
or 14) is selected when b1-01 is set to “1” (Terminals).
Note 2. The analog input from terminal 16 is selected when H3-05 is set to “0” (Auxiliary Reference)
and reference 2 is selected for any other H3-05 setting.
5-17
Timing Chart
Reference 8
Reference 7
Reference 6
Reference 5
Reference 4
Reference 3
Reference 2
Auxiliary-speed Jog Reference
Reference 1
Main-speed
Run/Stop
Multi-step Reference 1
Jog Reference
Note The jog reference setting has priority over the multi-step reference settings.
Setting “7” and “1A”: Multi-Accel/Decel Time Selector 1 and 2

Four acceleration times and four deceleration times can be set in the 3G3FV. Set “Multi-Accel/Decel 1
and 2” in multi-function inputs and change the status of these inputs to switch between these accelera-
tion and deceleration times.
Setting Function
7 Multi-Accel/Decel 1 (multi-accel/decel time selector 1)
1A Multi-Accel/Decel 2 (multi-accel/decel time selector 2)
The following table shows which acceleration and deceleration times are selected by each possible
combination of acceleration/deceleration time selectors 1 and 2.
Multi-accel/decel time selector Acceleration time Deceleration time
1 2
OFF or not set OFF or not set Acceleration time 1 (C1-01) Deceleration time 1 (C1-02)
ON OFF or not set Acceleration time 2 (C1-03) Deceleration time 2 (C1-04)
OFF or not set ON Acceleration time 3 (C1-05) Deceleration time 3 (C1-06)
ON ON Acceleration time 4 (C1-07) Deceleration time 4 (C1-08)
Note The acceleration and deceleration times can be changed while the Inverter is operating.
5-18
Setting “15”, “17”: Fast-Stop (Emergency Stop)
When the multi-function input that is set to “Fast-Stop” is turned ON (or OFF for an N.C. contact), the
motor will decelerate to a stop at the rate set with the deceleration time in C1-09 (fast-stop time). To clear
the emergency stop, turn the run command OFF, turn the fast-stop input OFF (or ON for an N.C. con-
tact), and then turn the run command ON again.
Setting “12” and “13”: Forward and Reverse Jog Commands

The jog function can operate in forward or reverse. The forward jog and reverse jog commands have
priority over other frequency reference commands.
Setting Function
12 Forward Jog command: Runs forward at the jog reference frequency (d1-09).
13 Reverse Jog command: Runs in reverse at the jog reference frequency (d1-09).
The inverter will stop operation with the stopping method is set in b1-03 if the forward jog and reverse jog
commands are both on for more than 500 ms. Turn ON either the forward jog command or the reverse
jog command, not both.
These jog commands can operate the Inverter independently. It isn’t necessary for a forward/reverse
command to be input.
Setting “1F”: Terminal 13/14 Switch

When this function is set in a multi-function input, that input terminal can be used to switch between
terminal 13 and terminal 14.
OFF The analog input from terminal 13 is used as the main-speed frequency reference.
ON The analog input from terminal 14 is used as the main-speed frequency reference.
When terminal 14 is used as the frequency reference, set “1F” (frequency reference) in parameter
H3-09; this parameter is the function selector for frequency reference (current) terminal 14. A setting
fault (OPE03) will occur if this function is selected without setting “1F” in H3-09.
When H3-09 is set to “1F” (frequency reference) but none of the multi-function inputs is set to “1F” (ter-
minal 13/14 switch), the sum of the inputs from terminals 13 and 14 will be used as the main-speed
frequency reference.
5-19
Open-loop vector control is vector control without pulse generator input. Auto-tuning is
the only setting for basic operation with open-loop vector control.
When the voltage limit restricted by the input power supply is reached near the rated
motor speed, vector control cannot be established and speed accuracy will be reduced.
To operate with the greatest speed precision near the rated speed, either select a motor
with a rated voltage that is at least 20 V below the Inverter’s input power supply voltage
(40 V below for a 400-V class Inverter) and use a special vector control motor is possible,
or set an output voltage restriction in parameter C3-06 (see 6-1-5 Operation for Output
Voltage Saturation for details). (If an output voltage restriction is set in C3-06, the Invert-
er’s output current will be reduced by about 10%, so be sure to use an Inverter with suffi-
cient capacity.)
5-2-1 Auto-tuning Procedure

Inverter Input Voltage Setting (E1-01)
Set the Inverter’s input voltage (E1-01) to match the power supply voltage; it cannot be changed during
operation. This setting is used as the reference value for functions such as the protection functions.
Parameter Display
p y Setting
number name range setting V/f V/f with Open Loop Flux
E1-01 Input Voltage 155 to 255 VAC 200 Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
(310 to 510) (400)
Note The voltage settings shown in parentheses are the values for the 400-V class.
Motor Selection (E1-02)

Set the motor selection (E1-02) to the type of motor to be used. This setting is used as a basis for motor
protection
Parameter Display
p y Setting
E1-02 Motor Selec- 0 to 2 --- 0 Quick-start
tion
Setting
Setting Function
0 Standard fan-cooled motor (general-purpose motor)
1 Standard blower motor (inverter-exclusive motor)
2 Special motor (special vector control motor)
Precautions Before Auto-tuning

5-20
mentally different.
Required Parameter Settings

Enter auto-tuning mode and make the following parameter settings:
Rated Voltage: Set the rated voltage (VAC) shown on the motor’s nameplate.
Rated Current: Set the rated current (A) shown on the motor’s nameplate.
Rated Frequency: Set the rated frequency (Hz) shown on the motor’s nameplate.
Rated Speed: Set the rated speed (r/min) shown on the motor’s nameplate.
Number of poles: Set the number of poles.
Motor Selection: Select motor 1.
For two-motor switching control, select motor 1 or motor 2.
The following message will appear when the parameters have been set:
Tuning Ready ?
Press RUN key
At this point, it is still possible to change the parameter settings by pressing the Increment and Decre-
ment Keys to display the desired parameter.
Press the Menu Key to cancel auto-tuning. (The operation mode display will appear.)
Performing Auto-tuning
Auto-tuning will start if the Run Key is pressed when the “Tuning Ready?” message is being displayed.
The motor will operate during auto-tuning, so be sure that it is safe for the motor to operate before press-
ing the Run Key.
The following message will be displayed when the Run Key is pressed:
Tune Proceeding
HZ A
Auto-tuning takes up to 1.5 minutes. The message “Tune Successful” will be displayed when auto-tun-
ing is completed. If auto-tuning has been completed successfully, press the Menu Key and proceed to
the next operation. If a fault occurred during auto-tuning, refer to 5-2-2 Auto-tuning Faults for details on
correcting the cause of the fault and perform auto-tuning again.
Note To cancel auto-tuning after it has been started, press the Stop Key to stop the operation and then
press the Menu Key to return to Drive Mode.
5-2-2 Auto-tuning Faults

One of the fault messages in the following table will be displayed if a fault occurs during auto-tuning. In
this case, determine the cause of the fault, correct it, and perform auto-tuning again.
5-21
The fault display can be cleared by pressing the Menu Key. The motor parameters will revert to their
default settings if a fault occurs. Set these parameters again when auto-tuning.
Fault display Probable cause and remedy

Data Invalid There was a fault in the data set during auto-tuning.
(Motor setting data fault) • There was a fault in the relationship between the rated frequency,
rated speed, and number of poles.
→ Change the settings to conform to the following formula:
Rated speed < 120 × Motor frequency/Number of poles
ALARM: Over Load The effective load factor exceeded 20% during auto-tuning.
(Excessive load during auto-tuning) • A load is connected to the motor axis. → Remove the load.
• There was a setting fault during auto-tuning.
→ Check the rated current setting. Change if necessary.
• There is a motor bearing problem.
→ Turn the Inverter off and rotate the motor by hand.
Replace the motor if it doesn’t turn smoothly.
Motor speed The torque reference value exceeded 100% during auto-tuning.
(Motor speed fault) • There is a broken/disconnected motor power wire.
→ Check and replace wiring components if necessary.
• A load is connected to the motor axis. → Remove the load.
Accelerate The motor doesn’t accelerate within the prescribed time.
(Motor acceleration fault) • The torque limit function is operating.
→ Initialize the torque limit parameters (L7-01 to L7-04).
• The acceleration time is too short.
→ Increase acceleration time 1 (C1-01).
Rated Slip The rated slip setting can’t be tuned within the prescribed time.
(Rated slip fault) • A load is connected to the motor axis. → Remove the load.
Saturation-1 The core-saturation coefficients can’t be tuned within the prescribed
(Core-saturation coefficient 1 fault) time.
• The rated current setting
g isn’t correct.
Saturation-2 → Check and change the setting if necessary.
(Core-saturation coefficient 2 fault) • There is a broken/disconnected motor power wire.
Resistance The motor terminal resistance or no-load current setting can’t be
(Motor wire resistance fault) tuned within the prescribed time.
g isn’t correct.
No-load Current → Check and change the setting if necessary.
(Motor no-load current fault) • There is a broken/disconnected motor power wire.
Minor Fault • A minor fault has occurred in the Inverter (warning or alarm detected).
(Minor fault) → Refer to Chapter 8 Maintenance Operations for appropriate ac-
tions.
V/f Over Setting • The torque reference exceeded 100% and the non-load current ex-
(V/f setting too high) ceeded 70% of the rated motor current during auto-tuning.
→ The settings are incorrect for the rated voltage or rated frequency.
Correct the settings.
→ The motor is connected to a load. Disconnect the load.
5-22
5-3 V/f Control
With V/f control, the user must set the Inverter’s input voltage, motor selection, rated
current, and V/f pattern.
5-3-1 Setting the Motor Parameters

Parameter Display
p y Setting
(310 to 510) (400)
Motor Selection and Rated Current Setting (E1-02 and E2-01)

Set the type of motor being used with the motor selection parameter (E1-02). This setting is a reference
for the protection functions. This parameter cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E1-02 Motor Selection 0 to 2 --- 0 Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
E1-02 Settings
Setting Function
1 Standard blower-cooled motor (inverter-exclusive motor)
Set parameter (E2-01) to rated current (A) shown on the motor’s nameplate. This parameter cannot be
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
number range1 setting2 V/f V/f with Open Loop Flux
E2-01 Motor Rated FLA 10 to 200% A (Note 2) Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
Note 1. The setting range is 10 to 200% of the Inverter’s rated output current.
Note 2. The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter.
5-23
5-3-2 V/f Pattern Selection (E1-03)

Set the V/f pattern with parameter E1-03. This parameter cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E1-03 V/f Selection 0 to F --- F Quick-start, Basic, Not applicable.
or Advanced
The V/f pattern settings can be divided into two categories: the 15 preset patterns (settings 0 through E)
and custom user-set patterns (setting F). The factory default setting for E1-03 is “F” (user-defined V/f
pattern), but the contents of this setting are actually the same as setting “1.”
Selecting a Preset V/f Pattern (Settings “0” through “E”)

Refer to the following table when selecting one of the 15 preset patterns.
Characteristics Applications Setting Specifications
General-purpose These patterns are for general-purpose 0 50 Hz
applications
applications.
1 60 Hz
Use these patterns when there is a
roughly proportional relationship 2 60 Hz, Voltage saturation at 50 Hz
between the rotational speed and load,
load
3 72 Hz, Voltage saturation at 60 Hz
such as in straight-line conveyors.
Variable torque
q Use these p patterns when there is a 4 50 Hz, cubic
quadratic
d i or cubic
bi relationship
l i hi between
b 5 50 Hz, quadratic
the rotational speed and load,
load such as
in fans or pumps. 6 60 Hz, cubic
7 60 Hz, quadratic
High
g starting
g (
(Normallyy it isn’t necessaryy to use these 8 50 Hz, low starting torque
torque patterns because
b starting
i torque is
i 9 50 Hz, high starting torque
ensured by automatic torque boost
functions.) A 60 Hz, low starting torque
b 60 Hz, high starting torque
High-speed These patterns are for applications that C 90 Hz, Voltage saturation at 60 Hz
operation must rotate at frequencies greater than
d 120 Hz, Voltage saturation at 60 Hz
60 Hz. A fixed voltage is applied at
frequencies greater than 60 Hz. E 180 Hz, Voltage saturation at 60 Hz
Note 1. Select a high starting torque V/f pattern only in the following cases:
The wiring distance between the Inverter and motor is relatively large (greater than 150 m).
A large torque is required at startup (such as heavy axis loads).
An AC or DC reactor is connected to the Inverter’s input or output.
Note 2. The parameter settings for E1-04 through E1-10 will be changed automatically when one of
these patterns is selected. There are three possible settings for these parameters depending
on the Inverter’s capacity: a 0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f pattern, a 2.2 to 45 kW V/f pattern, and a 55 kW
V/f pattern.
Note 3. The characteristics for these patterns are shown in the diagrams on the following pages. The
voltages in these graphs are for 200-V class Inverters. Double the voltage for 400-V class
Inverters.
5-24
V/f Patterns: 0.4 to 1.5 kW
w General-purpose Characteristics (Settings 0 to 3)
Setting: 0 Setting: 1 Setting: 2 Setting: 3
15 15 15 15
9 9 9 9
w Variable Torque Characteristics (Settings 4 to 7)
9 9
8 8
30 30
w High Starting Torque Characteristics (Settings 8 to b)
Setting: 8 Setting: 9 Setting: A Setting: b
24 24
19 19
13 15
11 11
w High-speed Operation (Settings C to E)
Setting: C Setting: d Setting: E
15 15 15
9 9 9
Note The voltages above are for 200-V class Inverters. Double the voltages for 400-V class Inverters.
5-25
V/f Patterns: 2.2 to 45 kW
14 14 14 14
7 7 7 7
7 7
6 6
30 30
23 23
18 18
11 13
9
14 14 14
7 7 7
5-26
V/f Patterns: 55 to 300 kW
30 30
5-27
Setting a User-defined V/f Pattern (Setting “F”)

Parameters E1-04 through E1-10 can be set by the user when E1-03 has been set to “F.” These param-
eters are read-only when E1-03 isn’t set to “F.” Parameters E1-04 through E1-10 cannot be changed
during operation.
When making the V/f characteristics a straight line, set the same value in E1-07 (middle output frequen-
cy) and E1-09 (minimum output frequency). In this case, parameter E1-08 (middle output voltage) will
be ignored.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
g Units Default Valid access levels*1
E1-04 Max Frequency 40.0 to 400.0 Hz 60.0 Q Q Q Q
E1-05 Max Voltage 0.0 to 255.0*2 VAC 200.0*2 Q Q Q Q
E1-06 Base Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 60.0 Q Q Q Q
E1-07 Mid Frequency A 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 3.0 Q Q A ---
E1-08 Mid Voltage A 0.0 to 255.0*2 VAC 15.0*2,3 Q Q A ---
E1-09 Min Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 1.5 Q Q Q A
E1-10 Min Voltage 0.0 to 255.0*2 VAC 9.0*2,3 Q Q A ---
Note 1. Q: Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
A: Advanced only
---: Not applicable.
Note 2. These voltages are for the 200-V class; Double the voltage for 400-V class Inverters.
Note 3. The default setting depends on the Inverter’s capacity. The default settings shown in the table
are for 200-V class, 0.4 to 1.5 kW Inverters. Refer to the graphs for “Setting: 1” on pages 5-26
and 5-27 for the default settings in 2.2 to 45 kW and 55 to 300 kW Inverters.
Note 4. The default settings for E1-07 through E1-10 depend on the control mode. The default set-
tings shown in the table are for V/f control.
Note 5. The four frequency settings must satisfy the following formula:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
For flux vector control, make the settings as follows:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-09 (FMIN)
User-defined V/f Pattern
Output voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
5-28
With flux vector control (vector control with PG), make the settings for the PG Speed
Control Card, select the zero-speed operation method, set the various auto-tuning pa-
rameters, and then adjust the gain of the speed control loop.
To ensure high-precision torque/speed control, use a motor specifically designed for
vector control with an integrated PG. Always use an Inverter with twice the motor’s ca-
pacity when a large load (50% or more of the rated current) is applied while in zero-
speed, such as with a vertical-axis load.
When setting up a separate PG (encoder), connect it directly to the motor axis. If the PG
is connected to the motor via gearing or belts, responses can be delayed by backlash or
torsion; the delayed responses can generate vibration and make control impossible.
5-4-1 PG Speed Control Card Settings
Available PG Speed Control Cards

There are 4 types of PG Speed Control Cards, but only 2 types can be used with vector control.
3G3FV-PPGB2: Phase-A/Phase-B pulse inputs, inputs for open collector
3G3FV-PPGX2: Phase-A/Phase-B/Phase-Z pulse inputs, line driver inputs
Select the Card according to the application and install it in the Inverter as described in 2-2-6 Installing
and Wiring PG Speed Control Cards.
Setting the PG Pulse Number (F1-01)

Set the PG (pulse generator or encoder) pulse number in pulses/revolution. Set the number of phase A
or phase B pulses in one motor revolution. This parameter cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
g Units Default Valid access levels*
F1-01 PG Pulses/Rev 0 to 60,000 p/r 1,000 --- Q --- Q
Note Q: Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced

Setting the PG Rotation Direction (F1-05)

This parameter is used to coordinate the PG’s rotation direction with the motor’s rotation direction; it
cannot be changed during operation.
Generally, phase A leads when the PG rotates in the clockwise direction (looking from the input axis).
When a forward command is input to the inverter, the motor rotates in the counterclockwise direction
(looking from the output axis). (These directions may be reversed in PG-integrated motors or other mo-
tors.)
5-29
Set whether phase A or phase B leads when the motor operates in the forward direction.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
F1-05 PG Rotation Sel 0 or 1 --- 0 --- B --- B
Note B: Basic or Advanced

PG Rotation Settings
Setting Function
0 Phase A leads with forward command. (Phase B leads with reverse command.)
1 Phase B leads with forward command. (Phase A leads with reverse command.)
Inverter Motor PG (encoder) Forward rotation in a typical motor:
The motor output axis

rotates in the counter-
clockwise direction with a
Pulse output forward inverter command.
[Setting: 0]
Phase A Phase A leading in a typical PG:
Phase B Phase A leads when the
input axis rotates clockwise.
[Setting: 1]
Phase A
Phase A
Phase B
Phase B
Setting the PG Pulse Output Monitor Division Ratio (F1-06)

This parameter is effective only when a 3G3FV-PPB2 is used; it sets the division ratio used when the
pulse monitor output is connected to a pulse input device. This parameter cannot be changed during
operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
F1-06 PG Output Ratio 001 to 032, --- 1 --- B --- B
101 to 132

The first digit in the setting (0 or 1) is n and the second two digits (01 to 32) are m. The division ratio is
calculated from n and m with the following equation:
F1 - 06 =
(1 ) n)
m Division ratio + m
n
The possible division ratio settings: 1/32 x F1-06x 1
5-30
Setting and Adjusting the Fault Detection Functions

PG Disconnection Stopping Method (F1-02)
This parameter sets the stopping method that is used when the signal from the PG is lost.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
F1-02 PG Fdbk Loss Sel 0 to 3 --- 1 --- B --- B
Settings
0 Ramp to Stop Deceleration stop using deceleration time 1 (C1-02).
2 Fast Stop Emergency stop using the fast-stop time (C1-09).
3 Alarm Only Continue operation (This setting can’t be made with flux vector control.)
PG Disconnection Detection Time (F1-14)

A PG disconnection will be detected if a disconnection status lasts for the following time or longer.
Note The motor speed will not be controlled while the PG is disconnected. Set this time as short as
possible in any application where safety cannot be ensured.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
F1-14 PGO Detect Time 0.0 to 10.0 Sec 2.0 X A X A
Overspeed Settings (F1-03, F1-08, and F1-09)

Overspeed refers to an excessive motor speed. These parameters set the conditions for an overspeed
fault and the stopping method that is used when an overspeed fault occurs; they cannot be changed
during operation.
Parameter F1-03 sets the stopping method that is used when an overspeed fault occurs.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
F1-03 PG Overspeed Sel 0 to 3 --- 1 --- B --- B
Settings
3 Alarm Only Continue operation (This setting can’t be made with flux vector control.)
5-31
Parameter F1-08 sets the overspeed detection level as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
Parameter F1-09 sets the length of time that the motor speed must exceed the overspeed detection
level in order to generate an overspeed fault.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
F1-08 PG Overspd Level 0 to 120 % 115 --- A --- A
F1-09 PG Overspd Time 0.0 to 2.0 s 0.0 --- A --- A
Note A: Advanced
PG Speed Deviation Settings (F1-04, F1-10, and F1-11)

PG speed deviation refers to the difference between the actual motor speed and the reference com-
mand speed. These parameters set the conditions for a PG speed deviation fault and the stopping
method that is used when a PG speed deviation fault occurs; they cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter F1-04 sets the conditions for detecting a PG speed deviation fault and the stopping method
to be used when a fault is detected.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
F1-04 PG Deviation Sel 0 to 7 --- 3 --- B --- B

Settings
Setting Stopping method Function
0 Ramp to Stop Detect when deviation occurs with the frequence reference matching (within
(C1-02)/Fault the L4-02 detection range) the output frequency.
1 Coast to Stop/Fault Detect when deviation occurs with the frequence reference matching (within
the L4-02 detection range) the output frequency.
2 Fast Stop Detect when deviation occurs with the frequence reference matching (within
3 Continue/Alarm Detect when deviation occurs with the frequence reference matching (within
Only the L4-02 detection range) the output frequency.
(C1-02)/Fault the L4-02 detection range) the motor speed (PG feedback).
5 Coast Stop/Fault Detect when deviation occurs with the frequence reference matching (within
the L4-02 detection range) the motor speed (PG feedback).
Only the L4-02 detection range) the motor speed (PG feedback).
Note 1. In order to detect faulty contacts, and so on, inserted at the Inverter output side, select detec-
tion when the frequency reference matches the output frequency.
Note 2. The detection conditions vary as shown below depending on the software version. In Ver.
VSG101114 and later versions, both functions are provided.
5-32
VSG101043 and earlier software: Set values 0 to 3.
VSG101113 software: Set values 4 to 7.
Parameter F1-10 sets the PG speed deviation detection level as a percentage of the maximum output
frequency. Parameter F1-11 sets the length of time that the difference between the motor speed and
reference speed must exceed the PG speed deviation detection level in order to generate a PG speed
deviation fault (DEV).
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
F1-10 PG Deviate Level 0 to 50 % 10 --- A --- A
F1-11 PG Deviate Time 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.5 --- A --- A
Note A: Advanced
5-4-2 Setting the Zero-speed Operation Parameters

With flux vector control, operation is possible even when the frequency reference is zero (below the
minimum output frequency). Parameter E1-09 sets the minimum output frequency and B1-05 sets the
operation method around this minimum frequency. These parameters cannot be changed during op-
eration.
Selecting the Stopping Method (b1-03)

Parameter b1-03 sets the stopping method used when a stop command is input.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b1-03 Stopping Method 0 to 3 --- 0 Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
Settings
0 Ramp to Stop Deceleration stop
2 DC Injection to Stop DC braking stop (This setting can’t be made with flux vector control.)
3 Coast w/Timer Free-run stop with timer (This setting can’t be made with flux vector control.)
Setting the Zero-speed Operation Method (b1-05)

Parameter b1-05 sets the operation method used when the frequency reference is below the minimum
output frequency set in E1-09.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b1-05 Zero Speed Oper 0 to 3 --- 0 Not applicable. Advanced
5-33
Settings
0 RUN at Frequency Ref Operate according to the frequency reference. (E1-09 is invalid.)
1 STOP Interrupt the output. (Coast when the frequency reference is below E1-09.)
2 RUN at Min Frequency Operate at E1-09 frequency. (Output the frequency set in E1-09.)
3 RUN at Zero RPM Zero-speed operation
(Zero reference value when the frequency reference is below E1-09.)
Parameter E1-09 sets the minimum output frequency. Set this minimum level to satisfy the require-
ments of the application.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E1-09 Min Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 --- 0.0 Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced Advanced
Initial Excitation Function Settings (b2-01, b2-03, and b2-04)

With flux vector control, the DC braking (injection) function is replaced by the initial excitation function.
The initial excitation function stops a motor that is rotating because of inertia. These parameters cannot
Parameter Name Setting
number (
(not displayed)) range setting V/f V/f with Open Loop Flux
b2-01 Excitation level 0.0 to 10.0 Hz 0.0 Basic or Advanced
b2-03 Initial excitation 0.00 to 10.00 s 0.00 Basic or Advanced
time when starting
b2-04 Initial excitation 0.00 to 10.00 s 0.50 Basic or Advanced
time when stopping
5-34
The timing of the initial excitation function depends on the zero-speed operation method selected with
b1-05, as shown in the following diagrams.
Run command
Frequency reference
from analog input
Inverter’s internal frequency reference

• b1-05 = 0 (Soft start input)
(RUN at Frequency Ref)
Initial excitation Initial excitation
BB
• b1-05 = 1 (Baseblock)
(STOP) After the frequency reference falls below
Initial excitation from E1-09 E1-09, initial excitation starts when the
motor speed drops below b2-01.
• b1-05 = 2
After the run command goes OFF, initial
(RUN at Min Frequency) excitation starts when the motor speed
drops below b2-01.
• b1-05 = 3 After the run command goes OFF, initial

(RUN at Zero RPM) excitation starts when the motor speed
drops below b2-01.
BB Zero speed Zero speed
Note 1. Initial excitation is started from b2-01 (excitation level) when decelerating.
A setting of b2-01 < E1-09 is valid only with flux vector control.
Note 2. The current level for the initial excitation function is set in E2-03 (no-load current). The DC
braking (injection) current (b2-02) isn’t used with flux vector control and can’t be set.
5-4-3 Auto-tuning

Parameter Display
p y Setting
(310 to 510) (400)
5-35
Motor Selection Setting (E1-02)

Set the motor selection (E1-02) to the type of motor to be used. This setting is used as a basis for motor
protection
Parameter Display
p y Setting
E1-02 Motor Selec- 0 to 2 --- 0 Quick-start
tion
Setting
Setting Function
1 Standard blower motor (inverter-exclusive motor)
Precautions Before Auto-tuning

mentally different.
Required Parameter Settings

Enter auto-tuning mode and make the following parameter settings:
Rated Voltage: Set the rated voltage (VAC) shown on the motor’s nameplate.
Rated Current: Set the rated current (A) shown on the motor’s nameplate.
Rated Frequency: Set the rated frequency (Hz) shown on the motor’s nameplate.
Rated Speed: Set the rated speed (r/min) shown on the motor’s nameplate.
Number of poles: Set the number of poles.
Motor Selection: Select motor 1.
For two-motor switching control, select motor 1 or motor 2.
PG Pulses/Rev: Set the number of A-phase or B-phase pulses per revolution.
The following message will appear when the parameters have been set:
Tuning Ready ?
Press RUN key
At this point, it is still possible to change the parameter settings by pressing the Increment and Decre-
ment Keys to display the desired parameter.
5-36
Press the Menu Key to cancel auto-tuning. (The operation mode display will appear.)
Performing Auto-tuning
Auto-tuning will start if the Run Key is pressed when the “Tuning Ready?” message is being displayed.
The motor will operate during auto-tuning, so be sure that it is safe for the motor to operate before press-
ing the Run Key.
The following message will be displayed when the Run Key is pressed:
Tune Proceeding
HZ A
Auto-tuning takes up to 1.5 minutes. The message“Tune Successful” will be displayed when auto-tun-
ing is completed. If auto-tuning has been completed successfully, press the Menu Key and proceed to
the next operation.
Note To cancel auto-tuning after it has been started, press the Stop Key to stop the operation and then
press the Menu Key to return to Drive Mode.
Auto-tuning Faults
One of the fault messages in the following table will be displayed if a fault occurs during auto-tuning. In
this case, determine the cause of the fault, correct it, and perform auto-tuning again.
The fault display can be cleared by pressing the Menu Key. The motor parameters will revert to their
default settings if a fault occurs. Set these parameters again when auto-tuning.
Data Invalid There was a fault in the data set during auto-tuning.
(Motor setting data fault) • There was a fault in the relationship between the rated frequency, rated
speed, and number of poles.
→ Change the settings to conform to the following formula:
Rated speed < 120 × Motor frequency/Number of poles
ALARM: Over Load The effective load factor exceeded 20% during auto-tuning.
(Excessive load during auto-tuning) • A load is connected to the motor axis. → Remove the load.
• There was a setting fault during auto-tuning.
→ Check the rated current setting. Change if necessary.
• The PG pulse number setting is incorrect.
→ Check the setting and change if necessary.
• There is a motor bearing problem.
→ Turn the Inverter off and rotate the motor by hand.
Replace the motor if it doesn’t turn smoothly.
Motor speed The torque reference value exceeded 100% during auto-tuning.
(Motor speed fault) • There is a broken/disconnected motor power wire.
• The PG pulse number setting is incorrect.
→ Check the setting and change if necessary.
5-37

Accelerate The motor doesn’t accelerate within the prescribed time.
(Motor acceleration fault) • The torque limit function is operating.
→ Initialize the torque limit parameters (H7-01 to H7-04).
Rated Slip The rated slip setting can’t be tuned within the prescribed time.
(Rated slip fault) • A load is connected to the motor axis. → Remove the load.
Saturation-1 The core-saturation coefficients can’t be tuned within the prescribed
(Core-saturation coefficient 1 fault) time.
g isn’t correct.
Saturation-2 → Check and change the setting if necessary.
(Core-saturation coefficient 2 fault) • There is a broken/disconnected motor power wire.
Resistance The motor terminal resistance or no-load current setting can’t be tuned
(Motor wire resistance fault) within the prescribed time.
g isn’t correct.
No-load Current → Check and change the setting if necessary.
(Motor no-load current fault) • There is a broken/disconnected motor power wire.
PGO, PG Open Pulses aren’t being input from the PG even though a rotation output is
(Broken PG cable detection) being sent to the motor.
• The cable to the PG is broken/disconnected.
→ Check the wiring and correct any problems.
• The PG’s power supply is broken/disconnected.
→ Check the power supply voltage and correct if necessary.
PG Direction • The motor direction and PG direction are different.
(Motor direction error) → Motor power lines are wrong. Connect in following order: U, V, W.
→ Encoder wiring is wrong. Wire phase A, phase B, and + correctly.
→ F1-05 is set incorrectly. Set so that the directions agree.
Minor Fault • A minor fault has occurred in the Inverter (warning or alarm detected).
(Minor fault) → Refer to Chapter 8 Maintenance Operations for appropriate actions.
V/f Over Setting • The torque reference exceeded 100% and the non-load current ex-
(V/f setting too high) ceeded 70% of the rated motor current during auto-tuning.
→ The settings are incorrect for the rated voltage or rated frequency.
Correct the settings.
→ The motor is connected to a load. Disconnect the load.
5-38
5-4-4 Speed Loop (ASR) Structure

The following block diagram shows the structure of the speed loop.
48
Secondary current reference

Frequency
reference
U1-21 U1-22
Detected
speed
Note In vector flux control, the ASR’s P gain is the maximum frequency standard.
Regular Gain Settings (C5-01 and C5-02)

Parameter C5-01 sets the proportional gain of the speed loop (ASR), and C5-02 sets the integral time.
Both of these parameters can be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y Setting
g range
number name setting V/f V/f with Open Loop Flux
C5-01 ASR P Gain 1 0.00 to 300.00 Factor 20.00 --- B --- B
C5-02 ASR I Time 1 0.000 to 10.000 s 0.500 --- B --- B

Low-speed Gain Settings (C5-03, C5-04, and C5-07)

Use these parameters to use different proportional gain and integral time settings for low-speed opera-
tion. Parameter C5-03 sets the proportional gain of the speed loop (ASR), and C5-04 sets the integral
time. Both of these parameters can be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y Setting
g range
C5-04 ASR I Time 2 0.000 to 10.000 s 0.500 --- B --- B

Parameter C5-07 is the “ASR Gain Switching Frequency Level.” ASR P Gain 1 and ASR I Time 1 are
used when the frequency is above this level. Below this level, the proportional gain and integral time
approach ASR P Gain 2 and ASR I Time 2 as the frequency approaches zero. This parameter cannot be
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
C5-07 ASR Gain SW Freq 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0 Not applicable. A
Note A: Advanced
5-39
The following graph shows how the proportional gain and integral time approach ASR P Gain 2 and
ASR I Time 2 linearly as the frequency approaches zero.
Motor speed (Hz)
Note If C5-07 is set to 0.0, ASR P Gain 1 and ASR I Time 1 are used for the proportional gain and inte-
gral time at all frequencies.
Multi-function Input Settings (H1-01 through H1-06)
ASR Integral Reset (Setting E)

When one of the multi-function inputs is set to “E,” the input can be used to switch the speed control loop
between P control and PI control. P control (integral reset) is used when the multi-function input is ON.
ASR Proportional Gain Switch (Setting 77)

When one of the multi-function inputs is set to “77,” the input can be used to switch between proportional
gain 1 and proportional gain 2. Proportional gain 2 (C5-03) is used when the multi-function input is ON.
This input has higher priority than the ASR switching frequency set in C5-07.
ASR Gain Switch signal

(a multi-function input)
Proportional gain determined
by motor speed.
Proportional gain (P)
C5-03 gain setting
Note The gain is changed linearly in integral time 1 (C5-02). The integral time setting isn’t switched.
5-40
Adjusting Speed Loop (ASR) Responsiveness (C5-06) and Integral

Limit (C5-08)
Normally it isn’t necessary to make this adjustment, but parameter C5-06 can be used when adjusting
the gain doesn’t remove motor vibration, or adjusting the gain removes vibration but results in poor re-
sponsiveness. A high C5-06 setting lowers the responsiveness of the speed control loop, but makes it
difficult for vibration to develop. This parameter cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
g range
number setting V/f V/f with Open Loop Flux
C5-06 ASR Delay Time 0.000 to 0.500 s 0.004 Not applicable. A
Note A: Advanced
Parameter Display
p y Setting
g range
C5-08 ASR 1 Limit 0 to 400 --- 400 X X X A
The setting of C5-08 does not normally need to be changed. It is used to set an upper limit for the integral
used in speed control. Set a smaller value if rapid changes in the load can damage the load or cause the
motor to become disengaged due to Inverter responsiveness. If the setting is too small, however, it may
become impossible to perform speed control.
5-4-5 Adjusting Speed Control Loop (ASR) Gain
Gain Adjustment Procedure

Use the following procedure to adjust the gain with the mechanical system and actual load connected.
At zero-speed, increase C5-01 (ASR P Gain 1)

until there is no vibration.
At zero-speed, decrease C5-02 (ASR I Time 1)

until there is no vibration.
Does vibration develop when the motor operates YES Decrease C5-01 (ASR P Gain 1).
at the maximum normal operating speed?
NO
Increase C5-02 (ASR I Time 1).
Adjustment completed.
(When there is higher-level position control, ad-
just the position loop gain so that overshooting/
undershooting doesn’t occur.)
Fine Adjustments
When you want even finer gain adjustment, adjust the gain while observing the speed waveform. Pa-
rameter settings like those shown in the following table will be necessary to observe the speed wave-
form.
5-41
Parameter Setting Explanation

H4-01 Analog output selection (terminal 21) 21 Settings
g that allow multi-function analog
g output
p 1
H4-02 Analog output gain (terminal 21) 1.00 to b
be used
d to monitor
i the
h ASR iinput.
H4-03 Analog output bias (terminal 21) 0.0
g output
p 2
be used
d to monitor
i the
h motor speed. d
H4-07 Analog output level selection 1 This setting allows a 0 to ±10 V signal range to be
monitored.
The multi-function analog outputs have the following functions with these parameter settings. Terminal
22 is the multi-function analog output common. (There are separate commons, terminals 27 and 37, for
the 3G3FV--CUE/CE.)
Multi-function analog output 1 (terminal 21): Outputs the Inverter’s ASR input (0 to ±10 V).
Multi-function analog output 2 (terminal 23): Outputs the actual motor speed (0 to ±10 V).
We recommend monitoring both the ASR input and the motor speed in order to observe a response
delay or deviation from the reference value, as shown in the following diagram.
Example Waveforms
ASR input command

Motor speed
Motor speed (response)
Time
Adjusting ASR Proportional Gain 1 (C5-01)

This gain setting adjusts the responsiveness of the speed control loop. The responsiveness is in-
creased when this setting is increased. Usually this setting is higher for larger loads. Vibration will occur
if this setting is increased too much.
The following diagram shows changes that occur in the response when the ASR proportional gain is
changed.
The proportional gain is high.

(Vibration occurs when the gain is too high.)
Motor speed
The proportional gain is low.
Time
5-42
Adjusting ASR Integral Time 1 (C5-02)
This parameter sets the speed control loop’s integral time. Lengthening the integral time lowers the re-
sponsiveness, and weakens the resistance to external influences. Vibration will occur if this setting is
too short.
The following diagram shows changes that occur in the response when the ASR integral time is
changed.
Short integral time
Motor speed
Long integral time
Time
Different Gain Settings for Low-speed/High-speed

Switch between low-speed and high-speed gain when vibration occurs because of resonance with the
mechanical system at low speed or high speed.
Setting the Gain Switching Frequency (C5-07)

Set the switching frequency to about 80% of the motor’s operating frequency or the frequency at which
vibration occurs.
Low-speed Gain Adjustments (C5-03 and C5-04)

• Connect the actual load and adjust these parameters at zero-speed.
• Increase ASR proportional gain 2 (C5-03) until there is no vibration.
• Decrease ASR integral time 2 (C5-04) until there is no vibration.
High-speed Gain Adjustments (C5-01 and C5-02)

• Adjust these parameters at normal operating speed.
• Increase ASR proportional gain 1 (C5-01) until there is no vibration.
• Decrease ASR integral time 1 (C5-02) until there is no vibration.
• Refer to Fine Adjustments on page 5-41 for details on making fine adjustments of high-speed opera-
tion.
5-43
5-5 V/f Control with PG
With V/f control with PG, the user must set the motor parameters, V/f pattern, PG Control
Card settings, and then adjust the speed control loop’s gain.
5-5-1 Setting the Motor Parameters

Parameter Display
p y Setting
(310 to 510) (400)
Motor Selection and Rated Current Setting (E1-02 and E2-01)

Set the type of motor being used with the motor selection parameter (E1-02). This setting is a reference
for the protection functions. This parameter cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E1-02 Motor Selection 0 to 2 --- 0 Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
E1-02 Settings
Setting Function
1 Standard blower-cooled motor (inverter-exclusive motor)
Set parameter (E2-01) to rated current (A) shown on the motor’s nameplate. This parameter cannot be
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E2-01 Motor Rated FLA 10 to 200% A (Note 2) Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced
Note 1. The setting range is 10 to 200% of the Inverter’s rated output current.
5-44
Set parameter (E2-04) to the number of poles shown on the motor’s nameplate. This parameter cannot
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E2-04 Number of Poles 2 to 48 --- 4 --- Quick- --- Quick-
start start
5-5-2 V/f Pattern Selection (E1-03)

Set the V/f pattern with parameter E1-03. This parameter cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E1-03 V/f Selection 0 to F --- F Quick-start, Basic, Not applicable.
or Advanced
The V/f pattern settings can be divided into two categories: the 15 preset patterns (settings 0 through E)
and custom user-set patterns (setting F). The factory default setting for E1-03 is “F” (user-defined V/f
pattern), but the contents of this setting are actually the same as setting “1.”
Selecting a Preset V/f Pattern (Settings “0” through “E”)

Refer to the following table when selecting one of the 15 preset patterns.
Characteristics Applications Setting Specifications
General-purpose These patterns are for general-purpose 0 50 Hz
applications
applications.
1 60 Hz
Use these patterns when there is a
roughly proportional relationship 2 60 Hz, Voltage saturation at 50 Hz
between the rotational speed and load,
load
3 72 Hz, Voltage saturation at 60 Hz
such as in straight-line conveyors.
Variable torque
q Use these p patterns when there is a 4 50 Hz, cubic
quadratic
d i or cubic
bi relationship
l i hi between
b 5 50 Hz, quadratic
the rotational speed and load,
load such as
in fans or pumps. 6 60 Hz, cubic
7 60 Hz, quadratic
High
g starting
g (
(Normallyy it isn’t necessaryy to use these 8 50 Hz, low starting torque
torque patterns because
b starting
i torque is
i 9 50 Hz, high starting torque
ensured by automatic torque boost
functions.) A 60 Hz, low starting torque
b 60 Hz, high starting torque
High-speed These patterns are for applications that C 90 Hz, Voltage saturation at 60 Hz
operations must rotate at frequencies greater than
d 120 Hz, Voltage saturation at 60 Hz
60 Hz. A fixed voltage is applied at
frequencies greater than 60 Hz. E 180 Hz, Voltage saturation at 60 Hz
Note 1. Select a high starting torque V/f pattern only in the following cases:
The wiring distance between the Inverter and motor is relatively large (greater than 150 m).
A large torque is required at startup (such as heavy axis loads).
An AC or DC reactor is connected to the Inverter’s input or output.
5-45
Note 2. The parameter settings for E1-04 through E1-10 will be changed automatically when one of
these patterns is selected. There are three possible settings for these parameters depending
on the Inverter’s capacity: a 0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f pattern, a 2.2 to 45 kW V/f pattern, and a 55 to
300 kW V/f pattern.
Note 3. The characteristics for these patterns are shown in the diagrams on pages 5-25 through 5-27.
Setting a User-defined V/f Pattern (Setting “F”)

Parameters E1-04 through E1-10 can be set by the user when E1-03 has been set to “F.” Refer to page
5-28 for details on setting these parameters.
5-5-3 PG Speed Control Card Settings
Available PG Speed Control Cards

There are 4 types of PG Speed Control Cards, but only 2 types can be used with V/f control.
3G3FV-PPGA2: Phase-A (single) pulse input, input for open collector
3G3FV-PPGD2: Phase-A (single) pulse input, line driver inputs
Select the Card according to the application and install it in the Inverter as described in 2-2-6 Installing
and Wiring PG Speed Control Cards.
Setting the PG Pulse Number (F1-01)

Set the PG (pulse generator or encoder) pulse number in pulses/revolution. Set the number of phase A
or phase B pulses in one motor revolution. This parameter cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
F1-01 PG Pulses/Rev 0 to 60,000 p/r 1,000 --- Q --- Q
Note Q: Quick-start, Basic, or Advanced

Setting the Number of PG Gear Teeth (F1-12 and F1-13)

When “V/f control with PG feedback” is used, the motor can be operated even if there are gears between
the motor and PG because the responsiveness is lower than it is with vector control.
Set the number of teeth on the gears if there are gears between the motor and PG. The motor’s speed
will be calculated within the Inverter using the following equation:
Number of pulses input from the PG 60 Number of gear teeth 2 (F1–13)

Motor speed (rńmin) +
Number of PG pulses (F1–01) Number of gear teeth 1 (F1–12)
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
g Units Default Valid access levels1
F1-12 PG # Gear Teeth1 0 to 1,000 --- 0 --- A --- ---
F1-13 PG # Gear Teeth2 0 to 1,000 --- 0 --- A --- ---
5-46
Note 1. A: Advanced
Note 2. These parameters cannot be changed during operation.
Note 3. A gear ratio of 1 (F1-12 = F1-13 = 1) will be used if either of these parameters is set to 0.
Selecting Integral Operation During Acceleration/Deceleration (F1-07)

When “V/f control with PG feedback” is used, integral control during acceleration and deceleration can
be enabled or disabled with F1-07. This parameter cannot be changed during operation.
Set F1-07 to “1” (integral control enabled) if you want to keep the motor speed as close to the frequency
reference as possible during acceleration and deceleration. Set F1-07 to “0” (integral control disabled) if
you want to prevent the occurrence overshooting/undershooting.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
g Units Default Valid access levels1
F1-07 PG Ramp PI/I Sel 0 or 1 --- 0 --- B --- ---
Note A: Basic or Advanced

Settings
Setting Function
0 Disabled
(The integral function isn’t used while accelerating or decelerating; it is used at constant speeds.)
1 Enabled (The integral function is used at all times.)
Setting and Adjusting the Fault Detection Functions
PG Disconnection Stopping Method (F1-02)

This parameter sets the stopping method that is used when the signal from the PG is lost.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
F1-02 PG Fdbk Loss Sel 0 to 3 --- 1 --- B --- B

Settings
3 Alarm Only Continue operation (Display “PGO” and continue operation with V/f control.)
PG Disconnection Detection Time (F1-14)

A PG disconnection will be detected if a disconnection status lasts for the following time or longer.
5-47
Note The motor speed will not be controlled while the PG is disconnected. Set this time as short as
possible in any application where safety cannot be ensured.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
F1-14 PGO Detect Time 0.0 to 10.0 Sec 2.0 X A X A
Overspeed Settings (F1-03, F1-08, and F1-09)

Overspeed refers to an excessive motor speed. These parameters set the conditions for an overspeed
fault and the stopping method that is used when an overspeed fault occurs; they cannot be changed
during operation.
Parameter F1-03 sets the stopping method that is used when an overspeed fault occurs.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
F1-03 PG Overspeed Sel 0 to 3 --- 1 --- B --- B

Settings

3 Alarm Only Continue operation (Display “OS” and continue control.)
Parameter F1-08 sets the overspeed detection level as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
Parameter F1-09 sets the length of time that the motor speed must exceed the overspeed detection
level in order to generate an overspeed fault.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
F1-08 PG Overspd Level 0 to 120 % 115 --- A --- A
F1-09 PG Overspd Time 0.0 to 2.0 s 0.0 --- A --- A
Note A: Advanced
PG Speed Deviation Settings (F1-04, F1-10, and F1-11)

PG speed deviation refers to the difference between the actual motor speed and the reference com-
mand speed. These parameters set the conditions for a PG speed deviation fault and the stopping
method that is used when a PG speed deviation fault occurs; they cannot be changed during operation.
5-48
Parameter F1-04 sets the conditions for detecting a PG speed deviation fault and the stopping method
to be used when a fault is detected.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
F1-04 PG Deviation Sel 0 to 7 --- 3 --- B --- B

Settings
Setting Stopping method Function

1 Coast to Stop/Fault Detect when deviation occurs with the frequence reference matching (within
the L4-02 detection range) the output frequency.
Only the L4-02 detection range) the output frequency.
5 Coast Stop/Fault Detect when deviation occurs with the frequence reference matching (within
the L4-02 detection range) the motor speed (PG feedback).
Only the L4-02 detection range) the motor speed (PG feedback).
Note 1. In order to detect faulty contacts, and so on, inserted at the Inverter output side, select detec-
tion when the frequency reference matches the output frequency.
Note 2. The detection conditions vary as shown below depending on the software version. In Ver.
VSG101114 and later versions, both functions are provided.
VSG101043 and earlier software: Set values 0 to 3.
VSG101113 software: Set values 4 to 7.
Parameter F1-10 sets the PG speed deviation detection level as a percentage of the maximum output
frequency. Parameter F1-11 sets the length of time that the difference between the motor speed and
reference speed must exceed the PG speed deviation detection level in order to generate a PG speed
deviation fault (DEV).
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
F1-10 PG Deviate Level 0 to 50 % 10 --- A --- A
F1-11 PG Deviate Time 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.5 --- A --- A
Note A: Advanced
5-49
5-5-4 Speed Loop (ASR) Structure

The following block diagram shows the structure of the speed loop.
Frequency Output frequency

reference
Detected Change U1-22
Limiter
speed limiter
U1-21
Gain Settings
When using “V/f control with PG feedback,” set the gain at the minimum frequency and maximum fre-
quency.
Max. Frequency Gain Settings (C5-01 and C5-02)

Set ASR proportional gain 1 (C5-01) and ASR integral time 1 (C5-02) at the maximum frequency.
Parameter Display
p y Setting
g range
C5-02 ASR I Time 1 0.000 to 10.000 s 0.200 --- B --- B
Min. Frequency Gain Settings (C5-03 and C5-04)

Set ASR proportional gain 2 (C5-03) and ASR integral time 2 (C5-04) at the minimum frequency.
Parameter Display
p y Setting
g range
C5-04 ASR I Time 2 0.000 to 10.000 s 0.050 --- B --- B
The following graph shows how the proportional gain and integral time are calculated from parameters
C5-01 through C5-04.
Motor speed (Hz)

E1-04
(Max. frequency)
5-50
Multi-function Input Settings (H1-01 through H1-06)

V/f Mode Select (Setting D)
When one of the multi-function inputs is set to “D,” the input can be used to enable and disable the speed
control loop. The speed control loop is disabled (normal V/f control) when the multi-function input is ON.
ASR Integral Reset (Setting E)

When one of the multi-function inputs is set to “E,” the input can be used to switch the speed control loop
between P control and PI control. P control (integral reset) is used when the multi-function input is ON.
5-5-5 Adjusting Speed Control Loop (ASR) Gain

Gain Adjustment Procedure
Use the following procedure to adjust the gain with the mechanical system and actual load connected.
Gain Adjustments at Minimum Frequency

1. Operate the motor at the minimum frequency.
2. Increase C5-03 (ASR proportional gain 2) to a level where there is no vibration.
3. Decrease C5-04 (ASR integral time 2) to a level where there is no vibration.
4. Monitor the Inverter’s output current and verify that it is less than 50% of the Inverter’s rated current.
If the output current exceeds 50% of the Inverter’s rated current, decrease C5-03 and increase
C5-04.
Gain Adjustments at Maximum Frequency

1. Operate the motor at the maximum frequency.
2. Increase C5-01 (ASR proportional gain 1) to a level where there is no vibration.
3. Decrease C5-02 (ASR integral time 1) to a level where there is no vibration.
Gain Adjustments for Integral Control during Acceleration/Deceleration

Enable integral operation during acceleration and deceleration (with F1-07) when you want the motor’s
speed to closely follow the frequency reference during acceleration and deceleration. Integral operation
causes the speed to reach the target speed as fast as possible, but may result in overshooting or under-
shooting.
1. Set F1-07 to “1” to enable integral operation at all times.
2. Make the parameter settings shown below in order to observe the speed waveform while making
fine adjustments to the gain.
Parameter Setting Explanation
g output
p 1
be used
d to monitor
i the
h ASR iinput.
g output
p 2
be used
d to monitor
i the
h motor speed. d
H4-07 Analog output level selection 1 This setting allows a 0 to ±10 V signal range to
be monitored.
5-51
The multi-function analog outputs have the following functions with these parameter settings. Ter-
minal 22 is the multi-function analog output common. (There are separate commons, terminals 27
and 37, for the 3G3FV--CUE/CE.)
Multi-function analog output 1 (terminal 21): Outputs the Inverter’s ASR input (0 to ±10 V).
Multi-function analog output 2 (terminal 23): Outputs the actual motor speed (0 to ±10 V).
We recommend monitoring both the ASR input and the motor speed in order to observe a response
delay or deviation from the reference value, as shown in the following diagram.
ASR input command

Motor speed
Motor speed (response)
Time
3. Give acceleration/deceleration commands and adjust the gain while observing the waveform.
Motor If overshooting occurs:

speed Decrease C5-01 and increase C5-02.
If undershooting occurs:
Decrease C5-03 and increase C5-04.
4. If the overshooting or undershooting can’t be eliminated by adjusting the gain, decrease the ASR
limit (C5-05) to lower the frequency reference compensation limit. Since C5-05 can’t be changed
during operation, stop the Inverter’s operation and then decrease the ASR limit by 0.5 (%). Perform
step 3 again after the setting has been changed.
The ASR limit is the frequency limit for compensation by speed control loop. Set this frequency limit
as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. If the frequency limit is lowered too much, the
motor speed might not reach the target speed. Verify that the target speed is reached during normal
operation.
Parameter Display
p y Setting
C5-05 ASR Limit 0.0 to 20.0 % 5.0 --- A --- ---
Note A: Advanced
5-52
6
Chapter 6
Advanced Operation
6-2 Normal V/f Control
6-4 V/f Control With PG Feedback
6-5 Common Functions
Advanced Operation Chapter 6
This section summarizes the functions that can be used with open-loop vector control
(vector control without PG feedback) and then provides detailed explanations of the
functions that are specific to open-loop vector control.
6-1-1 Summary of Open-loop Vector Control Functions

The functions specific to open-loop vector control are marked with a “” and described in more detail
later in this section.
Group
w/PG Vector Vector
Application
b7 --- Not used. (Can’t be set.) --- --- --- OK
b8 Energy Saving Not used. (Can’t be set.) OK OK --- ---
b9 Zero Servo Not used. (Can’t be set.) --- --- --- OK
Tuning
C5 ASR Tuning Not used. (Can’t be set.) --- OK --- OK
C7 Hunting Prev Not used. (Can’t be set.) OK OK --- ---
Reference d1 Preset Reference Frequency reference settings (when using Operator) OK OK OK OK
d4 Sequence Up/Down, Accel/Decel stop hold frequency setting OK OK OK OK
d5 Torque Control Not used. (Can’t be set.) --- --- --- OK
Motor E1 V/f Pattern Motor pa
parameters
a ees OK OK OK OK
E2 Motor Setup (M
(Motor parameters are set b
by the
h auto-tuning
i ffunction.)
i ) OK OK OK OK
E3 Control Method 2 Control mode settings for second motor OK OK OK OK
E4 V/f Pattern 2 Parameters for second motor OK OK OK OK
E5 Motor Setup 2 OK OK OK OK
Options
p F1 PG Option Setup Not used. (Can’t be set.) --- OK --- OK
F2 AI-14 Setup Parameter settings for an Analog Command Card OK OK OK OK
F3 DI-08, 16 Setup Parameter settings for a Digital Command Card OK OK OK OK
F5 DO-02 Setup Not Used. ((Do not change
g these settings.)
g ) --- --- --- ---
F6 DO-08 Setup
F7 PO-36F Setup Parameter settings for a Pulse Monitor Card OK OK OK OK
F8 SI-F/G Setup Parameter settings for a SYSMAC BUS Interface Card. OK OK OK OK
F9 CP-916 Setup Parameter settings for a CompoBus/D Communications OK OK OK OK
Card
6-2
w/PG Vector Vector
H3 Analog Inputs Adjustment/function selection for external analog inputs OK OK OK OK
H4 Analog Outputs Adjustment/function selection for multi-function analog OK OK OK OK
outputs
H5 Serial Com Setup Not Used. (Do not change this setting.) --- --- --- ---
Protection L1 Motor Overload Sets electrical/thermal functions that protect the motor. OK OK OK OK
L3 Stall Prevention Accel/Decel stall prevention settings and selection OK OK OK OK
L6 Torque Detection Sets overtorque detection functions 1 and 2 (by torque) OK OK OK OK
L7 Torque Limit Torque limit settings --- --- OK OK
L8 Hdwe Protection Hardware overheating and phase loss protection settings OK OK OK OK
Operator
p o1 Monitor Select Selects the Operator’s display and setting methods. OK OK OK OK
o2 Key Selections Operator’s key function selection and other parameters OK OK OK OK
6-1-2 Torque Limit Function
With open-loop vector control, the torque limit can be applied at an arbitrary value be-
cause the torque output by the motor is calculated internally.
The torque limit function is useful when the load cannot sustain a torque above a certain
level or regenerative torque above a certain level. The two ways to apply a torque limit
are listed below. (The lower torque limit will be used if both of these methods are set.)
1) Setting a torque limit with the parameters
2) Limiting torque with the analog inputs
The precision of the torque limit is ±5% for output frequencies above 10 Hz, but the preci-
sion is lower for output frequencies below 10 Hz. Use flux vector control if you want to
apply a torque limit at low-speed (below 10 Hz).
Setting a Torque Limit with Parameters

Torque limits can be set separately for the 4 ways that torque can be applied: forward torque, reverse
torque, forward regenerative torque, and reverse forward regenerative torque. These parameters can-
not be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L7-01 Torque Limit Fwd 0 to 300 % 200 Not applicable
pp Basic or Advanced
L7-02 Torque Limit Rev
L7-03 Torque Limit Fwd Rgn
L7-04 Torque Limit Rev Rgn
6-3
The following diagram shows the relationship between each parameter and the output torque.
Output torque
Forward direction
L7-01
L7-04
Regenerative
torque Motor speed
Reverse Forward
Regenerative
torque
L7-03
L7-02
Reverse direction
Note When the torque limit function is engaged the torque control has priority and motor speed control
and compensation will be ignored, so the acceleration/deceleration times might be lengthened
and motor speed might be reduced.
Limiting Torque with Analog Inputs

The following two analog inputs that can be used to limit torque.
Multi-function analog input terminal 16
Frequency reference (current) terminal 14
Use either or both of these inputs as needed with parameters H3-05 and H3-09. These parameters can-
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
Settings
The following table shows only those settings related to the torque limit function.
Setting Name
10 Forward Torque Limit
11 Reverse Torque Limit
12 Regenerative Torque Limit
15 Speed Limit (Limits torque in both the forward and reverse directions.)
Set the analog input terminal’s signal level, gain, and bias to match the actual input signal. The factory
default settings for the input terminal’s signal level are as follows:
• Terminal 16: 0 to 10 V (A 10-V input limits the torque to 100% of the motor’s rated torque.)
• Terminal 14: 4 to 20 mA (A 20-mA input limits the torque to 100% of the motor’s rated torque.)
6-4
The following diagram shows the relationship between the output torque and each torque limit.
Output torque
Forward direction
Forward torque limit
Regenerative torque limit
Reverse Forward
Reverse torque limit

Reverse direction
Note 1. When the forward torque limit has been set, the analog input signal acts as the limit value for
torque generated in the forward direction. The torque limit input is effective when torque is
generated in the forward direction even if the motor is operating in reverse (regenerative
torque).
Note 2. The torque limit is 100% of the motor’s rated torque when the analog input is at its maximum
value (10 V or 20 mA). To increase the torque limit above 100%, set the input terminal’s gain
above 100%. For example, a gain of 150.0% would result in a torque limit of 150% of the mo-
tor’s rated torque with a 10-V or 20-mA analog input.
6-1-3 Adjusting Speed Feedback

With open-loop vector control, internal Inverter data is used to calculate the feedback
value. The gain of this automatic frequency regulator (AFR) operation can be fine-tuned
according to motor response. (Normally it isn’t necessary to change the default setting.)
Parameter Display
p y Setting
C8-08 AFR Gain 0.00 to 10.00 Factor 1.00 --- Advanced ---
Parameter Display
p y Setting
C8-09 AFR Time 0 to 2000 ms 50 --- Advanced ---
Note 1. The default settings do not normally need to be changed.
Note 2. Fine-tune the gain or time constant if the rotation of the motor is unstable, causing hunting to
occur, or the torque and speed responsiveness of the motor is low.
Set parameter C8-09 to a larger value if hunting occurs. Set the parameter C8-08 to a smaller
value if hunting cannot be suppressed with the parameter C8-09.
Set parameter C8-09 to a smaller value within a range where no hunting occurs if the torque
and speed responsiveness of the motor are low. To increase the gain, set parameter C8-08 to a
larger value within a range where no hunting occurs.
6-5
6-1-4 Setting Magnetic Flux Characteristics for Open-loop

Vector Control
Set the following parameter to select the method for V/f calculation to determine the magnetic flux char-
acteristics. The default setting does not normally need to be changed. Set the parameter if stable slip
compensation is required in the constant output area where the operating frequency is as high as or
higher than the rated frequency.
Parameter Display
p y Setting
C3-05 Flux Se- 0, 1 --- 0 --- Advanced ---
lect
Settings
Setting Description
0 The calculation of magnetic flux in open-loop vector control is based on the output frequency after
slip compensation.
1 The calculation of magnetic flux in open-loop vector control is based on the output frequency with
the V/f characteristic (i.e., the value without slip compensation).
Note Set the parameter to 1 if the speed of the motor is unstable in the constant output area.
6-1-5 Operation for Saturated Output Voltage
Previously, the accuracy of motor speed for vector control was greatly reduced when the
limit of the Inverter’s voltage output was approached (a voltage greater than that of the
input power supply cannot be output).
Set the following parameter to control the output voltage so that the limit will not be
reached, thus maintaining speed accuracy.
Parameter Display
p y Setting
C3-06 Output V 0, 1 --- 0 --- Advanced ---
limit
Settings
Setting Description
0 Disabled. (There is no limit of output voltage saturation. Slip compensation is disabled when the
output voltage saturates.)
1 Enabled. (Output voltage saturation is suppressed to maintain speed control.)
Note 1. Set the parameter to 1 if accuracy of speed is required within the rated rpm range. This will
cause an increase of approximately 10% in the output current. Therefore, be sure that Invert-
er has more than sufficient output current.
Note 2. If the Inverter’s input voltage is extremely lower than the rated motor voltage, the accuracy of
the speed of the motor may not be maintained even with the output voltage suppressed.
6-6
6-1-6 Startup Torque Compensation

With open-loop vector control, a starting-torque compensation can be input to decrease the torque ref-
erence’s rise time at startup.
This function is effective for equipment in which a starting torque is required, such as machinery with a
high friction load or cranes. Unlike flux vector control, the compensation is input only at startup.
Starting-torque Compensation Function Settings

Parameter Display
p y name Setting
C4-03 F TorqCmp@start 0.0 to 200.0 0.1% 0.0 --- Advanced ---
C4-04 R TorqCmp@start –200.0 to 0.0 0.1% 0.0 --- Advanced ---
C4-05 TorqCmp Delay T 0 to 200 1 ms 10 --- Advanced ---
These parameters cannot be changed during operation.

Timing Chart
Frequency reference
Run command
Time constant: C4-02

Torque compensation value C4-03 (forward)
C4-04 (reverse)
C4-05 × 4
Output frequency
Larger of b2-01
E1-09 and E1-09
Note The Inverter’s torque reference value is at its lower limit

with the torque compensation value shown above.
• When using this compensation function, set the starting-torque compensation value to the friction load
in regular machinery or the lifting/lowering load for machinery such as cranes.
Friction loads:
Set the friction load in both C4-03 and C4-04.
Lifting/lowering load:
Set the electrically driven (winding) load only. (When the lifting machinery is equipped with a coun-
terweight, a shock may be generated if there is a regenerative load so do not use this function.)
• It is only possible to set the electrically driven compensation in both forward and reverse. (The regen-
erative setting cannot be made.)
• The starting-torque compensation is not applied when switching between forward and reverse or after
a speed search.
• The starting-torque compensation is usually not applied when using a second motor.
6-7
• When a shock is generated at startup, increase the setting for the starting-torque compensation time
constant (C4-05). Use either the DC injection braking at startup (b2-03) or the “DC braking reference”
multi-function input (set value: 60) to raise the motor’s magnetic flux in advance before startup. (The
magnetic flux from the DC injection braking at startup (b2-03) can also be brought up quickly. Refer to
Setting DC Injection Braking (b2) on page 6-42 for details.)
6-1-7 Selecting Auto-tuning Carrier Frequency

The auto-tuning carrier frequency is by default set to a value higher than that used for conventional
models to improve the accuracy of auto-tuning. The default setting does not normally need to be
changed.
Parameter Display
p y Setting
C8-30 Carrier in 0 to 2 --- 2 --- Advanced
tune
Settings
Setting Description
0 The auto-tuning carrier frequency is set to 2 kHz.
1 The auto-tuning carrier frequency is set according to the set value of parameter C6-01.
Note The default setting does not normally need to be changed. Adjust the parameter with the parame-
ter C6-01 set to 0 or 1 if auto tuning cannot be executed.
6-1-8 Setting/Adjusting Motor Parameters
Adjusting the V/f Pattern

Normally it isn’t necessary to adjust the V/f pattern with open-loop vector control. Adjust the V/f pattern
when you want to change the maximum frequency setting or decrease the Inverter’s output voltage or
when stalls are occurring during no-load operation. It is possible to make user-defined V/f pattern set-
tings (E1-04 through E1-10) in open-loop vector control mode. (The preset V/f patterns cannot be se-
lected.)
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E1-07 Mid Frequency A 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 3.0*2 Q Q A ---
E1-08 Mid Voltage A 0.0 to 255.0*2 VAC 11.0*2,3 Q Q A ---
E1-10 Min Voltage 0.0 to 255.0*2 VAC 2.0*2,3 Q Q A ---
Note 1. Q: Quick Start, Basic, or Advanced
A: Advanced only
6-8
are for 200-V class, 0.4 to 1.5 kW Inverters.
Note 4. The default settings for E1-07 through E1-10 depend on the control mode. The default set-
tings shown in the table are for open-loop vector control.
Note 5. The four frequency settings must satisfy the following formula:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
For flux vector control, make the settings as follows:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-09 (FMIN)
Note 6. When making the V/f characteristics a straight line, set the same value in E1-07 (middle out-
put frequency) and E1-09 (minimum output frequency). In this case, parameter E1-08 (middle
output voltage) will be ignored.
User-defined V/f Pattern
Output voltage (V)
VMAX
(E1-05)
VC
(E1-08)
VMIN
(E1-10) Frequency (Hz)
FMIN FB FA FMAX
(E1-09) (E1-07) (E1-06) (E1-04)
Adjusting Output Voltage

Adjust the output voltage when you want to output more torque at low speed, such as in an elevator, or
when torque isn’t really necessary and you want to reduce the output voltage to save energy.
• When generating more torque, gradually increase the voltage but do not exceed 100% of the Invert-
er’s rated output current.
• When saving energy, decrease the voltage but do not cause stalling.
Setting the Maximum Frequency

The maximum frequency can be set from 50.0 to 400.0 Hz. Set this parameter in accordance with the
motor’s maximum rotational speed.
Setting Motor Parameters

The motor parameters (function E2) will all be set automatically when auto-tuning is performed, so it
normally isn’t necessary to set them manually. Set these parameters manually if auto-tuning can’t be
completed properly. These parameters cannot be changed during operation.
Set the rated current (A) shown on the motor’s nameplate.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
number range setting* V/f V/f with Open Loop Flux
E2-01 Motor Rated FLA 0.32 to 6.40 A 1.90 Quick Start, Basic, or Advanced
6-9
Note The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter’s rated output current. The default setting de-
pends upon the type of Inverter. (The table shows the default setting for 200-V class, 0.4-kW In-
verters.)
Calculate the rated slip (E2-02) from the value shown on the motor’s nameplate with the following equa-
tion and set this value.
Rated slip = rated frequency (Hz) – rated speed (r/min) × number of poles/120
Set the no-load current (E2-03) at the rated voltage and rated frequency. Normally this value isn’t shown
on the motor’s nameplate, so it might be necessary to contact the motor manufacturer.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
g range
number setting* V/f V/f with Open Loop Flux
E2-02 Motor Rated Slip 0.00 to 20.00 Hz 2.90 Advanced Quick Start,, Basic,,
E2-03 No-Load Current 0.00 to 2.90 A 1.20 or Advanced
(see note 2)
Note 1. The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter. (The table shows the default settings for
200-V class, 0.4-kW Inverters.)
Note 2. The setting range is between 0.00 and 0.1 less than the Inverter’s rated current.
Set the motor’s terminal resistance between U and V, V and W, or W and U.
Usually the nameplate of the motor does not provide the motor’s terminal resistance. Contact the motor
manufacturer for a test report on the motor’s terminal resistance to set the following values.
• Type E insulation: Motor’s terminal resistance (Ω) at 75°C x 0.92
• Type B insulation: Motor’s terminal resistance (Ω) at 75°C x 0.92
• Type F insulation: Motor’s terminal resistance (Ω) at 115°C x 0.87
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
g range
E2-05 Term Resistance 0.000 to 65.000 Ω 9.842 Advanced
Note The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter.
(The table shows the default settings for 200-V class, 0.4-kW Inverters.)
Set the voltage drop (caused by the motor’s leakage inductance) as a percentage of the motor’s rated
voltage in parameter E2-06. Normally this value is not shown on the motor’s nameplate, so it might be
necessary to contact the motor manufacturer. It is also acceptable to set the loss (caused by the motor’s
leakage inductance) as a percentage.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E2-06 Leak Inductance 0.0 to 40.0 % 18.2 Not applicable. Advanced
The default setting does not normally need to be changed because the Inverter in operation ad-
justs the leak inductance automatically. Set the parameter if a high-speed motor or any other mo-
tor with low inductance is used.
Parameters E2-07 and E2-08 are used in a frequency range even higher than the motor’s rated fre-
quency. It isn’t necessary to set these parameters when operating below the motor’s rated frequency.
Set the following values:
6-10
Motor core-saturation coefficient 1: Core-saturation coefficient when magnetic flux is 50%.
Normally these values aren’t shown on the motor’s nameplate, so it might be necessary to contact the
motor manufacturer.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E2-07 Saturation Comp 1 0.0 to 0.50 --- 0.50 Not applicable.
pp Advanced
E2-08 Saturation Comp 2 0.00 to 0.75 --- 0.75
Note It is possible to operate the motor with the default settings, but motor efficiency may decrease.
6-11
6-2 Normal V/f Control
This section summarizes the functions that can be used with normal V/f control (V/f con-
trol without PG feedback) and then provides detailed explanations of the functions that
are specific to normal V/f control.
6-2-1 Summary of V/f Control Functions

The functions specific to normal V/f control are marked with a “” and described in more detail later in
this section.
Group
w/PG Vector Vector
Application
b7 --- Not used. (Can’t be set.) --- --- --- OK
b8 Energy Saving Multi-function input: Energy-saving control settings OK OK --- ---
Tuning
C5 ASR Tuning Not used. (Can’t be set.) --- OK --- OK
C7 Hunting Prev Hunting prevention function settings OK OK --- ---
C8 Factory Tuning Not used. (Can’t be set.) --- --- OK ---
parameters
a ees OK OK OK OK
E2 Motor Setup (M
(Motor parameters set manually.)
ll ) OK OK OK OK
E4 V/f Pattern 2 Parameter settings
g for second motor OK OK OK OK
Options
p F1 PG Option Setup Not used. (Can’t be set.) --- OK --- OK
g these settings.)
g ) --- --- --- ---
F6 DO-08 Setup
Card.
6-12
w/PG Vector Vector
outputs
L3 Stall Prevention Accel/Decel/Run stall prevention settings and selection OK OK OK OK
L6 Torque Detection Sets overtorque detection functions 1 and 2 (by current) OK OK OK OK
L7 Torque Limit Not used. (Can’t be set.) --- --- OK OK
Operator
6-2-2 Energy-saving Control Function

The energy-saving control function is enabled when the energy-saving command (setting 63) has been
set in a multi-function input (H1-01 through H1-06). Inputting the energy-saving command while there is
a light load causes the Inverter’s output voltage to be reduced and saves energy. Turn OFF the energy-
saving command when a normal load is added.
Parameter b8-01 determines the Inverter’s output voltage when the energy-saving command is input.
Set this value as a percentage of the V/f pattern’s voltage. Parameter L2-04 (the voltage recovery time)
determines the rate at which the output voltage is changed when the energy-saving command is turned
ON or OFF.
Parameter b8-02 determines the lower limit frequency for the energy-saving function. The energy-sav-
ing command is enabled only when the frequency reference is above this lower-limit and the motor
speed is within the “speed agree” range.
Parameters b8-01 and b8-02 cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b8-01 Energy Save Gain 0 to 100 % 80 Advanced Not applicable.
pp
b8-02 Energy Save Freq 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0
6-13
Timing Chart
OFF ON
Run command
Energy-saving command OFF ON
Frequency reference ≥ b8-02
Output frequency
Output voltage
L2-04 E1-03 to E1-10 setting × Energy Save Gain (B8-01)
6-2-3 Hunting-prevention Function

The hunting-prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load. This
function is valid with V/f control and V/f with PG control. Parameters C7-01 and C7-02 cannot be
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
C7-01 Hung Prev Select 0, 1 --- 1 Advanced Not applicable.
C7-01 Settings
Setting Function
0 Disables the hunting-prevention function.
1 Enables the hunting-prevention function.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
C7-02 Hung Prev Gain 0.00 to 2.50 Factor 1.00 Advanced Not applicable.
Normally it isn’t necessary to change these parameters. Adjust these parameters as follows if hunting
occurs with a light load.
• Increase the setting in C7-02 if vibration occurs when operating with a light load.
(If the setting is increased too much, the current can fall to the point where stalling occurs.)
• Decrease the setting in C7-02 if stalling occurs.
• Disable the hunting-prevention function (C7-01 = 0) if high responsiveness is more important than
suppressing vibration.
6-14
6-2-4 Setting Motor Parameters

The motor parameters other than the V/f pattern parameters are described below:
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
g range
(see note 2)

Note 3. These settings are used as reference values for the motor slip compensation function.
Set the motor’s terminal resistance (phase to phase) in parameter E2-05. Normally this value isn’t
shown on the motor’s nameplate, so it might be necessary to contact the motor manufacturer.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
g range

Note 2. This setting is used as a reference value for the torque compensation function.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
g range
E2-10 Tcomp Iron Loss 0 to 65535 W 14 Advanced ---
Note 1. The default setting varies with the Inverter’s capacity. The above setting applies to 200-V
class, 0.4-kW Inverters.
Note 2. Set the motor iron core loss in 1-W increments. The default setting does not normally need to
be changed.
Note 3. The set value is used as the reference value for the torque compensation function.
6-15
This section summarizes the functions that can be used with flux vector control (vector
control with PG feedback) and then provides detailed explanations of the functions that
are specific to flux vector control.
6-3-1 Summary of Flux Vector Control Functions

The functions specific to normal V/f control are marked with a “” and described in more detail later in
this section.
Group
w/PG Vector Vector
Application
b7 Droop Control Droop Control function settings --- --- --- OK
b8 Energy Saving Not used. (Can’t be set.) OK OK --- ---
b9 Zero Servo Zero-servo function settings --- --- --- OK
Tuning
C3 Motor-Slip Comp Motor temperature compensation function adjustment OK OK OK OK
C4 Torque Comp Not used. (Can’t be set.) OK OK OK ---
C5 ASR Tuning Speed control loop adjustment --- OK --- OK
C7 Hunting Prev Not used. (Can’t be set.) OK OK --- ---
d5 Torque Control Torque control settings and adjustment --- --- --- OK
parameters
a ees OK OK OK OK
E2 Motor Setup (M
(Motor parameters set automatically
i ll with
i h auto-tuning.)
i ) OK OK OK OK
Options
p F1 PG Option Setup Parameter settings for a PG Speed Control Card --- OK --- OK
g these settings.)
g ) --- --- --- ---
F6 DO-08 Setup
Card.
6-16
w/PG Vector Vector
outputs
L6 Torque Detection Sets overtorque detection functions 1 and 2 (by current) OK OK OK OK
L7 Torque Limit Torque limit function settings --- --- OK OK
Operator
6-3-2 Droop Control Function

Droop control is a function that allows the user to set the amount of motor slip. When a single load is
operated with two motors (such as in a crane conveyor), a high-resistance motor (a motor in which the
secondary winding’s resistance is increased resulting in an increased amount of slip) is normally used
to adjust the load balance, as shown in the following diagram.
The balance of the load is very different with different amounts of slip.
Motor A’s torque

Torque Torque Motor A’s torque characteristics
characteristics
Motor B’s torque characteristics
TA TA
Load torque Load torque
TB TB
Motor B’s torque

characteristics TA–TB>>0 TA–TB'0
Reference Speed Reference Speed

speed speed
• Load balance when using a general-purpose motor • Load balance when using a high-resistance motor
If droop control is used, a high-resistance motor’s characteristics can be set for a general-purpose mo-
tor. Also, it is easy to make adjustments while watching the load balance because the amount of slip can
be set arbitrarily.
Set the amount of slip in parameter b7-01 as the percentage of slip when the maximum frequency is
input and the rated torque is generated. Droop control is disabled if b7-01 is set to 0.0.
6-17
Parameter b7-02 is used to adjust the responsiveness of droop control. Increase this setting if vibration
or hunting occur.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b7-01 Droop gain 0.0 to 100.0 % 0.0 Not applicable.
pp Advanced
b7-02 Droop delay 0.03 to 2.00 s 0.05
time
Note These parameters can be changed during operation.
b7-01
Droop amount (Slip equivalent)
Torque
100%
0 Speed
Reference
speed
6-3-3 Zero-servo Function (Position-lock)

The zero-servo function is enabled when one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01 through H1-06) is set to
72 (Zero Servo Command). If the zero-servo command is ON when the frequency (speed) reference
6-18
falls below the excitation level (b2-01), a position control loop is formed and the motor is stopped. (The
motor will not rotate even if there is an offset in the analog reference input.)
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b9-01 Zero Servo Gain 0 to 100 --- 5 Not applicable
pp Advanced
b9-02 Zero Servo Count 0 to Pulses 10
16383
Zero-servo command
Excitation level (b2-01)

Frequency (speed) reference
Excitation level (b2-01)

Motor speed
Zero Servo End signal

Completely stopped by
zero-servo function
• Assign the zero-servo command (setting 72) to one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01 through
H1-06).
• The zero-servo status is entered when the frequency (speed) reference falls below the zero-speed
level (b2-01).
• Be sure to leave the run command input ON. If the run command is turned OFF, the output will be
interrupted and the zero-servo function will become ineffective.
• Adjust the holding strength of the zero-servo position lock with parameter b9-01 (Zero Servo Gain).
Increasing this setting increases the holding strength, although vibration will occur if the setting is too
high. (Adjust the holding strength after adjusting the speed control (ASR) gain.)
• To output the zero-servo status externally, assign the Zero Servo End signal (setting 33) to one of the
multi-function outputs (H2-01 through H2-03). The Zero Servo Count setting in b9-02 is enabled when
one of the multi-function outputs has been set to 33.
• The “Zero Servo Count” specifies the allowed offset from the starting position, and the Zero Servo End
signal remains ON as long as the position is within this range (starting position ± Zero Servo Count).
• Set the Zero Servo Count to four times the number of pulses from the PG (pulse generator or encoder),
as shown in the following diagram. For example, when a 1,000 p/r encoder is being used, the number
of pulses would be 4,000 p/r after multiplying by four.
• The Zero Servo End signal will go OFF when the zero-servo command is turned OFF.
• These parameters cannot be changed during operation.
Note When using the zero-servo function for an extended period of time, limit the load to a maximum of
50% of the Inverter’s rated output current. If a high holding strength is required of the zero-servo
6-19
position lock for a long time, select an Inverter with a capacity one rank higher than the capacity of
the motor.
Factor of 4: By counting the rising and falling edges of phase A and phase B,
this method has four times the resolution of the PG.
1 pulse
Phase A
Phase B
Count 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
6-3-4 Torque Control
Torque Control Function Settings

With flux vector control, the motor’s output torque can be controlled by a torque reference from an ana-
log input. Set parameter d5-01 to “1” to select torque control. This parameter cannot be changed during
operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
d5-01 Torq Control Sel 0 or 1 --- 0 Not applicable. Advanced
Settings
Setting Function
0 Speed control (controlled by C5-01 through C5-07)
1 Torque control
The following block diagram shows the operation of torque control.
Torque reference +
Torque reference primary delay filter + Internal torque reference
(d5-02)
+
Torque limit
Torque compensation bias (L7-01 to L7-04)
Speed limit Speed limiting circuit
Speed feedback
Speed limit
bias
(d5-05)
6-20
Torque Reference Settings

• Set multi-function analog input (terminal 16) or frequency reference current input (terminal 14) to
torque reference. The torque reference value cannot be set with the Digital Operator.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
Note Set either one of these parameters to torque reference (setting 13). (These parameters cannot be
changed during operation.)
• Next, set the signal level for the analog input terminal that was set to torque reference. These parame-
ters cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
Signal Level Settings

Setting Function
0 0- to +10-V input (When H3-08 is being set, be sure to disconnect jumper wire J1.)
1 0- to ±10-V input (When H3-08 is being set, be sure to disconnect jumper wire J1.)
2 4- to 20-mA input (H3-08 only)
Note 1. Set the proper signal level for the torque reference that you want to input.
Note 2. The direction of the torque that is output is determined by the sign (polarity) of the signal that
was input. It is not determined by the direction of the run command (forward/reverse).
+Voltage (or current): Forward torque reference (generally counter-clockwise; axis side)
–Voltage: Reverse torque reference (generally clockwise; axis side)
Since the polarity of the voltage input determines the direction, only forward torque refer-
ences can be input when the “0 to +10 V” or “4 to 20 mA” signal level has been selected. If you
want to input reverse torque references, be sure to select the “0 to ±10 V” signal level.
Note 3. When supplying a voltage input to the frequency reference current input (terminal 14), be sure
to disconnect jumper wire J1 on the control board. If the jumper wire isn’t disconnected, the
input resistor will be destroyed.
6-21
200-V Class, 0.4-kW Inverter Example
Jumper wire
Control
circuit
terminals
Main circuit
terminals
Braking Resistor
Power supply inputs Unit Motor output
Speed Limit Function Settings

• This setting selects the speed limit function used when torque control is performed.
With torque control, the motor sometimes rotates at high speed with no load or a light load. The speed
limit function keeps the motor speed from exceeding the specified limit in these cases.
• If the speed limit is exceeded during torque control operation, a suppressing torque (proportional to
the divergence from the speed limit) is added to the torque reference. (The suppressing torque is ap-
plied opposite to the motor rotation.)
• There are two ways to set the motor speed limit: a parameter setting or an analog input value.
Speed Limit Selection

Parameter Display
p y name Setting
d5-03 Speed Limit Sel 1 or 2 --- 1 Not applicable. Advanced
Note This parameter cannot be changed during operation.

Settings
Setting Function
1 The speed limit is set from one of the analog frequency reference terminals (13 or 14).
2 The speed limit is set to the value in parameter d5-04.
Speed Limit Selection Settings

• Limit with Analog Input (d5-03 = 1)
6-22
The speed limit value is set by the input voltage to frequency reference (voltage) terminal 13.
When frequency reference (current) terminal 14 has been set to frequency reference by setting
parameter H3-09 to 1F, this terminal is also used as an input terminal for the speed limit.
In this case, the actual speed limit value is the sum of the voltage input value at terminal 13 and the
current input value at terminal 14.
The polarity of the speed limit signal and the direction of the run command determine the direction
in which the speed is limited, as shown in the following table.
Signal polarity Run command Speed limit direction
+Voltage
g input
p Forward rotation Speed is limited in the forward direction.
Reverse rotation Speed is limited in the reverse direction.
–Voltage
g input
p Forward rotation Speed is limited in the reverse direction.
Reverse rotation Speed is limited in the forward direction.
The speed limit value is zero for rotation opposite to the speed limit direction.
For example, when a +voltage is being input and the forward rotation command is ON, the effec-
tive range of the torque control is from zero to the speed limit value in the forward direction (when
parameter d5-05, the speed limit bias, is set to 0).
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
Note Set the signal level to match the speed limit voltage being input. (This parameter cannot be
changed during operation.)
• Limit with Parameter Setting (d5-03 = 2)

Parameter Display
p y name Setting
d5-04 Speed Lmt Value –120 to % 0 Not applicable. Advanced
+120

Set the speed limit as a percentage of the maximum frequency. (The max. frequency is 100%.)
The sign of the parameter setting and the direction of the run command determine the direction in
which the speed is limited, as shown in the following table.
Sign of d5-04 Run command Speed limit direction
Setting
g+ Forward rotation Speed is limited in the forward direction.
Reverse rotation Speed is limited in the reverse direction.
Setting
g– Forward rotation Speed is limited in the reverse direction.
Reverse rotation Speed is limited in the forward direction.
The speed limit value is zero for rotation opposite to the speed limit direction.
For example, when a positive value is set in d5-04 and the forward rotation command is ON, the
effective range of the torque control is from zero to the speed limit value in the forward direction
(when parameter d5-05, the speed limit bias, is set to 0).
6-23
• Speed Limit Bias Setting
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
d5-05 Speed Lmt Bias 0 to 120 % 10 Not applicable. Advanced
Set the speed limit bias as a percentage of the maximum frequency. (The max. frequency is
100%.)
The speed limit bias can be used to add margins to the speed limit.
When the speed limit bias is used, it is possible to set the same speed limit value in both the for-
ward and reverse directions. For example, the following settings establish speed limits of 50% of
the maximum frequency in both the forward and reverse directions.
Speed limit setting: Zero (with d5-04 as the speed limit: d5-03 = 2, d5-04 = 0)
Speed limit bias setting: 50% (d5-05 = 50)
When a forward speed limit and a speed limit bias have been set, the speed range of the torque
control is from the “–speed limit bias setting” to the “speed limit setting + speed limit bias setting.” In
effect, the speed limit range is extended by the speed limit bias in both the forward and reverse
directions.
Output torque Forward

direction
When the speed exceeds the reverse d5-05 d5-05
speed limit, the torque is increased in
the forward direction.
Torque reference value
Motor speed
Reverse Forward
rotation rotation
When the speed exceeds the forward
speed limit, the torque is increased in
the reverse direction.
Effective range of
torque control
Speed limit setting
Limit opposite Reverse
to speed limit direction
setting
Torque Reference Adjustment
Primary Delay Time Constant for Torque Reference Filter

• The time constant of the primary filter in the torque reference section can be adjusted.
6-24
• This parameter is used to eliminate noise in the torque reference signal and adjust the responsiveness
to the host controller. This parameter cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
d5-02 Torq Ref Filter 0 to 1000 ms 0 Not applicable. Advanced
Note 1. Set the torque reference filter’s primary delay time constant in ms units.
Note 2. Increase the time constant setting if vibration occurs during torque control operation.
Setting the Torque Compensation Bias

• Set multi-function analog input (terminal 16) or frequency reference current input (terminal 14) to
torque compensation (setting 14).
• When the amount of torque loss at the load is input to one of these terminals, it is added to the torque
reference to compensate for the loss.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
Note 1. Set torque compensation (setting 14) in the input terminal that wasn’t set to torque reference
(setting 13).
Note 2. These parameters cannot be changed during operation.
• Set the signal level for the terminal. These parameters cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
Signal Level Settings

Setting Function
0 0 to +10 V input (When H3-08 is being set, be sure to disconnect jumper wire J1.)
1 0 to ±10 V input (When H3-08 is being set, be sure to disconnect jumper wire J1.)
2 4 to 20 mA input (H3-08 only)
Note 1. Set the proper signal level for the torque compensation bias that you want to input.
Note 2. The direction of the torque compensation bias is determined by the sign (polarity) of the signal
that is input. It is not determined by the direction of the run command (forward/reverse).
+Voltage (or current): Forward torque compensation
(generally counter-clockwise; axis side)
–Voltage: Reverse torque compensation (generally clockwise; axis side)
Since the polarity of the voltage input determines the direction, only forward torque compen-
sation can be input when the “0 to +10 V” or “4 to 20 mA” signal level has been selected. If you
want to input reverse torque compensation, be sure to select the “0 to ±10 V” signal level.
6-25
Note 3. When supplying a voltage input to the frequency reference current input (terminal 14), be sure
to disconnect jumper wire J1 on the control board. If the jumper wire isn’t disconnected, the
input resistor will be destroyed. Refer to page 6-22 for a diagram of the control board.
Adjusting the Gain/Bias of the Analog Inputs

• Adjust the gain and bias for the frequency reference (voltage), frequency reference (current), and mul-
ti-function analog inputs according to the input specifications for each input. The following parameters
can be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
g range
H3-02 Terminal 13 Gain 0.0 to 1,000.0 % 100.0 Basic or Advanced
H3-03 Terminal 13 Bias –100.0 to 100.0 % 0.0 Basic or Advanced
H3-06 Terminal 16 Gain 0.0 to 1,000.0 % 100.0 Basic or Advanced
H3-10 Terminal 14 Gain 0.0 to 1,000.0 % 100.0 Advanced
H3-11 Terminal 14 Bias –100.0 to 100.0 % 0.0 Advanced
Note 1. Adjust the gain so that the maximum signal level corresponds to the maximum frequency or
the motor’s rated torque, as follows.
When the input terminal is used for frequency reference:
A 10-V (20 mA) input indicates a frequency reference that is 100% of the max. frequency.
When the input terminal is used for torque reference:
A 10-V (20 mA) input indicates a torque reference that is 100% of the motor’s rated torque.
When the input terminal is used for torque compensation:
A 10-V (20 mA) input indicates a torque compensation that is 100% of the motor’s rated torque.
Note 2. Adjust the bias so that the minimum signal level corresponds to the maximum frequency or
the motor’s rated torque, as follows.
When the input terminal is used for frequency reference:
A 0-V (4 mA) input indicates a frequency reference that is 100% of the max. frequency.
When the input terminal is used for torque reference:
A 0-V (4 mA) input indicates a torque reference that is 100% of the motor’s rated torque.
6-26
When the input terminal is used for torque compensation:
A 0-V (4 mA) input indicates a torque compensation that is 100% of the motor’s rated torque.
Reference
value
Max.frequency Gain
100
Ratedtorque Gain
100
Max.frequency Bias
100
Ratedtorque Bias
100 Input voltage
(Input current)
0V 10 V
(4 mA) (20 mA)
Note Use the current values shown in parentheses when current input has been selected.
6-3-5 Speed/Torque Control Switching Function

It is possible to switch between speed control and torque control when one of the multi-function inputs
(H1-01 through H1-06) is set to 71 (Speed/Torque Control Change). Speed control is performed when
the input is OFF and torque control is performed when the input is ON.
Torque Control Function Settings

Parameter Display
p y name Setting
d5-01 Torq Control Sel 0 or 1 --- 0 Not applicable. Advanced

Settings
Setting Function
0 Speed control (controlled by C5-01 through C5-07)
1 Torque control
Note Set parameter d5-01 to 0 (speed control) when using the speed/torque control switching function.
Setting the Speed/Torque Control Switching Timer

This setting specifies the delay (0 to 1,000 ms) between a change in the multi-function input (ON → OFF
or OFF → ON) and the corresponding change in the control mode. The timer setting is effective only
when 71 (Speed/Torque Control Change) has been set in one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01
through H1-06).
6-27
During the timer delay, the value of the 3 analog inputs will retain the values they had when the ON/OFF
status of speed/torque control switching signal was changed. Use this delay to make any preparations
for the change in the control mode.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
d5-06 Ref Hold Time 0 to 1000 ms 0 Not applicable. Advanced
Frequency Reference and Speed Limit

The frequency reference (during speed control) is set with b1-01 (Reference Source).
The speed limit (during torque control) is set with d5-03 (Speed Limit Selection).
It is possible to assign the frequency reference and speed limit functions to the same analog input termi-
nal (13 or 14).
Torque Reference and Torque Limit

If the torque reference has been assigned to a multi-function analog input or the frequency reference
(current) terminal, the input’s function changes when the control mode is switched between torque con-
trol and speed control.
• During speed control: The analog input terminal is used as the torque limit input.
• During torque control: The analog input terminal is used as the torque reference input.
Either the absolute value of the torque limit input or the torque limit parameter setting (L7-01 through
L7-04), whichever is smaller, will be used for the torque limit.
Stopping Method
When the run command is turned OFF during speed control, the motor is decelerated to a stop.
When the run command is turned OFF during torque control, the control mode is automatically switched
to speed control and the motor is decelerated to a stop.
6-3-6 Torque Limit Function
With flux vector control, the torque limit can be applied at an arbitrary value because the
torque output by the motor is calculated internally.
The torque limit function is useful when the load cannot sustain a torque above a certain
level or regenerative torque above a certain level. The two ways to apply a torque limit
are listed below. (The lower torque limit will be used if both of these methods are set.)
1) Setting a torque limit with the parameters
2) Limiting torque with the analog inputs
The precision of the torque limit is ±5% at all frequencies.
6-28
Setting a Torque Limit with Parameters

Torque limits can be set separately for the 4 ways that torque can be applied: forward torque, reverse
torque, forward regenerative torque, and reverse forward regenerative torque. These parameters can-
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L7-01 Torque Limit Fwd 0 to 300 % 200 Not applicable
pp Basic or Advanced
L7-02 Torque Limit Rev
L7-03 Torque Limit Fwd Rgn
L7-04 Torque Limit Rev Rgn
The following diagram shows the relationship between each parameter and the output torque.
Output torque
Forward direction
L7-01
L7-04
Regenerative
torque Motor speed
Reverse Forward
Regenerative
torque
L7-03
L7-02
Reverse direction
Note When the torque limit function is engaged the torque control has priority and motor speed control
and compensation will be ignored, so the acceleration/deceleration times might be lengthened
and motor speed might be reduced.
Limiting Torque with Analog Inputs

The following two analog inputs that can be used to limit torque.
Multi-function analog input terminal 16
Frequency reference (current) terminal 14
Use either or both of these inputs as needed with parameters H3-05 and H3-09. These parameters can-
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
6-29
Settings
The following table shows only those settings related to the torque limit function.
Setting Name
10 Forward Torque Limit
11 Reverse Torque Limit
12 Regenerative Torque Limit
13 Torque reference
(The input limits torque in both the forward and reverse directions during speed control.)
15 Speed Limit (Limits torque in both the forward and reverse directions.)
Set the analog input terminal’s signal level, gain, and bias to match the actual input signal. The factory
default settings for the input terminal’s signal level are as follows:
• Terminal 16: 0 to +10 V (A 10-V input limits the torque to 100% of the motor’s rated torque.)
• Terminal 14: 4 to 20 mA (A 20-mA input limits the torque to 100% of the motor’s rated torque.)
The following diagram shows the relationship between the output torque and each torque limit.
Output torque
Forward direction
Forward torque limit
Reverse Forward
Reverse torque limit

Reverse direction
Note 1. When the forward torque limit has been set, the analog input signal acts as the limit value for
torque generated in the forward direction. The torque limit input is effective when torque is
generated in the forward direction even if the motor is operating in reverse (regenerative
torque).
Note 2. The torque limit is 100% of the motor’s rated torque when the analog input is at its maximum
value (10 V or 20 mA). To increase the torque limit above 100%, set the input terminal’s gain
above 100%. For example, a gain of 150.0% would result in a torque limit of 150% of the mo-
tor’s rated torque with a 10-V or 20-mA analog input.
6-30
6-3-7 Setting/Adjusting Motor Parameters

Adjusting the V/f Pattern
Normally it isn’t necessary to adjust the V/f pattern with flux vector control. Adjust the V/f pattern when
you want to change the maximum frequency, maximum voltage, base frequency, or minimum output
frequency settings.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
Note 1. Q: Quick Start, Basic, or Advanced
A: Advanced only
Note 3. The default setting for E1-09 depends on the control mode. The default settings shown in the
table are for flux vector control.
Note 4. The three frequency settings must satisfy the following formula:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-09 (FMIN)
V/f Pattern
Output voltage (V)
VMAX
(E1-05)
Frequency (Hz)
FMIN FA FMAX
(E1-09) (E1-06) (E1-04)
Units for V/f Pattern Settings

The units used for V/f pattern frequency settings can be changed when flux vector control has been
selected. This parameter cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
o1-04 Display Units 0 or 1 --- 0 Not applicable. B
Display Unit Settings
Setting Function
0 Units: Hz
1 Units: r/min
6-31
Note 1. The setting units for parameters E1-04, E1-06, and E1-09 can be changed.
Note 2. This function is specific to flux vector control.
Setting Motor Parameters

The motor parameters (function E2) will all be set automatically when auto-tuning is performed, so it
normally isn’t necessary to set them manually. Set these parameters manually if auto-tuning can’t be
completed properly. These parameters cannot be changed during operation.
Set the rated current (A) shown on the motor’s nameplate.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
number range setting* V/f V/f with Open Loop Flux
E2-01 Motor Rated FLA 0.32 to 6.40 A 1.90 Quick Start, Basic, or Advanced
Note The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter’s rated output current. The default setting de-
pends upon the type of Inverter. (The table shows the default setting for 200-V class, 0.4-kW In-
verters.)
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
g range
(see note 2)

Set the number of poles (E2-04) shown on the motor’s nameplate.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E2-04 Number of Poles 2 to 48 --- 4 --- Q --- Q
Note Q: Quick Start, Basic, or Advanced

Set the motor’s terminal resistance between U and V, V and W, or W and U.
Usually the nameplate of the motor does not provide the motor’s terminal resistance. Contact the motor
manufacturer for a test report on the motor’s terminal resistance to set the following values.
• Type E insulation: Motor’s terminal resistance (Ω) at 75°C x 0.92
• Type B insulation: Motor’s terminal resistance (Ω) at 75°C x 0.92
6-32
• Type F insulation: Motor’s terminal resistance (Ω) at 115°C x 0.87
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
g range

Set the voltage drop (caused by the motor’s leakage inductance) as a percentage of the motor’s rated
voltage in parameter E2-06. Normally this value is not shown on the motor’s nameplate, so it might be
necessary to contact the motor manufacturer. It is also acceptable to set the loss (caused by the motor’s
leakage inductance) as a percentage.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E2-06 Leak Inductance 0.0 to 30.0 % 18.2 Not applicable. Advanced

Note 2. The default setting does not normally need to be changed because the Inverter in operation
adjusts the leak inductance automatically. Set the parameter if a high-speed motor or any oth-
er motor with low inductance is used.
Parameters E2-07 and E2-08 are used in a frequency range even higher than the motor’s rated fre-
quency. It isn’t necessary to set these parameters when operating below the motor’s rated frequency.
Set the following values:
Normally these values aren’t shown on the motor’s nameplate, so it might be necessary to contact the
motor manufacturer.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E2-07 Saturation Comp 1 0.0 to 0.50 --- 0.50 Not applicable.
pp Advanced
E2-08 Saturation Comp 2 0.00 to 0.75 --- 0.75
Note It is possible to operate the motor with the default settings, but motor efficiency may decrease.
Parameter E2-09 is used to compensate for torque lost mechanically in the motor. Normally it isn’t nec-
essary to change this setting, but it can be adjusted when there is a large torque loss to the motor’s
bearings or to a fan or pump connected to the motor. This parameter cannot be changed during opera-
tion.
Set the mechanical loss as a percentage of the motor’s rated output power (W).
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E2-09 Mechanical Loss 0.0 to 10.0 % 0.0 Not applicable. Advanced
6-33
Setting the Slip Compensation Gain

With flux vector control, parameter C3-01 sets the motor’s temperature compensation gain. Adjust this
setting when a torque limit or torque control is being used and the output torque varies with the ambient
temperature. (There is no change to the compensation during speed control operation.)
Normally it isn’t necessary to change this setting. If the motor’s internal parameters change at higher
temperatures and the amount of slip increases, this parameter can be set to adjust the amount of slip
according to an internally calculated temperature rise. This parameter cannot be changed during op-
eration.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
C3-01 Slip Come Gain 0.0 to 2.5 Factor 1.0 B --- B
Note 1. B: Basic or Advanced

Note 2. Adjust the setting if the output torque varies with the ambient temperature when a torque con-
trol or torque limit is being used. The compensation amount increases as the set value is
increased. This adjustment is not required during speed control operation.
6-3-8 Operation for Saturated Output Voltage
Previously, the accuracy of motor speed for vector control was greatly reduced when the
limit of the Inverter’s voltage output was approached (a voltage greater than that of the
input power supply cannot be output).
Set the following parameter to control the output voltage so that the limit will not be
reached, thus maintaining speed accuracy.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
C3-06 Output V limit 0, 1 --- 0 Not applicable. Advanced
Settings
Setting Description
0 Disabled (There is no limit of output voltage saturation. Slip compensation is disabled when the
output voltage saturates.)
1 Enabled (Output voltage saturation is suppressed to keep the speed constantly.)
Note 1. Set the parameter to 1 if the accuracy of speed is required within the rated rpm range. This will
cause an increase of approximately 10% in the output current. Therefore, be sure that the
Inverter has more and sufficient output current.
Note 2. If the Inverter’s input voltage is extremely lower than the rated motor voltage, the accuracy of
the speed of the motor may not be maintained even with the output voltage suppressed.
6-34
6-3-9 Selecting Auto-tuning Carrier Frequency

The auto-tuning carrier frequency is by default set to a value higher than that used for conventional
models to improve the accuracy of auto-tuning. The default setting does not normally need to be
changed.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
C8-30 Carrier in tune 0 to 2 --- 2 Not applicable. Advanced
Settings
Setting Description
1 The auto-tuning carrier frequency is set according to the set value in parameter C6-01.
Note The default setting does not normally need to be changed. Adjust the parameter with the parame-
ter C6-01 set to 0 or 1 if auto-tuning cannot be executed.
6-35
6-4 V/f Control With PG Feedback
This section summarizes the functions that can be used with V/f control with PG feed-
back, and provides detailed explanations of the functions that are specific to V/f control
with PG feedback.
6-4-1 Summary of V/f Control With PG Feedback Functions

The functions specific to V/f control with PG feedback are marked with a “” and described in more
detail later in this section.
Group
p Function Control mode
w/PG Vector Vector
Application
b7 Droop Control Not used. (Can’t be set.) --- --- --- OK
b8 Energy Saving Multi-function input: Sets energy-saving control OK OK --- ---
by energy saving reference.
Tuning
C5 ASR Tuning Speed control adjustment --- OK --- OK
C7 Hunting Prev Hunting prevention settings OK OK --- ---
parameters
a ees OK OK OK OK
E2 Motor Setup (M
(Motor parameters are set manually.)
ll ) OK OK OK OK
6-36
Group Function Control mode
w/PG Vector Vector
Options
F5 Not used ((Do not change
g these settings.)
g ) --- --- --- ---
F6 Not used
F8 SI-F/G Setup Parameter settings for a SYSMAC BUS Interface OK OK OK OK
Card.
F9 CP-916 Setup Parameter settings for a CompoBus/D Communica- OK OK OK OK
tions Card.
H3 Analog Inputs Adjustment/function selection for external analog OK OK OK OK
inputs
H4 Analog Outputs Adjustment/function selection for multi-function ana- OK OK OK OK
log outputs
H5 Not used (Do not change these settings.) --- --- --- ---
Protection L1 Motor Overload Sets electrical/thermal functions that protect the mo- OK OK OK OK
tor.
L6 Torque Detection Sets overtorque detection functions 1 and 2 OK OK OK OK
L7 Torque Limit Not used. (Can’t be set.) --- --- OK OK
L8 Hdwe Protection Hardware overheating and phase loss protection OK OK OK OK
settings
Operator
o2 Key Selections Operator’s key function selection and other parame- OK OK OK OK
ters
6-4-2 Energy-saving Control Function

The energy-saving control function is enabled when the energy-saving command (setting 63) has been
set in a multi-function input (H1-01 through H1-06). Inputting the energy-saving command while there is
a light load causes the Inverter’s output voltage to be reduced and saves energy. Turn OFF the energy-
saving command when a normal load is added.
Parameter b8-01 determines the Inverter’s output voltage when the energy-saving command is input.
Set this value as a percentage of the V/f pattern’s voltage. Parameter L2-04 (the voltage recovery time)
determines the rate at which the output voltage is changed when the energy-saving command is turned
ON or OFF.
Parameter b8-02 determines the lower limit frequency for the energy-saving function. The energy-sav-
ing command is enabled only when the frequency reference is above this lower limit and the motor
speed is within the “speed agree” range.
6-37
Parameters b8-01 and b8-02 cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b8-01 Energy Save Gain 0 to 100 % 80 Advanced Not applicable.
pp
b8-02 Energy Save Freq 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0
Timing Chart
OFF ON
Run command
Energy-saving command OFF ON
Frequency reference ≥ b8-02
Output frequency
Output voltage
L2-04 E1-03 to E1-10 setting × Energy Save Gain (B8-01)
6-4-3 Hunting-prevention Function

The hunting-prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load. This
function is valid with V/f control and V/f with PG control. Parameters C7-01 and C7-02 cannot be
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
C7-01 Hunt Prev Select 0, 1 --- 1 Advanced Not applicable.
Setting Function
0 Disables the hunting-prevention function.
1 Enables the hunting-prevention function.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
C7-02 Hunt Prev Gain 0.0 to Multi- 1.00 Advanced Not applicable.
2.50 ples
Normally it isn’t necessary to change these parameters. Adjust these parameters as follows if hunting
occurs with a light load.
6-38
• Increase the setting in C7-02 if vibration occurs when operating with a light load.
(If the setting is increased too much, the current can fall to the point where stalling occurs.)
• Decrease the setting in C7-02 if stalling occurs.
• Disable the hunting-prevention function (C7-01 = 0) if high responsiveness is more important than
suppressing vibration.
6-4-4 Setting Motor Parameters

The motor parameters other than the V/f pattern parameters are described below:
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
g range
(see note 2)

Note 3. These settings are used as reference values for the motor slip compensation function.
Set the motor’s terminal resistance (phase to phase) in parameter E2-05. Normally this value isn’t
shown on the motor’s nameplate, so it might be necessary to contact the motor manufacturer.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
g range

Note 2. This setting is used as a reference value for the torque compensation function.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
g range
E2-10 Tcomp Iron Loss 0 to 65535 W 14 Advanced Not applicable.
Note 1. The default setting varies with the Inverter’s capacity. The above setting applies to 200-V
class, 0.4-kW Inverters.
Note 2. Set the iron core loss in 1-W increments. The default setting does not normally need to be
changed.
Note 3. The set value is used as the reference value for the torque compensation function.
6-39
6-5 Common Functions

This section summarizes the functions that can be used in common among the various
modes, and provides detailed explanations of their operations.
6-5-1 Summary of Common Control Functions

The functions that can be used in common are marked with a “” and described in more detail later in
this section.
Group
w/PG Vector Vector
Application
b7 Droop Control Droop control settings --- --- --- OK
b8 Energy Saving Multi-function input: Sets energy-saving control by ener- OK OK --- ---
gy saving reference.
b9 Zero Servo Zero servo settings --- --- --- OK
Tuning
C5 ASR Tuning Speed control tuning --- OK --- OK
C7 Hunting Prev Hunting prevention settings OK OK --- ---
d5 Torque Control Torque control settings and tuning --- --- --- OK
Motor E1 V/f Pattern Motor settings
se gs OK OK OK OK
E2 Motor Setup OK OK OK OK
E4 V/f Pattern 2 Parameter
a a e e se
settings
gs for second
sec d motor OK OK OK OK
Options
g these settings.)
g ) --- --- --- ---
F6 DO-08 Setup
F8 SI-F/G Setup Parameter settings for a SYSMAC BUS Interface OK OK OK OK
Card.
F9 CP-916 Setup Parameter settings for a CompoBus/D Communica- OK OK OK OK
tions Card.
6-40
w/PG Vector Vector
H3 Analog Inputs Adjustment/function selection for external analog in- OK OK OK OK
puts
outputs
L6 Torque Detection Sets overtorque detection functions 1 and 2 OK OK OK OK
L7 Torque Limit Torque limit settings --- --- OK OK
L8 Hdwe Protection Hardware overheating and phase loss protection set- OK OK OK OK
tings
Operator
o2 Key Selections Operator’s key function selection and other parame- OK OK OK OK
ters
6-5-2 Application Parameters (b)
Setting Operation Source Selection (b1)

• The input methods of parameters or frequency references and the operation methods of the run com-
mand can be set in the Inverter in operation mode. In addition, the following advanced functions are
available.
• The run command already set in the Inverter can be disabled or enabled when switching the Inverter to
local mode from remote mode.
• The run command already set in the Inverter in any mode other than drive mode can be disabled or
enabled.
• Set the parameter according to the application.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b1-07 LOC/REM RUN 0, 1 --- 0 Advanced
Set
Explanation of Settings
Setting Description
0 The run command already set is disabled (when the Inverter is switched to local mode
from remote mode. The Inverter will start operating with the run command input again.)
1 The run command already set is enabled (and the Inverter will start operating according
to the present run command when the Inverter is switched to local mode from remote
mode).
Note If parameter b1-07 (LOC/REM RUN Sel) is set to 1, the run command will not be ignored. In this
case, an Inverter may start operating immediately when switched to remote mode from local
mode. Take necessary measures for safety.
6-41
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b1-08 RUN CMD at 0, 1 --- 0 Advanced
PRG
Setting Description
0 The run command in any mode other than drive mode is disabled. (The Inverter will start
operating with the run command input again in drive mode.)
1 A run command is enabled. (The Inverter will start operating according to the present run
command in drive mode or any other mode.)
Note The run command is disabled if the Digital Operator is specified with parameter b1-02
set to 0.
Note If the parameter b1-08 is set to 1, the Inverter will start operating regardless of whether parame-
ters are adjusted in program mode or not. Take necessary safety measures to prevent accidents.
Setting DC Injection Braking (b2-01 to 04)

The DC injection braking function decelerates by applying a DC magnetic field to the motor.
DC injection braking time at start:
This is effective for temporarily stopping and then restarting, without regenerative processing, a mo-
tor coasting by inertia.
DC injection braking time at stop:
When there is a large load, this is used to prevent coasting by inertia when the motor is not complete-
ly stopped by normal deceleration. The stopping time can be shortened by lengthening the DC injec-
tion braking time or increasing the DC injection braking current.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b2-01 DC Inj Start Freq 0.0 to Hz 0.5 Basic or Advanced
10.0
b2-02 DC Inj Current 0 to 100 % 50 Basic or Advanced ---
b2-03 DC Inj 0.0 to Sec 0.00 Basic or Advanced
Time@Start 10.00
b2-04 DC Inj 0.0 to Sec 0.50 Basic or Advanced
Time@Stop 10.00
• For the excitation level (b2-01), set the frequency for beginning DC injection braking at the time of
deceleration. If the excitation level is lower than the minimum output frequency (E1-09), the DC injec-
tion braking will begin from the minimum output frequency.
Note 1. In flux vector control mode, DC injection braking becomes the initial excitation starting fre-
quency at the time of deceleration. In that case, braking starts from the excitation level regard-
less of the minimum output frequency setting.
Note 2. The excitation level is also used as the operating frequency for the zero servo function (for flux
vector control only).
6-42
• For the DC injection braking current (b2-02), set the value for the current that is output at the time of DC
injection braking. DC injection braking current is set as a percentage of Inverter rated output current,
with the Inverter rated output current taken as 100%. If the DC injection braking time (parameters
b2-03 and b2-04) is longer than one second, set the DC injection braking current to 50% or less.
• For the DC injection braking time at start (b2-03), set the DC injection braking operating time for when
the motor is started.
• For the DC injection braking time at stop (b2-04), set the DC injection braking operating time for when
the motor is stopped.
DC Injection (Initial Excitation) Timing Chart
Output frequency
E1-09 The larger of b2-01

(Min. output frequency) or E1-09
Time
b2-03 b2-04
(DC injection braking time at start) (DC injection braking
time at stop)
Setting Magnetic Field Compensation (b2-08)

When using the “DC injection braking at startup” (initial excitation) function to bring up the motor’s mag-
netic flux before running machinery that requires high starting torque, it may take some time for the
magnetic flux to rise sufficiently. This depends upon the motor’s electrical time constant, and is espe-
cially true with high-capacity motors.
This function can be used to apply a stronger magnetic flux current when the “DC injection braking at
startup” (initial excitation) function starts, so that the magnetic field in the motor rises faster and more
reliably.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b2-08 Field Comp@start 0 to 500 1% 0 Not applicable. Advanced
Note When b2-08 is 100%, it indicates the motor’s no-load current value (motor magnetic flux current).
6-43
Timing Chart
Run command
Output frequency
The motor excitation current is limited to the

Motor excitation current b2-08 motor’s rated current or 80% of the Inverter’s
rated current, whichever is smaller.
Magnetic flux
current of
motor under
b2-08 = 100% b2-03
control
Control mode Baseblock time Speed control
Startup DC braking (initial excitation)
• The magnetic flux in the motor can be brought up faster by setting b2-08 greater than 100% so that a
larger current flows when the “DC injection braking at startup” (initial excitation) function starts. The
magnetic flux will rise approximately twice as fast when b2-08 is set to 200%.
• The magnetic flux in the motor will rise more slowly when b2-08 is set below 100%. (In general do not
set b2-08 below 100%, although operation with b2-08 = 0% is the same as b2-08 = 100% and the
magnetic flux is raised by the set DC injection braking current (b2-02).)
• The sound generated from the motor during startup DC injection braking may increase as the magnet-
ic compensation value in b2-08 is increased.
• If the delay before the start of control due to the DC injection braking (initial excitation) time at start
setting in b2-03 is too long, do not use this compensation function. Use the DC injection braking multi-
function input (set value: 60) instead and raise the motor magnetic flux in advance while the motor is
stopped.
Setting Speed Search (b3)

The speed search function finds the speed of a coasting motor and starts up smoothly from that speed. It
is effective in situations such as switching from a commercial power supply.
The speed search function applies a lower voltage than normal, and finds the speed at the current flow-
ing at that time. The speed search is determined to be completed when the frequency is lowered from
the maximum frequency (or a set frequency) and the current that is output falls below a fixed value.
When the speed search is completed, the speed is accelerated to the frequency reference according to
the acceleration time that has been set. For V/f with PG or flux vector control, detection occurs at the
motor speed with PG feedback.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b3-01 Spd Srch at Start 0, 1 --- 0 (See Advanced
note.)
Note When the control mode is switched, the factory default setting changes as follows:
V/f control: 0; V/f with PG: 1; open-loop vector 0; flux vector: 1
6-44
Set value Contents
0 Speed search disabled: Motor starts from minimum output frequency.
1 Speed search enabled: Speed search is performed from maximum output frequency and
motor is started. (In control modes with PG, i.e., V/f with PG and flux vector, motor starts
from the motor speed.)
Set “1” to use the speed search function. To use speed search freely in control modes without PG, i.e.,
V/f control and open-loop vector control, set the multi-function contact input selection (H1-01 to H1-06)
to 61 or 62 (external search command).
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b3-02 Spd Srch Current 0 to 200 % 100 Ad- --- Advanced ---
vanced
b3-03 Spd Srch Dec 0.1 to Sec 2.0 Ad- --- Advanced ---
Time 10.0 vanced
L2-03 PwrL Baseblock t 0.0 to Sec 0.5 (see Basic or Advanced
0.5 note)
Note The factory-set default varies depending on the Inverter capacity. The values shown in the table
are for 200-V class, 0.4-kW.
• For the speed search operating current (b3-02), set the operating current for the speed search. If re-
starting is not possible with the set value, then lower the set value. Set the speed search operating
current as a percentage of the Inverter’s rated output current, with the Inverter’s rated output current
taken as 100%.
• For the speed search deceleration time (b3-03), set the output frequency deceleration time for while
the speed search is being performed.
• When the speed search and DC injection braking are set, set the minimum baseblock time (L2-03).
For the minimum baseblock time, set the time to wait for the motor’s residual voltage to dissipate. If an
overcurrent is detected when starting a speed search or DC injection braking, raise the set value to
prevent a fault from occurring.
Speed Search Timing Chart
Run command
Deceleration time set for b3-03

Maximum frequency
Frequency reference
that is set
Output frequency
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03)
Output current
6-45
Setting the Timer Function (b4)

The timer function is enabled when the timer function input (set value: 18) and the timer function output
(set value: 12) are set for the multi-function input and multi-function output respectively. These inputs
and outputs serve as general-purpose I/O. Chattering of sensors, switches, and so on, can be pre-
vented by setting a delay time.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b4-01 Delay-ON Timer 0.0 to Sec 0.0 Advanced
300.0
b4-02 Delay-OFF Timer 0.0 to Sec 0.0 Advanced
300.0

• When the timer function input ON time is longer than the value set for b4-01 (timer function ON-delay
time), the timer function output turns ON.
• When the timer function input OFF time is longer than the value set for b4-02 (timer function OFF-
delay time), the timer function output turns OFF.
Operation Example
Timer function input ON ON
Timer function output ON ON
b4-01 b4-02 b4-01 b4-02
Setting PID Control (b5)

The PID control function is a control system that matches a feedback value (i.e., a de-
tected value) to the set target value. Combining proportional (P), integral (I), and deriva-
tive (D) control makes control possible even for a mechanical system with dead time.
The PID control provided by the SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Inverter is not suited for control that
requires a responsiveness of 50 ms or less.
This section explains the PID control applications and operations, along with the param-
eter settings and tuning procedure.
6-46
PID Control Applications
The following table shows examples of PID control applications using the Inverter.
Application Control contents Sensors used
(example)
Speed control Speeds are matched to target values as speed Tacho-generator
information in a mechanical system.
Speed information for another mechanical system is
input as target values, and synchronized control is
executed by feeding back actual speeds.
Pressure control Pressure information is returned as feedback for Pressure sensor
stable pressure control.
Flow control Flow information is returned as feedback for accurate Flow sensor
flow control.
Temperature control Temperature information is returned as feedback to Thermocouple
control temperature by turning a fan. Thermistor
PID Control Operations

In order to distinguish the separate PID control operations (i.e., proportional, integral, and derivative),
the following diagram shows the changes in the control input (i.e., the output frequency) when the devi-
ation between the target value and the feedback is held constant.
Deviation
Time
Control input PID control

I control
D control
P control
Time
• P Control
A control input proportional to the deviation is output. The deviation cannot be zeroed by P control
alone.
• I Control
A control input which is an integral of the deviation is output. This is effective for matching the feedback
to the target value. Sudden changes, however, cannot be followed.
• D Control
A control input which is an integral of the deviation is output. Quick response to sudden changes is
possible.
• PID Control
Optimum control is achieved by combining the best features of P, I, and D control.
Types of PID Control

Two types of PID control are possible with the 3G3FV: measured-value derivative PID control and basic
PID control. The type that is normally used is measured-value derivative PID control.
6-47
w Measured-value Derivative PID Control
With measured-value derivative PID control, the feedback value is differentiated for PID control. Re-
sponse is possible with respect to changes both in target values and the control object.
Target value P Control object
I
D
Feedback value
w Basic PID Control

This is the basic form of PID control. When the D control response is adjusted to follow changes in the
control object, overshooting and undershooting can occur with changes in the target value.
Target value P Control object
Feedback value
Inverter’s PID Control Function

The following illustration is a block diagram of the Inverter’s internal PID control.
Frequency reference 2 through 8

Frequency reference input /Inching frequency
(voltage)
Multi-step reference
Frequency reference 1 Frequency reference
Frequency reference
from Optional Card Other than H3-03 or
H3-09 set to C
Target value
input or frequency ref-
erence input (current)
input or frequency ref- Feedback value
erence input (current)
6-48
Frequency reference
PID upper limit
Proportional gain (P)
Target value b5-02

Integral (I) upper limit
Integral time (I) Multi-function input
U1-38 U1-36 Integral hold input
PID primary
delay time
ZERO constant b5-08
Integral
hold
Multi-function input
Integral reset input
PID output
Derivative time (D) characteris-
tics selection
ZERO
PID offset
adjustment
Feedback value PID output gain
U1-37
U1-24
Derivative time (D)
Reverse direction
limit
Limit
PID output
reverse
selection
PID control function

selection
Multi-function input
PID control ON/OFF
Inverter output
frequency
6-49
PID Control Settings
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b5-01 PID Mode 0 to 4 --- 0 Advanced

Set value Contents
0 PID disabled
1 PID enabled (Deviation signal is put through derivative control.)
2 PID enabled (Feedback signal is put through derivative control.)
3 PID enabled. (Frequency reference and PID control/deviation signal are put through
derivative control.)
4 PID enabled. (Frequency reference and PID control/feedback signal are put through
derivative control.)
Note 1. To enable PID control, set 1 through 4. (Normally 2 or 4 is used for measured-value derivative
PID control.)
Note 2. If the target speed of the application (e.g., tension control) is rather clear and PID control is
required for fine tuning, set 3 or 4 for frequency reference and PID control.
Setting Target Values for PID Control
The following guidelines can be used to select target values for PID Control.
c Contents
Frequency reference input, The frequency source selected for parameter b1-01 is used as the
voltage: Terminal 13 target value.
Note 1. If the PID control target value is not set for a multi-function ana-
log input or frequency reference (current) selection (H3-05,
Setting via Digital Operator H3-09), then the setting of b1-01 is used automatically.
Note 2. Frequency references 2 to 8 and the inching reference are
enabled regardless of the setting of b1
b1-01.
01
Option frequency reference
Note 3. Operation will be clearer if o1-03 is set to 1 (% unit) when set-
ting from a Digital Operator.
Multi-function analog input: Set C for the function selection of multi-function analog input terminal
Terminal 16 16 (H3-05) to select the PID target value.
Frequency reference, current: Set C for the function selection of frequency reference (current)
Terminal 14 terminal 14 (H3-09) to select the PID target value.
Note When using different input signals for frequency reference and PID control, set the PID target
value to either a multi-function analog input or the frequency reference (current).
Setting Feedback Values for PID Control
The following guidelines can be used to select feedback values for PID Control.
c Contents
Multi-function analog input: Set B for the function selection of multi-function analog input terminal
Terminal 16 16 (H3-05) to select the PID feedback value.
Frequency reference, current: Set B for the function selection of frequency reference (current)
Terminal 14 terminal 14 (H3-09) to select the PID feedback value.
Note 1. Use the gain and bias settings for the analog inputs to adjust the feedback value.
6-50
Note 2. PID control feedback cannot be set for more than one analog input.
Note 3. Use different settings for the PID target value and the PID feedback value.
Adjust the responsiveness of the PID control by means of the proportional gain (P), integral time (I), and
derivative time (D).
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b5-02 PID Gain 0.00 to Multi- 1.00 Advanced
25.00 ple
b5-03 PID I Time 0.0 to Sec 1.0 Advanced
360.0
b5-05 PID D Time 0.0 to Sec 0.00 Advanced
10.00
These parameters can be changed during operation.
Explanation of Set Values
• Optimize the responsiveness by adjusting it while operating an actual load (mechanical system). (Re-
fer to Adjusting PID Control on page 6-55.)
• Any control (P, I, or D) that is set to zero (0.0, 0.00) will not operate.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b5-04 PID I Limit 0.0 to % 100.0 Advanced
100.0
This parameter can be changed during operation.
• This parameter prevents the calculated value of the integral control in the PID control from exceeding
the fixed amount.
• Parameter b5-04 is preset at the factory to the optimum value for most applications, so there is normal-
ly no need to change the setting.
• Reduce the set value if there is a risk of load damage, or of the motor going out of step, by the Inverter’s
response when the load suddenly changes. If the set value is reduced too much, the target value and
the feedback value will not match.
• Set this parameter as a percentage of the maximum frequency, with the maximum frequency taken as
100%.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b5-06 PID Limit 0.0 to % 100.0 Advanced
100.0
• Parameter b5-06 prevents the frequency reference after PID control from exceeding the fixed amount.
• Set this parameter as a percentage of the maximum frequency, with the maximum frequency taken as
100%.
6-51
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b5-07 PID Offset –100.0 % 0.0 Advanced
to 100.0

• Parameter b5-07 adjusts the PID control offset.
• If both the target value and the feedback value are set to zero, adjust the Inverter’s output frequency to
zero.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b5-08 PID Delay Time 0.00 to Sec 0.00 Advanced
10.00

• Parameter b5-08 is the low-pass filter setting for PID control outputs.
• Parameter b5-08 is preset at the factory to the optimum value for most applications, so there is normal-
ly no need to change the setting.
• If the viscous friction of the mechanical system is high, or if the rigidity is low, causing the mechanical
system to vibrate, increase the set value so that it is higher than the vibration frequency period. This
will decrease the responsiveness, but it will prevent the vibration.
Jump Frequency Function

While the Inverter is in PID control, a frequency band can be avoided by setting parameters d3-01
through d3-04 to the desired frequencies. Use this function to prevent vibration of the mechanical sys-
tem.
Note The frequency band to be set should be as narrow as possible, otherwise PID control will not func-
tion properly and the mechanical system may vibrate.
PID Control Reverse Characteristics

Use the following parameter to set or adjust PID control characteristics.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b5-09 Output Level Set 0, 1 --- 0 Advanced
Set value Contents
0 Positive PID output.
1 Negative PID output. (–1 is added to the operation result of PID control.)
6-52
• Positive or reverse characteristic PID control is possible.
• Set the characteristic according to the relationship between the Inverter’s output frequency and the
feedback value.
Positive characteristic: The feedback value increases when the Inverter’s output frequency in-
creases.
Negative characteristic: The feedback value increases when the Inverter’s output frequency de-
creases.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b5-10 Output Gain 0.0 to Times 1.0 Advanced
25.0
• Use this parameter to set the multiplication ratio of the Inverter’s final output under PID control.
• The entire PID control amount can be adjusted. For frequency reference + PID control, the adjustment
of PID control of the frequency reference can be made.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b5-11 Output Rev Set 0, 1 --- 0 Advanced
Set value Contents
0 Reverse rotation disabled. (If the final output is negative, the output will be limited to 0
and the motor will not rotate in the reverse direction.)
1 Reverse rotation enabled. (If the final output is negative, the motor will rotate according to
the output value.)
• Set this parameter to enable or disable the motor to rotate in the reverse direction if the Inverter’s final
output under PID control is negative.
The reverse direction means the direction opposite to the direction specified by the run command in-
put. Therefore, if a run command is input for reverse rotation, the motor will rotate in the forward direc-
tion. If a run command is input for forward rotation input, the motor will rotate in the opposite.
• The parameter is by default set to 0 in consideration of safety. Set this parameter according to the
application.
Note 1. If the parameter is set to 1, the motor will rotate in the reverse rotation when run command for
forward rotation is input. Take necessary safety measure for the prevention of accidents.
Note 2. If parameter b1-04 (Disabling Reverse Operation) is set to 1, the motor will not rotate in the
reverse direction even with the parameter b5-11 set to 1.
Feedback Loss Detection for PID Control

This function is used to detect the loss of the feedback signal (e.g., as a result of line disconnection or
short-circuiting) when the feedback voltage drops suddenly.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b5-12 Fb los Det Sel 0 to 2 --- 0 Advanced
6-53
Set value Contents
0 Feedback loss detection disabled.
1 Feedback loss detection enabled. (The Inverter will continue operating with a warning
output turned ON.)
2 Feedback loss detection enabled. (The Inverter’s protective function shuts off the output.)
• Set this parameter to disable or enable the feedback loss detection function and to specify the opera-
tion of the Inverter after the loss of the feedback signal is detected.
• Feedback loss will be detected if the Inverter receives feedback values lower than the feedback loss
detection level set with b5-13 for the time set with b5-14.
• The loss of the feedback can be checked with the following output.
If 1 (warning) is set: Multi-function contact output or multi-function 1/2 output will turn ON as an
alarm (setting: 10).
If 2 (protective function) is set: The fault contact output will turn ON.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b5-13 Bb loss Det Lvl 0 to 100 % 0 Advanced
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b5-14 Fb los Det Time 0.0 to Sec 1.0 Advanced
25.5
• These parameters are used to set reference values for detecting the loss of the feedback signal for
PID control.
• Set parameter b5-13 to the detection level in 1% increments based on the feedback value correspond-
ing to the maximum frequency as 100%.
• Set parameter b5-14 to the detection time in 1-s increments so that the loss of the feedback signal will
be detected when the time set elapses.
PID Control Switching Function of Multi-function Input

By setting multi-function inputs 1 through 6 (the parameters H1-01 through H1-06) to the following func-
tions, PID control characteristics can be selected.
• PID control ON/OFF (setting: 19)
ON: PID control disabled (The Inverter is in normal control.)
PID or normal control function can be selected in advance.
• PID control integral value reset (setting: 30)
ON: The integral value is reset.
The PID integral value will be reset to zero and the integral function disabled. This can be used to
handle the friction of the mechanism when stopped or to reduce gain.
• PID control integral value hold (setting: 31)
ON: The integral value is retained.
The integral value in PID control can be fixed with the parameter set. This can be used to handle the
friction of the mechanism when stopped or to reduce gain or fluctuations.
6-54
Adjusting PID Control
w Step Response
This section explains how to adjust PID control parameters while observing the step response of the
control object.
1. Measuring the Step Response Waveform

Use the following procedure to measure the step response waveform.
a) Connect a load under the same conditions as for normal operation.
b) Set parameter b5-01 to “0” (PID control disabled).
c) Set the Inverter’s acceleration time as low as possible, and input the step frequency reference.
d) Measure the response waveform of the feedback (i.e., the detection value).
Note Conduct the measurement so as to know the timing with the step input.
2. Calculating the PID Parameters

Draw a tangential line at the steepest point of the gradient of the step response waveform mea-
sured in procedure 1.
Measuring R
Measure the inclination of the tangential line, with the target value as “1.”
Measuring L
Measure the time (unit: seconds) until the tangential line from the beginning of the step input joins
the time axis.
Measuring T
Measure the time (unit: seconds) from the point where the tangential line joins the time axis to the
point where it meets the target value.
Response
Target value
Time
6-55
Calculating the PID Parameters
The PID parameters can be calculated from the R, L, and T values measured above, as shown in
the following table.
Proportional gain (P) Integral time (I) Derivative time (D)
(b5-02) (b5-03) (b5-05)
P control 0.3/RL --- ---
PI control 0.35/RL 1.2T ---
PID control 0.6/RL T 0.5L
First set the PID control parameters by this method, and then make fine adjustments.
If the viscous friction of the mechanical system is high, or if the rigidity is low, these set values may not be
optimum.
w Making Manual Adjustments
Use the following procedure to make adjustments while using PID control and observing the response
waveform.
1. Set parameter b5-01 to “1” to “4” (PID control enabled).

2. Increase the proportional gain P (b5-02) in the non-vibration range.
3. Decrease the integral time I (b5-03) in the non-vibration range.
4. Decrease the derivative time I (b5-05) in the non-vibration range.
Making Fine Adjustments

First set the individual PID control parameters, and then make fine adjustments.
w Reducing Overshooting
If overshooting occurs, shorten the derivative time (D) and lengthen the integral time (I).
Response Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
w Rapidly Stabilizing Control Status

To rapidly stabilize the control conditions even when overshooting occurs, shorten the integral time (I)
and lengthen the derivative time (D).
After adjustment
Time
6-56
w Reducing Long-cycle Vibration
If vibration occurs with a longer cycle than the integral time (I) set value, it means that integral operation
is strong. The vibration will be reduced as the integral time (I) is lengthened.
After adjustment
Time
w Reducing Short-cycle Vibration

If the vibration cycle is short and vibration occurs with a cycle approximately the same as the derivative
time (D) set value, it means that the derivative operation is strong. The vibration will be reduced as the
derivative time (D) is shortened.
If vibration cannot be reduced even by setting the derivative time (D) to “0.00” (no derivative control),
then either lower the proportional gain (P) or raise the PID’s primary delay time constant.
After adjustment
Time
Setting the Reference Hold Function (b6)

The reference hold or dwell function is used to temporarily hold the output frequency when starting or
stopping a motor with a heavy load. This helps to prevent stalling.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
b6-01 Dwell Ref @Start 0.0 to Hz 0.0 Advanced
400.0
b6-02 Dwell 0.0 to Sec 0.0 Advanced
Time@Start 10.0
b6-03 Dwell Ref @Stop 0.0 to Hz 0.0 Advanced
400.0
b6-04 Dwell Time 0.0 to Sec 0.0 Advanced
@Stop 10.0
6-57
The relation between these parameters is shown in the following diagram.
Output frequency
b6-01
b6-03 Time
b6-02 b6-04
6-5-3 Tuning Parameters (C)
Setting the S-curve Characteristic Function (C2)

• Using the S-curve characteristic function for acceleration and deceleration can reduce shock to the
machinery when stopping and starting.
• With the SYSDRIVE 3G3FV, S-curve characteristic times can be set respectively for beginning accel-
eration, ending acceleration, beginning deceleration, and ending deceleration.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
C2-01 SCrv Acc @ Start 0.00 to Sec 0.20 Advanced
2.50
C2-02 SCrv Acc @ End 0.00 to Sec 0.20 Advanced
2.50
C2-03 SCrv Dec @ 0.00 to Sec 0.20 Advanced
Start 2.50
C2-04 SCrv Dec @ End 0.00 to Sec 0.20 Advanced
2.50

• The relation between these parameters is shown in the following diagram.
Output frequency
Time
6-58
Note When the S-curve characteristic time is set, the acceleration and deceleration times will be
lengthened as follows:
Acceleration time = Selected acceleration time + (S-curve at beginning of acceleration + S-curve
at end of acceleration) / 2
Deceleration time = Selected deceleration time + (S-curve at beginning of deceleration + S-curve
at end of deceleration) / 2
Setting Motor Slip Compensation (C3)

• The motor slip compensation function calculates the motor torque according to the output current, and
sets gain to compensate for output frequency.
• This function is used to improve speed accuracy when operating with a load. It is mainly effective with
V/f control (without PG).
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
C3-01 Slip Come Gain 0.0 to Multi- 1.0 (See Basic or ___ Basic or Advanced
2.5 ple note.) Adv.
V/f control: 0.0; V/f with PG: 1.0; open-loop vector 0; flux vector: 1.0
When “1.0” is set, this function compensates for the rated slip that has been set, by the rated torque
output.
With flux vector control, this becomes the gain to compensate for slip caused by motor temperature
variation. (Refer to page 6-34.)
w Motor Slip Compensation Gain Adjustment Procedure
1. Correctly set the motor rated slip (parameter E2-02) and the motor no-load current (parameter
E2-03). The motor rated slip can be calculated by means of the following equation, using the num-
bers that are shown on the motor’s nameplate.
Motor rated slip = Motor rated frequency (Hz) – rated speed (r/min) x motor (No. of poles) / 120
(With vector control, the motor rated slip is automatically set by auto-tuning.
2. Set the slip compensation gain (parameter C3-01 to “1.0.” (If it is set to “0.0,” slip compensation will
be disabled.)
3. Operate with a load, measure the speed, and adjust the slip compensation gain (in increments of
0.1). If the speed is lower than the target value, increase the slip compensation gain. If the speed is
higher than the target value, decrease the slip compensation gain.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
C3-02 Slip Come Time 0 to ms 200 (See Adv. --- Advanced ---
10000 note.)
Note When the control mode is switched, the values change as follows:
V/f control: 2,000; open-loop vector: 200
6-59
Adjust the slip compensation primary delay time if the motor slip compensation responsiveness is low,
or if the speeds are unstable. (This does not normally need to be set.) If responsiveness is low, lower the
set value. If speeds are unstable, raise the set value.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
C3-03 Slip Come Limit 0 to 250 % 200 Adv. --- Advanced ---
Parameter C3-03 sets the slip compensation limit as a percentage of motor rated slip (E2-02), with the
motor rated slip taken as 100%.
If the speed is lower than the target value and does not change even when the slip compensation gain is
adjusted, it is possible that the slip compensation limit has been reached. Raise the limit and then check
again. Make sure, however, that the value of the sum of the command frequency and the slip com-
pensation limit does not exceed the speed capacity of the machinery.
Slip compensation limit The limit is as shown below in the constant
E1-04 torque and constant output areas.
x C3 - 03
E1-06
C3 - 03
Output frequency
E1-06 E1-04
E1-06: Maximum voltage frequency
E1-04: Maximum output frequency
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
C3-04 Slip Come Regen 0, 1 --- 0 Advanced ---

Explanation of Set Value
Set value Contents
0 Slip compensation disabled during regeneration
1 Slip compensation enabled during regeneration
Parameter C3-04 enables or disables slip compensation during regeneration. The amount of regenera-
tion is momentarily increased when this function is used, so some control option (e.g., control resistor,
Control Resistor Unit, Braking Unit) may be required.
Setting the Torque Compensation Function (C4)

The torque compensation function detects increases in the motor load, and increases the output torque
to compensate.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
C4-01 Torq Comp Gain 0.00 to Multi- 1.00 Advanced ---
2.50 ple
6-60
This parameter can be changed during operation, but normally no adjustments are required. Make ad-
justments in the following cases:
If the wiring distance between the Inverter and the motor is long, raise the set value.
If the motor capacity is less than the Inverter capacity (the maximum application motor capacity),
raise the set value.
If the motor generates excessive vibration, lower the set value.
Set the torque compensation gain so that the output current at low-speed rotation does not exceed 50%
of the Inverter’s rated output current. If the setting exceeds 100% of the Inverter’s rated output current,
the Inverter may be damaged.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
C4-02 Torq Comp Time 0 to ms (See Advanced ---
10000 note.)
V/f control: 200; V/f with PG: 200; open-loop vector 20
The torque compensation time constant does not normally need to be adjusted, but make adjustments
in the following cases:
If the motor generates excessive vibration, raise the set value.
If motor responsiveness is low, lower the set value.
Setting the Carrier Frequency (C6)

The carrier frequency characteristics differ according to the control mode.
V/f control and V/f with PG control: Carrier frequency variable setting possible.
Open-loop vector control and flux vector control: Constant frequency (The carrier frequency upper
limit only is set.)
The carrier frequency does not normally need to be adjusted, but make adjustments in the following
cases:
If the wiring distance between the Inverter and the motor is long, lower the carrier frequency. The
standards are 15 mHz or less for a wiring distance of 50 meters or less; 10 mHz or less for 100 me-
ters or less; and 5 mHz or less for over 100 meters.
If there are great irregularities in speed or torque, lower the carrier frequency.
Setting the Carrier Frequency and Inverter Overload “OL2”
For a 400-V Inverter, if the carrier frequency is set to a value higher than the default setting, the
Inverter overload detection value will decrease in consideration of an increase in the heat that will be
generated by the change in the carrier frequency. Since the detection value is set to decrease by
approximately 15% for an increase of 2 kHz, carefully set the frequency so that the rated motor cur-
rent can be output.
6-61
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
C6-01 Carrier Freq Max 0.4 to kHz (See Basic or Advanced
15.0 note.)
(See
note.)
C6-02 Carrier Freq Min 0.4 to kHz (See Advanced ---
15.0 note.)
(See
note.)
C6-03 Carrier Freq Gain 0 to 99 Multi- 0 Advanced ---
ple
Note The setting range and the factory default setting vary according to the Inverter capacity. The table
shows a value of 200-V class, 0.4 kW.
In the vector control modes, the carrier frequency is determined by the carrier frequency upper limit
(parameter C6-01).
In the V/f control modes (both with and without PG), the carrier frequency can be changed in response to
the output frequency by setting the carrier frequency lower limit (parameter C6-02) and the carrier fre-
quency proportional gain (parameter C6-03).
Carrier frequency
The coefficient “K” varies depending on the carrier
frequency upper limit, as described below:
C6-01
C6-02
Output frequency
x (C6-03) x K
Output frequency
E1-04
(Maximum output frequency)
To make the carrier frequency constant, either set the same value for parameters C6-01 and C6-02 or
set the carrier frequency proportional gain (parameter C6-03) to “0” (i.e., fix at upper limit value).
The following settings will generate a parameter setting fault (OPE11):
Carrier frequency upper limit (C6-01) > 5.0 kHz and carrier frequency lower limit (c6-02) x 5.0 kHz
Carrier frequency proportional gain (C6-03) > 6 and (C6-01) < C6-02)
If the lower limit is set higher than the upper limit, the lower limit will be ignored and carrier frequency will
be fixed at the upper limit.
Note For a 400-V Inverter, if the carrier frequency is set to a value higher than the default setting, the
Inverter’s rated output current will decrease. If the Inverter’s overload is detected earlier than the
motor overload fault (OL2), set the carrier frequency to a lower value.
6-62
400-V class 3G3FV-A-E(-A) English model 3G3FV-A-CU/3G3FV-A-CE

Inverter
e e (Japanese model) EN-approved model
capacity Default Reduction in Reduction in Default Reduction in Reduction in
setting rating at rating at setting rating at rating at
10 kHz 15 kHz 10 kHz 15 kHz
0.4 to 5.5 kW 15.0 kHz 100% 100% 15.0 kHz 100% 95%
7.5 kW 12.5 kHz 100% 90% 12.5 kHz 100% 80%
11 kW 12.5 kHz 100% 90% 15.0 kHz 100% 95%
15/18.5 kW 12.5 kHz 100% 90% 10.0 kHz 100% 80%
22 kW 10.0 kHz 100% 80% 8.0 kHz 85% 50%
30 kW 10.0 kHz 100% 80% 8.0 kHz 85% 50%
37 kW 10.0 kHz 100% --- 6.0 kHz 70% ---
45 kW 7.0 kHz 85% --- 6.0 kHz 70% ---
55 to 160 kW 6.0 kHz 70% --- 6.0 kHz 70% ---
185 to 300 kW 2.5 kHz --- --- --- --- ---
6-63
6-5-4 Reference Parameters (d)

Setting the Frequency Reference Function (d2)
The frequency reference function sets the output frequency upper and lower limits.
When the frequency reference is zero and a run command is input, the motor operates at the frequency
reference lower limit (d2-02). The motor will not operate, however, if the lower limit is set lower than the
minimum output frequency (E1-09).
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
d2-01 Ref Upper Limit 0.0 to % 100.0 Basic or Advanced
110.0
d2-02 Ref Lower Limit 0.0 to % 0.0 Basic or Advanced
109.0
Note The frequency reference upper and lower limits are set as a percentage of the maximum output
frequency (E1-04), in increments of 1%.
Internal frequency reference
Frequency reference upper limit (d2-01)
Frequency reference lower limit (d2-02)

Set frequency reference
Setting Prohibiting Frequency (Jump Frequencies) (d3)

This function allows the prohibition or “jumping” of certain frequencies within the Inverter’s output fre-
quency range so that the motor can operate without resonant vibrations caused by some machine sys-
tems. It is also used for deadband control.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
d3-01 Jump Freq 1 0.0 to Hz 0.0 Basic or Advanced
400.0
400.0
400.0
d3-04 Jump Bandwidth 0.0 to Hz 1.0 Basic or Advanced
20.0
To disable this function, set the jump frequency references (d3-01 to d3-03) to 0.0 Hz.
For d3-01 to d3-03, set the center values of the frequencies to be jumped.
For d3-04, set the jump frequency bandwidth. The jump frequency ± the jump bandwidth becomes the
jump frequency range.
Operation is prohibited within the jump frequency range, but changes during acceleration and decelera-
tion are smooth with no jumps.
6-64
Be sure to set the jump frequency so that d3-03 x d3-02 x d3-01.
Internal frequency reference
d3-04
Set frequency reference

d3-03 d3-02 d3-01
Hold Reference Memory Selection (d4-01)

Parameter d4-01 selects whether the held frequency during motor operated potentiometer (MOP) sim-
ulation operation is stored when operation is stopped. MOP operation is enabled by making either of the
following settings for the multi-function inputs (H1-01 to H1-06).
Accel/decel ramp hold (set value: A)
UP command (set value: 10)/DOWN command (set value: 11) {MOP increase/decrease}
When hold status is established by these external signals, specify whether or not the output frequency
is to be retained.
When this function is enabled, operation is re-started after power-up using the frequency reference val-
ue that was retained.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
d4-01 MOP Ref 0, 1 --- 0 Advanced
Memory

Setting Description
0 Disabled. Held frequency during MOP operation is not retained. If a stop command is
given, or if power is removed, the frequency reference is reset to 0Hz. Restart after
operation stoppage or power-up begins at zero.
1 Enabled. Held frequency during MOP operation is retained. If a stop command is given,
or if power is removed, operation resumes at the held frequency reference when the run
command is restored.
For information regarding the accel/decel stop (HOLD) command and the UP and DOWN commands,
refer to 6-5-7 External Terminal Function (H).
6-65
Trim Control Level (d4-02)

This function sets the motor operated “trim” control level as a percentage of maximum output frequency
in units of 1%. When trim control increase and decrease are selected as multi-function contact input
functions (setting: H1__ = “1C” and “1D” respectively), the trim control level is added to or subtracted
from the analog frequency reference, when each respective contact closes.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
d4-02 Trim Control Lvl 0 to 100 % 25 Advanced
If the minus speed command is ON and the result of the subtraction is beyond zero, the output frequen-
cy will become zero.
For information regarding the plus and minus speed commands, refer to the explanations of the multi-
function inputs (H1) in 6-5-7 External Terminal Function (H).
6-5-5 Motor Parameters (E)
Intermediate Output Frequency 2 and Intermediate Output Frequency

Voltage 2
For vector control of a special motor, such as a constant power-output motor or machine tool shaft mo-
tor, the motor may not fully operate in the constant output area (i.e., in frequency range as high as or
higher than the rated frequency).
If the high-performance control of the motor is required in the constant output area, V/f characteristics to
compensate for voltage increases caused by the motor inductance must be set.
These parameter settings are not required for normal motor control.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E1-11 Mid Frequency B 0.0 to Times 0.0 Advanced
400.0
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E1-12 Mid Voltage B 0.0 to Times 0.0 Advanced
255.0
(see
note)
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E1-13 Base Voltage 0.0 to Times 0.0 Advanced Quick startup
255.0
(see
note)
6-66
Note The above upper limit values are for 200-V class Inverters. Double the values for 400-V class
Inverters.
Output voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
Note 1. Set so that the following condition will be satisfied.

E1-06 x E1-11 x E1-04
Note 2. The function is disabled if the parameters E-11 and E1-12 are both set to 0.0.
Note 3. If auto-tuning is executed, the parameters E1-05 and E1-13 will be set to the set voltage.
Two-motor Switching Control Function

This function enables switching control between two motors using one Inverter. The following function
additions were made to support this new functionality.
Setting Control Mode and Motor Parameters for Second Motor

Set the following parameter for the second motor. The settings of parameters E1 and E2 are used for the
first motor.
If the motor is operated in flux or open-loop vector control mode, set the motor selection for auto-tuning
to 2.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E3-01 Control Method 0 to 3 --- 2 Advanced
Setting Description
0 Normal V/f control
1 V/f control with PG
2 Open-loop vector control
3 Flux vector control
Set the control mode for the second motor. The set value will not be set to the default value when the
Inverter is initialized.
6-67
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E4-01 Max. Frequency 40.0 to Hz 60.0 Advanced
400.0
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E4-02 Max. Voltage 0.0 to V 200.0 Advanced
255.0 (see note
(see 2)
note 2)
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E4-03 Base Frequency 0.0 to Hz 60.0 Advanced
400.0
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E4-04 Mid Frequency 0.0 to Hz 3.0 (see Advanced Not ap-
400.0 note 3) plicable.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E4-05 Mid Voltage 0.0 to V 11.0 (see Advanced Not ap-
255.0 notes 2, plicable.
(see 3)
note 2)
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E4-06 Min Frequency 0.0 to Hz 0.5 (see Advanced
400.0 note 3)
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E4-07 Min Voltage 0.0 to V 2.0 (see Advanced Not ap-
255.0 notes 2, plicable.
(see 3)
note 2)
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E5-01 Motor Rated FLA 0.32 to A 1.9 (see Advanced
6.40 note 3)
(see
note 4)
6-68
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E5-02 Motor Rated Slip 0.00 to Hz 2.90 (see Advanced
20.00 note 3)
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E5-03 No-Load Current 0.00 to A 1.20 (see Advanced
2.90 note 3)
(see
note 5)
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E5-04 Number of Poles 2 to 48 --- 4 Not ap- Ad- Not applica- Ad-
plicable. vanced ble. vanced
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E5-05 Term Resistance 0.000 to Ω 9.842 Advanced
65.000 (see note
3)
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
E5-06 Leak Inductance 0.0 to % 18.2 (see Not applicable. Advanced
40.0 note 3)
The above parameters are used to set the V/f characteristics and constants of the second motor. Set
them like the parameters E2-01 through E2-06 and E1-04 through E1-10.
Note 1. If the first motor and second motor are different to each other in maximum frequency setting,
the higher set value of them will be the set range of the frequency reference.
Note 2. The upper limit values and default settings are for 200-V class Inverter models. Double the
values for 400-V class Inverters.
Note 3. The default settings vary with the Inverter’s capacity or a change in the control mode. The
values for 200-V class, 0.4-kW Inverters are shown.
Note 4. The setting range is between 10% and 200% of the Inverter’s rated current. The value for
200-V class, 0.4-kW Inverters is shown.
Note 5. The setting range is between 0.00 and 0.1 less than the Inverter’s rated current. The value for
200-V class, 0.4-kw Inverters is shown.
Switching Control for Two Motors

Set a multi-function input 1 to 6 (the parameters H1-01 to H1-06) to 16 for motor switching. When the
motor switching input turns ON, the constants of the second motor will be selected. Switch the following
6-69
external wires to the second motor when the constants are selected. By setting the multi-function con-
tact output or the multi-function output 1 or 2 to 1C for motor selection, the status of the switching of the
motor can be checked. The output will turn ON when the second motor is selected.
• Power wires U, V, and W
• PG signal line (if PG is selected)
• Peripheral circuits (e.g., a motor brake and a thermo switch for excessive heating detection)
Note 1. Two-motor switching control is not possible while the Inverter is in operation. If an attempted is
made to switch the motor while the Inverter is in operation, the message “Motor Running” will
flash.
Note 2. Switch the motor while the motor is not rotating. Do not attempt to switch the motor while it is
coasting to a stop, otherwise a main circuit overvoltage (OV) or overcurrent (OC) fault will re-
sult.
Note 3. Other than the motor constants, the same parameters are used by the first and second mo-
tors. When connecting a PG, check that the two motors have the same number of PG pulses.
The default settings of some constants vary with the motor control mode. In that case, when
the second motor is selected, the constants will be set to default values.
Motor switching selection
Motor 1 operation
Contactor for
motor switching
Motor 2 operation
Motor selection output
Approx. 200 ms Approx. 50 ms

(Approx. 500 ms for flux vector control or
V/f control with PG feedback)
Forward (reverse) command
Turn ON the forward (reverse) command only

after checking the status of motor 1, motor 2,
and the motor selection monitor.
6-5-6 Option Parameters (F)
Installing Optional Cards

A maximum of three Optional Cards can be installed in the SYSDRIVE 3G3FV. The installation location
of each is determined by the type of Card. Be sure to install the Cards in their correct locations.
Installation Procedure
1. Turn off the Inverter’s main-circuit power supply. Wait at least one minute (or at least three minutes
for models of 30 kW or more), and then remove the Inverter’s front cover. Check to be sure that the
CHARGE light is turned OFF.
2. Check the Optional Card’s installation location (A, C, or D).
6-70
Type of card Model Specifications Location

Analog
g Reference 3G3IV-PAI14U 14-bit analog, 2 inputs (voltage/current) C
C d
Card 3G3IV-PAI14B 14-bits analog, 3 inputs C
Digital
g Reference 3G3IV-PDI08 8-bit digital input (BCD/binary) C
C d
Card 3G3IV-PDI16H2 16-bit digital input (BCD/binary) C
PG Speed
p Control 3G3FV-PPGA2 Open-collector-compatible, single input A
C d
Card 3G3FV-PPGB2 Open-collector-compatible, A/B-phase input A
3G3FV-PPGD2 Line-driver-compatible, single input A
3G3FV-PPGX2 Line-driver-compatible, A/B-phase input A
Analog
g Monitor Card 3G3IV-PAO08 8-bit analog output, 2 channels D
3G3IV-PAO12 12-bit analog output, 2 channels D
Pulse Monitor Card 3G3IV-PPO36F Pulse frequency output D
3. Insert the accessory spacer into the spacer mounting hole in the Inverter’s mounting base.
4. Align the Optional Card connector with the connector position on the control board, and then pass
the spacer through the spacer mounting hole on the card. Press firmly until the spacer snaps into
place.
5. Connect the Optional Card’s FG connection line to the Inverter’s FG terminal (terminal 12).
Option A Inverter’s mounting base

4CN Control board
Option A connector
2CN Option C
Option C connector
3CN Option D
Option D connector
Front View Side View
Setting a Analog Reference Card (F2)

When using a 3G3IV-PAI14B/PA114U Analog Reference Card, set parameter b1-01 (reference selec-
tion) to “3” (option).
When using a 3G3IV-PAI14B, set the function for channels 1 to 3 with parameter F2-01. (There are no
parameters to set for 3G3IV-PAI14U.)
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
F2-01 AI-14 Input Sel 0, 1 --- 0 Basic or Advanced
6-71
Setting Description
0 3-channel individual input (CH1: terminal 13; CH2: terminal 14; CH3: terminal 16;
1 3-channel additional input (Sum of CH1 to CH3 is used as the frequency reference value.)
Parameter b1-01 (reference selection) must be set to “1” (external terminal), except for when 3-channel
input (setting: 0) is set.
When using a 3G3IV-PAI14B, the multi-function input “Option/Inverter selection” function (setting: 2)
cannot be used.
Setting a Digital Reference Card (F3)

When using a 3G3IV-PDI08/PD116H2 Digital Reference Card, set parameter b1-01 (reference selec-
tion) to “3” (option) and set the input method with parameter F3-01.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
F3-01 DI Input 0 to 7 --- 0 Basic or Advanced

Setting Description
0 BCD 1% unit
1 BCD 0.1% unit
2 BCD 0.01% unit
3 BCD 1 Hz unit
4 BCD 0.1 Hz unit
5 BCD 0.01 Hz unit
6 BCD special setting (5-digit input) (Only when 3G3FV-PDI16H2 is used.)
7 Binary input (Set value is displayed in decimal notation.)
• When binary input is used (setting: 7), this becomes the maximum frequency (100% speed) reference
when all bits are set to “1.”
3G3IV-PD108: Maximum frequency reference when FFH (255) is set.
3G3IV-PD116H2: Maximum frequency reference when FFFH (4095) is set with 12 bits se-
lected. Maximum frequency reference when 7530H (30000) is set with 16 bits selected.
• Setting 6, BCD special setting (5-digit input), is valid only when the 3G3IV-PD116H2 is used.
If the parameter o1-03 (Display Scaling) is set to 2 or a larger value, normal BCD setting will be valid and
the setting unit in the parameter o1-03 will be valid.
Setting: Sign 8 x 103 4 x 103 2 x 103 1 x 103 to ... 8 x 100 4 x 100 2 x 100 1 x 100
1 to 5
Setting: 6 2 x 104 1 x 104 8 x 103 4 x 103 2 x 103 to ... 1 x 101 8 x 100 4 x 100 2 x 100
The sign bit is used as a data bit, so only positive (plus) data can be set.
The second digit below the decimal point is set by bits 8x100, 4x100, and 2x100, so the settings are
made in units of 0.02 Hz. (If these three bits are “111,” “110,” and “101,” they will be recognized as “9.”)
6-72
Setting an Analog Monitor Card (F4)

When using a 3G3IV-PAO08/PAO12 Analog Monitor Card, set the monitor items and gain with the fol-
lowing parameters. Parameters F4-02, F4-04, F4-05, and F4-06 can be changed during operation,
while F4-01 and F4-03 cannot.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
F4-01 AO Ch1 Select 0 to 38 --- 2 Basic or Advanced
F4-02 AO Ch1 Gain 0.00 to Multi- 1.00 Basic or Advanced
2.50 ple
F4-03 AO Ch2 Select 0 to 38 --- 3 Basic or Advanced
F4-04 AO Ch2 Gain 0.00 to Multi- 0.50 Basic or Advanced
2.50 ple
F4-05 AO Ch1 Bias –10.0 to % 0.0 Basic or Advanced
10.0
F4-06 AO Ch2 Bias –10.0 to % 0.0 Basic or Advanced
10.0
Set parameters F4-01 and F4-03 (AO Ch1 Select and AO Ch2 Select) to the right side of the of “U1”
parameters in the table on page 3-12 of this manual. The setting range is between 1 and 38, but the
following numbers cannot be set: 4, 10, 11, 13, 14, 25, 28, 29, 30, 31, 34, 35.
Set the parameters F4-05 and F4-06 (AO Ch1 Bias and AO Ch2 Bias) to a bias that moves the output
characteristics up and down in parallel in 1% increments based on 10 V as 100%.
When the 3G3IV-PAO12 is used, outputs of 0 to ±10 V are possible. For that, set parameter H4-07 (mul-
ti-function analog output signal level selection) to “1” (0 to ±10-V outputs). There are some monitor
items, however, that can only use outputs of 0 to +10 V even if parameter H4-07 is set to “1.”
When the 3G3IV-PAO08 is used, only outputs of 0 to +10 V are possible regardless of the parameter
H4-07 setting.
Setting a Pulse Monitor Card (F7)

When using a 3G3IV-PPO36F Pulse Monitor Card, set the number of output pulses with parameter
F7-01.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
F7-01 PO-36F 0 to 4 --- 1 Basic or Advanced
Selection
Setting Description
0 1F
1 6F
2 10F
3 12F
4 36F
Note “F” indicates the output frequency (Hz). For example, if “0” (1F) is set, when the output frequency
is 60 Hz there will be an output of 60 pulses per minute. (Duty 50%)
6-73
Setting a Wired SYSMAC BUS Interface Card (F8)

When using a 3G3IV-PSIG Wired SYSMAC BUS Interface Card, set the following parameter in order to
specify the operation of the Inverter for communications failures.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
F8-01 E-15 Det Sel 0 to 3 --- 1 Basic or Advanced
Set the parameter according to the application.
Setting Description Inverter’s status Fault output
0 Deceleration 2: Decelerates to a stop Fault ON
with C1-02 set.
1 Coast to a stop. Fault ON
2 Emergency stop time: Decelerates to a Fault ON
stop according to the C1-09 setting.
3 Continuous operation. (See note.) Alarm OFF
Note If the parameter is set to 3, the Inverter will operate without references from the host controller.
Take necessary measures, such as emergency stop measures, to ensure safety.
Setting a CompoBus/D Communications Card (F9)

When using a 3G3FV-PDRT1-SIN CompoBus/D Communications Card, make the communications
settings with the following parameters.
Setting Communications External Fault Input

Set the following three parameters to specify the detection method of communications external fault
input.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
F9-01 EF0 Selection 0, 1 --- 0 Basic or Advanced
Setting Description
0 Normally open contact. (A communications external fault is input with the bit turns ON.)
1 Normally close contact. (A communications external fault is input with the bit turns OFF.)
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
F9-02 EF0 Detection 0, 1 --- 0 Basic or Advanced
Setting Description
0 Always detects communications external faults
1 Detects communications external faults during operation.
Parameter Display name Setting Units Default V/f V/f with Open Loop Flux
number range setting Control PG Vector Vector
F9-03 EF0 Fault Action 0 to 3 --- 1 Basic or Advanced
6-74
with C1-02 set.
Torque Limit/Torque Reference Operation Selection via Communications

Parameter Display
p y name Setting
F9-05 Torq Ref/Lmt Sel 0, 1 --- 1 Not applicable. Basic or
Ad-
vanced
Setting Description
0 The communications torque reference/torque limit reference is disabled.
1 The communications torque reference/torque limit reference is enabled.
Note Set the parameter to 1 because the CompoBus/D Communications Card does not support torque
references or torque limit references.
Selection of Operation for Communications Failures

Parameter Display
p y name Setting
F9-06 BUS Fault Sel 0 to 3 --- 1 Basic or Advanced
Set the parameter according to the application.

with C1-02 set.
Note If the parameter is set to 3, the Inverter will operates without references from the host controller.
Take necessary measures, such as emergency stop measures, to ensure safety.
6-75
6-5-7 External Terminal Functions: H
Multi-function Input Settings (H1)

Setting
g Function Control mode
w/PG Vector Vector
0 3-Wire Control (with a forward/reverse rotation input) OK OK OK OK
1 Local/Remote Selection (operation signal selection) OK OK OK OK
2 Option/Inverter Selection (ON: Optional Card) OK OK OK OK
3 Multi-Step Reference 1 OK OK OK OK
Switches between main speed and auxiliary speed when
parameter H3-05 is set to 0 (auxiliary frequency reference).
6 Jog Frequency Reference (higher priority than multi-step) OK OK OK OK
7 Multi-Accel/Decel 1 (accel/decel time selector 1) OK OK OK OK
8 External Baseblock N.O. (normally open contact) OK OK OK OK
9 External Baseblock N.C. (normally closed contact) OK OK OK OK
A Accel/Decel Ramp Hold (Pauses acceleration/deceleration.) OK OK OK OK
B OH2 Alarm Signal (Inverter overheating warning) OK OK OK OK
C Terminal 16 Enable (Enables the multi-function analog input.) OK OK OK OK
D ASR Selection --- OK --- ---
(Disables PG feedback and switches to normal V/f control.)
E ASR Integral Reset (Disables integral control.) --- OK --- OK
F Not used. (Do not input this setting.) --- --- --- ---
10 UP command (Always used with the DOWN command.) OK OK OK OK
11 DOWN command (Always used with the UP command.) OK OK OK OK
12 Forward Jog command (Forward jog at the speed in d1-09.) OK OK OK OK
13 Reverse Jog command (Reverse jog at the speed in d1-09.) OK OK OK OK
14 Fault Reset (Faults are reset when input goes OFF → ON.) OK OK OK OK
15 Fast-Stop OK OK OK OK
(Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.)
16 Motor 2 Selection OK OK OK OK
Selection of motor 1 or motor 2 for two-motor switching
(ON: Motor 2 selected)
17 Fast-stop N.C. (OFF: Decelerates to a stop when the OK OK OK OK
emergency stop time set with C1-09 elapses.)
18 Timer Function Input OK OK OK OK
(Used with the b4 ON/OFF delay timers and timer output.)
19 PID Disable (Disables PID control.) OK OK OK OK
1A Multi-Accel/Decel 2 (accel/decel time selector 2) OK OK OK OK
1B Program Lockout (Parameters write-protected when OFF.) OK OK OK OK
1C Trim Control Increase (Adds the d4-02 trim control level to OK OK OK OK
the analog frequency reference.)
1D Trim Control Decrease (Subtracts the d4-02 trim control level OK OK OK OK
from the analog frequency reference.)
1E Ref Sample Hold (ON: Retains the analog value.) OK OK OK OK
6-76
Setting Function Control mode

w/PG Vector Vector
1F Terminal 13/14 Switch (Selects terminal 14 when ON.) OK OK OK OK
20 to External Fault OK OK OK OK
2F (Any combination of the following can be set as needed.)
Input: Normally open or normally closed
Detection mode: Always or During operation only
Stopping method: Decel, Coast, Emergency, or Continue
30 PID Integral Reset (ON: Resets the integral value with I OK OK OK OK
control disabled.)
31 PID Integral Hold (ON: Retains the integral value.) OK OK OK OK
60 DC Injection Activate (Performs DC braking when ON.) OK OK OK OK
61 External search 1 (Speed search from max. frequency) OK --- OK ---
62 External search 2 (Speed search from frequency reference) OK --- OK ---
63 Energy-saving operation (according to b8-01 and b8-02) OK OK --- ---
64 to 66 Not used. (Do not input this setting.) --- --- --- ---
71 Speed Torque Control Change (Torque Control when ON.) --- --- --- OK
72 Zero-servo Command (Zero Servo operation when ON.) --- --- --- OK
77 ASR Gain Switch --- --- --- OK
ON: Use proportional gain in C5-03.
OFF: Calculate gain from C5-01, C5-03, and C5-07.
Parameter Settings
The following table shows the setting information for multi-function inputs 1 through 6. These parame-
ters cannot be changed during operation.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
number range setting*1 V/f V/f with Open Loop Flux
Note 1. The default settings in parentheses are the default settings when the Unit is initialized for
3-wire control.
Note 2. The following table shows the settings and page references for some common functions.
6-77
Function(s) Setting(s) Page

3-Wire Control (with forward/reverse rotation input) 0 5-16
Multi-step References 1 through 3 and Jog Reference 3 through 6 5-17
Multi-Accel/Decel 1 and 2 (acceleration/deceleration time selectors 1 and 2) 7 and 1A 5-18
Fast-Stop (Emergency stop) 15 and 17 5-19
Forward and Reverse Jog commands 12 and 13 5-19
Terminal 13/14 Switch 1F 5-19
Timer Function Input 18 6-46
Energy-saving operation 63 6-13,
6-37
Two-motor switching control 16 6-67
PID control integral reset 30 6-54
PID control integral hold 31 6-54
Local/Remote Selection (Setting: 1)

OFF Operate with the frequency reference and run command specified in b1-01 (the frequency
reference source selector) and b1-02 (the run command source selector).
ON Operate with the frequency reference and run command set at the Digital Operator.
• With this setting, the multi-function input selects the input method for the frequency reference and run
command.
• The input method can be switched only when the Inverter is stopped.
• The Digital Operator’s LOCAL/REMOTE Key is disabled when this function has been set in a multi-
function input.
Note 1. There is no difference between two modes if the parameters b1-01 and b1-02 are both set to
0.
Note 2. The above values are set through the Digital Operator and the frequencies are stored in fre-
quency references 1 through 8 (d1-01 through d1-08) or the inching frequency reference
(d1-09) in remote or local mode.
Note 3. Multi-function inputs 1 through 6 are enabled in remote or local mode. The stop command is,
however, disabled in local mode only if the 3-wire sequential set value is 0.
Note 4. If the run command is input when switching the Inverter to remote mode from local mode, the
run input will be ignored to ensure safety. Turn the run command OFF once. Then turn the run
command ON again in remote mode. If the parameter b1-07 (LOC/REM RUN Sel) is set to 1,
the run command will not be ignored. In this case, the Inverter may operate immediately when
switched to remote mode from local mode. Take necessary measures for safety.
Option/Inverter Selection (Setting: 2)

OFF The Inverter’s frequency reference is enabled.
ON The Optional Card’s frequency reference is enabled.
• With this setting, the multi-function input enables the frequency reference input from the Inverter itself
or the one from Optional Card.
• The frequency reference input can be switched only when the Inverter is stopped.
• Be sure that b1-01 (the frequency reference source selector) has been set to 0 (Operator) or 1 (exter-
nal terminal). Only the frequency reference from the Optional Card will be enabled if b1-01 is set to 3
(Option PCB).
6-78
• Setting 2 can’t be selected if the 3G3IV-PAI14B is being used and parameter F2-01 (AI-14 Input Selec-
tor) is set to 0.
External Baseblock N.O. (Setting: 8)

OFF Normal operation
ON Baseblock
External Baseblock N.C. (Setting: 9)

OFF Baseblock
ON Normal operation
• With either of these settings, the multi-function input controls baseblock operation.
• Baseblock is an interruption of the Inverter output. The motor coasts while the baseblock command is
being input.
• The output frequency is retained internally, so the speed search will start from the same frequency and
the motor will be started up when the baseblock command is cleared. To cancel the retained frequen-
cy, turn OFF the run command once. Then the retained frequency will be set to 0.
• After a baseblock command is cleared, the voltage will be restored in the voltage recovery time set in
L2-04.
Run/Stop command OFF ON
Baseblock command Input Cleared
Frequency reference
The retained output frequency

is output in a step pattern.
Output frequency
Coasting
Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold (Setting: A)

OFF Normal operation or restart acceleration/deceleration.
ON Pause acceleration/deceleration and maintain the present frequency.
• With this setting, the multi-function input pauses acceleration or deceleration and maintains (holds)
the output frequency.
• Acceleration/deceleration is restarted when the acceleration/deceleration ramp hold input is turned
OFF.
• The motor will be stopped if a stop command is input while the acceleration/deceleration ramp hold
input is ON.
6-79
• When parameter d4-01 (the frequency reference hold function selector) is set to 1, the held frequency
will be stored in memory. This stored frequency will be retained even after a power interruption and the
motor will be restarted at this frequency when a run command is input again.
Run/Stop command OFF ON OFF ON
Acceleration/deceleration OFF ON OFF ON

ramp hold
Frequency reference
Output frequency d4-01 = 1
d4-01 = 0
Hold Hold
Note 1. When d4-01 is set to 1, the held output frequency will be retained. To operate at this frequency
even after the Inverter is stopped, input the run command with the acceleration/deceleration
ramp hold input ON.
Note 2. When d4-01 is set to 0, the output frequency will be held at zero if the run command is input
with the acceleration/deceleration ramp hold input ON.
Note 3. Select and set one of the following functions for multi-function input. Do not set more than one
of them, otherwise a setting error (OPE3) will result.
UP and DOWN Commands (Settings: 10 and 11)
Trim Control Increase and Decrease (Settings: 1C and 1D)
Analog Frequency Reference Sample/Hold (Setting: 1E)
OH2 Alarm Signal (Setting: B)

ON Normal operation (The warning message “OH2” will be displayed on the Digital Operator.)
• With this setting, a temperature sensor can be connected to the multi-function input to display a warn-
ing message when the temperature rises too high.
• The message “OH2” will be displayed on the Digital Operator while the multi-function input is ON and
the display will revert to its previous status when the input is turned OFF. (It isn’t necessary to reset the
alarm.)
• The Inverter will continue operation without detecting a fault.
Terminal 16 Enable (Setting: C)

OFF Disables the multi-function analog input (terminal 16).
ON Enables the multi-function analog input (terminal 16).
6-80
• With this setting, the multi-function input can be used to enable or disable the multi-function analog
input.
• Turning the input OFF has the same effect as setting H3-05 (the multi-function analog input selector
for terminal 16) to1F.
ASR Selection (Setting: D)

OFF V/f control with PG feedback (speed control with speed feedback)
ON Normal V/f control with PG feedback (Disables speed feedback control.)
• With this setting, the multi-function input can be used to switch “V/f control with PG feedback” to “Nor-
mal V/f control.”
• It is possible to switch between these control modes during operation.
ASR Integral Reset (Setting: E)

OFF Operates with PI-control speed control loop.
ON Operates with P-control speed control loop.
(The speed control’s integral values are reset by the integral time constant.)
• This function is valid only in “V/f control with PG feedback” mode when parameter F1-07 is set to 0.
(Setting F1-07 to 0 disables ASR integral operation during acceleration/deceleration.)
• It is possible to switch between these speed control modes during operation.

UP command DOWN command Operation
ON OFF Acceleration
OFF ON Deceleration
ON ON Hold
OFF OFF Hold
• With these settings, the multi-function inputs can be used to control the Inverter’s output frequency.
• When using this function, be sure to set both the UP command (setting 10) and the DOWN command
(setting 11) in 2 multi-function inputs.
(An OPE03 option fault will occur if only one of these commands is set.)
• Be sure to set parameter b1-02 (the run command source selector) to 1 (external terminal). The up/
down function won’t operate with any other b1-02 setting.
• The frequency up/down commands operate according to the normal acceleration/deceleration times
in C1-01 through C1-08.
• The upper and lower limits for the output frequency with the up/down commands are determined by
the following settings:
Reference upper limit (d2–01)

Upper limit + Maximum frequency (E1–04)
100
Reference lower limit (d2–02)
Lower limit + Maximum frequency (E1–04)
100
When frequency reference (voltage) terminal 13 or frequency reference (current) terminal 14 is being
used as a frequency reference input, the greatest frequency value becomes the lower limit.
6-81
• When the up/down function is being used, the output frequency will be accelerated to the lower limit if a
run command is input.
• When the up/down function and jog frequency reference are both assigned to multi-function inputs, an
ON jog frequency reference input has the highest priority.
• Multi-step References 1 through 8 are all disabled when the up/down function has been set.
• The output frequency held by the up/down function will be stored in memory if d4-01 (the frequen-
cy reference hold function selector) is set to 1.
This output frequency will be retained even after a power interruption, and operation will be re-
started at this frequency the next time that a run command is input. The stored output frequency
will be cleared from memory if the UP or DOWN command is turned ON while the run command is
OFF.
Note Select and set one of the following functions for multi-function input. Do not set more than one of
them, otherwise a setting error (OPE3) will result.
• The operation of the up/down function is shown in the following timing chart.
Output frequency
Upper limit
Accelerates to
lower limit
d4-01 = 1
Same frequency
d4-01 = 0
Lower limit
Forward/Stop ON
UP command ON
ON Reference frequency reset

DOWN command
ON
Speed Agree signal
(see note)
Power supply ON ON
Note The Speed Agree signal remains ON while the run command is ON and the motor is not accelerat-
ing or decelerating.
Fault Reset (Setting: 14)

ON Resets faults when input goes from OFF to ON. (Normal operation when no fault has occurred.)
6-82
• With this setting, the multi-function input resets faults that have occurred.
• When a fault has occurred, be sure to find out what kind of fault occurred, take steps to correct the
cause of the fault, and restart the Inverter. It is possible to damage the Inverter by repeatedly resetting
a fault without correcting the cause.
• To resume operation after a fault has occurred, turn the run command OFF, turn the fault reset input
from ON to OFF, and then turn the run command ON again. A fault cannot be reset while the run com-
mand is ON.
• If a fault hasn’t occurred, turning the fault reset ON and OFF will have no effect on operation.
PID Disable (Setting: 19)

OFF Enables PID control.
ON Disables PID control. (Normal Inverter control)
• With this setting, the multi-function input switches between PID control and normal Inverter control.
• This function can be used to perform trial operation or jog operation with normal inverter control (open-
loop control) and then switch to PID control (closed-loop control using feedback) after adjusting the
system. The PID disable function can also be used to switch to open-loop control when there is a prob-
lem with the feedback value.
Program Lockout (Setting: 1B)

OFF Write-protects all parameters except for frequency monitor.
ON Allows parameters specified in Initialize mode to be changed.
• With this setting, the multi-function input can be used to write-protect the Operator’s parameters.
• When the input is OFF, the Operation mode’s frequency can be monitored and the frequency can be
changed but other changes are prohibited.

Trim Control Trim Control Output frequency
Increase Decrease
ON OFF Reference frequency + trim control level (d4-02)
OFF ON Reference frequency – trim control level (d4-02)
ON ON Reference frequency
OFF OFF Reference frequency
• The trim control increase function adds the level in d4-02 to the analog frequency reference and the
trim control decrease function subtracts the level in d4-02 to the analog frequency reference.
• These functions are effective when the frequency reference is input from an analog input.
• These functions can be used independently or together.
• The analog frequency reference won’t be changed when both the trim control increase and decrease
inputs are ON.
• The output frequency is limited to zero when the trim control decrease input is ON and the result of the
subtraction is less than zero.
6-83

This function retains the analog input in the Inverter.
• If the analog frequency reference sample/hold input is ON for 100 ms continuously, the analog value
that is input 100 ms after the analog frequency reference sample/hold input turns ON will be sampled
and retained.
• The retained analog value will be kept on hold until the next sampling period.
• All the following analog inputs are applicable.
Frequency reference input (voltage): Pin 13
Frequency reference input (current): Pin 14
Multi-function analog input: Pin 16
Analog Input Cards: 3G3IV-PAI14U/3G3IV-PAI14B
Sample/hold
command
Analog input
Analog output and
frequency refer-
ence (hold value)
Frequency reference (hold value)
6-84
External Faults (Settings: 20 through 2F)
• With this setting, the multi-function input can be used to stop the Inverter or output an alarm when a
malfunction or fault occurs in a peripheral device.
• There are 16 external fault inputs available with all 16 combinations of the following variables. Select
the setting with the desired combination.
Input level: Normally open or normally closed

Detection method: Always or During operation only
Operation selection: Decelerate to stop, Coast to stop, Emergency stop, or Continue operation
Setting
g Input level Detection method Operation selection
N.O. N.C. Always During Decelerate Coast Emergency Continue
operation to stop to stop stop operation
(Fault) (Fault) (Fault) (Alarm)
20 Yes --- Yes --- Yes --- --- ---
21 --- Yes Yes --- Yes --- --- ---
22 Yes --- --- Yes Yes --- --- ---
23 --- Yes --- Yes Yes --- --- ---
24 Yes --- Yes --- --- Yes --- ---
25 --- Yes Yes --- --- Yes --- ---
26 Yes --- --- Yes --- Yes --- ---
27 --- Yes --- Yes --- Yes --- ---
28 Yes --- Yes --- --- --- Yes ---
29 --- Yes Yes --- --- --- Yes ---
2A Yes --- --- Yes --- --- Yes ---
2B --- Yes --- Yes --- --- Yes ---
2C Yes --- Yes --- --- --- --- Yes
2D --- Yes Yes --- --- --- --- Yes
2E Yes --- --- Yes --- --- --- Yes
2F --- Yes --- Yes --- --- --- Yes
Note 1. For the input level, select whether you want a fault to be detected when the input signal is ON
(normally open input) or OFF (normally closed input).
Note 2. For the detection method, select whether you want faults to be detected any time that the In-
verter is on or only during operation.
Note 3. For the operation selection, select the processing method that you want to be performed
when a fault has been detected.
Decelerate to stop: A fault is output and the output stopped in the selected deceleration time.
Coast to stop: A fault is output and the Inverter output is cut off.
Emergency stop: A fault is output and the output stopped in the fast-stop time (C1-09).
Continue operation: An alarm is output and operation continues.
When an alarm is going to be output externally, be sure to set one of the multi-function outputs
(H2) to alarm (Minor Fault, setting 10).
• An external fault setting cannot be set in more than one multi-function input.
6-85
• Unlike other parameter settings, the external fault settings have an input procedure, as shown in the
following diagrams.
1. When setting an external fault function, press the Enter Key when “External Fault” is displayed to
bring up the “Input Level” display.
External Fault Input level
Detection method
Operation
Selection
2. Press the Increment Key to switch displays as follows:

“Detection Method” → “Operation Selection” → “Input Method”
3. Press the Enter Key at the desired parameter to select that parameter. At this point, the Increment
and Decrement Keys can be pressed to scroll through the available settings for the selected param-
eter. Press the Enter Key to select the displayed parameter setting.
(Press the Escape Key to cancel the operation without changing the parameter setting.)
Input level N.O. Contact Set parameter
N.C. Contact
Detection method Always Set parameter
During operation
Operation selection Ramp to Stop Set parameter
Coast to Stop
Emergency Stop
Continue operation
6-86
DC Injection Activate (Setting: 60)
ON Applies DC braking if the Inverter is stopped.
(Applies initial excitation when flux vector control is being used.)
• DC braking is used to prevent the motor from rotating due to inertia or external forces when the Inverter
is stopped.
• DC braking is performed if the DC braking input is ON while the Inverter is stopped.
• If a run command or jog command (jog frequency reference, forward jog, or reverse jog) is input, the
DC braking will be cleared and motor operation will be started.
Run command OFF ON
DC braking command OFF ON
Output frequency
DC braking DC braking
E1-09 Min. output frequency b2-01 Excitation level
External Search 1 (Settings: 61)

ON Starts a speed search from the maximum frequency.
External Search 2 (Settings: 62)

ON Starts a speed search from the set frequency (the present reference frequency).
The speed search function applies a lower voltage than normal, and finds the speed at the current flow-
ing at that time. The speed search is determined to be completed when the frequency is lowered from
the maximum frequency (or a set frequency) and the current that is output falls below a fixed value.
When the speed search is completed, the speed is accelerated to the frequency reference according to
the acceleration time that has been set. For V/f with PG or flux vector control, detection occurs at the
motor speed with PG feedback, so there is no need to set this function.
• The speed search function can be used to operate the motor without tripping when switching opera-
tion from a commercial power supply and the Inverter or starting a coasting motor.
• The speed search will begin after the minimum baseblock time has elapsed when the run command is
input after the external search command has been turned ON.
• Either one of the external search functions can be set, but not both.
6-87
Timing Chart
Run command OFF ON
External search command OFF ON

5 ms min.
Deceleration time set in b3-03.

Maximum frequency
or set frequency Frequency reference
that was set
Output frequency
Minimum baseblock time
Speed Torque Control Change (Setting: 71)

OFF Speed control
ON Torque control
• With this setting, the multi-function input can be used to switch between speed and torque control.
Note Refer to 6-3-5 Speed/Torque Control Switching Function for more details.
Zero-servo Command (Setting: 72)

ON Locks position when the frequency (speed) reference falls below the zero-speed level in b2-01.
• With this setting, the multi-function input controls the zero servo function (B9-01 and b9-02).
• When the zero-servo command is ON, a position control loop is formed and the motor is completely
stopped when the frequency (speed) reference falls below the excitation level set in b2-01.
Note Refer to 6-3-3 Zero-servo Function (Position-lock) for more details.
ASR Gain Switch (Setting: 77)

OFF The gain is set according to the values in C5-01, C5-03, and C5-07.
ON The gain is set to the value in C5-03 (ASR proportional gain 2).
• With this setting, the multi-function input switches the proportional gain used in speed control (ASR).
(The integral time is not changed.)
Note Refer to 5-4-4 Speed Loop (ASR) Structure for more details on parameters C5-01, C5-03, and
C5-07.
6-88
Multi-function Output Settings (H2)

Setting
g Function Control mode
w/PG Vector Vector
0 During RUN 1 OK OK OK OK
1 Zero-speed OK OK OK OK
2 Fref/Fout Agree 1 (Detection width in L4-02) OK OK OK OK
3 Fref/Set Agree 1 (Detection width in L4-02) OK OK OK OK
4 Frequency Detection 1 (–L4-01 ≥ output frequency ≥ +L4-01) OK OK OK OK
5 Frequency Detection 2 (|Output frequency| ≥ L4-01) OK OK OK OK
6 Inverter Ready (Initialization completed, no faults) OK OK OK OK
7 DC Bus Undervoltage (Main circuit voltage too low) OK OK OK OK
8 Baseblock 1 OK OK OK OK
9 Option Reference (ON: Frequency reference from Operator) OK OK OK OK
A Remote Operation (ON: Run command from Operator) OK OK OK OK
B Torque Detection 1 (N.O.) OK OK OK OK
C Loss of Reference (Valid when L4-05 is set to 1.) OK OK OK OK
D DB overheat (DC braking resistor overheating or faulty) OK OK OK OK
E Fault (A fault other than CPF00 or CPF01 occurred.) OK OK OK OK
10 Minor Fault (Alarm display) OK OK OK OK
11 Reset Command Active (Fault reset command in progress) OK OK OK OK
12 Timer Output OK OK OK OK
13 Fref/Fout Agree 2 (Detection width in L4-04) OK OK OK OK
14 Fref/Set Agree 2 (Detection width in L4-04) OK OK OK OK
15 Frequency Detection 3 (Output frequency ≤ –L4-03) OK OK OK OK
16 Frequency Detection 4 (Output frequency ≥ –L4-03) OK OK OK OK
17 Torque Detection 1 (N.C.) OK OK OK OK
18 Torque Detection 2 (N.O.) OK OK OK OK
19 Torque Detection 2 (N.C.) OK OK OK OK
1A Reverse Direction (Operating in reverse direction.) OK OK OK OK
1B Baseblock 2 OK OK OK OK
1C Motor 2 Selected (ON: Motor 2 selected) OK OK OK OK
1D Regenerating --- --- --- OK
1E Restart Enabled (Enabled during restart by Auto Restart OK OK OK OK
operation) (ON: During restart)
1F Overload (OL1) (ON when 90% or more than detection level) OK OK OK OK
20 OH Prealarm (ON when temperature exceeds L8-02 setting) OK OK OK OK
30 Current/Torque Limit --- --- OK OK
31 Speed Limit --- --- --- OK
33 Zero Servo End (Zero servo function completed) --- --- --- OK
37 During RUN 2 OK OK OK OK
(ON when outputting a frequency. OFF for baseblock,
DC braking, initial excitation, or stopped operation.)
6-89
Parameter Settings
The following table shows the setting information for the multi-function outputs. These parameters can-
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
Note 1. The following table shows the settings and page references for functions that are described in
more detail in this chapter.
Function Setting Page
Fref/Fout Agree 1 2 6-103
Fref/Set Agree 1 3 6-103
Frequency Detection 1 4 6-103
Torque Detection 1 (N.O.) B 6-107
Loss of Reference C 6-103
Timer Output 12 6-46
Fref/Fout Agree 2 13 6-103
Fref/Set Agree 2 14 6-103
Torque Detection 1 (N.C.) 17 6-107
Torque Detection 2 (N.O.) 18 6-107
Torque Detection 2 (N.C.) 19 6-107
Motor Selection 1C 6-70
Note 2. The following table shows the settings for simple functions that aren’t explained in detail.
Function Setting
Inverter Ready 6
DC Bus Undervoltage 7
Baseblock 1 8
Option Reference 9
Remote Operation A
DB overheat D
Fault E
Minor Fault 10
Reset Command Active 11
Reverse Direction 1A
Baseblock 2 1B
Motor 2 Selected 1D
Regenerating 1E
Current/Torque Limit 30
Speed Limit 31
6-90
Inverter Operating 1 (“During RUN 1,” Setting: 0)
OFF The run command is OFF and there is not output voltage.
ON The run command is ON and voltage is being output.
Inverter Operating 2 (“During RUN 2,” Setting: 37)

OFF The Inverter is not outputting a frequency. (Baseblock, DC braking, initial excitation, or stopped)
ON The Inverter is outputting a frequency.
• These outputs can be used to indicate the Inverter’s operating status.
Run command OFF ON
Baseblock command OFF ON
Output frequency
During RUN 1 output OFF ON
During RUN 2 output OFF ON
Excitation (Setting: 1)
OFF The output frequency is greater than the minimum output frequency (E1-09).
(With flux vector control, the output frequency is greater than the excitation level (b2-01).)
ON The output frequency is less than the minimum output frequency (E1-09).
(With flux vector control, the output frequency is less than the excitation level (b2-01).)
Output frequency
Minimum output frequency (E1-09)
(Excitation level (b2-01) when flux vector control is being used.)
Excitation output OFF ON
Overload OL1 (Setting: 1F)

OFF The motor protection function’s electronic thermal value is less than 90% of the detection level.
ON The motor protection function’s electronic thermal value is greater than 90% of the detection level.
• This output function is valid when the motor overload protection function is enabled (L1-01 =1).
• This output can be used to warn of overheating before the protection function itself operates.
OH Prealarm (Setting: 20)

OFF The cooling fin temperature is less than the “OH Pre-Alarm Level” set in L8-02.
ON The cooling fin temperature exceeds the “OH Pre-Alarm Level” set in L8-02.
• This output function indicates that the temperature of the cooling fins reaches the temperature set in
L8-02 (the Inverter overheating alarm detection level).
6-91
Zero-servo End (Setting: 33)
OFF The zero-servo command isn’t being input or zero-servo position control hasn’t been completed.
ON The position has been brought within the zero servo completion width (b9-02) after the zero servo
command was input.
• This output function indicates that zero-servo position control has been completed.
• The output is turned ON after the zero servo command is input and the difference between the zero-
servo operation starting position and the current position is within the zero servo completion width
(b9-02).
Multi-function Analog Input/Frequency Reference (Current)

(H3-05/H3-09)
Parameter Settings
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
Note These parameters cannot be changed during operation.
Setting
g Function Equivalent
q of 100% Input
p Control mode
(10 V or 20 mA)
A) V/f V/f Open-loop Flux
w/PG Vector Vector
0 Auxiliary reference (H3-05) Maximum frequency OK OK OK OK
1 Frequency Gain Frequency ref. of terminal 13 OK OK OK OK
2 Frequency Bias Maximum frequency OK OK OK OK
(added to H3-03)
4 Voltage Bias Rated voltage (E1-05) OK OK OK OK
5 Accel/Decel Change Accel/Decel times (C1-) OK OK OK ---
6 DC Brake Current Inverter’s rated output current OK OK OK OK
7 Overtorque Level Rated torque or Inverter’s OK OK --- ---
rated output
(Setting in L6-05 is ignored.)
8 Stall Prevention Level Inverter’s rated output current OK OK OK OK
9 Reference Lower Limit Maximum frequency OK OK OK OK
A Jump Frequency Maximum frequency OK OK OK OK
B PID Feedback Maximum frequency OK OK OK OK
C PID target value Maximum frequency OK OK OK OK
D Frequency bias 2 Maximum frequency (added OK OK OK OK
to H3-03 set value)
10 Forward Torque Limit Rated torque --- --- OK OK
11 Reverse Torque Limit Rated torque --- --- OK OK
12 Regenerative Torque Limit Rated torque --- --- OK OK
13 Torque reference Rated torque --- --- --- OK
14 Torque Compensation Bias Rated torque --- --- --- OK
15 Speed Limit Rated torque --- --- OK OK
6-92
Setting Function Equivalent of 100% Input Control mode

(10 V or 20 mA) V/f V/f Open-loop Flux
w/PG Vector Vector
1F Disable analog input (H3-05) --- OK OK OK OK
Frequency Reference (H3-09) Maximum frequency
Note 1. The analog inputs’ signal level, gain, and bias are set with the following parameters. Terminal
16 is the multi-function analog input and terminal 14 is the frequency reference (current) input.
Terminal 16 signal level selector . . . H3-04 (0 to +10 V or 0 to ±10 V)
Terminal 16 input gain . . . . . . . . . . . H3-06
Terminal 16 input bias . . . . . . . . . . . . H3-07
Terminal 14 signal level selector . . . H3-08 (0 to +10 V, 0 to ±10 V, or 4 to 20 mA)
Terminal 14 input gain . . . . . . . . . . . H3-10
Terminal 14 input bias . . . . . . . . . . . . H3-11
Note 2. When a voltage input is being input to terminal 14, be sure to disconnect jumper wire J1 on the
control board. The input resistance will be destroyed if a voltage input is used without discon-
necting the jumper wire.
Note 3. Set the time constant with the following parameter when adding a primary delay filter to an
analog input:
Analog input filter time constant . . . H3-12
This filter time constant applies to all three of the analog inputs.
Note 4. The frequency bias setting (setting: 2) is different from the frequency bias 2 setting (setting: D)
in the operation of the Inverter if the calculation results in a negative value. The frequency bias
will be limited to 0 and frequency bias 2 will rotate the motor in the reverse direction.
Note 5. The frequency bias and frequency bias 2 cannot be set together for two analog inputs. A set-
ting error (OPE07) will result if an attempt is made to set them.
Analog Input Characteristics with Gain = 100.0% and Bias = 0.0%

• Auxiliary Frequency Reference (Setting: 0)
Frequency Bias (Setting: 2)
Frequency Bias 2 (Setting: D)
PID Feedback (Setting: B)
Frequency Reference (H3-09, Setting: 1F)
100%
–10 V
0 10 V
–100%
6-93
• Frequency Gain (Setting: 1)
Output Voltage Bias (Setting: 4)
DC Braking Current (Setting: 6)
Overtorque Detection Level (Setting: 7)
100%
–10 V 0 10 V
Note 1. If 1 is set, the final gain will be equal to the result of multiplication by the set value of H3-02.
Note 2. The setting 7 is only valid for overtorque detection 1.
• Acceleration/Deceleration Time Gain (Setting: 5)
Note The acceleration/deceleration time gain for 1 to 10 V is 10 V/input voltage (V) x 10%
• Stall Prevention Level (Setting: 8)
100%
–10 V 0 10 V
• Output Frequency Lower Limit (Setting: 9)

Jump Frequency (Setting: A)
100%
–10 V 0 10 V
6-94
• Torque Reference (Setting: 13)
Torque Compensation Bias (Setting: 14)
100%
–10 V
0 10 V
–100%
• Forward Torque Limit (Setting: 10)

Reverse Torque Limit (Setting: 11)
Regenerative Torque Limit (Setting: 12)
100%
–10 V 0 10 V
• Forward/Reverse Torque (Speed) Limit (Setting: 15)
100%
0 10 V
–100%
Multi-function Analog Output Settings (H4)
Function Selection Parameters

Parameter Display
p y name Setting
number range1,2
12 setting V/f V/f with Open Loop Flux
6-95
• The multi-function outputs can be set to monitor any of the U1 Inverter status items by setting the last
two digits of the parameter number (U1-).
Refer to page 3-12 for a table listing all of these U1 settings.
• The Inverter’s status monitor item U1 can be output as multi-function analog output. Set the parame-
ters H4-01 and H4-03 (AO Ch1 Select and AO Ch2 Select) to the right side of the of “U1” constants in
the table on page 3-12 of this manual. The setting range is between 1 and 38, but the following num-
bers cannot be set: 4, 10, 11, 13, 14, 25, 28, 29, 30, 31, 34, 35.
Adjusting the Monitor Output

Parameter Display
p y name Setting
H4-02 Terminal 21 Gain 0.00 to 2.50 Factor 1.00 Basic or Advanced
H4-05 Terminal 23 Gain 0.00 to 2.50 Factor 0.50 Basic or Advanced
Note These parameters can be changed during operation.
• For the output gain, set what multiple of 10 V will correspond to a 100% output of the monitored item.
• For the output bias, set the amount that the output characteristic will be shifted vertically.
Set this amount as a percentage, with 10 V corresponding to 100%.
Output voltage
Gain × 10 V
10 V
Bias 10 V
100
0V
Monitored item
0% 100%
Multi-function Analog Output Signal Level

Parameter Display
p y name Setting
H4-07 AO Level Select 0 or 1 --- 0 Basic or Advanced
Setting Function
0 0 to +10 V (Absolute value output)
1 0 to ±10 V
• This signal level setting applies to analog outputs 1 and 2 (terminals 21 and 23).
• When the 0- to ±10-V signal level is used to output speed values (frequency reference, output frequen-
cy, or motor speed), positive voltage indicates Inverter output in the forward direction and negative
voltage indicates Inverter output in the reverse direction. (Assuming a bias setting of 0.0.)
6-96
• There are some monitor items that are limited to the 0 to +10 V signal range even when the 0- to ±10-V
signal level has been selected. Refer to the table of status monitor items in page 3-12 for details.
6-5-8 Protective Functions: L
Motor Protection Settings (L1)

Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L1-01 MOL Fault Select 0 or 1 --- 1 Basic or Advanced
Setting Function
0 Disabled.
1 Enabled.
• This setting enables or disables the motor overload protection function.

• The rated current setting (E2-01) is used as a basis for overload detection.
• Disable the motor protection function (setting 0) when two or more motors are connected to a single
Inverter. Use another method to provide overload protection separately to each motor, such as con-
necting a thermal relay to the power line of each motor.
• The motor protection function may not protect a motor when the power supply is turned on and off
frequently, because the thermal value is reset each time that the power is turned off.
• If the Overload OL1 alarm (1F) is set in one of the multi-function outputs (H2-01 through H2-03), the
output will be turned ON when the electronic thermal value reaches 90% of the overload detection
level.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L1-02 MOL Time Const 0.1 to 5.0 Minutes 1.0 Basic or Advanced
• Normally it isn’t necessary to change this setting. (The default setting is a 150%, 1 minute endurance.)
• This setting specifies the electronic thermal detection time.
• Set the protection time for a 150% load imposed after hot-starting and continuously operating the
Inverter with a rated current. Set the protection time at rated speed if a general-purpose motor is used.
The rated current of the general-purpose motor will decrease if the frequency drops. Therefore, the
Inverter will automatically shorten the detection time at low frequency.
• When the motor’s overload endurance level is known, set the hot-start overload resistance level for
the motor, but be sure to allow some margin for safety.
• Decrease this setting when you want to detect an overload more quickly.
6-97
Electronic Thermal Time Characteristics
In this example, L1-02 is set to 1 minute, the motor is operating at 60 Hz, and general-purpose motor
characteristics are used.
Operating time (minutes)
Cold start
Hot start
Motor current (%)

(E2-01 is 100%.)
Momentary Power Loss Settings (L2)

Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L2-01 PwrL Selection 0 to 2 --- 0 Basic or Advanced

Setting Function
0 Disabled. (An under-voltage fault is detected when there is a momentary power loss.)
1 Enabled. (Restarts if power is restored within the L2-02 time. An under-voltage fault is detected for
a longer power loss.)
2 Enabled during CPU operation. (Restarts if power is restored while the CPU is operating. An
under-voltage fault is not detected.)
• This parameter specifies the processing that is performed when a momentary power loss occurs.
• When power-loss ridethrough is enabled (setting 1 or 2), operation will be restarted after a speed
search if the power is restored within the allowed time interval.
• When power-loss ridethrough is disabled (setting 0), an under-voltage fault will be detected if power is
interrupted for more than 15 ms.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L2-02 PwrL Ridethru t 0.0 to 2.0 s 0.5 Basic or Advanced
Note 1. This parameter cannot be changed during operation.

Note 2. The default setting depends on the Inverter’s capacity. The default setting shown in the table
is for a 200-V class, 0.4-kW Inverter.
• This setting is valid only when parameter L2-01 is set to 1.
6-98
• Set the power-loss ridethrough time in seconds.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L2-03 PwrL Baseblock t 0.1 to 5.0 s 0.3 Basic or Advanced
Note 2. The default setting varies with the Inverter’s capacity. The setting for 200-V class, 0.4-kW In-
verters is shown.
• This setting is used with the speed search and DC braking functions.
• Set the time required for the leakage voltage to dissipate. Increase the setting if an overcurrent (OC)
occurs when the speed search or DC braking function starts.
• This setting is valid for speed searches performed after a momentary power loss and regular speed
searches.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L2-04 PwrL V/F Ramp t 0.1 to 5.0 s 0.3 Advanced
• Set the time allowed for the normal voltage to be restored after completion of the speed search.
• For a 200-V class Inverter, this is the time in seconds for voltage to be restored from 0 VAC to 200 VAC.
For a 400-V class Inverter, this is the time in seconds for voltage to be restored from 0 VAC to 400 VAC.
• This setting is valid for speed searches after a momentary power loss, regular speed searches, the
voltage changes with energy-saving control, and the voltage changes with baseblock clearing.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L2-05 PUV Det Level 150 to 210 V 190 (380) Advanced
(300 to 420)
Note 2. The values in parentheses are for 400-V class Inverters.
• Normally it isn’t necessary to change this setting.
• Use this parameter when you want to add an AC reactor and lower the main circuit under-voltage
detection level. Be sure to set a main circuit DC voltage value (V) that will detect a main circuit under-
voltage.
Stall Prevention Function Settings (L3)

A stall occurs if the rotor cannot keep up with the rotating magnetic field on the motor
stator side when a large load is applied to the motor or a sudden acceleration/decelera-
tion is performed.
In the 3G3FV, stall prevention functions can be set independently for accelerating, run-
ning, and decelerating. (Some functions are restricted depending on the control mode.)
6-99
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L3-01 StallP Accel Sel 0 to 2 --- 1 Basic or Advanced N.A.
Note 2. N.A. = Not applicable.
Setting Function
0 Disabled. (Accelerate according to the settings. Stalls may occur with large loads.)
1 Enabled. (Stop acceleration if L3-02 setting is exceeded. Accelerate again when current recovers.)
2 Intelligent. (Adjust acceleration so that the L3-02 isn’t exceeded by much. Ignore the acceleration
time setting.)
• When setting 1 (enabled) is selected, acceleration is stopped if the motor current exceeds the accel-
eration stall prevention level. Acceleration is started again when the current falls below this level.
• When setting 2 (intelligent) is selected, acceleration is performed using the the acceleration stall pre-
vention level as a basis. In this case, the acceleration time is ignored.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L3-02 StallP Accel Lvl 0 to 200 % 150 Basic or Advanced N.A.
• This setting is valid when L3-01 is set to 1 or 2.
• There is normally no need to change this setting.
• Decrease this setting when the motor’s capacity is small compared to the Inverter’s capacity or stalling
occurs when the motor is operated with the default setting. The standard target setting is 2 to 3 times
the motor’s rated current. (Set this current value as a percentage of the Inverter’s rated current, i.e.,
100% corresponds to the Inverter’s rated current.)
Acceleration Stall Prevention Example: L3-01 = 1
Output current
L3-02 (Acceleration stall prevention level)
Time
Output frequency
The output frequency is controlled

to prevent stalling.
Time
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L3-03 StallP CHP Lvl 0 to 100 % 50 Advanced N.A.
6-100
• There is normally no need to change this setting.
• Set this parameter when a high-speed motor is being used in the high-speed range (the high frequen-
cy range above the base frequency).
The standard target setting is the motor’s rated current. (Set this current value as a percentage of the
Inverter’s rated current, i.e., 100% corresponds to the Inverter’s rated current.)
Acceleration stall L3-02

prevention level (Acceleration stall prevention level)
L3-03
(Acceleration stall prevention limit)
Output frequency
E1-06
Base frequency (FA)
• When the motor is used in the high-speed range, the acceleration stall prevention
level is automatically lowered to provide smoother acceleration.
The acceleration stall prevention limit (L3-03) limits how much the acceleration
stall prevention level is lowered so that it isn’t lowered any more than necessary.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L3-04 StallP Decel Sel 0 to 3 --- 1 Basic or Advanced
Setting Function
0 Disabled. (Decelerate according to the settings. Main circuit over-voltage may occur if the
deceleration time is too short.)
1 Enabled. (Stops deceleration if the main circuit voltage exceeds the over-voltage level. Decelerate
again when voltage recovers.)
2 Intelligent. (Decelerate as fast as possible judging from the main circuit voltage. Ignore the
deceleration time setting.)
3 Enabled. (Stall preventive function using a Braking Resistor or Braking Resistor Unit.)
• If the parameter is set to 1, the deceleration time will be automatically prolonged without using the
braking function (i.e., without using a Braking Resistor or Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit) so
that the main circuit overvoltage (OV) will not result.
• Set the parameter to 0 or 3 when using the braking function (i.e., using a Braking Resistor or Braking
Resistor Unit and Braking Unit), otherwise the braking function cannot be used and the deceleration
time will not be shortened. If 3 is set, part of deceleration time will be automatically prolonged to pre-
vent main circuit overvoltage (OV) with the braking function (a Braking Resistor or Braking Resistor
Unit and Braking Unit) used. As a result, the possible set time will be shorter than that possible with the
parameter set to 0, and the deceleration time will be shortened as well. Set the parameter to 0, howev-
er, if it is desired to decelerate the motor in the set deceleration time.
6-101
• When this parameter is set to 3, in contrast to a setting of 0, the deceleration time is automatically
prolonged with main axis overvoltage (OV) easily detected. Therefore the actual deceleration time
becomes longer than the deceleration time that has been set. This can be adjusted, however, by set-
ting a shorter deceleration time than for the 0 setting, so that the actual deceleration time will also be
shorter.
Note The parameter cannot be set to 3 in flux vector control.

Deceleration Stall Prevention Example: L3-04 = 1
Output frequency The deceleration time is controlled

to prevent overvoltage.
Time
Deceleration time
(set value)
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L3-05 StallP Run Sel 0 to 2 --- 1 Basic or Advanced Not applicable.
Setting Function
0 Disabled. (Run according to the settings. Stalls may occur with large loads.)
1 Enabled – deceleration time 1. (Use deceleration time in C1-02 for stall prevention function.)
2 Enabled – deceleration time 2. (Use deceleration time in C1-04 for stall prevention function.)
• When setting 1 or 2 (enabled) is selected, deceleration is started if the run stall prevention level’s cur-
rent continues for more than 100 ms. The motor is accelerated back to the reference frequency again
when the current falls below this level.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L3-06 StallP Run Level 30 to 200 % 160 Basic or Advanced Not applicable.

• This setting is valid when L3-05 is set to 1 or 2.
• Normally it isn’t necessary to change this setting.
• Decrease this setting when the motor’s capacity is small compared to the Inverter’s capacity or stalling
occurs when the motor is operated with the default setting. The standard target setting is 2 to 3 times
the motor’s rated current. (Set this current value as a percentage of the Inverter’s rated current, i.e.,
100% corresponds to the Inverter’s rated current.)
6-102
Run Stall Prevention Example: L3-05 = 1 or 2
Output current
L3-06 (Run stall prevention level)
Time
Output frequency
The output frequency is controlled

to prevent stalling.
Time
Frequency Detection Settings (L4)

Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L4-01 Spd Agree Level 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0 Basic or Advanced
L4-02 Spd Agree Width 0.0 to 20.0 Hz 2.0 Basic or Advanced
L4-03 Spd Agree Lvl+– –400.0 to Hz 0.0 Advanced
+400.0
L4-04 Spd Agree Wdth+– 0.0 to 20.0 Hz 2.0 Advanced
• Set these parameters when outputting one of the frequency agree or frequency detection signals from
a multi-function output (settings 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15, or 16). The following table shows the relationship
between these parameters and the output signals.
Parameter Related output settings Parameter function
Speed Agree Level Fref/Set Agree 1 (setting 3) Set the speed that you want to detect in Hz.
(Absolute value) Frequency Detection 1 (setting 4) The set speed is an absolute value, so the
Frequency Detection 2 (setting 5) speed is detected in forward or reverse.
Speed Agree Width Fref/Fout Agree 1 (setting 2) Set the speed detection range in Hz.
(Absolute value) Fref/Set Agree 1 (setting 3)
Frequency Detection 1 (setting 4)
Speed Agree Level +/– Fref/Set Agree 2 (setting 14) Set the speed that you want to detect in Hz.
(Signed value) Frequency Detection 3 (setting 15) Set positive values for forward, negative
Frequency Detection 4 (setting 16) values for reverse.
Speed Agree Width +/– Fref/Fout Agree 2 (setting 13) Set the speed detection range in Hz.
(Signed value) Fref/Set Agree 2 (setting 14)
• Set the corresponding setting in the multi-function output (H2-01, H2-02, or H2-03) to output the de-
sired Fref/Fout Agree signal, Fref/Set Agree signal, or Frequency Detection signal. There is a timing
chart showing the operation of these signals on the following page.
6-103
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L4-05 Ref Loss Sel 0 or 1 --- 0 Advanced
Setting Function
0 Stop. (Operate according to the frequency reference value.)
1 Continue operation at 80% speed. (Continue operation with a speed that is 80% of the
value when the frequency reference was lost.)
• The frequency reference is considered lost when the frequency reference voltage drops by 90% for
more than 400 ms.
6-104
Frequency Detection Operation
Related L4-01: Speed Agree Level L4-03: Speed Agree Level +/–
parameter L4-02: Speed Agree Width L4-04: Speed Agree Width +/–
Fref/Fout Fref/Fout Agree 1 Fref/Fout Agree 2
A
Agree Frequency
Frequency
reference reference
L4-02 L4-04
Output frequency Output frequency
or motor speed or motor speed
L4-02 L4-04
Fref/Fout Fref/Fout
Agree 1 OFF ON Agree 2 OFF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 2) (Multi-function output setting = 13)
Fref/Set Fref/Set Agree 1 Fref/Set Agree 2
A
Agree L4-02 L4-04
Output Output
L4-01 frequency L4-03
frequency
or motor or motor
speed speed
L4-01
L4-02
Fref/Set OFF ON Fref/Set OFF ON
Agree 1 Agree 2
Frequency
q y Frequency Detection 1 Frequency Detection 3
D
Detection
i L4-02 L4-04
Output Output
L4-01 frequency L4-03
frequency
or motor or motor
speed speed
L4-01
L4-02
Freq. Freq.
Detection 1 ON OFF Detection 3
ON OFF
Frequency Detection 2 Frequency Detection 4
L4-02 L4-04
Output Output
frequency L4-01 frequency L4-03
or motor or motor
speed speed
L4-01
L4-02
Freq. Freq.
Detection 2 OFF ON Detection 4 OFF ON
6-105
Fault Restart Settings (L5)

Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L5-01 Num of Restarts 0 to 10 --- 0 Basic or Advanced
! Caution The Inverter might be damaged when using the fault restart function.
Understanding that the Inverter might be damaged, be sure to take the following pre-
cautions:
Always set up a no-fuse breaker (NFB).
Set up a sequence that will stop peripheral equipment when an Inverter fault occurs.
• The fault restart function automatically restarts the Inverter even when an internal fault occurs during
Inverter operation.
• Use this function only when continuing operation is more important than damaging the Inverter.
• The fault restart function is effective with the following faults. With other faults, the protective opera-
tions will engage immediately without attempting to restart operation.
OC (Over-current)
GF (Ground fault)
PUF (Fuse blown)
OV (Main circuit over-voltage)
UV1 (Main circuit under-voltage)
PF (Main circuit voltage fault)
LF (Output open-phase)
RF (Braking resistor overheated)
RR (Braking transistor failure)
OL1 (Motor overload)
OL2 (Inverter overload)
OL3 (Overtorque)
OL4 (Overtorque)
• The fault restart count is cleared when operation is normal for 10 minutes after a fault restart is per-
formed or the power is turned off and then on again.
• When one of the multi-function outputs (H2-01, H2-02, or H2-03) is set to 1E (Restart Enabled), the
output will be ON while the fault restart function is in progress.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L5-02 Restart Sel 0 or 1 --- 0 Basic or Advanced
Setting Function
0 Do not output fault restart. (The fault contact does not operate.)
1 Output fault restart. (The fault contact operates.)
6-106
Overtorque Detection Settings (L6)

Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L6-01 Torq Det 1 Sel 0 to 4 --- 0 Basic or Advanced
L6-02 Torq Det 1 Lvl 0 to 300 % 150 Basic or Advanced
L6-03 Torq Det 1 Time 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.1 Basic or Advanced
L6-04 Torq Det 2 Sel 0 to 4 --- 0 Advanced
L6-05 Torq Det 2 Lvl 0 to 300 % 150 Advanced
L6-06 Torq Det 2 Time 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.1 Advanced

• The overtorque detection function detects an excessive mechanical load from an increase in the out-
put current (or output torque).
• The settings in the torque detection selection parameters (L6-01 and L6-04) determine whether over-
torque conditions will be detected and what kind of processing will be performed if a overtorque condi-
tion is detected.
L6-01/L6-04 Settings
Setting Function
0 No overtorque detection
1 Detect only during speed agreement. Continue operation even after detection. (Minor fault)
2 Detect overtorque at any time. Continue operation even after detection. (Minor fault)
3 Detect only during speed agreement. Stop output after detection. (Fault)
4 Detect overtorque at any time. Stop output after detection. (Fault)
• When overtorque detection is enabled, be sure to set the overtorque detection level (L6-02 or L6-05)
and the overtorque detection time (L6-02 or L6-05). An overtorque condition is detected when the cur-
rent exceeds the overtorque detection level for longer than the overtorque detection time.
• The overtorque detection level settings depend on the control mode:
Open-loop or flux vector control: Set as a percentage of the motor’s rated torque.
Normal V/f or V/f with PG control: Set as a percentage of the Inverter’s rated output current.
• Any of the following functions can be set in a multi-function output (H2-01, H2-02, or H2-03) to indicate
the fact that an overtorque condition has been detected.
Setting B: Overtorque detection 1 (N.O.)
Setting 17: Overtorque detection 1 (N.C.)
Setting 18: Overtorque detection 2 (N.O.)
Setting 19: Overtorque detection 2 (N.C.)
6-107
Overtorque Detection Timing Chart
Motor current
(Output torque) See note. See note.
L6-02 or L6-05
L6-03 L6-03
or or
Overtorque Detection 1 (N.O.) L6-06 L6-06
or Overtorque Detection 2 (N.O.)
Note The overtorque detection is cleared when the current drops about 5% of the Inverter’s rated cur-
rent (or the motor’s rated torque).
Hardware Protection Settings (L8)

Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L8-01 DB Resistor Prot 0 or 1 --- 0 Basic or Advanced
Setting Function
0 Disabled. (Select 0 when a braking resistor isn’t being used or a Braking Resistor Unit is being
used.)
1 Enabled. (Protects the braking resistor from overheating.)
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L8-02 OH Pre-Alarm Lvl 50 to 130 °C 100 Advanced
L8-03 OH Pre-Alarm Sel 0 to 3 --- 3 Advanced
• Parameter L8-02 specifies the detection temperature in C for the Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm
function. An overheat pre-alarm occurs when the temperature of the cooling fins reaches this level.
• Parameter L8-03 specifies the processing that will be performed when an overheat pre-alarm occurs.
0 Ramp to Stop Decelerates to a stop in the deceleration time set in C1-09. (Fault)
1 Coast to Stop Coasts to a stop. (Fault)
2 Fast-Stop Emergency stop in the fast-stop time set in C1-09. (Fault)
3 Alarm Only Continues operation. (Monitor display only.) (Minor fault)
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L8-05 Ph Loss In Sel 0 or 1 --- 0 Advanced
6-108
• This function detects changes in the main circuit’s DC voltage which indicate a power supply phase
loss, large imbalance in the power supply voltage, or deterioration of the main circuit condenser.
Setting Function
0 Disabled.
1 Enabled. (Detects input power supply phase loss, 3-phase imbalance, or deterioration of the
main circuit condenser.)
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L8-07 Ph Loss Out Sel 0 or 1 --- 0 Advanced

• This function detects an Inverter output phase loss.
Setting Function
0 Disabled.
1 Enabled. (Detects an output phase loss at under 5% of the Inverter’s rated output current.)
• False phase loss detections may occur when the motor’s capacity is small compared to the capacity of
the Inverter. In this case, disable the detection function by setting L8-07 to 0.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L8-10 Ground Fault Sel 0 or 1 --- 1 Advanced
Settings
Setting Function
0 Disabled. (No ground fault is protected.)
1 Enabled. (The ground fault is protected.)
• The ground fault protective function can be enabled or disabled with the parameter.
• The default setting does not normally need to be changed. Set the parameter to 0 if the output power
cable is as long as or longer than 100 m or the stray capacitance of the output cable is excessively high
and the ground fault protective function operates by mistake.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L8-17 L-Spd IGBD Prlcl 0 to 3 --- 1 Advanced Not ap-
plicable.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
L8-19 OL2 Chara@L- 0 or 1 --- 0 Advanced
Spd
• The inverter overload (OL2) characteristics can be set according to the application.
• Set parameter L8-17 to 0 and parameter L8-10 to 1 if the motor has metal friction noise (or to increase
the carrier frequency).
6-109
• If the output torque at low speed is a problem (i.e., a heavy load is connected at low speed), set the
parameter L8-18 to 1 and the parameter L8-19 to 0.
Note 1. Do not set both parameters (L8-17 and L8-19) to 0, otherwise the Inverter may be damaged.
In that case, use a higher rank Inverter with parameter L8-17 set to 0 and parameter L8-19 set
to 1.
Note 2. Use a higher rank Inverter or set parameter C6-01 (Carrier Freq Max) to 2 kHz if a high load is
continuously connected at low speed in flux vector control mode.
Settings for L8-17
Setting Function
0 Disabled. (The carrier frequency is not reduced at low speed.)
1 Enabled. (The carrier frequency is reduced at low speed.)
2 For factory
y adjustment.
j ((Do not use.))
3
Settings for L8-19
Setting Function
0 Disabled. (The OL2 detection level is not reduced at low speed.)
1 Enabled (The OL2 detection level is reduced at low speed.)
6-5-9 Operator Parameters: o
Operator Display Selection (o1)

Parameter Display
p y name Setting
o1-01 User Monitor Sel 4 to 38 --- 6 Basic or Advanced
Note This parameter can be changed during operation.
• In operation mode, the frequency reference, output frequency, output current, and output voltage can
be monitored immediately if the default settings are being used. One of these four values, the output
voltage, can be changed to a different value. When you want to monitor a value other than the output
voltage, set that value’s number in parameter o1-01.
• Use the last two digits from the “U1 Monitor” list (U1-) to select a value. Refer to page 3-12 for a
table listing all of these U1 settings.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
o1-02 Power-On Monitor 1 to 4 --- 1 Basic or Advanced
Note This parameter can be changed during operation.
6-110
• When the power is turned on, the frequency reference will appear in the Unit’s data display if the de-
fault settings are being used. Any one of the four values monitored at startup (frequency reference,
output frequency, output current, or the value set in parameter o1-01) can be selected to appear when
the power is turned on. The value that appears automatically at startup is determined by parameter
o1-02 (Power-On Monitor).
1 Frequency reference The frequency reference is displayed at start-up.
2 Output Frequency The output frequency is displayed at start-up.
3 Output Current The output current is displayed at start-up.
4 User Monitor The value set in parameter o1-01 is displayed at start-up.
Key Function Settings/Other Settings (o2)

Parameter Display
p y name Setting
o2-01 Local/Remote Key 0, 1 --- 1 Basic or Advanced
• This parameter enables or disables the LOCAL/REMOTE Key (the Operation Mode Selector Key) on
the Digital Operator; it cannot be changed during operation.
Setting Function
0 Disabled.
1 Enabled. (Pressing the LOCAL/REMOTE Key switches control of operation between the
Operator and the sources specified in parameters b1-01 and b1-02.)
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
o2-02 Oper Stop Key 0, 1 --- 1 Basic or Advanced
• This parameter enables or disables the STOP on the Digital Operator; it cannot be changed during
operation.
Setting Function
0 Disabled. (The STOP Key is disabled when the run command is input from an external terminal.)
1 Enabled. (The STOP Key is enabled at all times during operation.)
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
o2-03 User Defaults 0, 1, or 2 --- 0 Basic or Advanced
• This parameter is used to record or clear the user defaults; it cannot be changed during operation.
Once the user defaults have been recorded, parameter A1-03 can be used to initialize the Inverter’s
parameters to these defaults.
• If the message “MAX Param Change” is displayed, the memory capacity is full. Reduce the number of
parameters that changed their default settings and register them again.
Note After the parameter o2-03 is set, the Digital Operator’s display will return to 0 when parameter
registration processing is completed.
6-111
Setting Function
0 No change. (Retain current settings.)
1 Record user defaults. (Record the current parameter settings as user defaults.)
2 Clear user defaults. (Clear the recorded user defaults.)
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
o2-04 Inverter Model # 0 to FF --- 0 Basic or Advanced
• Do not change this parameter setting; it is used by the manufacturer to identify the Inverter model.
• The setting range and default setting depend on the Inverter capacity. The settings shown in the table
are for a 200-V class, 0.4 kW Inverter.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
o2-05 Operator M.O.P. 0, 1 --- 0 Advanced
• This parameter determines whether it is necessary to press the Enter Key when changing the frequen-
cy reference with the Digital Operator’s frequency reference monitor; it cannot be changed during op-
eration.
• When o2-05 is set to 1 (Enter Key input not required.), the frequency reference changes simulta-
neously with the Digital Operator’s value.
Setting Function
0 Enter Key input required.
1 Enter Key input not required.
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
o2-06 Oper Detection 0 or 1 --- 0 Advanced
• This parameter specifies whether to stop operation when the Digital Operator is disconnected; it can-
Setting Function
0 Disable Operator detection. (Continue operation when the Digital Operator is disconnected.)
1 Enable Operator detection. (Detect an OPR fault when the Digital Operator is disconnected, stop
the Inverter output, and operate the fault contact.)
Parameter Display
p y name Setting
o2-07 Elapsed Time Set 0 to 65535 h 0 Advanced
o2-08 Elapsed Time Run 0 or 1 --- 0 Advanced
Note These parameters cannot be changed during operation

• Set the initial elapsed time in parameter o2-07. The elapsed operating time will start from this value.
Note When parameter o2-07 is set to the initial elapsed time, the accumulated operating time will be the
same as the value set in the parameter U1-13.
6-112
7Chapter 7
Parameter Lists
7-1 Initialize Mode Parameters
7-2 Program Mode Parameter List
Parameter Lists Chapter 7
This sections lists all parameters that can be used in the Program and Initialize modes.
Using the Lists

Para Name Description Setting Default Chan- Control mode Page
meter range setting ges
Display during V/f V/f Open Flux
No.
name opera- control with loop vector
tion PG vector
A1-00 Display Used to select the language 0 to 6 1 OK Q Q Q Q 3-18
Language displayed on the Digital
Operator
0: English
1: Japanese
2: German
3: French
Select 4: Italian
Language 5: Spanish
6: Portuguese
Note: This parameter is not ini-
tialized by the initialize
operation.
Parameter No. The parameter number.

Name The parameter name.
Display name The parameter name displayed on the Digital Operator.
Description Details of the parameter function or setting value.
Setting range The parameter setting range.
Default setting The default setting value (each control mode has its own default setting. There-
fore the default setting changes when the control mode is changed.)
Changes during operation Indicates whether or not the parameter can be changed while in the In-
verter is in operation.
OK: Changes possible during operation.
NO: Changes not possible during operation.
Control mode Indicates which control modes and which access levels can be set and refer-
enced.
Q: Items which can be set and referenced on all access levels; QUICK-START,
BASIC, and ADVANCED.
B: Items which can be set and referenced in BASIC and ADVANCED.
A: Items which can be set and referenced in ADVANCED only.
X: Items which cannot be set or referenced in that control mode.
Page Reference page for more detailed information on the parameter.
7-2
7-1 Initialize Mode Parameters
Para Name Description Setting Default Chang Control mode Page

meter range setting e dur
dur-
No. Display ing V/f V/f Open Flux
tion PG vector
A1-00 Display Used to select the language 0 to 6 1 OK Q Q Q Q 3-18

Language displayed on the Digital
Operator
0: English
1: Japanese
2: German
3: French
Select 4: Italian
Language 5: Spanish
6: Portuguese
Note: This parameter is not ini-
operation.
A1-01 Access Used to set the parameter 0 to 4 2 OK Q Q Q Q 3-18

Level access level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only (Displays
only Operation mode and
Initialize mode)
1: Used to select user
Access parameter
Level (Parameters A2-01 to A2-32
only can be set/read.)
2: QUICK-START
3: BASIC
4: ADVANCED
A1-02 Select Used to select the control 0 to 3 2 NO Q Q Q Q 3-19

Control method for the Inverter
Method 0: V/f control
1: V/f with PG
2: Open
p loop p vector
Control 3 Flux
3: Fl vector t
Method Note: This parameter is not ini-
operation.
A1-03 Initialize Used to initialize the parameters 0 to 0 NO Q Q Q Q 3-20

using the specified method. 3330
0: No initializing
1110: Initializes using the
Init User parameters
Parameters 2220: Initializes using a
two-wire sequence.
3330: Initializes using a
three-wire sequence.
A1-04 Password When a password has been set 0 to 0 NO Q Q Q Q 3-22

in A1-05 this function write 9999
protects the password input
section of the Operation mode
parameter.
Note: If the password is
Enter changed, parameters
Password A1-01 to A1-03 and A2-01
to A2-32 can no longer be
changed. (Program mode
parameters can be
changed.)
7-3
Para Name Description Setting Default Chang Control mode Page
meter range setting e dur-
No. Display ing V/f V/f Open Flux
tion PG vector
A1-05 Setting the Used to set a four digit number 0 to 0 NO Q Q Q Q 3-22
Password as the password. 9999
Note: This parameter is not usu-
ally displayed. When the
password (A1-04) is dis-
Select played, hold down the Re-
Password set/Select Key and press
the Menu Key and the
password will be dis-
played.
A2-01 Setting the Used to set the parameter b1-01 --- NO A A A A 3-22
to User numbers that can be set/read. to
A2-32 Parameter Maximum 32. o2-08
Note It is most effective to set
the user setting parame-
ter to 1 in access level
User A1-01. If set in the Pro-
Param 1 to gram mode only, parame-
32 ters set in access levels
A2-01 to A2-32 may be
set/read.
7-4
7-2 Program Mode Parameter List
7-2-1 Application Group: b
Operation Sequence Selection: b1

No. Display during V/f V/f Open Flux
tion PG vector
b1-01 Frequency Used to set the input method for 0 to 4 1 NO Q Q Q Q 5-4,
Reference the reference frequency. 5-8
Selection 0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminals
(analog inputs).
2: Not used
used. (Do not set this
Reference value.)
Source 3: Optional Card
4: Not used. (Do not set this
value.)
b1-02 Run Source Used to set the source of the 0 to 4 1 NO Q Q Q Q 5-10
Selection run command.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminals
(sequence inputs).
2: Not used
used. (Do not set this
Run Source value.)
3: Optional Card
4: Not used. (Do not set this
value.)
b1-03 Stopping Used to set the stopping 0 to 3 0 NO Q Q Q Q 5-13
Method method used when a stop
Selection command is input.
0: Ramp to stop
1: Coast to stop.
2: DC braking stop: (Stops
faster than coast to stop,
without regenerative
Stopping operation.)
Method 3: Coast to stop with timer:
Run commands are ignored
during deceleration.
Note: Only settings 0 and 1 can
be used with flux vector
control.
b1-04 Disabling 0: Reverse enabled 0, 1 0 NO B B B B 5-13
Reverse 1: Reverse disabled
Operation
Reverse
Oper
7-5
tion PG vector
b1-05 Operation Used to set the method of 0 to 3 0 NO X X X A 5-33
Selection operation when the frequency
for reference input is less than the
Minimum minimum frequency (E1-09).
Frequency 0: Run at frequency reference
(E1-09 or (E1-09 not effective).
less) 1: STOP (Frequencies below
E1-09 in the coast to stop
state.)
2: Run at min. frequency.
(E1-09)
(E1 09)
Zero-Speed 3: Run at zero speed
Oper (Frequencies below E1-09
are zero)
Note: This function is only avail-
able in with flux vector
control.
b1-06 Setting Used to set the responsiveness 0, 1 1 NO A A A A 5-11
Control In- of the control inputs
put Re- (forward/reverse and
sponsive- multi-function inputs.)
ness 0: Two scans every 2 ms (Use
when connecting transistor
outputs )
outputs.)
Cntl Input 1: Two scans every 5 ms (Use
Scans when connecting contact
outputs or switches.)
b1-07 Operation Used to set the Operation mode 0, 1 0 NO A A A A ---
Selection by switching to the Remote
After mode using the Local/Remote
Switching Key.
to Remote 0: Run signals that are input
Mode during mode switching are
ignored. (Input Run signals
after switching the mode.)
LOC/REM 1: Run signals become
RUN Sel effective immediately after
switching to the Remote
mode.
b1-08 Operation Used to set the operation when 0, 1 0 NO A A A A 6-41
for run a run command is input in a
commands mode other than drive mode.
in modes 0: Run command ineffective
other than (Ignore run command.
drive mode Switch to drive mode and
input the run command
again in order to run.)
1: Run command effective
((Run accordingg to run
command.)d)
RUN CMD
at PRG Note: Safety precautions are re-
quired when using the “1”
setting.
Note: The “1” setting is not valid
if b1-02 = 0.
7-6
DC Braking: b2
tion PG vector
b2-01 Excitation Used to set the frequency which 0.0 to 0.5 NO B B B B 6-42,
level (DC starts DC injection braking (the 10.0 5-34
injection initial excitation for flux vector
starting control) in units of 0.1 Hz when
frequency) deceleration to stop is selected.
Note: When b2-01 is less than
E1 09 E1
E1-09, 09 becomes
E1-09
DCInj Start the DC starting frequency.
Freq Only with flux vector con-
trol is b2-01 used.
b2-02 DC Sets the DC injection braking 0 to 50 NO B B B X 6-42
injection current as a percentage of the 100
braking Inverter rated current.
current Note: The initial excitation cur-
rent for flux vector control
DCInj depends on the E2-03
Current setting.
b2-03 DC Used to set the time to perform 0.00 to 0.00 NO B B B B 6-42,
injection DC injection braking (initial 10.00 5-34
braking excitation for flux vector control)
time at at start in units of 1 second.
start. Note: Used to stop the load ro-
tating and restart itit. When
DCInj the set value is 0, DC in-
Time@ jection braking at start is
Start not performed.
b2-04 DC Used to set the time to perform 0.00 to 0.50 NO B B B B 6-42,
injection DC injection braking (initial 10.00 5-34
braking excitation for flux vector control)
time at at stop in units of 1 second.
stop. Note: Used to prevent coasting
after the stopp command is
input When the set value
input.
DOInj is 0.00, DC injection brak-
Time@Stop ing at stop is not per-
formed.
b2-08 Magnetic Sets the magnetic flux 0 to 0 NO X X A A 6-43
flux compensation value during DC 500
compensati injection braking as a
on value percentage of the no-load
current.
N t Used
Note: U d to t reduce
d th start-
the t t
Field
ing time in motors with
Comp@sta
high electrical time
rt
constants, such as high-
capacity motors.
7-7
Speed Search: b3
tion PG vector
b3-01 Speed Sets the speed search function 0, 1 0 (See NO A A A A 6-44
search to start when the run command note.)
selection at is input.
start 0: Disabled (Starts from the
minimum output frequency.)
1: Enabled (Speed search is
started from the maximum
Spd Srch at frequency. In a control
Start mode with PG, the motor
starts at the frequency of
motor rotation when the run
command is input.)
b3-02 Speed Sets the speed search 0 to 100 NO A X A X 6-45
search operation current as a 200
operation percentage of the Inverter rated
current current.
Note: Not usually necessary to
Spd Srch set. When restarting is not
Current possible with the set val-
ue, reduce the value.
b3-03 Speed Sets the output frequency 0.1 to 2.0 NO A X A X 6-45
search de- deceleration time during speed 10.0
celeration search in 1-second units.
time Note: Set the time for decelera-
decelera
Spd Srch tion from the maximum
Dec Time frequency to 0 Hz.
Note When the control mode is changed, the Inverter reverts to default settings. (The open loop vector
control default settings are given above.)
Timer Function: b4
tion PG vector
b4-01 Timer Sets the timer function output 0.0 to 0.0 NO A A A A 6-46
function ON-delay time (dead band) for 300.0
ON-delay the timer function input, in
time 1-second units.
Note: Enabled when the timer
Delay-ON function is set for multi-
Timer function inputs and out-
puts.
b4-02 Timer Sets the timer function output 0.0 to 0.0 NO A A A A 6-46
function OFF-delay time (dead band) for 300.0
OFF-delay the timer function input, in
time 1-second units.
Note: Enabled when the timer
Delay-OFF function is set for multi-
Timer function inputs and out-
puts.
7-8
PID Control: b5
tion PG vector
b5-01 PID control 0: Disabled 0 to 4 0 NO A A A A 6-50

selection 1: Enabled (Deviation is
D-controlled.)
2: Enabled (Feedback value is
D-controlled.)
3: Enabled (Frequency
reference + PID control/
PID Mode deviation is D-controlled.)
4: Enabled (Frequency
reference + PID control/
feedback value is
D-controlled.)
b5-02 Proportiona Sets P-control proportional gain 0.00 to 1.00 OK A A A A 6-51

l gain (P) as a percentage. 25.00
Note: P
P-control
control is not performed
PID Gain when the setting is 0.00.
b5-03 Integral Sets I-control integral time in 0.0 to 1.0 OK A A A A 6-51

time (I) 1-second units. 360.0
Note: I-control
I control is not performed
PID I Time when the setting is 0.0.
b5-04 Integral Sets the I-control limit as a 0.0 to 100.0 OK A A A A 6-51

limit (I) percentage
p g of the maximum 100.0
f
frequency.
PID I Limit
b5-05 Differential Sets D-control differential time 0.00 to 0.00 OK A A A A 6-51
time (D) in 1-second units. 10.00
Note: D-control
D control is not performed
PID D Time when the setting is 0.00.
b5-06 PID limit Sets the limit after PID-control 0.0 to 100.0 OK A A A A 6-51
as a percentage of the 100 0
100.0
PID Limit maximum frequency.
b5-07 PID offset Sets the offset after PID-control –100.0 0.0 OK A A A A 6-52
adjustment as a percentage
p g of the to
i
maximum f
frequency. 100 0
100.0
PID Offset
b5-08 PID primary Sets the time constant for low 0.00 to 0.00 OK A A A A 6-52
delay time pass filter for PID-control 10.00
constant outputs
p in 1-second units.
PID Delay Note: Not usually necessary to
Time set.
b5-09 PID output Selects whether the PID output 0, 1 0 NO A A A A 6-52

characteris- is reflected in positive or
tics selec- negative characteristics.
tion 0: Positive characteristics
(Increased output frequency
increases feedback value)
Output 1: Negative characteristics
Level Sel (Increased output frequency
decreases feedback value)
b5-10 PID output Sets the multiplier for the final 0.0 to 1.0 NO A A A A 6-53
gain calculation result of PID control 25.0
(PID control value).
Note: Normallyy it is not neces-
sary to
t change
h the
th factory
f t
Output
settings. Adjust the level
Gain
of PID influence when us-
ing “Frequency reference
+ PID control.”
7-9
tion PG vector
b5-11 PID output Selects operation when the final 0, 1 0 NO A A A A 6-53
reverse calculation result of PID control
selection is a negative value.
0: Disable reverse.
(If the result is negative, the
zero limit is imposed and
there is no rotation in
reverse.)
Output Rev 1: Enable reverse.
Sel (If the result is negative,
rotation in reverse occurs in
accordance with the result.)
Note: The zero limit is imposed
if reverse operation is dis-
abled in b1-04.
b5-12 Feedback Selects the method used to 0 to 2 0 NO A A A A 6-53
loss detect that feedback has been
detection lost during PID control.
selection 0: Disable feedback loss
detection.
1: Enable feedback loss
detection (Continue
detection.
Fb los Det operation: Alarm)
Sel 2: Enable feedback loss
detection. (Stop output:
Protective operation)
b5-13 Feedback Sets the detection level used 0 to 0 NO A A A A 6-54
loss when feedback loss detection 100
detection has been enabled.
level Set as a percentage
p g of the
f db k value
feedback l that
th t is
i produced
d d
Fb los Det
at the maximum frequency.
Lvl
b5-14 Feedback Sets the detection time used 0.0 to 1.0 NO A A A A 6-54
loss when feedback loss detection 25.5
detection has been enabled.
time
Note: Feedback loss is detected
if the feedback value is
Fb los Det below the level set in
Time b5-13 for longer than the
detection time set here.
7-10
Reference Hold: b6
tion PG vector
b6-01 Dwell Note: The dwell function is 0.0 to 0.0 NO A A A A 6-57
frequency used to stop/start the out- 400.0
at start p q
put frequency y temporarily
p y
when
h d driving
i i a motort with
ith
Dwell Ref
a heavy load.
@Start
Output frequency
b6-02 Dwell time 0.0 to 0.0 NO A A A A 6-57
at start 10.0
Dwell Time
@Start
b6-03 Dwell b6-01 Time 0.0 to 0.0 NO A A A A 6-57
b6-03
frequency b6-02 b6-04
400.0
at stop
Dwell Ref
@Stop
b6-04 Dwell time 0.0 to 0.0 NO A A A A 6-57
at stop 10.0
Dwell Time
@Stop
Droop Control: b7
tion PG vector
b7-01 Droop Sets the slip as a percentage of 0.0 to 0.0 OK X X X A 6-18
control gain maximum frequency when the 100.0
maximum frequency is specified
and the rated torque
q occurs.
Droop gain Note: Droop-control is not per-
formed when the setting
is 0.0.
b7-02 Droop Droop control responsiveness 0.03 to 0.05 OK X X X A 6-18
control parameter 2.00
delay time Note: When hunting or vibration
Droop occurs, increase the val-
delay time ue.
7-11
Energy Saving: b8
tion PG vector
b8-01 Energy- Sets the Inverter output voltage 0 to 80 NO A A X X 6-13,
saving gain when the energy-saving 100 6-38
command is input.
Note: Enabled when the “ener-
ener-
Energy gy-save mode” command
Save Gain is set for multi-function in-
put. Set as a percentage
of the V/f pattern voltage.
b8-02 Energy- Sets the energy-saving effective 0.0 to 0.0 NO A A X X 6-13,
saving fre- range minimum frequency in 400.0 6-38
quency Hz.
Note: The energy-saving func-
tion is only enabled when
Energy the frequency is greater
Save Freq than the energy-saving
frequency and the speeds
are consistent.
Zero Servo: b9
tion PG vector
b9-01 Zero-servo Used to adjust the strength of 0 to 5 NO X X X A 6-19
gain the zero-servo lock. 100
Note: Enabled when the “zero-
servo command” is set for
the multi-function input.
When the zero-servo
command has been input
and the frequency refer-
ence drops below excita-
Zero Servo tion level (b2-01), a posi-
Gain tion control loop is
created and the motor
stops. Increasing the
zero-servo gain in turn in-
creases the strength of
the lock. Increasing it by
too much will cause vibra-
tion.
b9-02 Zero-servo Sets the output width of the 0 to 10 NO X X X A 6-19
completion P-lock completion signal. 16383
width Note: Enabled when the “zero-
servo completion (end)” is
set for multi-function out-
put. The zero-servo
completion signal is ON
when the current position
is within the range (the
zero servo position ±
zero-servo
Zero Servo zero-servo completion
Count width.)
Set the allowable position
displacement from the
zero-servo position to 4
times the pulse rate of the
PG (pulse generator, en-
coder) in use.
7-12
7-2-2 Tuning Parameters
Acceleration/Deceleration: C1
tion PG vector
C1-01 Accelera- Sets the acceleration time to 0.0 to 10.0 OK Q Q Q Q 5-12,
tion time 1 accelerate from 0 to the 6000.0 5-18
i
maximum f
frequency, i
in (S
(See
Accelera-
1-second units. note.)
tion Time 1
C1-02 Decelera- Sets the deceleration time to OK Q Q Q Q 5-12,
tion time 1 decelerate from the maximum 5-18
ffrequency tto 0
0, iin 1 d
1-second
Decelera-
units.
tion Time 1
C1-03 Accelera- The acceleration time when the OK B B B B 5-12,
tion time 2 multi-function input
p 5-18
“ lti l/d
“multi-accel/decel l titime 1” iis sett
Accelera-
to ON.
tion Time 2
C1-04 Decelera- The deceleration time when the OK B B B B 5-12,
p 5-18
“ lti l/d
Decelera-
to ON.
tion Time 2
C1-05 Accelera- The acceleration time when the NO A A A A 5-12,
p 5-18
“ lti
“multi-accel/decel
l/d l titime 2” iis sett
Accelera-
to ON.
tion Time 3
C1-06 Decelera- The deceleration time when the NO A A A A 5-12,
p 5-18
“ lti l/d
Decelera-
to ON.
tion Time 3
C1-07 Accelera- The acceleration time when the NO A A A A 5-12,
tion time 4 multi-function input 5-18
“multi accel/decel time 1” and
Accelera- “multi-accel/decel time 2” are
tion Time 4 set to ON.
C1-08 Decelera- The deceleration time when the NO A A A A 5-12,
tion time 4 multi-function input 5-18
“multi accel/decel time 1” and
Decelera- “multi-accel/decel time 2” are
tion Time 4 set to ON.
C1-09 Emergency The deceleration time when the NO B B B B 5-12,
stop time multi-function input “Emergency 5-18
(fast) stop
stop” is set to ON.
Fast Stop Note: This function can be used
Time as a stop method when a
fault has been detected.
C1-10 Accelera- 0: 0.01-second units 0, 1 1 NO A A A A 5-11,
tion/decel- 1: 0.1-second units 5-18
eration time
units
Acc/Dec
Units
7-13
tion PG vector
C1-11 Accelera- Sets the frequency for automat- 0.0 to 0.0 NO A A A A 5-13
tion/decel- ic acceleration/deceleration 400.0
eration switching.
switching Below set frequency: Accel/de-
frequency cel time 4, above set frequency:
Accel/decel time 1
Note: The multi function input
multi-function
Acc/Dec “multi-accel/decel time 1”
SW Freq or “multi-accel/decel time
2” take priority.
Note The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times will differ according to the setting for C1-10
(the unit for acceleration/deceleration time.) When C1-10 is set to 0, the setting range for accel-
eration/deceleration times becomes 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.
S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration: C2
tion PG vector
C2-01 S-curve All sections of the S-curve 0.00 to 0.20 NO A A A A 6-58
characteris- characteristic time are set in 2.50
tic time at seconds units.
accelera-
Note: When the S-curve char-
tion start.
acteristic time is set,
set the
SCrv Acc accel/decel times will in-
@ Start crease by only half of
C2-02 S-curve the S-curve characteris- 0.00 to 0.20 NO A A A A 6-58
characteristic times at start and 2.50
tic time at end.
accelera- Output frequency
tion end.
SCrv Acc
@ End
C2-03 S-curve 0.00 to 0.20 NO A A A A 6-58
characteris- 2.50
tic time at Time
decelera-
tion start.
SCrv Dec
@ Start
C2-04 S-curve 0.00 to 0.00 NO A A A A 6-58
characteris- 2.50
tic time at
decelera-
tion end.
SCrv Dec
@ End
7-14
Motor-Slip Compensation: C3
tion PG vector
C3-01 Slip com- Used to improve speed 0.0 to 1.0 OK B X B B 6-59,

pensation accuracy when operating with a 2.5 (See 6-34
gain. load. note.)
Note: Usually setting is not nec-
essary.
When actual speed is low,
increase the set value.
When actual speed is
Slip Comp high, decrease the set
Gain value.
In flux vector control
mode this function be-
comes gain to compen-
sate for slip caused by
temperature variation.
C3-02 Slip com- Slip compensation primary 0 to 200 NO A X A X 6-59
pensation delay time is set in ms units. 10000 (See
primary Note: Usually setting is not nec- note.)
delay time. essary.
Adjust when slip com-
pensation responsiveness
is low, or speed is not sta-
bilized.
Slip Comp When responsiveness is
Time low, decrease the set val-
ue.
When speed is not stabi-
lized, increase the set val-
ue.
C3-03 Slip com- Sets the slip compensation limit 0 to 200 NO A X A X 6-60
pensation as a percentage of motor rated 250
limit. slip.
p
Slip Comp
Limit
C3-04 Slip com- 0: Disabled. 0, 1 0 NO A A A X 6-60

pensation 1: Enabled.
during re- Note: When the slip compensa-
generation. tion during regeneration
function has been acti-
vated, as regeneration ca-
pacity increases momen-
Slip Comp tarily, it may be necessary
Regen to use a braking option
(braking resistor, Braking
Resistor Unit or Braking
Unit.)
C3-05 Flux Cal- Used to set the flux calculation 0, 1 0 NO X X A X 6-6

culation method. Normally, this setting is
Method not required.
0: Flux is calculated based on
the output frequency after
frequencies using slip
compensation, etc.
1: Flux is calculated based on
the output frequency before
Flux Select correcting frequencies using
slip compensation, etc.
Note: Set to “1” when motor
rotation becomes unsta-
ble due to interference
using slip compensation.
7-15
tion PG vector
C3-06 Selects out- Selects the output voltage limit 0, 1 0 NO X X A A 6-6
put voltage function so that the voltage
limit opera- calculation in open-loop vector
tion control does not become
saturated.
0: Disabled. (Output voltage
saturation is not limited. Slip
compensation is disabled.)
1: Enabled. (Output voltage
saturation is suppressed.
Speed accuracy is not
reduced.)
Output V Note: Be sure that there is suffi-
limit cient output current ca-
pacity in the inverter be-
cause the output current
is about 10% higher when
this function is enabled.
Note: The speed accuracy may
be reduced when the in-
put voltage is very low.
Torque Compensation: C4
tion PG vector
C4-01 Torque Sets torque compensation gain 0.00 to 1.00 OK B B B X 6-60

compensa- as a ratio. 2.50
tion gain. Note: Usually setting is not nec-
essary.
Adjust in the following cir-
cumstances:
When the cable is long;
increase the set value.
When the motor capacity
is smaller than the capac-
ity of the Inverter (Max.
applicable motor capac-
ity), increase the set val-
ues.
Torq Comp When the motor is vibrat-
Gain ing, decrease the set val-
ues.
When adjusting the gain, be
sure that the output current at
low speeds does not exceed
100% of the Inverter’s rated
output current.
Note: Do not change the torque
compensation gain when
using open-loop vector
control.
7-16
tion PG vector
C4-02 Torque The torque compensation delay 0 to 20 NO A A A X 6-61
compensa- time is set in ms units. 10000 (See
tion delay Note: Usually setting is not nec- note.)
time. essary.
cumstances:
When the motor is vibrat-
Torq Comp ing, increase the set val-
Time ues.
When the responsiveness
of the motor is low, de-
crease the set values.
C4-03 Starting When using open-loop vector 0.0 to 0.0 NO X X A X 6-7
torque val- control, these parameters set 200.0
ue (for- the motor’s forward and reverse
ward) g q compensation
starting-torque p
values as a percentage of the
F TorqCmp motor’s rated torque.
@start
Note: Effective for reducing the
C4-04 Starting starting time with friction –200.0 0.0 NO X X A X 6-7
torque val- loads or lifting machinery. to 0.0
ue (rever-
se) Note: Not effective when start-
re
ing motor 2 if using a re-
R TorqCmp generative starting sys-
@start tem.
C4-05 Starting Sets the rise time constant (ms) 0 to 10 NO X X A X 6-7
torque time for the starting torque value. 200
constant
Note: The starting torque time
TorqCmp constant is disabled if set
Delay T between 0 and 4 ms.
7-17
Speed Control (ASR): C5

tion PG vector
C5-01 ASR Pro- Sets the proportional gain of the 0.00 to 20.0 OK X B X B 5-39,
portional speed loop (ASR.) 300.00 (See 5-50
(P) gain 1 note.))
ASR P
Gain 1
C5-02 ASR Inte- Sets the integral time of the 0.000 0.500 OK X B X B 5-39,
gral (I) time speed loop (ASR) in 1-second to (See 5-50
1 units. 10.000 note.))
ASR I Gain
1
C5-03 ASR Pro- Usually setting is not necessary. 0.00 to 20.0 OK X B X B 5-39,
portional Note: Set to change the rota- 300.00 (See 5-50
Gain (P) 2 tional speed gain. note.)
ASR P For flux vector control

P = C5-01
Gain 2 P, I I = C5-02
C5-04 ASR Inte- 0.000 0.500 OK X B X B 5-39,

gral (I) time For V/f control with PG to (See 5-50
2 P = C5-03 10.000 note.)
I = C5-04
ASR I Time 0 C5-07 E1-04
2 Motor speed (Hz)
C5-05 ASR Limit Sets the upper limit for the 0.0 to 5.0 NO X A X X 5-52
compensation frequency for the 20.0
speed loop (ASR) to a
ASR Limit percentage of the maximum
frequency.
C5-06 ASR Prima- Sets the filter time constant; the 0.000 0.004 NO X X X A 5-41
ry delay time from the speed loop to the to
time torque reference output, in units 0.500
of 1-second
1-second.
ASR Delay Note: Usually setting is not nec-
Time essary.
C5-07 ASR Sets the frequency for switching 0.0 to 0.0 NO X X X A 5-39
Switching between Proportion Gain 1, 2 400.0
frequency and Integral Time 1, 2 in Hz
units.
ASR Gain Note: The multi-function input
SW Freq “ASR Gain SW” takes
priority.
C5-08 ASR Inte- Used to set the limit to the 0 to 400 NO X X X A 5-41
gral (I) Limit integral of the speed loop 400
(ASR). Normally, this setting is
not required.
Note: Set to a small value to
ASR I Limit prevent any radical load
change. Set to 100% of
the maximum output fre-
quency.
7-18
Carrier Frequency: C6
tion PG vector
C6-01 Carrier Sets the carrier frequency 2.0 to 15.0 NO B B B B 6-62
frequency upper limit and lower limit in 15.0 (see
upper limit. kHz units. (See note 2) (see note 1)
The carrier frequency note 1)
Carrier proportional gain is set as
Freq Max follows:
C6-02 Carrier Note: In vector control mode, 0.4 to 15.0 NO A A X X 6-62
frequency the upper limit of the car- 15.0 (see
lower limit. q
rier frequencyy is fixed at (see note 1)
C6 01
C6-01 note 1)
Carrier
Freq Min Carrier frequency
C6-03 Carrier C6-01 0 to 99 0 NO A A X X 6-62

frequency
C6-02
proportional Output frequency × (C6-03)
gain. ×K
Carrier 0 E1-04
(Max. frequency)
Freq Gain Output frequency
Note 1. The setting range and the default of the Inverter will differ depending on its capacity and con-
trol mode. (The value for the 200-V class 0.4 kW Inverter in open loop vector control mode is
given above.)
Note 2. For a 400-V Inverter, if the carrier frequency is set to a value higher than the default setting, the
Inverter overload “OL2” detection value will decrease.
Hunting Prevention: C7
tion PG vector
C7-01 Hunting 0: Disabled 0, 1 1 NO A A X X 6-14,
prevention 1: Enabled 6-38
selection Note: The hunting prevention
function is used to stop a
motor under a light load
from hunting.
This function is exclusive-
ly for the V/f control
Hunt Prev mode.
Select When greater responsive-
ness than vibration con-
trol is required, set hunt-
ing prevention to “dis-
abled.”
C7-02 Hunting Sets the ratio for hunting 0.00 to 1.00 NO A A X X 6-14,
prevention prevention gain. 2.50 6-38
gain Note: Usually setting is not nec-
essary.
cumstances:
When vibration occurs
due to a light load, in-
Hunt Prev crease the set values.
Gain When the motor is stalled,
decrease the set values.
If the set values become
too large, the motor may
stall as a result of non-
controlled current.
7-19
Factory Tuning: C8
tion PG vector
C8-08 Speed Sets the gain and time constant 0.00 to 1.00 NO X X A X 6-5
feedback of the internal speed feedback 10.00
detection detection control circuit.
control Normally it is not necessary to
(AFR) gain set these parameters. Adjust in
the following circumstances:
AFR Gain Hunting occurs:
Increase C8-09. If that does
C8-09 Speed not correct the problem, 0 to 50 NO X X A X 6-5
feedback reduce C8-08. 2000
detection Poor responsiveness:
control Reduce C8-09 as long as
(AFR) time hunting does not occur.
constant Increase the gain in C8-08
as long as hunting does not
AFR Time occur.
Note Unit for C8-09: ms
C8-30 Carrier Sets the carrier frequency 0 to 2 2 NO X X A A 6-8
Frequency during Auto-tuning. Normally it
Selection is not necessary to set this
During parameter. Adjust if auto-tuning
Auto-tuning is not functioning.
0: Sets the carrier frequency
to 2 kHz.
Carrier in 1: Sets the carrier frequency
tune to the value in C6-01.
2: Sets the carrier frequency
to 5 kHz.
7-20
7-2-3 Reference Parameters List
Preset Reference: d1
tion PG vector
d1-01 Frequency Sets the frequency reference in 0 to 6.00 OK Q Q Q Q 5-10
reference 1 the units used in o1-03 max.
(f
(frequency f
reference di l / t
display/set f
fre-
Preset
units.) The default setting unit quency.
Reference
for o1-03 is Hz.
1
d1-02 Frequency The frequency reference when 0.00 OK Q Q Q Q 5-10
reference 2 the multi-function input
p
“ lti t speed
“multi-step d reference
f 1”
Preset
is ON.
Reference
2
reference 3 p
the multi-function input
“ lti t speed
f 2”
Preset
is ON.
Reference
3
reference 4 p
“ lti t speed
f 1
1,
Preset
2” is ON.
Reference
4
d1-05 Frequency The frequency reference when 0.00 OK B B B B 5-10
reference 5 p
“ lti t speed
f 3”
Preset
is ON.
Reference
5
p
““multi-step
lti t speedd reference
f 1
1,
Preset
3” is ON.
Reference
6
p
“ lti t speed
f 2
2,
Preset
3” is ON.
Reference
7
p
“ lti t speed
f 1
1,
Preset
2, 3” is ON.
Reference
8
d1-09 Jog The reference frequency when 6.00 OK Q Q Q Q 5-10
frequency the multi-function inputs, “Jog
reference q
reference frequency y selection,”
,
“FJOG command,” d ” andd “RJOG
Jog
command” are ON.
Reference
7-21
Reference Limits: d2
tion PG vector
d2-01 Reference Sets the output frequency upper 0.0 to 100.0 NO B B B B 6-64
frequency limit as a percentage of the 110.0
upper limit q
maximum frequency. y
Ref Upper
Limit
d2-02 Reference Sets the output frequency lower 0.0 to 0.0 NO B B B B 6-64
frequency limit as a percentage of the 109.0
lower limit q
maximum frequency. y
Ref Lower
Limit
Jump Frequencies: d3
tion PG vector
d3-01 Jump Sets the center value of the 0.0 to 0.0 NO B B B B 6-64
frequency 1 jjump
p frequency
q y in Hz. 400.0
Jump Freq Note: This function is disabled
1 by setting the jump fre-
quency to 0 HzHz. Always
d3-02 Jump ensure that the following 0.0 NO B B B B 6-64
frequency 2 applies:
Jump Freq d3-01 y d3-02 y d3-03
2 Operation in the jump fre-
prohib
quency range is prohib-
d3-03 Jump ited but during accelera- 0.0 NO B B B B 6-64
frequency 3 tion and deceleration,
Jump Freq speed changes smoothly
3 without jump.
d3-04 Jump Sets the jump frequency 0.0 to 1.0 NO B B B B 6-64
frequency bandwidth in Hz. 20.0
width Note: The jump frequency will
Jump be the jump frequency ±
Bandwidth d3-04.
7-22
Sequence for Reference: d4

tion PG vector
d4-01 Reference Sets whether or not frequencies 0, 1 0 NO A A A A 6-65
frequency on hold will be recorded.
hold 0: Disabled (when operation is
function stopped or the power is
selection turned on again starts at 0.)
1: Enabled (when operation is
stopped or the power is
turned on again starts at the
previous hold frequency.)
Note: This function is available
MOP Ref when the multi-function
Memory inputs “accel/decel Ramp
Hold” or “UP/DOWN”
commands (MOP
increase/decrease) are
set.
d4-02 Trim control Sets the increase/decrease 0 to 25 NO A A A A 6-66
level frequency for analog frequency 100
references as a percentage of
the maximum frequency.
Note: This function is available
Trim when the multi-function
Control Lvl inputs “Trim Ctl Increase”
or “Trim Ctl Decrease” is
set.
Torque Control: d5
tion PG vector
d5-01 Torque con- 0: Speed control (C5-01 to 0, 1 0 NO X X X A 6-20,
trol selec- C5-07) 6-27
tion 1: Torque control
Note: This function is only avail-
able in flux vector control
mode.
To use the function for
Torq Con- switching between speed
trol Sel and torque control, set to
0 and set the multi-func-
tion input to “speed/torque
control change.”
d5-02 Torque ref- Sets the torque reference delay 0 to 0 NO X X X A 6-25
erence time in ms units. 1000
delay time Note: This function can be used
to adjust the noise of the
torque control signal or
the responsiveness with
Torq Ref the host controller. When
Filter vibration occurs during
torque control, increase
the set value.
7-23
tion PG vector
d5-03 Speed limit Sets the speed limit command 1, 2 1 NO X X X A 6-22
selection method for the torque control
mode.
1: The analog input limit from
an analog frequency
Speed Limit reference terminal
Sel (terminals 13 and 14.)
2: Limited to d5-04 parameter
setting values.
d5-04 Speed limit Sets the speed limit during –120 to 0 NO X X X A 6-23
torque control as a percentage +120
of the maximum frequency.
Note: This function is enabled
d5 03 is set to 2.
when d5-03 2
Speed Lmt Directions are as follows.
Value +: operation command
direction
–: operation command
opposite direction
d5-05 Speed limit Sets the speed limit bias as a 0 to 10 NO X X X A 6-24
bias percentage of the maximum 120
frequency.
Note: Bias is given to the speci
speci-
Speed Lmt fied speed limit. It can be
Bias used to adjust the margin
for the speed limit.
d5-06 Speed/ Sets the delay time from 0 to 0 NO X X X A 6-28
torque con- inputting the multi-function input 1000
trol switch- “speed/torque control change”
ing timer. (from ON to OFF or OFF to ON)
until the control is actually
changed, in ms units.
Note: This function is enabled
when the multi-function
input “speed/torque con-
g is set. In the
trol change”
speed/torque control
Ref Hold switching timer, the three
Time analog inputs hold the
values of when the
“speed/torque control
change” changes. Always
be sure to allow time for
this process to finish com-
pletely.
7-2-4 Motor Constant Parameter Lists
V/f Pattern: E1
tion PG vector
E1-01 Input Sets the Inverter input voltage in 155 to 200 NO Q Q Q Q 5-20,
voltage units of 1 V. 255 (see 5-23,
setting Note: This setting is used as the (see note 1) 5-35,
reference value for func-
func note 1) 5-44
Input tions such as the protec-
Voltage tion functions.
7-24
tion PG vector
E1-02 Motor 0: Standard fan-cooled motor 0 to 2 0 NO Q Q Q Q 5-23,
selection (general-purpose motor) 5-44
1: Special motor (Inverter-only
motor)
2: Special
p motor ((Vector
Motor t l l motor)
control-only t )
Selection Note: This setting is used as the
reference value for func-
tions such as the protec-
tion functions.
E1-03 V/f pattern 0 to E: Select from the 15 preset 0 to F F NO Q Q X X 5-24
selection patterns.
F: Custom user-set
user set patterns
V/F (Applicable for settings E1-04 to
Selection E1-10.)
E1-04 Maximum Output voltage (V) 40.0 to 60.0 NO Q Q Q Q 5-28
frequency VMAX 400.0
(FMAX) ((E1-05))
Max
Frequency
E1-05 Maximum VC 0.0 to 200.0 NO Q Q Q Q 5-28
voltage (E1-08) 255.0 (see
(VMAX) VMIN ((see note 1))
(E1-10)
(E1 10) note
t 1)
Max
FMIN FB FA FAX
Voltage (E1-07) (E1-06) (E1-04)
(E1-09)
E1-06 Maximum Frequency (Hz)
0.0 to 60.0 NO Q Q Q Q 5-28
voltage 400.0
frequency Note: To set V/f characteristics
(FA) in a straight line, set the
Base same values for E1-07
Frequency and E1-09. In this case,
the setting for E1-08 will
E1-07 Intermedi- be ignored. 0.0 to 3.0 NO Q Q A X 5-28
ate fre- Always ensure that the 400.0 (see
quency four frequencies are set note 2)
(FB) in the following manner:
Mid E1-04 (FMAX) y
Frequency E1-06 (FA) uE1-07 (FB)
A y E1-09 (FMIN)
E1-08 Intermedi- Note: For flux vector control, 0.0 to 11.0 NO Q Q A X 5-28
ate voltage make the settings as fol- 255.0 (see
(VC) lows: ((see note 1,,
E1 04 (FMAX) y
E1-04 note
t 1) 2)
Mid Voltage E1-06 (FA) u E1-09
A (FMIN)
E1-09 Minimum 0.0 to 0.5 NO Q Q Q A 5-28
frequency 400.0 (see
(FMIN) note 2))
Min
Frequency
E1-10 Minimum 0.0 to 2.0 NO Q Q A X 5-28
voltage 255.0 (see
(VMIN) ((see note 1,,
note
t 1) 2)
Min Voltage
7-25
tion PG vector
E1-11 Mid. Output Used to set the middle 0.0 to 0.0 NO A A A A ---
Frequency frequency and voltage in the 400.0
B constant output area. Normally,
this setting is not required.
Mid N t When
Note: Wh using i a high-speed
hi h d
frequency motor, set the characteris-
B tics of the constant output
area.
Output
O t t voltage
lt (V)
E1-12 Mid. Output VMA
0.0 to 0.0 NO A A A A ---
Frequency E1-05 255.0
Voltage B E1-12 (See
E1-13 note 1.)
Mid voltage
B 0
FA E1-11 FMAX
E1-06 E1-04
E1-13 Base Frequency (Hz) 0.0 to 0.0 NO A A Q Q ---
Voltage 255.0
Note: Set as follows:
(See
E1 06<E1 11<E1 O4.
E1-06<E1-11<E1-O4.
note 1.)
1)
Base Note: This parameter becomes
voltage disabled if E1-11 and
E1-12 are set to “0.”
Note 1. These are values for a 200-V class Inverter. Double these values for a 400-V class Inverter.
Note 2. When the control mode is changed, the Inverter reverts to default settings. (The open loop
vector control default settings are given above.)
Motor Setup: E2
tion PG vector
E2-01 Motor rated Sets the motor rated current in 0.32 to 1.90 NO Q Q Q Q 5-23,
current 1-A units. 6.40 (See 5-44,
Note: These set values will be- (See note 1.) 6-9,
come the reference val- note 2.) 6-32
ues for motor protection,
torque limits and torque
Motor control.
Rated FLA These values will auto-
matically be set if they
were set during auto-tun-
ing.
E2-02 Motor rated Sets the motor rated slip in Hz 0.00 to 2.90 NO A A Q Q 6-10,
slip units. 20.00 (See 6-15,
Note: These set values will be- note 1.) 6-32
come the reference val-
Motor ues for slip compensation.
Rated Slip These values will be auto-
matically set if auto-tuning
is started.
E2-03 Motor Sets the motor no-load current 0.00 to 1.20 NO A A Q Q 6-10,
no-load in 1-A units. 2.9 (See 6-15,
current Note: These values will be auto-
auto ((See note 1.)) 6-32
matically set if auto-tuning note
t 33.))
No-Load
Current is started.
7-26
tion PG vector
E2-04 Number of Sets the number of motor poles. 2 to 48 4 NO X Q X Q 5-45,
motor poles Note: These values will auto- 6-32
matically be set if they
Number of were set during auto-tun-
Poles ing.
E2-05 Motor Sets the motor phase-to-phase 0.000 9.842 NO A A A A 6-10,
phase-to- resistance in Ω units. to (See 6-15,
phase re- Note: These values will be auto- 65.000 note 1.) 6-33
sistance auto-tuning
matically set if auto tuning
Term is started.
Resistance
E2-06 Motor Sets the voltage drop due to 0.0 to 18.2 NO X X A A 6-10,
leakage motor leakage inductance as a 40.0 (See 6-33
inductance percentage of the motor rated note 1.)
voltage.
Leak Note: These values will be auto-
Inductance matically set if auto-tuning
is started.
E2-07 Motor Sets the motor iron-core 0.00 to 0.50 NO X X A A 6-11,
iron-core saturation coefficient at 50% of 0.50 6-33
saturation magnetic flux.
coefficient Note: These values will be auto-
1 matically set if auto-tuning
Saturation is started.
Comp1
E2-08 Motor Sets the motor iron-core 0.00 to 0.75 NO X X A A 6-11,
iron-core saturation coefficient at 75% of 0.75 6-33
saturation magnetic flux.
coefficient Note: These values will be auto-
2 matically set if auto-tuning
Saturation is started.
Comp2
E2-09 Mechanical Sets motor mechanical loss as 0.0 to 0.0 NO X X X A 6-33
loss a percentage of motor rated 10.0
output (W).
essary. Adjust in the fol-
lowing circumstances:
When torque loss is large
Mechanical due to motor bearing.
Loss When the torque loss in
the pump or fan is large.
The set mechanical loss
will compensate for
torque.
E2-10 Torque Sets the motor’s copper loss in 0 to 14 (see NO A A X X 6-15
compensati watts (W). 65535 note 1)
on for
motor loss
Tcomp Iron
Loss
Note 1. The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter. The values for a 200-V class 0.4 kW
Inverter are given above.
Note 2. The setting range is 10 to 200% of the Inverter’s rated output current. The values for a 200-V
class 0.4 kW Inverter are given above.
Note 3. The setting range is between 0.00 and [Inverter’s rated current – 0.1].
7-27
Motor 2 Setup: E3 to E5 (Reference pages: 6-67 to 6-69)

Para Name Description
p Setting
g Default Changes
g Control mode
meter
t Display range setting
tti d i
during V/f V/f with Open Flux vec-
No. name opera- control PG loop tor
tion vector
E3-01 Select 0: Normal V/f Control 0 to 3 2 NO A A A A
control 1: V/f Control With PG
method of Feedback
motor 2 p
2: Open-loopp Vector Control
3 Flux
3: Fl Vector
V t Control
C t l
Control
Method
E4-01 Motor 2 Sets the motor constants of 40.0 to 60.0 NO A A A A
maximum motor 2, when used for 400.0
frequency two-motor switching g
Max Note 1: Enabled when the mo-
Frequency tor 2 selection function
multi function
is set for multi-function
E4-02 Motor 2 input. 0.0 to 200 NO A A A A
maximum 255.0 (see
voltage Note 2: Set like E1-04 to E2-06. (see note 1)
(VMAX) Note 3: Changes motors after note 1))
Max Inverter and motor stop.
Voltage Note 4: Waits to change motor
E4-03 Motor 2 for 20 to 50 ms after 0.0 to 60.0 NO A A A A
maximum Inverter input. 400.0
voltage Note 5: Cannot use motor 1
frequency parameters and motor 2
Base parameters at same
Frequency time.
E4-04 Motor 2 Note 6: Motor selection signal 0.0 to 3.0 NO A A A X
intermedi- will be enabled when 400.0 (see
ate fre- the motor 2 selected note 2)
quency function is set for multi-
f
function
ti output.
t t
Mid
Frequency Note 7: If the control method for
motort 1 is
i different
diff t from
f
E4-05 Motor 2 0.0 to 11.0 NO A A A X
that for motor 2, all oth-
intermedi- 255.0 (see
er parameters of motor
ate voltage ((see notes
2 will be set to default
note
t 1) 1 2)
1,
Mid Voltage settings.
E4-06 Motor 2 0.0 to 0.5 NO A A A A
minimum 400.0 (see
frequency note 2))
Min
Frequency
E4-07 Motor 2 0.0 to 2.0 NO A A A X
minimum 255.0 (see
voltage notes
1 2)
1,
Min Voltage
E5-01 Motor 2 0.32 to 1.90 NO A A A A
rated 6.40 (see
current ((see note 3))
note
t 4)
Motor
Rated FLA
E5-02 Motor 2 0.00 to 2.90 NO A A A A
rated slip 20.00 ((see
t 3)
note
Motor
Rated Slip
7-28
Para Name Description Setting Default Changes Control mode
meter Display range setting during V/f V/f with Open Flux vec-
No. name opera- control PG loop tor
tion vector
E5-03 Motor 2 Sets the motor constants of 0.00 to 1.20 NO A A A A
no-load motor 2, when used for 2.90 (see
current two-motor switching (see note 3)
Note 1: Enabled when the mo- note 5)
No-Load tor 2 selection function
Current is set for multi-function
p
input.
E5-04 Motor 2 Note 2: Set like E1-04 to E2-06. 2 to 48 4 NO A A A A
number of
Note 3: Changes motors after
motor poles
Inverter and motor stop.
Number of Note 4: Waits to change motor

Poles for 20 to 50 ms after
Inverter input.
E5-05 Motor 2 Note 5: Cannot use motor 1 0.000 9.842 NO A A A A
phase-to- parameters and motor 2 to (see
phase re- parameters at same 65.000 note 3)
sistance time.
Note 6: Motor selection signal
Term will be enabled when
Resistance the motor 2 selected
function is set for multi-
multi
E5-06 Motor 2 function output. 0.0 to 18.2 NO A A A A
leakage Note 7: If the control method for 40.0 (see
inductance motor 1 is different from note 3)
that for motor 2, all oth-
Leak er parameters of motor
Inductance 2 will be set to default
settings.
Note 2. The default values are restored if the control mode is changed. The defaults for open-loop
control are shown.
are for 200-V class, 0.4 to 1.5 kW Inverters.
Note 4. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter’s rated output current. (The default settings
shown in the table are for 200-V class, 0.4-kW Inverters.)
Note 5. The setting range is between 0.00 and 0.1 less than the motor’s rated current. (The default
settings shown in the table are for 200-V class, 0.4-kW Inverters.)
7-2-5 Options Parameter Lists
PG Option Setup: F1
tion PG vector
F1-01 Number of Sets the number of PG (pulse 0 to 1000 NO X Q X Q 5-29,
PG pulses generator or encoder)) p
g pulses. 60000 5-46
PG Note: Sets the number of pulses
Pulses/Rev per motor revolution.
7-29
tion PG vector
F1-02 PG discon- Sets the PG disconnection 0 to 3 1 NO X B X B 5-31,
nection stopping method. 5-47
stopping 0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration
method stop using deceleration time
(PGO) 1, C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop
using the fast-stop
fast stop time,
time
PG Fdbk C1-09.)
Loss Sel 3: Continue operation (This
setting can’t be made with
flux vector control.)
F1-03 PG Sets the stopping method when 0 to 3 1 NO X B X B 5-31,
overspeed an overspeed (OS) fault occurs. 5-48
stopping 0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration
method stop using deceleration time
1, C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop
PG using the fast-stop time,
OverSpeed C1-09.)
Sel 3: Continue operation (This
setting can’t be made with
flux vector control.)
F1-04 PG speed Sets the stopping method when 0 to 3 3 NO X B X B 5-32,
deviation a speed deviation (DEV) fault 5-48
stopping occurs.
method 0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration
stop using deceleration time
1, C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
PG 2: Fast stop (Emergency stop
Deviation using the fast-stop time,
Sel C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (DEV is
displayed and control
continued.)
F1-05 PG rotation 0: Phase A leads with forward 0, 1 0 NO X B X B 5-30
setting command. (Phase B leads
with reverse command
command.))
PG 1: Phase B leads with forward
Rotation command. (Phase A leads
Sel with reverse command.)
F1-06 PG output Sets the division ratio for the 1 to 1 NO X B X B 5-30
ratio PG speed control card pulse 132
output.
Division ratio = (1+ n) /m (n=0,1
m=1 to 32)
F1 - 06 =
m
PG Output
Ratio n
Note: This parameter is only ef-
fective when a 3G3FV-
PPGB2 is used.
The possible division ratio
settings are:
1/32xF1-06x1.
7-30
tion PG vector
F1-07 Selecting Sets integral control during 0, 1 0 NO X B X X 5-47
integral acceleration/deceleration to
control either enabled or disabled.
during 0: Disabled (The integral
accel/decel. function isn’t used while
accelerating or
decelerating; it is used at
PG Ramp constant speeds.)
PI/I Sel 1: Enabled (The integral
function is used at all
times.)
F1-08 Overspeed Sets the overspeed detection 0 to 115 NO X A X A 5-32,

(OS) method. Frequencies above that 120 5-48
detection set for F1-08 (set as a
level. percentage
p g of the maximum
f
frequency),) which
hi h continue
ti tto
PG
exceed this frequency for the
Overspd
detection time (F1-09), are
Level
detected as overspeed faults.
faults
F1-09 Overspeed 0.0 to 0.0 NO X A X A 5-32,
(OS) 2.0 (See 5-48
detection note.)
time
PG
Overspd
Time
F1-10 PG speed Sets the speed deviation 0 to 50 10 NO X A X A 5-33,

deviation detection method. 5-49
detection Any speed deviation above the
level (DEV) F1-10
F1 10 set level (set as a
PG Deviate percentage of the maximum
Level frequency), which continues for
the deviation detection time
F1-11 PG speed (F1-11) is detected as a speed 0.0 to 0.5 NO X A X A 5-33,
deviation deviation. 10.0 5-49
detection
Note: Speed deviation is the dif-
time (DEV)
ference between actual
PG Deviate motor speed and the ref-
Time erence command speed.
F1-12 Number of Sets the number of teeth on the 0 to 0 NO X A X X 5-46

PG gear gears if there are gears 1000
teeth 1 between the PG and the motor.
PG # Gear Motor speed (r/min) =
Teeth1 [No. of pulses input from PG x
F1-13 Number of 60/N off PG pulses
60/No. l (F1 01)] x
(F1-01)] 0 NO X A X X 5-46
PG gear [(F1-13)/(F1-12)]
teeth 2
Note: A gear ratio of 1 will be
PG # Gear used if either of these pa-
Teeth2 rameters is set to 0.
F1-14 PG Discon- Used to set the PG 0 to 2.0 NO X A X A ---

nection disconnection detection time. 10.0
Detection PGO will be detected if the
Time detection time continues beyond
y
th sett time.
the ti
PG0 Time
Note The setting range will change when the control mode is changed. (The setting range for Open
loop vector control is given above.)
7-31
Other Options Setup: F2 to F9

tion PG vector
F2-01 Analog Sets the functions for channels 0, 1 0 NO B B B B 6-71
Reference 1 to 3 which are effective when
Card the 3G3IV-PAI14B Analog
selection Reference Card is used.
0: 3-channel individual
(Channel 1: terminal 13,
Channel 2: terminal 14,
Channel 3: terminal 16)
1: 3-channel
3 channel addition (Addition
AI-14 Input values are the frequency
Sel reference)
Note: When set to 0, select 1 for
b1-01. In this case the
multi-function input “Op-
tion/Inverter selection”
cannot be used.
F3-01 Digital Sets the Digital Reference Card 0 to 7 0 NO B B B B 6-72
Reference input method.
Card input 0: BCD 1% unit
selection 1: BCD 0.1% unit
2: BCD 0.01% unit
3: BCD 1 Hz unit
4: BCD 0.1 Hz unit
5: BCD 0.01 Hz unit
6: BCD special setting (5-digit
input)
7: Binary input
Note: Setting “6” is effective
only when the 3G3FV-
PDI16H2 is used, but the
input will be BCD and the
units will be set in o1-03 if
DI Input 01-03 has been set to “2”
or higher.
Note: When F3-01 is set to “7”,
input the following values
as the max. frequency.
3G3IV-PD108: FF hex (255
decimal)
3G3FV-PD116H2: FFF hex
(4,095 decimal) for 12 bits or
7530 hex (30,000 decimal) for
16 bits
7-32
tion PG vector
F4-01 Channel 1 Effective when an Analog 1 to 38 2 NO B B B B 6-73
output Monitor Card is used.
monitor Monitor selection: Set the
selection number of the monitor item to
AO Ch1 be output. (U1-)
Select Gain: Set the multiplep of 10 V
F4-02 Channel 1 f outputting
for t tti monitor it items.
it 0.00 to 1.00 OK B B B B 6-73
gain Note: 4, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 25, 2.50
28 cannot be set.
set 29 to 31
AO Ch1 are not used. When the
Gain 3G3IV-PAO12 is used
F4-03 Channel 2 outputs of ± 10 V are pos- 1 to 38 3 NO B B B B 6-73
output sible. In this case, set
monitor H4-07 (select multi-func-
selection tion analog g output
p signal
g
level) to 1.
1 When the
AO Ch2 3G3IV-PAO08 is used,
Select only outputs of 0 to 10 V
F4-04 Channel 2 are possible. 0.00 to 0.50 OK B B B B 6-73
gain 2.50
AO Ch2
Gain
F4-05 Channel 1 Sets the bias value of channel 1 –10.0 0.0 OK B B B B 6-73
output on the Analog Monitor Card. Set to 10.0
monitor as a percentage with 10 V
bias equivalent
q to 100%.
AO Ch1
Bias
F4-06 Channel 2 Sets the bias value of channel 2 –10.0 0.0 OK B B B B 6-73
output on the Analog Monitor Card. Set to 10.0
monitor as a percentage with 10 V
bias equivalent
q to 100%.
AO Ch2
Bias
F5-01 Channel 1 Selects the function to be set for 0 to 37 0 NO B B B B ---
output channel 1 when a Contact
selection Output Card is used. The same
functions can be set as for
D0-02 Ch1 multi-function outputs H2-01 to
Select H2-03.
F5-02 Channel 2 Selects the function to be set for 0 to 37 1 NO B B B B ---
output channel 1 when a Contact
selection Output Card is used. The same
functions can be set as for
D0-02 Ch2 multi-function outputs H2-01 to
Select H2-03.
F6-01 Digital Selects the digital output 0, 1 0 NO B B B B ---
output method for when a Digital
selection Output
p Card is used.
D0-08 0: 8 channels individually
Selection 1: Code output (binary code)
7-33
tion PG vector
F7-01 Output Effective when a Pulse Monitor 0 to 4 1 NO B B B B 6-73
pulse Card is used. Sets the number
multiple of output pulses.
selection 0: 1F, 1: 6F, 2: 10F, 3: 12F, 4:
36F
Note: F= the output frequency
displayed in Hz.
PO-36F Example: When 0 (1F) is
Selection set, and the output fre-
quency is 60 Hz, 60
pulses per second are
output. (50% duty)
F8-01 E-15 Selects inverter operation to 0 to 3 1 NO B B B B 6-74
operation perform when a
selection communications error occurs at
the SYSMAC BUS (Wired) I/F
Card.
E-15 Det 0: Decelerate to stop.
Sel 1: Coast to stop.
2: Emergency stop.
3: Continue operation.
F9-01 Commu- Selects the type of input used 0, 1 0 NO B B B B 6-74
nications for the communications external
external fault input from communications
fault input: (CompoBus/D Communications
input type Card.))
EFO 0 Normally
0: N ll open iinputt
Selection 1: Normally closed input
F9-02 Commu- Selects the detection method for 0, 1 0 NO B B B B 6-74

nications used for the communications
external external fault input from
fault input: communications (CompoBus/D
detection Communications Card.)
method 0: Always y detect.
1 Detect
1: D t t during
d i operation.ti
EFO
Detection
F9-03 Commu- Selects the inverter operation to 0 to 3 1 NO B B B B 6-74
nications perform when there is an
external communications external fault
fault input: input from communications
Operation (CompoBus/D Communications
Card.)
0: Decelerate to stop in the
time set in C1-02.
(Protective operation)
1: Coast to stop
stop.
EFO Fault (Protective operation)
Action 2: Emergency stop in the time
set in C1-09.
(Alarm)
F9-04 Not used. --- 0 to 0 NO B B B B ---
Trace 60000
Sample Tim
7-34
tion PG vector
F9-05 Torque This setting enables or disables 0, 1 1 NO X X X B 6-75
reference/ torque reference and torque
torque limit limit values input from
selection communications (CompoBus/D
from Communications Card.)
communica Note: Always set to “disable”
tions when using a CompoBus/
D Communications Card.
0: Disable torqueq reference/
t
torque li it from
limit f
TorqueRef/
communications.
Lmt Sel
1: Enable torque reference/
torque limit from
communications.
F9-06 Operation Selects the inverter operation to 0 to 3 1 NO B B B B 6-75
after perform when a
communica communications (CompoBus/D
tions error Communications Card) error
occurs.
0: Decelerate to stop in the
time set in C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
stop.
BUS Fault (Protective operation)
Sel 2: Emergency stop in the time
set in C1-09.
(Alarm)
7-35
7-2-6 Terminal Parameter Lists

Digital Inputs: H1
Parame- Name Description Setting Default Chan- Control mode Page
ter No
No. range setting ges
Display during V/f con- V/f with Open Flux
name opera- trol PG loop vector
tion vector
H1-01 Multi-func- Terminal 3 Sel 0 to 77 24 NO B B B B 6-77
tion input 1:
Terminal 3
selection
tion input 2:
Terminal 4
selection
H1-03 Multi-func- Terminal 5 Sel 0 to 77 3 (0) NO B B B B 6-77
tion input 3: (See
Terminal 5 note.)
selection
tion input 4: (See
Terminal 6 note.)
selection
tion input 5: (See
Terminal 7 note.)
selection
tion input 6: (See
Terminal 8 note.)
selection
Note The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3-wire sequence.
Digital Input Functions List

Setting
g Function Control mode Page
g
value
l V/f V/f Open loop Flux
w/PG Vector vector
0 3-wire control (Forward/Reverse command) OK OK OK OK 5-16
1 Local/Remote selection (ON: Operating, OFF: OK OK OK OK 6-78
Setting parameters)
2 Option/Inverter selection (ON: Option) OK OK OK OK 6-78
3 Multi-step speed reference 1 OK OK OK OK 5-17
When H3-05 is set to “0,” this function is
combined with “Main/auxiliary speed switch.”
6 Jog frequency reference (has priority over OK OK OK OK 5-17
multi-step speed)
7 Multi-accel/decel time 1 OK OK OK OK 5-18
8 Baseblock NO (contact a: Base block ON) OK OK OK OK 6-79
9 Baseblock NC (contact b: Base block OFF) OK OK OK OK 6-79
A Accel/decel ramp hold (ON: Accel/decel stopped, OK OK OK OK 6-79
frequency on hold)
B OH2 alarm signal input (ON: OH2 will be OK OK OK OK 6-80
displayed)
7-36
Setting Function Control mode Page

value V/f V/f Open loop Flux
w/PG Vector vector
C Multi-function analog input selection (ON: Enable) OK OK OK OK 6-80
D V/f mode selection (ON: Speed feedback control --- OK --- --- 6-81
disabled, (normal V/f control))
E Speed control integral reset (ON: Integral control --- OK --- OK 6-81
disabled)
F Not used: Do not set --- --- --- --- ---
10 UP command “MOP Increase” (Always set with OK OK OK OK 6-81
the DOWN command)
11 DOWN command “MOP Decrease” (Always set OK OK OK OK 6-81
with the UP command)
12 FJOG command (ON: Forward rotation for jog OK OK OK OK 5-19
frequency d1-09)
13 RJOG command (ON: Reverse rotation for jog OK OK OK OK 5-19
frequency d1-09)
14 Fault reset (Reset when turned ON) OK OK OK OK 6-82
15 Emergency stop “Fast-stop” (Normally open OK OK OK OK 5-19
condition, When ON: Decelerate to a stop in the
emergency stop time set in c1-09)
16 Motor 2 selection: Selection of motor 1 or motor 2 OK OK OK OK ---
for two-motor switching control (ON: Motor 2
selected)
17 Emergency stop N.C. (ON: Decelerate to a stop in OK OK OK OK 5-19
the emergency stop time set in c1-09)
18 Timer function input (Functions are set with OK OK OK OK 6-46
b4-01, b4-02 and the timer function is set at the
same time)
19 PID control ON/OFF (ON: PID control disabled) OK OK OK OK 6-83
1A Multi-accel/decel time 2 OK OK OK OK 5-18
1B Parameter write access (ON: Parameters can be OK OK OK OK 6-83
overwritten; OFF: All parameters other than
frequency monitor are write protected.)
1C Trim control increase (ON: d4-02 frequencies are OK OK OK OK 6-83
added to analog frequency references.)
1D Trim control decrease (ON: d4-02 frequencies are OK OK OK OK 6-83
subtracted from analog frequency references.)
1E Sample/hold analog frequency reference (ON: OK OK OK OK 6-84
Hold analog value)
1F Frequency reference terminal 13/14 selection OK OK OK OK 5-19
(ON: select terminal 14)
Valid only when H3-09 is set to “1F”.
20 to External fault (Desired settings possible) OK OK OK OK 6-85
2F Input mode: contact a/contact b,
Detection mode: Normal/during operation
Stopping method: Ramp to stop, coast to stop,
fast stop or continue operation.
30 Reset PID control integration (ON: resets the PID OK OK OK OK 6-54
control integration value)
31 Hold PID control integration (ON: maintains the OK OK OK OK 6-54
PID control integration value)
7-37

w/PG Vector vector
60 DC injection braking command (ON: DC OK OK OK OK 6-87
operation)
61 External speed search command 1: Maximum OK --- OK --- 6-87
frequency (ON: speed search)
62 External speed search command 2: Set frequency OK --- OK --- 6-87
(ON: speed search)
63 Energy save mode (ON: Energy-saving control OK OK --- --- 6-13
set for b8-01, b8-02)
64 External speed search command OK OK OK OK ---
65 KEB (deceleration operation for momentary OK OK OK OK ---
power interruption) command (NC contact)
66 KEB (deceleration operation for momentary OK OK OK OK ---
power interruption) command (NO contact)
71 Speed/torque control change (ON: Torque control) --- --- --- OK 6-88
72 Zero-servo command (ON: Zero-servo lock) --- --- --- OK 6-88
77 Speed control (ASR) proportional gain switch --- --- --- OK 6-88
(ON: C5-03)
Digital Outputs: H2
Parame- Name Description Setting Default Chan- Control mode Page
ter No
No. range setting ges
Display during V/f con- V/f with Open Flux
name opera- trol PG loop vector
tion vector
H2-01 Multi-func- Terminal 9 to 10 Sel 0 to 37 0 NO B B B B 6-90
tion contact
output: ter-
minal 9 to
10.
tion output
1: terminal
25.
tion output
2: terminal
26.
Digital Outputs List

Setting
g Function Control mode Page
g
value
l V/f V/f Open loop Flux
w/PG Vector vector
0 During run 1 OK OK OK OK 6-91
1 Excitation OK OK OK OK 6-91
2 Frequency (ref/out) agree 1: detection width OK OK OK OK 6-103
L4-02
3 Desired frequency (ref/setting) agree 1 (ON: OK OK OK OK 6-103
Output frequency = ±L4-01, detection width
L4-02)
4 Frequency detection 1 (ON: +L4-01youtput OK OK OK OK 6-103
frequencyy–L4-01, detection width L4-02)
7-38

w/PG Vector vector
5 Frequency detection 2 OK OK OK OK 6-103
(ON: Output frequencyy+L4-01 or output
frequencyx–L4-01, detection width L4-02)
6 Inverter operation ready OK OK OK OK ---
READY: After initialization, no faults
7 During DC bus low voltage (UV) detection OK OK OK OK ---
8 During baseblock 1 (ON: during baseblock) OK OK OK OK ---
9 Operation reference (ON: Operator) OK OK OK OK ---
A Run command remote operation (ON: Operator) OK OK OK OK ---
B Overtorque detection 1 NO (contact a: ON, OK OK OK OK 6-107
overtorque detection)
C Loss of frequency reference (Effective when OK OK OK OK 6-104
operation selection is “1” for L4-05 frequency
reference missing)
D DB overheat (ON: Resistance overheat or braking OK OK OK OK ---
Tr fault)
E Fault (ON: Faults other than CPF00, CPF01 have OK OK OK OK 8-1
occurred.)
F Not used. Do not set. --- --- --- --- ---
10 Minor fault (ON:Report displayed) OK OK OK OK 8-8
11 Fault reset command active OK OK OK OK ---
12 Timer output OK OK OK OK 6-46
13 Frequency (ref/out) agree 2 (Detection width: OK OK OK OK 6-103
L4-04)
14 Desired frequency (ref/setting) agree 2 (ON: OK OK OK OK 6-103
Output frequency = L4-03, detection width L4-04)
15 Frequency detection 3 (ON: output frequency OK OK OK OK 6-103
x–L4-03, detection width L4-04)
16 Frequency detection 4 (ON: output frequency OK OK OK OK 6-103
y–L4-03, detection width L4-04)
17 Overtorque detection 1 NC (Contact b: OFF, OK OK OK OK 6-107
torque detection)
18 Overtorque detection 2 NO (Contact a: ON, OK OK OK OK 6-107
torque detection)
19 Overtorque detection 2 NC (Contact b: OFF, OK OK OK OK 6-107
torque detection)
1A During reverse run (ON: during reverse run) OK OK OK OK ---
1B During baseblock 2 (OFF: During base block) OK OK OK OK ---
1C Motor 2 selected (ON: motor 2 selected) OK OK OK OK ---
1D Regenerating (ON: Regenerating) --- --- --- OK ---
1E Restart enabled (ON: Restart enabled) OK OK OK OK 6-106
1F Motor overload (OL1) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or OK OK OK OK 6-91
more of the detection level)
20 Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm (ON: OK OK OK OK 6-91
Temperature is above L8-02)
30 During torque limit (current limit) (ON: During --- --- OK OK ---
torque limit)
7-39

w/PG Vector vector
31 During speed limit. (ON: During speed limit) --- --- --- OK ---
33 Zero-servo end (ON: Zero-servo) --- --- --- OK 6-92
37 During run 2 (ON: Frequency output, OFF: Base OK OK OK OK 6-91
block, DC braking, initialization, operation stop.
Analog Inputs: H3
tion PG vector
H3-01 Signal 0: 0 to +10 V 0, 1 0 NO B B B B 5-5
selection: 1: 0 to ±10 V
terminal 13
(Voltage)
Term 13
Signal
H3-02 Gain: termi- Sets the frequency when 10 V 0.0 to 100.0 OK B B B B 5-7
nal 13 is input,
p , as a p
percentage
g of the 1000.0
i
maximum f
frequency.
Terminal 13
Gain
H3-03 Bias: termi- Sets the frequency when 0 V is –100.0 0.0 OK B B B B 5-7
nal 13 input,
p , as a percentage
p g of the to
maximum
i frequency.
f +100.0
100 0
Terminal 13
Bias
H3-04 Multi-func- 0: 0 to +10 V 0, 1 0 NO B B B B 5-7
tion analog 1: 0 to ±10 V
input signal
selection:
terminal 16
Term 16
Signal
H3-05 Selection: Select from the functions listed 0 to 1F 1F NO B B B B 5-7,
Terminal 16 on the following
g table. Refer to 6-92
6 92
page 6-92.
Terminal 16
Sel
H3-06 Gain: termi- Sets the input gain (level) when 0.0 to 100.0 OK B B B B 5-8
nal 16 terminal 16 is 10 V. 1000.0
Th contents
The t t iin th
the ffollowing
ll i
Terminal 16
table are taken as 100%.
Gain
H3-07 Bias: termi- Sets the input gain (level) when –100.0 0.0 OK B B B B 5-8
nal 16 terminal 16 is 0 V. to
Th contents
The t t iin th
the ffollowing
ll i +100.0
100 0
Terminal 16
Bias
H3-08 Signal 0: 0 to +10 V (Always cut 0 to 2 2 NO A A A A 5-6
selection: jumper wire J1)
terminal 14 1: 0 to ±10 V ((Always
y cut
j
jumper wire
i J1)
Term 14
2: 4 to 20 mA
Signal
H3-09 Selection: Set as for H3-05. 1 to 1F 1F NO A A A A 5-5,
Terminal 14 Note: Cannot be set to 0. The 6-92
Terminal 14 1F function will become
Sel “frequency reference.”
7-40
tion PG vector
H3-10 Gain: Ter- Sets the input gain (level) when 0.0 to 100.0 OK A A A A 5-7
minal 14 terminal 14 is 10 V (20
( mA). ) 1000.0
Th contents
The t t iin th
the ffollowing
ll i
Terminal 14
Gain
H3-11 Bias: Termi- Sets the input gain (level) when –100.0 0.0 OK A A A A 5-7
nal 14 terminal 14 is 0 V (4
( mA). ) to
Th contents
The t t iin th
the ffollowing
ll i 100 0
+100.0
Terminal 14
Bias
H3-12 Analog in- Sets terminals 13, 14, 16 to 0.00 to 0.00 NO A A A A 5-8
put filter primary delay filter time 2.00
time con- constant, in seconds units.
stant Note: Effective for noise control
Filter Avg etc.
Time
Description of Multi-function Analog Input: Terminal 16

Function Contents Control mode
0 Auxiliary frequency reference Maximum frequency OK OK OK OK
1 Frequency gain Frequency reference command OK OK OK OK
value (voltage.)
2 Frequency bias Maximum frequency (H0-03 +) OK OK OK OK
4 Voltage bias Motor rated voltage (E1-05) OK OK --- ---
5 Accel/decel change Set acceleration and OK OK OK OK
deceleration times (C1-01 to
C1-08)
6 DC injection braking current Inverter rated output current OK OK OK ---
7 Overtorque detection level Motor rated torque OK OK OK OK
8 Stall prevention level during run Inverter rated output current OK OK --- ---
9 Frequency reference lower limit Maximum frequency OK OK OK OK
level
A Jump frequency Maximum frequency OK OK OK OK
B PID feedback Maximum frequency OK OK OK OK
C PID target value Maximum frequency OK OK OK OK
D Frequency bias 2 (rotates in Maximum frequency (H0-03 +) OK OK OK OK
reverse with negative values)
10 Forward side torque limit Rated torque --- --- OK OK
11 Reverse side torque limit Rated torque --- --- OK OK
12 Regeneration side torque limit Rated torque --- --- OK OK
13 Torque reference/torque limit at Rated torque --- --- --- OK
speed control
14 Torque compensation (bias) Rated torque --- --- --- OK
15 Forward/reverse side torque limit Rated torque --- --- OK OK
1F Not used (terminal 14: frequency --- OK OK OK OK
reference)
7-41
Analog Outputs: H4
tion PG vector
H4-01 Multi-func- Sets the number of the monitor 1 to 38 2 NO B B B B 6-95
tion analog item to be output (U1-) from
output 1 terminal 21.
selection: Note: Settings 4, 10, 11, 12, 13,
terminal 21 14, 25, 28, 34, and 35
Terminal 21 cannot be set and 29 to
Sel 31 are not used.
H4-02 Gain Sets the multi-function analog 0.00 to 1.00 OK B B B B 6-96
terminal 21 output 1 voltage level gain. 2.50
Sets whether the monitor item
Terminal 21 output will be output in multiples
Gain of 10 V.
H4-03 Bias Sets the multi-function analog –10.0 0.0 OK B B B B 6-96
terminal 21 output 1 voltage level bias. to
Sets output characteristic +10 0
+10.0
Terminal 21 up/down parallel movement as
Bias a percentage of 10 V.
H4-04 Multi-func- Sets the number of the monitor 1 to 38 3 NO B B B B 6-95
tion analog item to be output (U1-) from
output 2 terminal 23.
selection: Note: Settings 4, 10, 11, 12, 13,
terminal 23 14, 25, 28, 34, and 35
Terminal 23 cannot be set and 29 to
Sel 31 are not used.
H4-05 Gain Sets the multi-function analog 0.00 to 0.50 OK B B B B 6-96
terminal 23 output 2 voltage level gain. 2.50
Sets whether the monitor item
Terminal 23 output will be output in multiples
Gain of 10 V.
H4-06 Bias Sets the multi-function analog –10.0 0.0 OK B B B B 6-96
terminal 23 output 2 voltage level bias. to
Sets output characteristic +10 0
+10.0
Terminal 23 up/down parallel movement as
Bias a percentage of 10 V.
H4-07 Analog Sets the signal output level for 0, 1 0 NO B B B B 6-96
output multi-function outputs 1 and 2
signal level (terminals 21, 23.)
selection 0: 0 to +10 V output
1: 0 to ±10 V output
AO Level Note: The optional Analog Mon-
Select itor Card may also be
used with this setting.
7-42
Serial Communications Setup: H5

tion PG vector
H5-01 Slave Sets the Slave address for 00 to 1F NO A A A A ---
Address RS-422/485 communications. 20
Serial 00: Communications function
Comm Adr disabled.
H5-02 Baud rate Selects the baud rate for 0 to 4 3 NO A A A A ---
selection RS-422/485 communications.
0: 1,200 bps
1: 2,400
2 400 bps
Serial Baud 2: 4,800 bps
Rate 3: 9,600 bps
4: 19,200 bps
H5-03 Parity Selects the parity check 0 to 2 0 NO A A A A ---
selection function for RS-422/485
communications.
Serial Com 0: No parity
Sel 1: Odd parity
2: Even parity
H5-04 Operation Selects the method of operation 0 to 3 3 NO A A A A ---
for commu- for when it is detected that the
nication communications time has
timeover elapsed in RS-422/485
communications.
0: Deceleration stopp
(C1 02)/F lt
(C1-02)/Fault
Serial Fault
Sel 1: Free-run stop/Fault
2: Fast stop (C1-09)/Fault
3: Continue/Alarm
H5-05 Commu- Enables or disables the 0, 1 1 NO A A A A ---
nications communications timeover
timeover function in RS-422/485
detection communications.
selection 0: Disable
Serial Flt 1: Enable
Dtct
7-43
7-2-7 Protection Parameter Lists
Motor Overload: L1
Para Name Description Set- De- Chan- Control mode Page
meter ting fault ges
No. Display name range set- dur- V/f V/f Open Flux
ting ing con- with loop vec-
op- trol PG vector
era- tor
tion
L1-01 Motor protection Sets whether the motor overload 0, 1 1 NO B B B B 6-97
selection function is enabled or disabled at
electric thermal overload relay.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Note: In some applications when the
Inverter power supply is turned
off, the thermal value is reset,
so even if this parameter is set
MOL Fault Select to 1, (Enabled), protection may
not be effective.
When several motors are con-
nected to one Inverter, set to 0
(Disabled) and ensure that each
motor is installed with a protec-
tion device.
L1-02 Motor protection Sets the electric thermal detection 0.1 to 1.0 NO B B B B 6-97
time constant time in units of seconds. 5.0
Note: Usually setting is not necessary.
The default setting is 150%
overload for one minute.
When the motor’s overload rere-
MOL Time Const sistance is known, set at the
overload resistance when the
motor is hot started. (Always
leave a margin for error.)
Power Loss Ridethrough: L2

tion PG vector
L2-01 Momentary 0: Disabled (Undervoltage 0 to 2 0 NO B B B B 6-98
power loss fault detection)
selection 1: Enabled (Restarted when
the power returns within the
time for L2-02. When L2-02
is exceeded, undervoltage
detection )
fault detection.)
PwrL 2: Enabled while CPU is
Selection operating. (Restarts when
power returns during control
operations. Does not detect
undervoltage fault.
L2-02 Momentary Sets the recovery time, when 0.0 to 0.7 NO B B B B 6-98
power loss momentary power loss selection 2.0 (See
ridethru ((L2-01)) is set to 1,, in units of note 1.))
one second. d
PwrL
Ridethru t
7-44
tion PG vector
L2-03 Minimum Sets the Inverter’s minimum 0.1 to 0.5 NO B B B B 6-99
baseblock baseblock time in units of one 5.0 (See
time (BB) second, when the Inverter is note 1.)
restarted after power loss
ridethrough.
Note: Sets the time for the mo-
tor’ss residual voltage to
tor
PwrL dissipate.
Baseblock t When an overcurrent oc-
curs when starting a
speed search or DC injec-
tion braking, increase the
set values.
L2-04 Voltage Sets the time required to return 0.0 to 0.3 NO A A A A 6-99
restart time to normal voltage at the 5.0
completion of a speed search,
in units of one second.
Note: Set the time required for a
200 V class Inverter to re-
200-V re
PwrL V/F cover from 0 V to
Ramp t 200 VAC.
(For the 400-V class In-
verter, the time from 0 V
to 400 VAC.)
L2-05 Under Sets the main circuit under 150 to 190 NO A A A A 6-99
voltage voltage (UV) detection level 210 (See
detection (main circuit DC voltage) in V (See note 2.)
level (UV) units. note 2.)
essary. Insert a AC reac-
PUV Det tor and use this function
Level to lower the main circuit
under voltage detection
level.
L2-06 KEB By decelerating simultaneously 0.0 to 0.1 NO A A A A ---
deceleration with a momentary power 100.0
rate interruption, this function
produces regenerative energy
and utilizes this energy to
counter the power interruption.
Select the deceleration rate to
be applied after the KEB
command (set value: 65 or 66)
set for multi-function inputs is
input.
Set as a percentage the
deceleration frequency rate for
when the time set in L2 02 has
L2-02
KEB elapsed after KEB command
Frequency input.
If 80% is set, deceleration will
be performed taking the time set
in L2-02, up to 80% of the
output frequency when KEB is
input.
If L2-06 is set to 0.0, C1-09 will
automatically decelerate to the
base so that the undervoltage
(UV) of the main circuit will not
be detected.
Note 1. The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter. The values for a 200-V class 0.4-kW
Inverter arre given above.
7-45
Note 2. These are values for a 200-V class Inverter. Values for the 400-V class Inverter are double.
Stall Prevention: L3
tion PG vector
L3-01 Stall pre- 0: Disabled (Acceleration as 0 to 2 1 NO B B B X 6-100
vention dur- set. With a large load, the
ing accel- motor may stall.)
eration 1: Enabled (Acceleration
stopped when L3-02 level is
exceeded. Acceleration
starts again when the
current is returned.)
StallP Ac- 2: Intelligent acceleration
cel Sel mode (Using the L3-02 level
as a basis, acceleration is
automatically adjusted. Set
acceleration time is
disregarded.)
L3-02 Stall pre- Effective when L3-01 is set to 1 0 to 150 NO B B B X 6-100
vention lev- or 2. Set as a percentage of 200
el during Inverter rated output current.
accelera- Note: Usually setting is not nec-
tion essary. The default set-
StallP Ac- ting reduces the set val-
cel Lvl ues when the motor stalls.
L3-03 Stall pre- Sets the lower limit for stall 0 to 50 NO A A A X 6-100
vention lev- prevention during acceleration, 100
el during as a percentage of the Inverter
accelera- rated output current, when
tion operation is in the frequency
range above the maximum
StallP CHP l
voltage f
frequency (E1 06 )
(E1-06.)
Lvl Note: Usually setting is not nec-
essary.
L3-04 Stall pre- 0: Disabled (Deceleration as 0 to 3 1 NO B B B B 6-101
vention dur- set. If deceleration time is
ing decel- too short, a main circuit
eration overvoltage may result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is
stopped when the main
circuit voltage exceeds the
overvoltage level.
Deceleration restarts when
voltage is returned.)
2: Intelligent deceleration
mode (Deceleration rate is
automatically adjusted so
that in Inverter can
decelerate in the shortest
StallP De- possible time. Set
cel Sel deceleration time is
disregarded.)
3: Enabled (Stall prevention
using a braking resistance
device or Braking Resistor
Unit)
Note: When a braking option
(braking resistance de-
vice, Braking Resistor
Unit, or Braking Unit) is
used, always set to 0 or 3.
7-46
tion PG vector
L3-05 Stall pre- 0: Disabled (Runs as set. With 0 to 2 1 NO B B X X 6-102
vention dur- a large load, the motor may
ing run stall.)
1: Enabled: Deceleration time
1 (the deceleration time for
the stall prevention function
StallP Run is C1-02.)
Sel 2: Enabled: Deceleration time
2 (the deceleration time for
the stall prevention function
is C1-04.)
L3-06 Stall pre- Effective when L3-04 is 1 or 2. 30 to 160 NO B B X X 6-102
vention lev- Set as a percentage of the 200
el during Inverter rated output current.
run Note: Usually setting is not nec-
essary.
StallP Run The default setting re-
Level duces the set values
when the motor stalls.
Note When the control mode is changed, the Inverter returns to default settings. (The open loop vector
Reference Detection: L4
tion PG vector
L4-01 Frequency Effective when “Desired 0.0 to 0.0 NO B B B B 6-103
detection frequency (ref/setting) agree 1,” 400.0
level “Frequency detection 1,”
“Frequency
Frequency detection 2,”
2, are set
Spd Agree for multi-function output.
Level Frequencies to be detected are
set in Hz units.
L4-02 Frequency Effective when “Frequency 0.0 to 2.0 NO B B B B 6-103
detection (ref/out) agree 1,” “Desired 20.0
width frequency (ref/setting) agree 1,”
“Frequency detection 1,”
“Frequency detection 2” are set
Spd Agree for multi-function output. Sets
Width the frequency detection width in
Hz units.
L4-03 Frequency Effective when “Desired –400.0 0.0 NO A A A A 6-103
detection frequency (ref/setting) agree 2,” to
level (+/–) “Frequency detection 3,” +400.0
“Frequency
Frequency detection 4,”
4, are set
Spd Agree for multi-function output.
Lvl+– Frequencies to be detected are
set in Hz units.
L4-04 Frequency Effective when “Frequency 0.0 to 2.0 NO A A A A 6-103
detection (ref/out) agree 2,” “Desired 20.0
width (+/–) frequency (ref/setting) agree 1,”
“Frequency detection 3,”
“Frequency detection 4” are set
Spd Agree for multi-function output. Sets
Wdth+– the frequency detection width in
Hz units.
7-47
tion PG vector
L4-05 Operation 0: Stop (Operation follows the 0, 1 0 NO A A A A 6-104
when frequency reference.)
frequency 1: Operation at 80% speed
reference is continues. (At 80% of speed
lost before the frequency reference
was lost)
N t Frequency
Note: F f
reference i
is
Ref Loss
lost: Frequency reference
Sel
dropped over 90% in
400 ms.
Fault Restart: L5
tion PG vector
L5-01 Number of Sets the number of auto restart 0 to 10 0 NO B B B B 6-106
auto restart attempts. Automatically restarts
attempts after a fault and conducts a
speed d searchh ffrom th
the run
Num of
frequency.
Restarts
L5-02 Auto restart Sets whether a fault contact 0, 1 0 NO B B B B 6-106
operation output is activated during fault
selection restart.
0: Not output (Fault contact is
not activated.)
activated )
Restart Sel 1: Output (Fault contact is
activated.)
Torque Detection: L6
tion PG vector
L6-01 Torque 0: Overtorque detection 0 to 4 0 NO B B B B 6-107
detection disabled.
selection 1 1: Detection during speed
agree only/Operation
continues after detection
(Minor fault)
2: Detection during
run/Operation continues
after detection (Minor fault)
Torq Det 1 3: Detection during speed
Sel agree only/Inverter output is
shut off after detection
(Fault)
4: Detection during
run/Inverter output is shut
off after detection (Fault)
L6-02 Torque Vector control: Motor rated 0 to 150 NO B B B B 6-107
detection torque is set as 100%. 300
level1 V/f control: Inverter rated output
p
currentt iis sett as 100%
100%.
Torq Det 1
Lvl
7-48
tion PG vector
L6-03 Torque Sets the torque detection time in 0.0 to 0.1 NO B B B B 6-107
detection 1-second units. 10.0
time 1
Torq Det 1
Time
L6-04 Torque Setting procedure is the same 0 to 4 0 NO A A A A 6-107
detection as for “Torque detection
selection 2 selection 1” ((L6-01 to L6-03.))
Torq Det 2 The following outputs are
Sel possible:
L6-05 T
Torque d
detection
t ti selection
l ti 11: 0 to 150 NO A A A A 6-107
Torque
Multi-function output “Torque 300
detection
detection selection 1” NO/NC
level 2
Torque detection selection 2:
Torq Det 2 Multi-function output “Torque
Lvl detection selection 22” NO/NC
L6-06 Torque 0.0 to 0.1 NO A A A A 6-107
detection 10.0
time 2
Torq Det 2
Time
Torque Limit: L7
tion PG vector
L7-01 Forward Sets the torque limit value as a 0 to 200 NO X X B B 6-3,
torque limit percentage
p g of the motor rated 300 6-29
t
torque. F
Four iindividual
di id l regions
i
Torq Limit
can be set.
Fwd
Output
O torque
L7-02 Reverse Reverse 0 to 200 NO X X B B 6-3,
Forward side
torque limit 300 6-29
L7-01
L7-04
L7 04
Torq Limit Regenerative Motor
verse
Rev state speed

Reve
d
Forward
L7-03 Forward re- Regenerative 0 to 200 NO X X B B 6-3,

state
generative 300 6-29
torque limit L7-03
L7-02
Torq Lmt
Fwd Rgn Reverse side
L7-04 Reverse re- 0 to 200 NO X X B B 6-3,

generative 300 6-29
torque limit
Torq Lmt
Rev Rgn
7-49
Hardware Protection: L8
tion PG vector
L8-01 DB resistor 0: Disabled (Braking resistor is 0, 1 0 NO B B B B 6-108
protection not used or the Braking
Resistor Unit is used)
DB 1: Enabled (Protects the
Resistor braking resistor from
Prot overheating)
L8-02 Inverter Sets the detection temperature 50 to 95 NO A A A A 6-108
overheat for the Inverter overheat 130
detection detection pre-alarm in C.
pre-alarm Note: The pre-alarm detects
level when the cooling fin tem-
OH perature reaches the set
Pre-Alarm value.
Lvl
L8-03 Operation Sets the operation for when the 0 to 3 3 NO A A A A 6-108
after Inverter overheat pre-alarm
Inverter goes ON.
overheat 0: Ramp to stop in
pre-alarm deceleration time C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop in fast-stop time
C1-09.
C1 09.
OH 3: Continue operation (Monitor
Pre-Alarm display only.)
Sel Note: A fault will be given in set-
ting 0 to 2 and a minor
fault will be given in set-
ting 3.
L8-05 Input 0: Disabled 0, 1 0 NO A A A A 6-108
open-phase 1: Enabled (Detects if input
protection current open-phase, power
selection supply voltage imbalance or
main circuit electrostatic
Ph Loss In capacitor deterioration
Sel occurs.)
L8-07 Output 0: Disabled 0, 1 0 NO A A A A 6-109
open-phase 1: Enabled (Output open
protection phase detected at less than
selection 5% of Inverter’s rated
current.)
Note: Output
p openp phase
p mayy
be detected inadvertently
Ph Loss when applied motor ca-
Out Sel pacity is small for Inverter
capacity. In this case, set
to 0 (Disabled.)
L8-10 Ground 0: Disable ground fault 0, 1 1 NO A A A A 6-109
fault protection.
protection 1: Enable ground fault
selection protection.
p
Ground
Fault Sel
7-50
tion PG vector
L8-17 Carrier L8-17 settings: 0 to 3 1 NO A A A X 6-109
frequency Enable or disable the low-speed
reduction at carrier frequency reduction
low speed function.
0: Disable (Don’t reduce
carrier frequency at low
speed.)
1: Enable (Reduce carrier
frequency at low speed.)
2,3: Reserved for factory
adjustments.
j
L-Spd GBT L8-19 settings:
Prtct 0: Disable (Don’t reduce the
OL2 detection level at low
speed.)
1: Enable (Reduce the OL2
detection level at low
speed.)
Note: Set these parameters in
one of the following com-
binations:
L8-19 Inverter 0, 1 0 NO A A A A 6-109
overload To reduce motor noise at
characteris- low speeds, set L8-17 to “0”
tics at low and L8-19 to “1”.
speed When high torque is
required at low speeds, set
L8-17 to “1” and L8-19 to
“0”.
Note: Do not set both L8-17 and
L8-19 to “0”. Doing so
may damage the inverter.
Use a larger inverter if
high torque is required
OL2 Chara and you want to set a
@L-Spd higher carrier frequency.
Note: If flux vector control is be-
ing used and a large load
is being applied continu-
ously at low speed, either
use a larger inverter or
set the carrier frequency
to 2 kHz in C6-01.
7-2-8 Operator Parameter Lists
Monitor Select: o1
No. Display range setting during V/f V/f Open Flux
name opera- con- with loop vector
tion trol PG vector
o1-01 Monitor Set the number of the monitor 4 to 38 6 OK B B B B 6-110
selection item to be displayed in the
earliest 4 monitor items.
(U1-)
User Note: The output monitor volt-
Monitor Sel age (default setting) can
be changed.
7-51
No. Display range setting during V/f V/f Open Flux
name opera- con- with loop vector
tion trol PG vector
o1-02 Monitor Sets the monitor item to be 1 to 4 1 OK B B B B 6-110
selection displayed when the power is
after turned on.
power-on 1: Frequency reference
2: Output frequency
Power-On 3: Output current
Monitor 4: The monitor item set for
o1-01
o1-03 Frequency Sets the units that will be set 0 to 0 NO B B B B 5-9
reference and displayed for the 39999
setting and frequency reference and
display frequency monitor.
units 0: 0.01-Hz units
1: 0.01% units (Maximum
frequency is 100%)
2 to 39: r/min units (Sets the
motor poles. Cannot
be set in Flex Vector
Control.)
40 to 39999: User desired
display
Set the desired values for
setting and
display for the
max. frequency.
Display
Scaling
Set four digits
without the dec-
imal point
Set the position
of the decimal
point in the first
digit.
Example: When the max. fre-

quency value is 200.0, set
12000
o1-04 V/f pattern Set the V/f pattern setting units. 0, 1 0 NO X X X B 6-31
setting (E1-04, 06, 09 set units)
units 0: Hz units
1: r/min units
Display Note: Effective only in the flux
Units control vector mode.
o1-05 Not used Do not set. --- 0 --- --- --- --- --- ---
Address
Display
Key Selections: o2
tion PG vector
o2-01 Local/Re- Sets the Digital Operator 0, 1 1 NO B B B B 6-111
mote Key Local/Remote Key
enabled/disabled.
0: Disabled
Local/Re- 1: Enabled (Switches between
mote Key the Digital Operator and the
parameter settings.)
7-52
tion PG vector
o2-02 Stop Key Sets the Stop Key in the run 0, 1 1 NO B B B B 6-111
mode.
0: Disabled (When the run
command is issued from
Oper Stop and external terminal, the
Key Stop Key is disabled.)
1: Enabled (Effective even
during run.)
o2-03 User Clears or stores user initial 0 to 2 0 NO B B B B 6-111

parameter values.
initial val- 0: Stores/not set
ues 1: Begins storing (Records the
set parameters as user
initial values.)
2: All clear (Clears all
recorded user initial values)
User De- Note: When the set parameters
faults are recorded as user ini-
tial values, 1110 will be
displayed in the Initialize
mode (A1-03.)
o2-04 Inverter ca- Do not set 0 to FF 0 (See NO B B B B 6-112

pacity Note: This parameter is set by (See note.)
selection the manufacturer note.))
Inverter
Model #
o2-05 Frequency When the frequency reference 0, 1 0 NO A A A A 6-112

reference is set on the Digital Operator’s
setting frequency reference monitor,
method sets whether the Enter Key is
necessary.
0: Enter Key needed
1: Enter Key not needed
Operator Note: When set to 1, the Invert-
M.O.P. er accepts the frequency
reference without Enter
Key operation.
o2-06 Operation Sets the operation when the 0, 1 0 NO A A A A 6-112

selection Digital Operator is
when Digi- disconnected.
tal Operator 0: Disabled (Operation
is discon- continues even if the Digital
nected Operator is disconnected.)
1: Enabled (OPR is detected
at Digital Operator
Oper disconnection. Inverter
Detection output is cut off, and fault
contact is operated.)
o2-07 Cumulative Sets the cumulative operation 0 to 0 NO A A A A 6-112

operation time in hour units. 65535
time setting Note: Operation time is calcu-
calcu
Elapsed lated from the set values.
Time Set
o2-08 Cumulative 0: Cumulative time when the 0, 1 0 NO A A A A 6-112

operation Inverter power is on. (All
time selec- time while the Inverter
tion power is on is
accumulated.)
Elapsed 1: Cumulative Inverter run
Time Run time. (Only Inverter output
time is accumulated.)
7-53
tion PG vector
o2-09 Factory use Do not set. --- 0 --- --- --- --- --- ---
Init mode
sel
Note The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter. The values for a 200-V class 0.4 kW Invert-
er are given above.
7-54
8
Chapter 8
Maintenance Operations
8-1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions
8-2 Troubleshooting
8-3 Maintenance and Inspection
Maintenance Operations Chapter 8
8-1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions
8-1-1 Fault Detection
When the Inverter detects a fault, the fault code is displayed on the Digital Operator, the
fault contact output operates, and the Inverter output is shut OFF causing the motor to
coast to a stop. (The stopping method can be selected for some faults, and the selected
stopping method will be used with these faults.)
Before restarting, reset the error using one of the following procedures. If the run com-
mand is ON, the reset will be ignored. Turn OFF the run command before resetting.
Turn ON the fault reset signal.
(A multi-function input (H1-01 to H1-06) must be set to 14 (Fault Reset).)
Press the RESET Key on the Digital Operator.
Turn the main circuit power supply off and then on again.
Fault Displays and Processing

Fault Display Meaning Probable causes and remedies
OC The Inverter output current • A short-circuit or ground fault occurred at the In-
Overcurrent exceeded the overcurrent verter output. (A short or ground fault can be
detection level. caused by motor burn damage, worn insulation, or
a damaged cable.)
• The load is too large or the acceleration/decelera-
tion time is too short.
• A special-purpose motor or motor with a capacity
too large for the Inverter is being used.
• A magnetic switch was switched at the Inverter’s
output.
→ Reset the fault after correcting its cause.
GF The ground fault current at the • A ground fault occurred at the Inverter output.
Ground Fault Inverter’s output exceeded (A ground fault can be caused by motor burn dam-
approximately 80% of the age, worn insulation, or a damaged cable.)
Inverter’s rated output current.
PUF The fuse in the main circuit is • The output transistor has failed because of a short-
DC Bus Fuse Open blown. circuit or ground fault at the Inverter output.
Check whether there is a short-circuit between the
following terminals. A short-circuit will damage the
output transistor:
B1(+3) ↔ T1(U), T2(V), T3(W)
(–) ↔ T1(U), T2(V), T3(W)
→ Replace the Inverter after correcting the cause.
8-2

SC The Inverter output or load was • A short-circuit or ground fault occurred at the In-
Short Circuit short-circuited. verter output. (A short or ground fault can be
caused by motor burn damage, worn insulation, or
a damaged cable.)
OV The main circuit DC voltage • The deceleration time is too short and the regen-
Overvoltage exceeded the overvoltage erative energy from the motor is too large.
detection level.
→ Increase the deceleration time or connect a
200-V class: Approx. 400 V braking resistor (or Braking Resistor Unit).
400-V class: Approx. 800 V
• A surge is generated when the phase-advancer
condenser switches.
→ Add an AC reactor to the power supply input.
• The power supply voltage is too high.
→ Decrease the voltage so it’s within specifica-
tions.
UV1 The main circuit DC voltage is • A phase loss occurred with the input power supply.
DC Bus Undervolt below the undervoltage
• A momentary power interruption occurred.
detection level (L2-05).
200-V class: Approx. 190 V • The wiring terminals for the input power supply are
400-V class: Approx. 380 V loose.
• The voltage fluctuations in the input power supply
are too large.
UV2 The control power supply → Try turning the power supply off and on.
CTL PS Undervolt voltage dropped.
→ Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to oc-
cur.
UV3 A failure occurred in the inrush → Try turning the power supply off and on.
MC Answerback prevention circuit.
→ Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to oc-
cur.
PF The main circuit DC voltage • A phase loss occurred in the input power supply.
Input Pha Loss oscillates unusually (not when
regenerating).
This fault is detected when • The wiring terminals for the input power supply are
L8-05 is set to “Enabled.” loose.
are too large.
• The voltage balance between phases is bad.
• The main circuit smoothing condenser has ex-
ceeded its life expectancy.
→ Replace the electrolytic condenser.
(Contact your OMRON representative.)
8-3

LF A phase loss occurred at the • There is a broken wire in the output cable.
Output Pha Loss Inverter’s output. • There is a broken wire in the motor’s winding.
This fault is detected when • The output terminals are loose.
L8-07 is set to “Enabled.”
• The motor being used has a capacity less than 10%
of the Inverter’s maximum motor capacity.
→ Check the motor and Inverter capacity.
OH The temperature of the • The ambient temperature is too high.
Heatsink Over tmp Inverter’s cooling fins → Install a cooling unit.
exceeded the setting in L8-02
or 105C. • There is a heat source nearby.
→ Remove the heat source.
• The Inverter’s cooling fan has stopped.
→ Replace the cooling fan.
• High carrier frequency. (400V-class models)
→ Decrease the C6-01 setting.
RH The braking resistor is • The deceleration time is too short and the regen-
Dyn Brk Resistor overheated and the protection erative energy from the motor is too large.
function set with L8-01 has
→ Lighten the load, increase the deceleration
operated.
time, or reduce the motor speed.
→ Change to a Braking Resistor Unit.
RR The braking transistor is not → Try turning the power supply off and on.
Dyn Brk Transistr operating properly. → Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to oc-
cur.
OL1 The motor overload protection • The load is too large. The acceleration time, decel-
Motor Overloaded function has operated based eration time, and cycle time are too short.
on the internal electronic
→ Check the size of the load and the length of the
thermal value.
acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
• The V/f characteristics voltage is too high.
→ Check the V/f characteristics.
• The motor’s rated current setting (E2-01) is incor-
rect.
→ Check the motor’s rated current setting
(E2-01).
OL2 The Inverter overload • The load is too large. The acceleration time, decel-
Inv Overloaded protection function has eration time and cycle time are too short.
operated based on the internal
→ Check the size of the load and the length of the
electronic thermal value.
acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
• The V/f characteristics voltage is too high.
→ Check the V/f characteristics.
• The Inverter’s capacity is too low.
→ Replace the Inverter with one that has a larger
capacity.
• High carrier frequency.
8-4

OL3 There has been a current → Make sure that the settings in L6-02 and L6-03
Overtorque Det 1 greater than the setting in are appropriate.
L6-02 for longer than the
setting in L6-03. → Check the mechanical system and correct the
cause of the overtorque.
OL4 There has been a current → Make sure that the current setting in L6-05 and
Overtorque Det 2 greater than the setting in time setting in L6-06 are appropriate.
OS The speed has been greater • Overshooting/Undershooting are occurring.
Over speed than the setting in F1-08 for
→ Adjust the gain again.
longer than the setting in
F1-09. • The reference speed is too high.
→ Check the reference circuit and reference gain.
• The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 aren’t appropriate.
→ Check the settings in F1-08 and F1-09.
PGO The PG is disconnected. • The is a break in the PG wiring.
PG open The Inverter is outputting a
→ Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
frequency, but PG pulses aren’t
being input. • The PG is wired incorrectly.
→ Fix the wiring.
• Power isn’t being supplied to the PG.
→ Supply power to the PG properly.
• The torque limit is set to 0 through CompoBus/D
communications. (Applies only to flux vector con-
trol.)
→ Set F9-05 to 0 (torque limit disabled).
DEV The speed deviation has been • The load is too large.
Speed Deviation greater than the setting in
→ Lighten the load.
F1-10 for longer than the
setting in F1-11. • The acceleration time and deceleration time are
too short.
→ Lengthen the acceleration time and decelera-
tion time.
• The load is locked.
→ Check the mechanical system.
trol.)
8-5

OPR Faulty Digital Operator • Wiring cable is broken.
Oper Disconnect connection.
• The Digital Operator or Inverter contacts are faulty.
The Digital Operator
connection was broken during → After disconnecting the connectors and then
Inverter operation. Detected connecting them again or cleaning the connec-
when the parameter is set as tors, restart the power supply.
follows: 02-06=1.
• Parameter was set incorrectly.
→ Set 02-06 to 0.
• If the problem persists, replace the cables or
Inverter.
EFO External fault • An external fault was input from an Optional Com-
Opt External Flt (Communications/option) munications Card.
→ Reset the external fault from the Optional Com-
munications Card.
→ Remove the cause of the external fault input.
EF3 External fault (Input terminal 3) • An external fault was input from a multi-function in-
External Fault 3 put.
EF4 External fault (Input terminal 4) → Reset external fault inputs to the multi-function
EF5 External fault (Input terminal 5) inputs.
EF6 External fault (Input terminal 6) → Remove the cause of the external fault.
EF7 External fault (Input terminal 7)
EF8 External fault (Input terminal 8)
E-15 SYSMAC BUS • The communications line was broken, short-cir-
SI-F/G Com Err communications error. cuited, or wired in reverse.
An error occurred in the
SYSMAC BUS → Check the communications line and correct the
communications line, trouble.
disrupting communications. • Hardware on the Master end is faulty.
→ Check the Master and take necessary mea-
sures.
• Communications data was damaged due to noise.
→ Use twisted-pair cables for communications
lines and ground all the shields on the Master
end.
• The Optional Card was damaged.
→ If wiring is correct and if the problem persists,
replace the Optional Card.
8-6

BUS CompoBus/D communications • Communications cable was broken, short-cir-
Option Com Err error. cuited, or wired incorrectly.
Communications error
occurred in the CompoBus/D → Check wiring of communications cables and
Communications Card. correct the fault.
• Hardware on the Master end is faulty.
sures.
• Data was damaged due to noise.
→ Change to special communications cables or
shielded cables and ground the shields on the
Master end or power supply end.
→ Separate communications cables from other
lines and install a noise filter on the power sup-
ply.
CPF00 Communications with the • The Digital Operator’s connector isn’t connected
COM-ERR (OP&INV) Operator were not established properly.
within 5 seconds after the
power was turned on. → Disconnect the Digital Operator and then con-
nect it again.
• The Inverter CPU’s peripheral element is faulty.
→ Replace the Inverter.
CPF01 After communications were • The Digital Operator isn’t connected properly.
COM-ERR (OP&INV) established, there was a
→ Disconnect the Digital Operator and then con-
transmission error with the
Digital Operator for more than nect it again.
2 seconds. • The Inverter CPU’s peripheral element is faulty.
CPF02 Baseblock circuit error → Try turning the power supply off and on again.
BB Circuit Err
• The control circuit is damaged.
CPF03 EEPROM error → Try turning the power supply off and on again.
EEPROM Error
CPF04 CPU internal A/D converter → Try turning the power supply off and on again.
Internal A/D Err error
CPF05 CPU external A/D converter → Try turning the power supply off and on again.
External A/D Err error
8-7

CPF06 Optional Card connection error • The Optional Card isn’t connected properly.
Option Error
→ Turn off the power and insert the Card again.
• The Inverter or Optional Card is faulty.
→ Replace the faulty component.
CPF20 Optional Card A/D converter • The Optional Card isn’t connected properly.
Option A/D Error error
→ Turn off the power and insert the Card again.
• The Optional Card’s A/D converter is faulty.
→ Replace the Optional Card.
CPF21 Optional Communications Card • The Optional Communications Card isn’t con-
Option CPU down diagnosis error nected properly.
CPF22 Optional Communications card → Turn off the power and insert the Card again.
Option Type Err Type error
• The Optional Communications Card is faulty.
faulty
CPF23 Optional Communications Card
Option DPRAM Err mutual diagnosis error → Replace the Optional Communications Card.
8-1-2 Minor Fault Detection
Minor faults are a type of Inverter protection function that do not operate the fault contact
output and are automatically returned to their original status once the cause of the minor
fault has been removed. The Digital Operator display flashes and the minor fault is out-
put from the multi-function outputs (H2-01 to H2-03). Take appropriate measures
according to the table below.
Minor Fault Displays and Processing

Minor fault display Meaning Probable causes and remedies
EF (flashing) Both the forward and reverse → Check the sequence of the forward and reverse
External Fault commands have been ON for commands.
more than 0.5 s.
* Since the rotational direction is unknown, the
motor will be decelerated to a stop when this
minor fault occurs.
UV (flashing) The main circuit DC voltage is • A phase loss occurred with the input power supply.
DC Bus Undervolt below the undervoltage
detection level (L2-05).
200-V class: Approx. 190 V • The wiring terminals for the input power supply are
400-V class: Approx. 380 V loose.
are too large.
OV (flashing) The main circuit DC voltage • The power supply voltage is too high.
Overvoltage exceeded the overvoltage
→ Decrease the voltage so it’s within specifica-
detection level.
tions.
8-8

OH (flashing) The temperature of the • The ambient temperature is too high.
Heatsink Over tmp Inverter’s cooling fins
→ Install a cooling unit.
exceeded the setting in L8-02.
• There is a heat source nearby.
→ Remove the heat source.
• The Inverter’s cooling fan has stopped.
→ Replace the cooling fan.
• High carrier frequency. (400V-class models)
OH2 (flashing) An OH2 alarm signal (Inverter • Clear the multi-function input’s overheating alarm
Over Heat 2 overheating alarm signal) was input.
input from a multi-function
input.
OL3 (flashing) There has been a current → Make sure that the settings in L6-02 and L6-03
Overtorque Det 1 greater than the setting in are appropriate.
OL4 (flashing) There has been a current → Make sure that the current setting in L6-05 and
Overtorque Det 2 greater than the setting in time setting in L6-06 are appropriate.
OS (flashing) The speed has been greater • Overshooting/undershooting are occurring.
Over speed than the setting in F1-08 for
→ Adjust the gain again.
longer than the setting in
F1-09. • The reference speed is too high.
→ Check the reference circuit and reference gain.
PGO (flashing) The PG is disconnected. • There is a break in the PG wiring.
PG open The Inverter is outputting a
→ Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
frequency, but PG pulses aren’t
being input. • The PG is wired incorrectly.
→ Fix the wiring.
• Power isn’t being supplied to the PG.
→ Supply power to the PG properly.
trol.)
8-9

DEV (flashing) The speed deviation has been • The load is too large.
Speed Deviation greater than the setting in
→ Lighten the load.
F1-10 for longer than the
setting in F1-11. • The acceleration time and deceleration time are
too short.
→ Lengthen the acceleration time and decelera-
tion time.
• The load is locked.
→ Check the mechanical system.
trol.)
EFO External fault • An external fault was input from an Optional Com-
Opt External Flt (Communications/option) munications Card.
→ Reset the external fault from the Optional Com-
munications Card.
→ Remove the cause of the external fault input.
EF3 (flashing) External fault (Input terminal 3) • An external fault was input from a multi-function in-
External Fault 3 put.
EF4 (flashing) External fault (Input terminal 4) → Reset external fault inputs to the multi-function
EF5 (flashing) External fault (Input terminal 5) inputs.
EF6 (flashing) External fault (Input terminal 6) → Remove the cause of the external fault.
EF7 (flashing) External fault (Input terminal 7)
EF8 (flashing) External fault (Input terminal 8)
CALL SYSMAC BUS CALL error Only 00 was transmitted since communications
SI-F/G ComCall Only 00 was received since were established and the host was ready.
communications were Note The Inverter waits for the host to be ready.
established. Clear this standby state by sending data.
→ Correct the program so that data other than 00
is sent first after communications are estab-
lished.
8-10

E-15 SYSMAC BUS • The communications line was broken, short-cir-
SI-F/G Com Err communications error. cuited, or wired in reverse.
An error occurred in the
SYSMAC BUS → Check the communications line and correct the
communications line, trouble.
disrupting communications. • Hardware on the Master end is faulty.
sures.
• Communications data was damaged due to noise.
→ Use twisted-pair cables for communications
lines and ground all the shields on the Master
end.
BUS CompoBus/D communications • Communications cable was broken, short-cir-
Option Com Err error. cuited, or wired incorrectly.
Communications error
occurred in the CompoBus/D → Check wiring of communications cables and
Communications Card. correct the fault.
• Hardware on the Master end is faulty.
sures.
• Data was damaged due to noise.
→ Change to special communications cables or
shielded cables and ground the shields on the
Master end or power supply end.
→ Separate communications cables from other
lines and install a noise filter on the power sup-
ply.
8-11
8-1-3 Operation Errors
After the parameters have been set, an operation error will occur if there is an invalid
setting or a contradiction between two parameter settings.
It won’t be possible to start the Inverter until the parameters have been set correctly.
(The minor fault output and fault contact output will not operate, either.)
When an operation error has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct
the cause of the errors.
Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings

Display Meaning Incorrect settings
OPE01 Incorrect Inverter • The Inverter capacity setting doesn’t match the Unit. (Contact
kVA Selection capacity setting your OMRON representative.)
OPE02 Parameter setting • The parameter setting is outside of the valid setting range.
Limit range error
OPE03 Multi-function input • One of the following errors has been made in the multi-function
Terminal selection error input (H1-01 to H1-06) settings:
• The same setting has been selected for two or more multi-
function inputs.
• An UP or DOWN command was selected independently.
(They must be used together.)
• More than two out of the following four items are set.
UP/DOWN commands, Hold Accel/Decel, +Speed/–Speed
commands, and Sample/Hold for analog frequency refer-
ence.
• Speed Search 1 (61) and Speed Search 2 (62) were selected
at the same time.
• External Baseblock N.O. (8) and External Baseblock N.C. (9)
were selected at the same time.
• The UP/DOWN commands (10 and 11) were selected while
PID control (b5-01) was enabled.
• The Terminal 13/14 Switch (1F) was selected, but the terminal
14 function selector (H3-09) wasn’t set to frequency reference
(1F).
• The +Speed and –Speed commands are not set at the same
time.
• The NO and NC contacts of an emergency stop input are set at
the same time.
OPE05 Optional Card • The Optional Card was selected as the frequency reference
Sequence Select selection error source by setting b1-01 to 3, but an Optional Card isn’t con-
nected.
OPE06 Control mode • V/f control with PG feedback was selected by setting A1-02 to 1,
PG Opt Missing selection error but a PG Speed Control Card isn’t connected.
• Flux vector control was selected by setting A1-02 to 3, but a PG
Speed Control Card isn’t connected.
8-12
Display Meaning Incorrect settings

OPE07 Multi-function analog • The same setting (other than 1F) has been selected for H3-05
Analog Selection input selection error and H3-09.
• A 3G3IV-PA114B Analog Reference Card is being used and
F2-01 is set to 0, but a multi-function input (H1-01 to H1-06) has
been set to Option/Inverter Selection (2).
• Frequency Bias and Frequency Bias 2 are set at the same time.
OPE08 Function setting error Functions that cannot be controlled by the current control
Function Setting mode are set. (For example, the torque reference was set in
V/f control.)
OPE10 V/f data setting error • Parameters E1-04, E1-06, E1-07, and E1-09 do not satisfy the
V/f Ptrn Setting following conditions:
• E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
OPE11 Parameter setting • One of the following parameter setting errors exists.
CarrFrg / error
• The carrier frequency upper limit (C6-01) > 5 KHz and
On-Delay
the carrier frequency lower limit (C6-02) ≤ 5 KHz.
• The carrier frequency gain (C6-03) > 6 and (C6-01) < (C6-02).
ERR (flashing) A verification error → Try turning the power supply off and on again.
EEPROM R/W Err occurred when writing
→ Try setting the parameters again.
EEPROM.
8-13
8-2 Troubleshooting
Due to parameter setting errors, faulty wiring, and so on, the Inverter and motor may not
operate as expected when the system is started up. If that should occur, use this section
as a reference and apply the appropriate measures. If the contents of the fault are dis-
played, refer to 8-1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions.
If Parameter Constants Cannot Be Set.
The display does not change when the Increment and Decrement Keys are
pressed.
• Passwords do not match.
If the parameter A1-04 (Password 1) and A1-05 (Password 2) numbers are different, the constants for
the initialize mode cannot be changed. Reset the password. If you cannot remember the password,
display A1-05 (select password) by pressing the Reset/Select Key and the Menu Key simultaneously
while in the A1-04 display. Then reset the password. (Input the reset password in parameter A1-04.)
• Constant write-in prohibition is input.
This occurs when “program lockout” (set value: 1B) is set for a multi-function input. If the program lock-
out input is OFF, the constants cannot be changed. Turn it ON and then set the constants.
• The Inverter is operating (drive mode).
There are some constants that cannot be set during operation. Turn the Inverter off and then make the
settings.
OPE01 through OPE11 is displayed.

This is a parameter setting error. The set value for the parameter constant is wrong. Refer to 8-1-3
Operation Errors and correct the setting.
CPF00 or CPF01 is displayed.

This is a Digital Operator transmission fault. The connection between the Digital Operator and the In-
verter may be faulty. Remove the Digital Operator and then re-install it.
If the Motor Does Not Operate
The motor does not operate when the Run Key on the Digital Operator is pressed.
• The operation method setting is wrong.
If parameter b1-02 (run source) is set to “1” (control circuit terminal), the motor will not operate when
the Run Key is pressed. Either press the Local/Remote Key* to switch to Digital Operator operation or
set parameter b1-02 to “0” (Digital Operator).
* The Local/Remote Key is enabled (set value: 1) or disabled (set value: 2) by means of parame-
ter o2-01. It is enabled when the drive mode is entered.
8-14
• The Inverter is not in operation mode.
If the Inverter is not in drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the Menu Key to
display the operation mode, and enter the drive mode by pressing the Enter Key.
• The frequency reference is too low.
If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (minimum output frequency), the
Inverter will not operate. Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
• There is a multi-function analog input setting error.
If multi-function analog inputs H3-05 and H3-09 are set to “1” (frequency gain), and if no voltage (cur-
rent) is input, then the frequency reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog
input value are correct.
• Frequency reference 2 is specified with multi-step speed operation, and auxiliary frequency
reference is not input.
If multi-function analog input H3-05 is set to “0” (auxiliary frequency reference), and if multi-step speed
reference is used, the auxiliary frequency reference will be treated as frequency reference 2. Check to
be sure that the set value and analog input value (terminal 16) are correct.
The motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input.
• The operation method selection is wrong.
If parameter b1-02 (run source) is set to “0” (Digital Operator), the motor will not operate when an ex-
ternal operation signal is input. Set b1-02 to “1” (control circuit terminal) and try again. Similarly, the
motor will also not operate if the Local/Remote Key has been pressed to switch to Digital Operator
operation. In that case press the Local/Remote Key* again to return to the original setting.
* The Local/Remote Key is enabled (set value: 1) or disabled (set value: 2) by means of parame-
ter o2-01. It is enabled when drive mode is entered.
• A 3-wire sequence is in effect.
The input method for a 3-wire sequence is different than when operating by forward/stop and reverse/
stop (2-wire sequence). When 3-wire sequence is set, the motor will not operate even when an input
terminal suitable for forward/stop and reverse/stop is turned ON. When using a 3-wire sequence, refer
to the timing chart on page 5-16 and input the proper signals. When using a 2-wire sequence, set multi-
function inputs H1-01 through H1-06 to a value other than 0.
• The Inverter is not in operation mode.
If the Inverter is not in operation mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the Menu
Key to display the drive mode, and enter the drive mode by pressing the Enter Key.
• The frequency reference is too low.
If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (minimum output frequency), the
Inverter will not operate. Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
• There is a multi-function analog input setting error.
If multi-function analog inputs H3-05 and H3-09 are set to “1” (frequency gain), and if no voltage (cur-
rent) is input, then the frequency reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog
input value are correct.
• Frequency reference 2 is specified with multi-step speed operation and auxiliary frequency
reference is not input.
If multi-function analog input H3-05 is set to “0” (auxiliary frequency reference) and if multi-step speed
reference is used, the auxiliary frequency reference will be treated as frequency reference 2. Check to
be sure that the set value and analog input value (terminal 16) are correct.
8-15
The motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected.
The load may be too big. The 3G3FV has a stall prevention function and an automatic torque boost
function, but the motor responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is too rapid or if the load
is too big. Lengthen the acceleration time or reduce the load. Also consider increasing the motor ca-
pacity.
The motor only rotates in one direction.

“Reverse run prohibited” is selected. If b1-04 (prohibition of reverse operation) is set to “1” (reverse run
prohibited), the Inverter will not receive reverse run commands. To use both forward and reverse op-
eration, set b1-04 to “0.”
If the Direction of the Motor’s Rotation is Reversed

The motor’s output wiring is faulty. When the Inverter’s T1(U), T2(V), and T3(W) are properly con-
nected to the motor’s T1(U), T2(V), and T3(W), the motor operates in a forward direction when a for-
ward command is executed. The forward direction depends on the maker and the motor type, so be
sure to check the specifications. Switching two wires among the T1(U), T2(V), and T3(W) will reverse
the direction of rotation.
If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow

• The torque limit has been reached.
When a torque limit has been set in parameters L7-01 to L7-04, no torque will be output beyond that
limit. This can cause the torque to be insufficient, or the acceleration time to be too long. Check to be
sure that the value set for the torque limit is suitable. If the torque limit has been set by multi-function
analog inputs H3-05 and H3-09 (set value: 10 to 13), check to be sure that the analog input value is
suitable.
• The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low.
If the value set for L3-02 (stall prevention level during acceleration) is too low, the acceleration time will
be too long. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
• The stall prevention level during running is too low.
If the value set for L3-06 (stall prevention level during running) is too low, the speed will drop before
outputting torque. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
If the Motor Does Not Operate According to Reference
The motor runs faster than reference.

• The frequency reference bias setting is wrong.
The frequency reference bias set in parameter H3-03 is added to the frequency reference. Check to
be sure that the set value is suitable.
• Frequency bias is set for multi-function analog inputs.
When “2” (frequency bias) is set for multi-function analog inputs H3-05 and H3-09, a frequency corre-
sponding to the input voltage (current) is added to the frequency reference. Check to be sure that the
set value and analog input value are suitable.
8-16
• A signal is being input to the frequency reference (current) terminal 14.
When “1F” (frequency reference) is set for parameter H3-09 (multi-function analog input terminal 14),
a frequency corresponding to the terminal 14 input input voltage (current) is added to the frequency
reference. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are suitable.
The motor does not rotate according to reference.

Torque control mode is selected. When parameter d5-01 (torque control selection) is set to “1” (torque
control), speed control cannot be executed. (Speed limits can be set.) To switch torque control and
speed control, set parameter d5-01 to “0” (speed control) and set one of the parameters from H1-01
through H1-06 (multi-function inputs) to “71” (speed/torque control change).
If the Slip Compensation Function Has Low Speed Precision

The slip compensation limit has been reached. With the slip compensation function, compensation
cannot be carried out beyond the slip compensation limit set in parameter C3-03. Check to be sure that
the set value is suitable.
If There is Low Speed Precision at High-speed Rotation in Open-loop

Control Mode
The motor’s rated voltage is high. The Inverter’s maximum output voltage is determined by its input
voltage. (For example, if 200 VAC is input, then the maximum output voltage will be 200 VAC.) If, as a
result of vector control, the output voltage reference value exceeds the Inverter output voltage maxi-
mum value, the speed precision will decrease. Either use a motor with a low rated voltage (i.e., a spe-
cial motor for use with vector control) or change to flux vector control.
If Motor Deceleration is Slow
The deceleration time is long even when control resistance is connected.

• “Stall prevention during deceleration enabled” is set. When control resistance is connected, set pa-
rameter L3-04 (stall prevention selection during deceleration) to “0” (disabled). When this parameter
is set to “1” (enabled, the factory-set default), control resistance is not used.
• The deceleration time setting is too long.
Check the deceleration time setting (parameters C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, and C1-08).
• Motor torque is insufficient.
If the parameter constants are correct and there is no overvoltage fault, then the motor’s power is limit-
ed. Consider increasing the motor capacity.
• The torque limit has been reached.
When a torque limit has been set in parameters L7-01 to L7-04, no torque will be output beyond that
limit. This can cause the deceleration time to be too long. Check to be sure that the value set for the
torque limit is suitable. If the torque limit has been set by multi-function analog inputs H3-05 and H3-09
(set value: 10 to 13), check to be sure that the analog input value is suitable.
8-17
If the Vertical-axis Load Drops When Brake is Applied

• The sequence is incorrect.
The Inverter goes into DC braking status for 0.5 seconds after deceleration is completed. (This is the
factory-set default.) To make sure that the brake holds, use the frequency detection function and apply
the brake only when the detected frequency drops to 3 to 5 Hz or lower. Also at startup, use the fre-
quency detection function, and release the brake only when the detected frequency is 3 to 5 Hz or
higher.
• The DC braking is insufficient.
If the DC braking power is insufficient, adjust parameter b2-02 (DC injection braking current).
• An inappropriate brake is being used.
The holding brake is designed only for holding, not for braking. If the holding brake is used for braking,
the brake pad will wear out much faster than designed. Use an appropriate brake for braking.
If the Motor Burns Out

• The load is too big.
If the motor’s load is too big and the motor is used with the effective torque exceeding the motor’s rated
torque, the motor will burn out. Also, if the motor’s inscription states that the motor is rated for eight
hours, for example, the motor’s rated torque and capacity may be limited to eight hours of use. If that
8-hour rated torque is used for normal operation it may cause the motor to burn out. Reduce the load
amount by either lightening the load or lengthening the acceleration/deceleration time. Also consider
increasing the motor capacity.
• The ambient temperature is too high.
The motor’s rating is determined within a particular ambient operating temperature range. The motor
will burn out if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment in which the maximum ambi-
ent operating temperature is exceeded. Lower the motor’s ambient temperature to within the accept-
able ambient operating temperature range.
• The withstand voltage between the motor’s phases is insufficient.
When the motor is connected to the Inverter’s output, a surge is generated between the Inverter’s
switching and the motor’s coil. Normally the maximum surge voltage is three times the Inverter’s input
power supply voltage (i.e., 600 V for 200-V class, and 1,200 V for 400-V class). Be sure to use a motor
with a withstand voltage between the motor’s phases that is greater than the maximum surge voltage.
In particular, when using a 400-V-class Inverter, use a special motor for Inverters.
If There is Noise When the Inverter is Started or From an AM Radio

If noise is generated by Inverter switching, implement the following measures:
Lower the Inverter’s carrier frequency (parameter C6-01). This will help to some extent by reduc-
ing the amount of internal switching.
Install a 3G3EV-PLNF or 3G3IV-PFN Input Noise Filter at the Inverter’s power supply input area.
Install a 3G3IV-PLF Output Noise Filter at the Inverter’s power supply output area.
Use metal tubing. Electric waves can be shielded by metal, so encase the Inverter with metal
(steel).
If the Leakage Breaker Operates When the Inverter is Run

The Inverter performs internal switching, so there is a certain amount of leakage current. This may
cause the leakage breaker to operate and cut off the power supply. Change to a leakage breaker with a
8-18
high leakage detection level (i.e., a sensitivity current of 200 mA or greater per Unit, with an operating
time of 0.1 s or more), or one that incorporates high frequency measures (i.e., one designed for use
with Inverters).
It will also help to some extent to lower the Inverter’s carrier frequency (parameter C6-01). In addition,
remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened. (In general, approximately
5 mA of leakage current occurs for each meter of cable.)
If There is Mechanical Vibration
The machinery is making unusual sounds.

• There may be resonance between the mechanical system’s characteristic frequency and the carrier
frequency. If the motor is running with no problems and the machinery is vibrating with a high-pitched
whine, it may indicate that this is occurring. To prevent this type of resonance, adjust the carrier fre-
quency with parameters C6-01 to C6-03.
• There may be resonance between a machine’s characteristic frequency and the output frequency of
the Inverter. To prevent this from occurring, either use the jump frequency functions in parameters
d3-01 to d3-04 or install rubber padding on the motor base to reduce vibration.
Vibration and hunting are occurring with open-loop vector control.

The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Reset the gain to a more effective level by adjusting parame-
ters C4-02 (torque compensation time constant), C8-08 (AFR gain), and C3-02 (slip compensation
primary delay time) in order. Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time setting.
Vibration and hunting are occurring with V/f control.

The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Reset the gain to a more effective level by adjusting parame-
ters C4-02 (torque compensation time constant), C7-02 (hunting prevention gain), and C3-02 (slip
compensation primary delay time) in order. Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time
setting.
Vibration and hunting are occurring with flux vector control.

The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Adjust the various types of speed control loop (ASR) gain.
(For details, refer to Chapter 5 Basic Operation of this manual.) If the mechanical system’s resonance
point coincides with the Inverter’s operating frequency and the vibration cannot be eliminated in this
way, increase the ASR primary delay time (parameter C5-06) and then try adjusting the gain again.
Vibration and hunting are occurring with V/f w/PG control.

The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Adjust the various types of speed control loop (ASR) gain.
(For details, refer to Chapter 5 Basic Operation of this manual.) If the vibration cannot be eliminated in
this way, set the hunting prevention selection (parameter C7-01) to “0” (disabled) and then try adjust-
ing the gain again.
Vibration and hunting are occurring with PID control.

Check the vibration cycle and individually adjust the P, I, and D. (Refer to page 6-55.)
8-19
If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped

The DC braking is not operating properly. If the motor continues operating at low speed, without com-
pletely stopping, and after a deceleration stop has been executed, it means that the DC braking is not
decelerating enough. Adjust the DC braking as follows:
Increase the parameter b2-02 (DC injection braking current) setting.
Increase the parameter b2-04 (DC injection braking time at stop) setting.
If 0 V is Detected When the Fan is Started, or Fan Stalls

DC braking is insufficient at startup. Generation of 0 V and stalling can occur if the fan is turning when it
is started. This can be prevented by slowing fan rotation by DC braking before starting the fan. In-
crease the parameter b2-03 (DC injection braking time at start) setting.
If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference

• The frequency reference is within the jump frequency range.
When the jump frequency function is used, the output frequency does not change within the jump fre-
quency range. Check to be sure that the jump frequency (parameters d3-01 to d3-03) and jump fre-
quency width (parameter d3-04) settings are suitable.
• The frequency reference upper limit has been reached.
The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula:
Maximum output frequency (E1-04) x Frequency reference upper limit (d2-01) / 100
Check to be sure that the parameter E1-04 and d2-01 settings are suitable.
Inverter Overload “OL2” is Detected

For a 400-V Inverter, if the carrier frequency “C6-01” is set to a value higher than the default setting, the
Inverter overload “OL2” detection value will decrease in consideration of an increase in the heat that will
be generated by the change in the carrier frequency. Since the detection value is set to decrease by
approximately 15% for every increase of 2 kHz from the default setting , the Inverter overload “OL2” may
be detected prior to the motor overload “OL1” depending on the set value. Set the carrier frequency to a
lower level.
If Inverter Does Not Operate Due to an EF Error (Forward and Reverse

Commands Input)
The sequence is faulty.

The EF error will be detected if the forward command and reverse command are input at the same time
for over 0.5 seconds. Check and correct the sequence.
Stray current causes malfunction.

The Inverter input may always remain ON due to stray current from the control section. As shown in the
following illustration, a current may flow in the direction shown by an arrow to turn ON the Inverter input
8-20
when the power output from the control section is below 24 VDC or when the power is turned OFF. If this
occurs, insert a diode as indicated by section A below.
Section A
24 V
1 to 8
3.3 K
360
11 0.1µ
GND
8-21
8-3 Maintenance and Inspection

! WARNING Do not touch the Inverter terminals while the power is being supplied.
! WARNING Maintenance or inspection must be performed only after turning OFF the power
supply, confirming that the CHARGE indicator (or status indicators) is turned OFF,
electrical shock.
! WARNING Maintenance, inspection, or parts replacement must be performed by authorized

personnel. Not doing so may result in electrical shock or injury.
! WARNING Do not attempt to take the Unit apart or repair. Doing either of these may result in
electrical shock or injury.
! Caution Carefully handle the Inverter because it uses semiconductor elements. Careless
handling may result in malfunction.
! Caution Do not change wiring, disconnect connectors, the Operator, or optional items, or
replace fans while power is being supplied. Doing so may result in injury, damage to
the product, or malfunction.
Daily Inspection
Check the following items with the system in operation.
The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises.
There should be no abnormal heat generation.
The ambient temperature should not be too high.
The output current value shown on the monitor display should not be higher than normal.
The cooling fan on the bottom of the Inverter should be operating normally.
Periodic Inspection
Check the following items during periodic maintenance. Before beginning inspection, be sure to
turn off the power supply. Confirm that the LED indicators on the front panel have all turned OFF, and
then wait until at least one minute (or at least three minutes for 30 kW or more) has elapsed before
beginning the inspection. Be sure not to touch terminals right after the power has been turned off.
Doing so can result in electric shock.
Terminal screws should not be loose.
There should be no conductive dust or oil mist on the terminal block or inside the Inverter.
The Inverter’s mounting screws should not be loose.
8-22
No dirt or dust should be accumulating on the heating fan unit.
No dust should be accumulating on the vents.
There should be no abnormalities in the outward appearance.
The control panel cooling fan should be operating normally. (Check to be sure that there are no
unusual noises or vibration and that the accumulated operating time has not exceeded the specifi-
cations.)
Periodic Maintenance of Parts

The Inverter is configured of many parts, and these parts must be operating properly in order to
make full use of the Inverter’s functions.
Among the electronic components, there are some that require maintenance depending on their
usage conditions. In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time, it is
necessary to perform period inspections and replace parts according to their service life.
Periodic inspection standards vary depending the Inverter’s installation environment and usage
conditions.
The Inverter’s maintenance periods are noted below. Keep them as reference.
Cooling fan: 2 to 3 years
Electrolytic capacitor: 5 years
Fuses: 10 years
The usage conditions are as follows:
Ambient temperature 40°C
Load factor: 80%
Operating time: 8 hours per day
Installation: According to instructions in manual.
If the maintenance period is extended, it is recommended that the ambient temperature be lowered
and that the power-on time be reduced as much as possible.
Note For details regarding maintenance, consult your OMRON sales representative.
8-23
9
Chapter 9
Specifications
9-1 Inverter Specifications
9-2 Option Specifications
Specifications Chapter 9
9-1 Inverter Specifications
General Specifications for 200-V Inverters

Model number A2004 A2007 A2015 A2022 A2037 A2055 A2075 A2110 A2150 B2185 B2220 B2300 B2370 B2450 B2550 B2750
3G3FV- -E
Max. applica- 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
ble motor ca-
pacity (kW)
Output characteristics
Rated output 1.2 2.3 3.0 4.2 6.7 9.5 13 19 24 30 37 50 61 70 85 110
capacity
(kVA)
Rated output 3.2 6.0 8.0 11 17.5 25 33 49 64 80 96 130 160 183 224 300
current (A)
Max. output 3-phase, 200 to 230 VAC (Corresponds to input voltage.)
voltage (V)
Max. output 400 Hz (Set by parameter.)
frequency
(Hz)
Power supply characteristics
Rated volt- 3-phase, 200 to 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz
age (V)
Rated fre-
quency (Hz)
Allowable –15% to 10%
voltage fluc-
tuation
Allowable ±5%
frequency
fluctuation
Power con- 0.07 0.09 0.12 0.14 0.22 0.30 0.35 0.59 0.73 0.89 1.2 1.4 1.8 2.1 2.7 3.3
sumption (kW)
Approximate 3.0 3.0 3.0 4.5 4.5 5.5 6.0 11 11 28 28 61 62 80 80 135
weight (kg)
9-2
Control Characteristics
3G3FV- -E
Power supply DC reactor (option) connection possible. DC reactor built in

harmonic
countermea-
sures
Control meth- Sine wave PWM (high-carrier frequency control)
od
Carrier fre- 0.4 to 15 kHz (2.0 to 15 kHz in vector control) 0.4 to 10 kHz (2.0 to 10 kHz in vector
quency control)
Speed control 1:100 (1:1000 with PG)
range
Speed control ±0.2% (±0.02% with PG)
precision
Speed control 5 Hz (30 Hz with PG)
response
Torque charac- 150% at 1 Hz (150% at 0 rpm with PG). A torque limit function is incorporated.
teristics
Torque control ±5% (with PG)
precision
Torque control 40 Hz (with PG)
response
Frequency 0.1 to 400 Hz
control range
Frequency pre- Digital references: ±0.01% (–10 to 40°C)
cision Analog references: ±0.1% (25±10°C)
(temperature
characteris-
tics)
Frequency set- Digital references: 0.01 Hz (Less than 100 Hz), 0.1 Hz (100 Hz or higher)
ting resolution Analog references: 0.03 Hz/60 Hz (11 bits + sign)
Output fre- 0.001 Hz
quency resolu-
tion
Overload 150% of rated current for one minute
capacity
Frequency set- 0 to ±10 VDC (20 kΩ), 0 to 10 VDC (20 kΩ) voltage input or 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω) current input
ting signal
Acceleration/ 0.01 to 6000.0 s (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings)
Deceleration
time
Braking torque Approximately 20% (Increment possible with an external braking resistor.)
Voltage/fre- Select vector control, one from 15 types of fixed V/f patterns, or set a user V/f pattern.
quency charac-
teristics
Protective Functions
3G3FV- -E
Motor protec- Protection by electronic thermal.

tion
Instantaneous Stops at approx. 200% of rated output current.
overcurrent
protection
Overload Stops in one minute at approx. 150% of rated output current.
protection
Overvoltage Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approx. 410 V.
protection
Undervoltage Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approx. 190 V.
protection
Momentary Stops for 15 ms or more. By selecting the momentary power interruption mode, operation can be continued if power is
power inter- restored within 2 s.
ruption com-
pensation
(selection)
Cooling fin Protection by thermistor.
overheating
9-3
3G3FV- -E
Grounding Protection by electronic circuits.

protection
Charge indica- Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approx. 50 V or more.
tor (internal
LED)
Environment
3G3FV- -E
Location Indoors (no corrosive gas, oil spray, metallic dust, etc.)
Ambient oper- –10 to 45°C (NEMA1 type: –10 to 40°C) –10 to 45C (Open chassis type)
ating tempera-
ture
Ambient oper- 90% RH max. (with no condensation)
ating humidity
Storage tem- –20 to 60°C
perature
Altitude 1,000 m max.
Insulation 5 MΩ min. (Do not carry out the insulation resistance test or withstand voltage test.)
resistance
Vibration with- Vibration frequency less than 20 Hz, 9.8 m/s2 {1G} max.; 20 to 50 Hz, 2 m/s2 {0.2G} max
stand
Protective Both enclosed NEMA1 type and open chassis type: IP00 Open chassis type: IP00
structure
General Specifications for 400-V Inverters

Model number A4004 A4007 A4015 A4022 A4037 A4055 A4075 A4110 A4150 B4185 B4220 B4300 B4370 B4450 B4550 B4750 B411K B416K B418K B422K B430K
3G3FV- -E -E -E -E -E -E
Max. applicable 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 110 160 185 220 300
motor capacity
(kW)
Output characteristics
Rated output 1.4 2.6 3.7 4.7 6.1 11 14 21 26 31 37 50 61 73 98 130 170 230 260 340 460
capacity
(kVA)
Rated output 1.8 3.4 4.8 6.2 8.0 14 18 27 34 41 48 65 80 96 128 165 224 302 340 450 605
current (A)
Max. output 3-phase, 380 to 460 VAC (Corresponds to input voltage.)
voltage (V)
Max. output 400 Hz (Set by parameter.)
frequency
(Hz)
Power supply characteristics
Rated voltage 3-phase, 380 to 460 VAC, 50/60 Hz
(V)
Rated fre-
quency (Hz)
Allowable –15% to 10%
voltage fluc-
tuation
Allowable fre- ±5%
quency fluc-
tuation
Power con- 0.06 0.09 0.11 0.13 0.15 0.22 0.36 0.46 0.57 0.66 0.88 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.9 2.4 3.1 4.2 5.0 6.9 9.8
sumption (kW)
Approximate 3.0 3.0 4.0 4.5 4.5 6.0 6.0 11 11 27 27 44 44 44 79 80 135 145 360 360 420
weight (kg)
9-4
Control Characteristics
3G3FV- -E -E -E -E -E -E
Power supply DC reactor (option) connection possible. DC reactor built in No item

harmonic coun-
termeasures
Control method Sine wave PWM (high-carrier frequency control)
Carrier frequen- 0.4 to 15 kHz (2.0 to 15 kHz in vector control) 0.4 to 10 kHz (2.0 to 10 kHz in 0.4 to 2.5 kHz
cy
vector control) (2.0 to 2.5 kHz
in vector con-
trol)
Speed control 1:100 (1:1000 with PG)
range
Speed control ±0.2% (±0.02% with PG)
precision
Speed control 5 Hz (30 Hz with PG)
response
Torque charac- 150% at 1 Hz (150% at 0 rpm with PG). A torque limit function is incorporated.
teristics
Torque control ±5% (with PG)
precision
Torque control 40 Hz (with PG)
response
Frequency con- 0.1 to 400 Hz
trol range
Frequency pre- Digital references: ±0.01% (–10 to 40°C)
cision
(temperature Analog references: ±0.1% (25±10°C)
characteristics)
Frequency set- Digital references: 0.01 Hz (Less than 100 Hz), 0.1 Hz (100 Hz or higher)
ting resolution
Analog references: 0.03 Hz/60 Hz (11 bits + sign)
Output frequen- 0.001 Hz
cy resolution
Overload capac- 150% of rated current for one minute
ity
Frequency set- 0 to ±10 VDC (20 kΩ), 0 to 10 VDC (20 kΩ) voltage input or 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω) current input
ting signal
Acceleration/De- 0.01 to 6000.0 s (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings)
celeration time
Braking torque Approximately 20% (Increment possible with an external braking resistor.)
Voltage/frequen- Select vector control, one from 15 types of fixed V/f patterns, or set a user V/f pattern.
cy characteris-
tics
Protective Functions
3G3FV- -E -E -E -E -E -E
Motor protection Protection by electronic thermal.

Instantaneous Stops at approx. 200% of rated output current.
overcurrent
protection
Overload Stops in one minute at approx. 150% of rated output current.
protection
Overvoltage Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approx. 820 V.
protection
Undervoltage Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approx. 380 V.
protection
Momentary pow- Stops for 15 ms or more. By selecting the momentary power interruption mode, operation can be continued if power is
er interruption
compensation restored within 2 s.
(selection)
Cooling fin over- Protection by thermistor.
heating
Grounding Protection by electronic circuits.
protection
Charge indicator Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approx. 50 V or more.
(internal LED)
9-5
Environment
3G3FV- -E -E -E -E -E -E
Location Indoors (no corrosive gas, oil spray, metallic dust, etc.)
Ambient operat- –10 to 45°C (NEMA1 type: –10 to 40°C) –10 to 45C (Open chassis type)
ing temperature
Ambient operat- 90% RH max. (with no condensation)
ing humidity
Storage temper- –20 to 60°C
ature
Altitude 1,000 m max.
Insulation resis- 5 MΩ min. (Do not carry out the insulation resistance test or withstand voltage test.)
tance
Vibration with- Vibration frequency less than 20 Hz, 9.8 m/s2 {1G} max.; 20 to 50 Hz, 2 m/s2 {0.2G} max
stand
Protective struc- Both enclosed NEMA1 type and open chassis Open chassis type: IP00
ture
type: IP00
9-6
9-2 Option Specifications
Separately Mounted Options Dedicated Options
K3TJ-V11
Scaling Meter
3G3IV-PCDBR- 3G3IV-PLKEB
3G3IV-PERF
Braking Resistor
Unit 150WJ
B Braking Unit
Braking Resistor
3G3IV-PJVOP96 3G3IV-PJVOP95
Analog Operator Analog Operator 3G3HV-PUZDAB 3G3FV-PCN25 Digital
(standard – steel) (compact – plastic) DC Reactor Operator Connection Cable
Recommended Options
Recommended Options
3G3EV-PLNFD
Simple Input Noise Filter
3G3IV-PUZBAB 3G3IV-PLF
AC Reactor Output Noise Filter
3G3IV-PNF
Input Noise Filter
3-phase Induction Motor

Power Supply
3-phase, 200 VAC (200V-class)
3-phase, 400 VAC (400V-class)
Optional Cards
3G3IV-PAI14U 3G3IV-PDI08 3G3FV-PPGA2 PG 3G3FV-PPGD2 PG 3G3IV-PAO08 3G3IV-PPO36F

Analog Reference Digital Reference Speed Control Card Speed Control Card 3G3VF-PDRT1-SIN Analog Monitor Pulse Monitor
Card Card CompoBus/D Commu- Card Card
nications Card
3G3IV-PAI14B 3G3FV-PDI16H2 3G3FV-PPGB2 3G3FV-PPGX2 PG 3G3IV-PAO12

Analog Reference Digital Reference PG Speed Control Speed Control Card 3G3IV-PSIG Analog Monitor
SYSMAC Bus (Wire)
Card Card Card I/F Card
Card
9-7
Separately Mounted Options

Name Model Descriptions
Scaling Meter K3TJ-V11 Connects to the multi-functional analog output of the Inverter.
It displays the rotational speed of a machine or the line speed.
Analog Operator 3G3IV-PJVOP96 Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF operation control to be
(steel: standard type) performed by analog references from a remote location (50 m max.).
Frequency counter specifications: 75 Hz, 150 Hz, 220 Hz
Analog Operator 3G3IV-PJVOP95 Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF operation control to be
(plastic: compact performed by analog references from a remote location (50 m max.).
type) Frequency counter specifications: 60/120 Hz, 90/180Hz
Dedicated Options
Braking Unit 3G3IV-PCDBRB Used in combination with a Braking Resistor Unit for reducing motor’s
deceleration time. Not necessary for 200V-class models of 7.5 kW max.
or 400V-class models of 15 kW max.
Braking Resistor Unit 3G3IV-PLKEB Consumes the regenerative energy of the motor and reduces the
deceleration time of the motor.
Braking Resistor 3G3IV-PERF Used for 200-V class of 3.7 kW max. and 400-V class of 2.2 kW max.
150WJ01 Consumes the regenerative energy of the motor and reduces the
deceleration time of the motor.
DC Reactor 3G3HV-PUZDAB Suppresses the harmonic currents of the 3G3FV and improves the
power factor of the 3G3FV. Models of 18.5 kW or more have a built-in
DC Reactor.
Digital Operator 3G3FV-PCN125 A dedicated cable for the 3G3FV Series. Used to connect the 3G3FV
Co ec o Cab
Connection Cablee (1 m) a d Digital
and g a Ope a o when
Operator e they
ey a e sepa
are a ed
separated.
3G3FV-PCN325
(3 m)
9-8
Optional Cards
Analog Reference 3G3IV-PAI14U The 3G3FV incorporates analog input terminals for frequency references
Card with a resolution of 1/2,048. This card increases the resolution to
1/16,384.
3G3IV-PAI14B Allows –10- to 10-VDC frequency reference inputs with a resolution of
1/8,192 + sign. Forward and reverse rotation is selected with the polarity
of the input voltage.
Digital
g Reference 3G3IV-PDI08 Used to set frequency references in 2-digit BCD or 8-bit binary.
C d
Card 3G3FV-PDI16H2 Used to set frequency references with 16 or 12 bits (switchable). A
parameter setting can be used to select BCD or binary data. The card
incorporates a 24-VDC battery (8 mA max.).
Analog Monitor Card 3G3IV-PAO08 Makes it possible to use the analog output of the terminals as control
signals. The card, which has two-point, 0 to 10 V analog output, is used
to monitor the output frequency, output current, output voltage reference,
3G3IV-PAO12 or DC voltage of the 3G3FV. The 3G3IV-PAO08 has an output resolution
of 1/256 (output voltage of 0 to 10 V) and the 3G3IV-PAO12 has an
output resolution of 1/2,048 (output voltage of 0 to ±10 V).
Pulse Monitor Card 3G3IV-PPO36F Used to output pulse-train signals according to the output frequency of
the 3G3FV. The pulse-train signals can be input to another device such
as a frequency meter or counter.
PG Speed Control 3G3FV-PPGA2 Used for V/f control using the PG at a maximum response frequency of
Card 30 kHz for phase-A (single) pulse input for open-collector output. Pulse
monitor output is incorporated.
3G3FV-PPGB2 Used for vector control using the PG at a maximum response frequency
of 30 kHz for phase-A/phase-B inputs for open-collector output. Pulse
monitor output is incorporated.
3G3FV-PPGD2 Used for V/f control using the PG at a maximum response frequency of
300 kHz for phase-A (single) pulse input and RS-422 line driver input.
Pulse monitor output is incorporated.
3G3FV-PPGX2 Used for vector control using the PG at a maximum response frequency
of 300 kHz for phase-A/phase-B/phase-Z pulse inputs and RS-422 line
driver input. Pulse monitor output is incorporated.
Wired SYSMAC BUS 3G3IV-PSIG Used to operate via Wired SYSMAC BUS Interface Card
Interface Card communications.
CompoBus/D 3G3FV-PDRT1-SIN Used to operate via DeviceNet communications.
(DeviceNet)
Communications
Card
Note 1. Use the Digital Reference Card when setting frequencies digitally from a PC’s Output Unit or
thumbwheel switches.
Note 2. Use the PG Speed Control Card for speed control with the Pulse Generator (PG).
Recommended Options
AC Reactor 3G3IV-PUZBAB Used if the harmonic currents of the 3G3FV must be suppressed or the
capacity of the power supply connected to the 3G3FV is much larger
than the capacity of the 3G3FV. The AC Reactor improves the power
factor of the 3G3FV.
Input Noise Filter 3G3EV-PLNFD Used to eliminate noise coming into the inverter from the power supply
3G3IV-PFN line and to reduce noise flowing from the inverter into the power supply
line. Connect to the power supply input side.
Output Noise Filter 3G3IV-PLF Used to suppress noise that is generated by the inverter from affecting
the power supply side. Connect to the motor output side.
9-9
Scaling Meter
K3TJ-V11
By connecting to the Inverter’s multi-function

analog output (analog monitor), it is possible to
display the number of rotations, line speed,
and so on.
Standard Models
Model Control power supply Display
K3TJ-V111R 100 to 200 VAC Red LED indicator
K3TJ-V111G Green LED indicator
K3TJ-V116R 24 VDC with insulation (See
( note.)) Red LED indicator
K3TJ-V116G Green LED indicator
Note The power supply circuit and input circuit are insulated.
Standard Specifications
Sampling time 0.5 s
Display refresh period 0.5 s
Process value averaging method Simple average or movement average
Number of process value 1, 2, 4, or 8 times
averaging operations
Max. displayed digits 4 digits (–1,999 to +9,999)
Display 7-segment red or green LED with character height of 14.2 mm
Decimal display Selected by the Up and Down Keys and parameter selector
Scaling function Shift/Scaling adjustment is possible with the Up and Down Keys and
parameter selector
Scaling range –1,999 to +9,999
Zero-limit range 0 to 99 digits
Overflow display Flashes
Zero-suppress function Yes
External control Process value hold (by short-circuiting the rear terminals)
Enclosure rating (conforming to Front panel: IP51 (see note)
IEC standards) Case: IP20
Terminals: IP00
Memory protection Non-volatile memory (no backup battery required)
Note IP51 ensured when the optional K32-L49SC Water-resistive Soft Front Cover is used and IP50
when it is not.
9-10
Wiring Example
Circuit breaker
Inverter ’s
R R internal U HOLD
Three-phase circuitry IM
power supply S S V
T T W
+ Analog output
SYSDRIVE 1 5 6
0 to 10 VDC
8
Analog
monitor 3
– 9
GND
E K3TJ
External Dimensions
98 Panel Cutouts (Recommended)
92
92+0.8
–0
45+0.6
–0
75 min.
120 min.
LED Display Character Size

48 43
14.2 mm
96 66
3.5
Weight: 200 g
7.8 mm
Analog Operators
3G3IV-PJVOP96 Analog Operator (Standard Steel-plate Type)
The 3G3IV-PJVOP96 Analog Operator is a control panel that allows frequency and run/stop operation by ana-
log references from a distance (50 m). Frequency scale: 75 Hz, 150 Hz, 220 Hz.
Frequency meter
calibration resistor Frequency meter
Frequency setting resistor

Main/auxiliary frequency reference switch
Power supply indicator
Run indicator Error limit
Error indicator Forward/stop/reverse switch
Front panel Case
Standard Models
Model Frequency meter specifications
3G3IV-PJVOP961 DCF-6A 3 V 1 mA 75 Hz
9-11
External Dimensions (mm)
Front panel
mounting
space
Panel
mounting
hole
Four, 7-dia. case

mounting hole 122 max.
Two, 23-dia. Two, 4-dia.
rubber bushing mounting tap
Weight: 1.8 kg Panel
3G3IV-PJVOP95 Analog Operator (Compact Plastic Type)

The 3G3IV-PJVOP95 Analog Operator is a control panel that allows frequency and run/stop operation by ana-
log references from a distance (50 m). Frequency scale: 60/120 Hz, 90/180 Hz.
Frequency setting resistor
Frequency meter Main/auxiliary frequency reference switch

Frequency meter
calibration resistor Forward/stop/reverse switch
Power supply indicator Error limit

Run indicator
Error indicator
Standard Models
Model Frequency meter specifications
3G3IV-PJVOP951 TRM-45 3 V 1 mA 60/120 Hz
3G3IV-PJVOP952 TRM-45 3 V 1 mA 90/180 Hz
Front panel
mounting
space
Panel
mounting
hole
3-M3 tap
Weight: 0.8 kg Panel
9-12
Dedicated Options
Braking Unit
3G3IV-PCDBRB
The 3G3IV-PCDBRB is used in combination with a Braking Resistor Unit to shorten the motor’s decel-
eration time. It is not serviceable at 200-V-class, 5 kW, or 400-V-class, 15 kW, or less.
Standard Models
Inverter Braking Unit
Voltage class Max. applicable motor Model Number used
capacity (kW)
200-V class 11 3G3IV-PCDBR2015B 1
15 3G3IV-PCDBR2015B 1
18.5 3G3IV-PCDBR2022B 1
400-V class 18.5 3G3IV-PCDBR4030B 1
9-13
Braking Unit Dimensions (mm)
Top
Mounting direction
100 min.
4-M 4
mounting hole
30 min. 30 min.
100 min.
Three lead-in wire holes (22 dia. rubber bushing)
Braking Resistor Unit (Yaskawa Electric)
3G3IV-PLKEB
The 3G3IV-PLKEB shortens deceleration time by consuming the motor’s regenerative energy by
means of a resistor. (Usage rate: 10% ED)
Note The “usage rate: 10% ED” means that 10% of the operating time in one cycle can be used for
braking (deceleration).
9-14
Standard Models
Inverter Approx.
pp Minimum
Voltage Maximum 3G3IV- Resistor Number of Units b ki
braking connection
i
c ass
class app cab e motor
applicable oo PLKEB spec ca o s
specifications (See note.) torque resistance
capacity ((kW)) (
(For one Unit)) (10% ED) (Ω)
Used Connectible
200-V 0.4 20P7 70 W 200 Ω 1 4 220% 48
class
l 0.75 20P7 70 W 200 Ω 1 4 125% 48
1.5 21P5 260 W 100 Ω 1 5 125% 16
2.2 22P2 260 W 70 Ω 1 7 120% 9.6
3.7 23P7 390 W 40 Ω 1 4 125% 9.6
5.5 25P5 520 W 30 Ω 1 3 115% 9.6
7.5 27P5 780 W 20 Ω 1 2 125% 9.6
11 2011 2400 W 13.6 Ω 1 1 125% 9.6
15 2015 3000 W 10 Ω 1 1 125% 9.6
18.5 2018 4800 W 8 Ω 1 1 125% 6.4
22 2022 4800 W 6.8 Ω 1 1 125% 6.4
30 2015 3000 W 10 Ω 2 1 125% 9.6
37 2015 3000 W 10 Ω 2 1 100% 9.6
45 2022 4800 W 6.8 Ω 2 1 120% 6.4
55 2022 4800 W 6.8 Ω 2 1 100% 6.4
75 2022 4800 W 6.8 Ω 3 1 110% 6.4
400-V 0.4 40P7 70 W 750 Ω 1 11 230% 64
class
l 0.75 40P7 70 W 750 Ω 1 11 130% 64
1.5 41P5 260 W 400 Ω 1 6 125% 64
2.2 42P2 260 W 250 Ω 1 7 135% 32
3.7 43P7 390 W 150 Ω 1 4 135% 32
5.5 45P5 520 W 100 Ω 1 3 135% 32
7.5 47P5 780 W 75 Ω 1 2 130% 32
11 4011 1040 W 50 Ω 1 2 135% 20
15 4015 1560 W 40 Ω 1 2 125% 20
18.5 4018 4800 W 32 Ω 1 1 125% 19.2
22 4022 4800 W 27.2 Ω 1 1 125% 19.2
30 4030 6000 W 20 Ω 1 1 125% 19.2
37 4037 9600 W 16 Ω 1 1 125% 12.8
45 4045 9600 W 13.6 Ω 1 1 125% 12.8
55 4030 6000 W 20 Ω 2 1 135% 19.2
75 4045 9600 W 13.6 Ω 2 1 145% 12.8
110 4030 6000 W 20 Ω 3 1 100% 19.2
160 4045 9600 W 13.6 Ω 4 1 140% 12.8
185 4045 9600 W 13.6 Ω 4 1 120% 12.8
220 4045 9600 W 13.6 Ω 5 1 125% 12.8
300 4045 9600 W 13.6 Ω 6 1 110% 12.8
Note 1. The Connectable column indicates the maximum number of Braking Resistor Units that can
be connected to a single Inverter or Braking Unit.
Note 2. Do not use a resistor with a resistance of less than the minimum connection resistance shown
above. Otherwise, the Inverter or Braking Unit will be damaged.
9-15
Braking Resistor Unit Dimensions (mm)
Figure 1 Mounting 150 min.

screws
30 min. 30 min.
150 min.
Figure 2 Mounting 200 min.

screws
50 min.
50 min. 200 min.
• 200-V Class
3G3IV- Figure
g Dimensions (mm) Weight
g
PLKEB A B C D Screws (k )
(kg)
20P7 1 105 275 50 260 M5 x 3 3.0
21P5 1 130 350 75 335 M5 x 4 4.5
22P2 1 130 350 75 335 M5 x 4 4.5
23P7 1 130 350 75 335 M5 x 4 5.0
25P5 1 250 350 200 335 M6 x 4 7.5
27P5 1 250 350 200 335 M6 x 4 8.5
2011 2 266 543 246 340 M8 x 4 10
2015 2 356 543 336 340 M8 x 4 15
2018 2 446 543 426 340 M8 x 4 19
2022 2 446 543 426 340 M8 x 4 19
• 400-V Class
3G3IV- Figure
g
PLKEB A B C D Screws
40P7 1 105 275 50 260 M5 x 3 3.0
41P5 1 130 350 75 335 M5 x 4 4.5
42P2 1 130 350 75 335 M5 x 4 4.5
43P7 1 130 350 75 335 M5 x 4 5.0
45P5 1 250 350 200 335 M6 x 4 7.5
47P5 1 250 350 200 335 M6 x 4 8.5
4011 2 350 412 330 325 M6 x 4 16
4015 2 350 412 330 325 M6 x 4 18
4018 2 446 543 426 340 M8 x 4 19
4022 2 446 543 426 340 M8 x 4 19
4030 2 356 956 336 740 M8 x 4 25
4037 2 446 956 426 740 M8 x 4 33
4045 2 446 956 426 740 M8 x 4 33
9-16
Braking Resistor (Yaskawa Electric)
3G3IV-PERF150WJ
The 3G3IV-PERF150WJ shortens deceleration time by consuming the motor’s regenerative energy
by means of a resistor. (Usage rate: 3% ED)
Note The “usage rate: 3% ED” means that 3% of the operation time in one cycle can be used for braking
(deceleration).
Standard Models
Inverter Braking Resistor Approx.
pp
Voltage class Maximum 3G3IV- Resistor Number used braking
b ki torque
applicable PERF150WJ specifications (3% ED)
motor
capacity (kW)
200-V class 0.4 201 150 W 200 Ω 1 220%
0.75 201 150 W 200 Ω 1 125%
1.5 101 150 W 100 Ω 1 125%
2.2 700 150 W 70 Ω 1 120%
3.7 620 150 W 62 Ω 1 100%
400-V class 0.4 751 150 W 750 Ω 1 230%
0.75 751 150 W 750 Ω 1 130%
1.5 401 150 W 400 Ω 1 125%
2.2 301 150 W 300 Ω 1 115%
3.7 201 150 W 200 Ω 1 110%
(See note.)
Note Usage rate: 2%.
9-17
Digital Operator Connecting Cable
3G3FV-PCN25
This is a special cable for the 3G3FV Series. It is used for connecting the Inverter to the Digital Operator.
The cable length can be either 1 or 3 meters.
Standard Models
3G3FV-PCN125 Cable length: 1 meter
3G3FV-PCN325 Cable length: 3 meters
DC Reactor (Yaskawa Electric)
3G3HV-PUZDABAMH
This DC Reactor is used for controlling harmonic current generated by the Inverter. It is more effective
than an AC reactor, and can be used in conjunction. It is intended for use with Inverters of 15 kW or less.
(It is built into Inverters of 18.5 kW and over.)
Standard Models
Inverter DC Reactor
Voltage Maximum 3G3IV-PUZDAB Rated Rated Inductance Loss (W)
class applicable voltage (V) current (A) (mH)
motor
capacity
(kW)
200-V 0.4/0.75 5.4A8MH 800 VDC 5.4 8 8
class
l 1.5 to 3.7 18A3MH 18 3 18
5.5/7.5 36A1MH 36 1 22
11/15 72A0.5MH 72 0.5 29
400-V 0.4/0.75 3.2A28MH 800 VDC 3.2 28 9
class
l 1.5/2.2 5.7A11MH 5.7 11 11
3.7 12A6.3MH 12 6.3 16
5.5/7.5 23A3.6MH 23 3.6 27
11/15 33A1.9MH 33 1.9 26
9-18
Figure 1 Figure 2 2- screw: d2 D2 max.
D1
D
H
W1 D1
t
2- mounting hole
W D
Screw: d1
4- mounting hole
W1 Screw: d1
W t
3G3HV- Figure
g
PUZDAB H W W1 D D1 D2 t d1 d2 (k )
(kg)
5.4A8MH 1 53 85 74 60 32 --- 0.8 M4 --- 0.8
18A3MH 2 76 86 60 72 55 80 1.2 M4 M5 2.0
36A1MH 2 93 105 64 92 80 90 1.6 M6 M6 3.2
72A0.5MH 2 93 105 64 112 100 105 1.6 M6 M8 4.9
3.2A28MH 1 53 85 74 60 32 --- 0.8 M4 --- 0.8
5.7A11MH 1 60 90 80 60 32 --- 0.8 M4 --- 1.0
12A6.3MH 2 76 86 60 72 55 80 1.2 M4 M5 2.0
23A3.6MH 2 93 105 64 92 80 90 1.6 M6 M5 3.2
33A1.9MH 2 93 105 64 102 90 95 1.6 M6 M6 4.0
AC Reactor (Yaskawa Electric)
3G3IV-PUZBABAMH
Connect this AC Reactor for controlling harmonic current generated by the Inverter, or when the power
supply capacity is extremely large compared with that of the Inverter. It is also effective for improving the
power factor. Select an AC Reactor from the following tables according to the motor capacity.
Connection Example Applicable Range
Wiring AC Reactor
Power supply capacity
breaker AC Reactor required

U X Motor
L1 L1 T1 4000 for harmonizing
V Y
L2 L2 T2 IM power supply.
L3 W Z L3 T3
SYSDRIVE 600 AC Reactor
(kVA)
not required.
0 60 400
Inverter Capacity (kVA)
9-19
Standard Specifications and Dimensions (mm)
• 200-V Class
Maximum 3G3IV-PUZBAB Current (A) Inductance Loss (W) Weight (kg) Figure
applicable (mH)
motor
capacity
(kW)
0.4 2.5A4.2MH 2.5 4.2 15 2.5 1
0.75 5A2.1MH 5 2.1 15 2.5
1.5 10A1.1MH 10 1.1 25 3
2.2 15A0.71MH 15 0.71 30 3
3.7 20A0.53MH 20 0.53 35 3 2
5.5 30A0.35MH 30 0.35 45 3
7.5 40A0.265MH 40 0.265 50 4
11 60A0.18MH 60 0.18 65 6
15 80A0.13MH 80 0.13 75 8
18.5 90A0.12MH 90 0.12 90 8
22 120A0.09MH 120 0.09 90 8
30 160A0.07MH 160 0.07 100 12
37 200A0.05MH 200 0.05 110 15
45 240A0.044MH 240 0.044 125 23
55 280A0.038MH 280 0.038 130 23
Dimensions (mm)
A B B1 C D E F H J K L M
120 71 --- 120 40 50 105 20 M6 10.5 7 M4
120 71 --- 120 40 50 105 20 M6 10.5 7 M4
130 88 --- 130 50 65 130 22 M6 11.5 7 M4
130 88 --- 130 50 65 130 22 M6 11.5 7 M4
130 88 114 105 50 65 130 22 M6 11.5 7 M5
130 88 119 105 50 70 130 22 M6 9 7 M5
130 98 139 105 50 75 130 22 M6 11.5 7 M6
160 105 147.5 130 75 85 160 25 M6 10 7 M6
180 100 155 150 75 80 180 25 M6 10 7 M8
180 100 150 150 75 80 180 25 M6 10 7 M8
180 100 155 150 75 80 180 25 M6 10 7 M10
210 100 170 175 75 80 205 25 M6 10 7 M10
210 115 182.5 175 75 95 205 25 M6 10 7 M10
240 126 218 215±5 150 110 240 25 M6 8 7 M10
240 126 218 215±5 150 110 240 25 M8 8 10 M12
9-20
• 400-V Class
Maximum 3G3IV-PUZBAB Current (A) Inductance Loss (W) Weight (kg) Figure
applicable (mH)
motor
capacity
(kW)
0.4 1.3A18.0MH 1.3 18.0 15 2.5 1
0.75 2.5A8.4MH 2.5 8.4 15 2.5
1.5 5A4.2MH 5 4.2 25 3
2.2 7.5A3.6MH 7.5 3.6 35 3
3.7 10A2.2MH 10 2.2 43 3
5.5 15A1.42MH 15 1.42 50 4
7.5 20A1.06MH 20 1.06 50 5 2
11 30A0.7MH 30 0.7 65 6
15 40A0.53MH 40 0.53 90 8
18.5 50A0.42MH 50 0.42 90 8
22 60A0.36MH 60 0.36 90 8.5
30 80A0.26MH 80 0.26 95 12
37 90A0.24MH 90 0.24 110 15
45 120A0.18MH 120 0.18 130 23
55 150A0.15MH 150 0.15 150 23
9-21
Dimensions (mm)
A B B1 C D E F H J K L M
120 71 --- 120 40 50 105 20 M6 10.5 7 M4
120 71 --- 120 40 50 105 20 M6 10.5 7 M4
130 88 --- 130 50 70 130 22 M6 9 7 M4
130 88 --- 130 50 70 130 22 M6 9 7 M4
130 88 --- 130 50 65 130 22 M6 11.5 7 M4
130 98 --- 130 50 75 130 22 M6 11.5 7 M4
160 90 115 130 75 70 160 25 M6 10 7 M5
160 105 132.5 130 75 85 160 25 M6 10 7 M5
180 100 140 150 75 80 180 25 M6 10 7 M6
180 100 145 150 75 80 180 25 M6 10 7 M6
180 100 150 150 75 75 180 25 M6 10 7 M6
210 100 150 175 75 80 205 25 M6 10 7 M8
210 115 177.5 175 75 95 205 25 M6 10 7 M8
240 126 193 205±5 150 110 240 25 M8 8 10 M10
240 126 198 205±5 150 110 240 25 M8 8 10 M10
Figure 1 Figure 2
M: Terminal Nameplate
M: Terminal
Nameplate
Detailed diagram of
Detailed diagram of 4-J Mounting bolt mounting hole
mounting hole 4-J Mounting bolt
Simple Input Noise Filter and Input Noise Filter

3G3EV-PLNFD (Yaskawa Electric)/3G3IV-PFN (Schaffner)
The Simple Input Noise Filter is connected

to the power input side to eliminate the noise
in the power line connected to the Inverter
and suppress noise leaking from the
Inverter to the power line.
Simple Input Noise Filter Input Noise Filter
9-22
Applicable Models
200-V class 400-V class
Maximum New model Rated Maximum New model Rated
motor ca- current motor ca- current
pacity (A) pacity (A)
(kW) (kW)
0.1 to 0.75 3G3EV-PLNFD2103DY 10 0.2 to 0.75 3G3EV-PLNFD4053DY 5
1.5 3G3EV-PLNFD2153DY 15 1.5/2.2 3G3EV-PLNFD4103DY 10
2.2 3G3EV-PLNFD2203DY 20 3.7 3G3EV-PLNFD4153DY 15
3.7 3G3EV-PLNFD2303DY 30 5.5 3G3EV-PLNFD4203DY 20
5.5 3G3IV-PFN258L4207 42 7.5 3G3EV-PLNFD4303DY 30
7.5 3G3IV-PFN258L5507 55 11 3G3IV-PFN258L4207 42
11 3G3IV-PFN258L7534 75 15/18.5 3G3IV-PFN258L5507 55
15 3G3IV-PFN258L10035 100 22 3G3IV-PFN258L7534 75
18.5/22 3G3IV-PFN258L13035 130 30 3G3IV-PFN258L10035 100
30 3G3IV-PFN258L18007 180 37/45 3G3IV-PFN258L13035 130
37/45 3G3IV-PFN359P25099 250 55 3G3IV-PFN258L18007 180
55 3G3IV-PFN359P30099 300 75/110 3G3IV-PFN359P30099 300
75 3G3IV-PFN359P25099 x 2P 500 160/185 3G3IV-PFN359P25099 x 2P 500
220 3G3IV-PFN359P30099 x 2P 600
300 3G3IV-PFN359P30099 x 2P 900
Connection Example
3-phase input
Noise filter
9-23
Dimensions
Dimensions 1 (Three-phase Input) Dimensions 2 (Three-phase Input)
Model Figure
g Dimension (mm)
3G3EV-
3G3EV ((above)
b ) W D H max. A A’ B Mounting
screw
PLNFD2103DY 1 120 80 55 108 --- 68 M4 × 4, 20 mm
PLNFD2153DY 120 80 55 108 --- 68 M4 × 4, 20 mm
PLNFD2203DY 170 90 70 158 --- 78 M4 × 4, 20 mm
PLNFD2303DY 2 170 110 70 --- 79 98 M4 × 6, 20 mm
PLNFD4053DY 170 130 75 --- 79 118 M4 × 6, 30 mm
PLNFD4103DY 170 130 95 --- 79 118 M4 × 6, 30 mm
PLNFD4153DY 170 130 95 --- 79 118 M4 × 6, 30 mm
PLNFD4203DY 200 145 100 --- 94 133 M4 × 6, 30 mm
PLNFD4303DY 200 145 100 --- 94 133 M4 × 6, 30 mm
9-24
External Figure 1 External Figure 2
A J (Mounting A J (Mounting
B screw) B screw)
G
E
G
E
C
C
D
F
F F
D
H
H
External Figure 3 External Figure 4
A J (Mounting 42 210 210 42
B screw)
5040 60 60
G
E
275
300
C
Six, 9 dia.
12.5
M12 M12
160
D
F F
64
30
510
H 47 516 47
Model Figure
g
3G3IV
3G3IV- ((above)
b ) A B C D E F G H J (k )
(kg)
PFN258L4207 1 329 300 325 185 70 M6 45 314 4-M5 2.8
PFN258L5507 329 300 353 185 80 M6 55 314 4-M5 3.1
PFN258L7534 2 329 300 377 220 80 M6 55 314 4-M5 4
PFN258L10035 379 350 436 220 90 M10 65 364 4-M5 5.5
PFN258L13035 439 400 486 240 110 M10 80 414 4-M5 7.5
PFN258L18007 3 438 400 480 240 110 M10 80 413 4-M5 11
PFN359P25099 4 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 16
PFN359P30099 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 16
9-25
3G3IV-PLF Output Noise Filter (Tokin Corp.)
Connect the 3G3IV-PLF Output Noise Filter to the motor output side of the Inverter to prevent the
noise generated by the Inverter from flowing to the motor.
Standard Specifications and External Dimensions
Maximum motor Inverter capacity

p y Output Noise Filter
capacity
i (kW) (kVA) Model 3G3IV- Rated current (A)
200-V class 3.7 6.7 PLF320KA 20
5.5 9.5 PLF350KA 50
7.5 13 PLF350KA 50
11 19 PLF350KA x 2P 100
15 24 PLF350KA x 2P 100
18.5 30 PLF350KA x 2P 100
22 37 PLF350KA x 3P 150
30 50 PLF350KA x 3P 150
37 61 PLF3110KB x 2P 220
45 70 PLF3110KB x 2P 220
55 85 PLF3110KB x 3P 330
75 110 PLF3110KB x 4P 440
400-V class 3.7 6.1 PLF310KB 10
5.5 11 PLF320KB 20
7.5 14 PLF320KB 20
11 21 PLF335KB 35
15 26 PLF335KB 35
18.5 31 PLF345KB 45
22 37 PLF375KB 75
30 50 PLF375KB 75
37 61 PLF3110KB 110
45 73 PLF3110KB 110
55 98 PLF375KB x 2P 150
75 130 PLF3110KB x 2P 220
110 170 PLF3110KB x 3P 330
160 230 PLF3110KB x 4P 440
185 260 PLF3110KB x 4P 440
220 340 PLF3110KB x 5P 550
300 460 PLF3110KB x 6P 660
9-26
External Dimensions
Model Termi- Dimensions Weight

g
3G3IV-
3G3IV nals
l A B C D E F G H (k )
(kg)
PLF320KA TE-K5.5 140 100 100 90 70 45 7 x 4.5 4.5 0.6
M4 dia. dia.
PLF350KA TE-K22 260 180 180 160 120 65 7 x 4.5 4.5 2.0
M6 dia. dia.
PLF310KA TE-K5.5 140 100 100 90 70 45 7 x 4.5 4.5 0.5
M4 dia. dia.
PLF320KB TE-K5.5 140 100 100 90 70 45 7 x 4.5 4.5 0.6
M4 dia. dia.
PLF335KB TE-K5.5 140 100 100 90 70 45 7 x 4.5 4.5 0.8
M4 dia. dia.
PLF345KB TE-K22 260 180 180 160 120 65 7 x 4.5 4.5 2.0
M6 dia. dia.
PLF375KB TE-K22 540 320 480 300 340 240 9 x 6.5 6.5 12.0
M6 dia. dia.
PLF3110KB TE-K60 540 340 480 300 340 240 9 x 6.5 6.5 19.5
M8 dia. dia.
Appearance
Output Noise Filter (Tokin Corp.)
3G3IV-PLF
This Noise Filter controls the noise generated by the Inverter from disseminating to the power supply
side. Connect it to the motor output.
9-27
Standard Models
Maximum 200-V class 400-V class
applicable
li bl Inverter Output Noise Filter Inverter Output Noise Filter
motor capacity capacity
capacity Model (3G3IV-) Rated Model (3G3IV-) Rated
(kVA) (kVA)
(kW) current (A) current (A)
0.4 1.2 PLF310KA 10 1.4 PLF310KB 10
0.75 2.3 PLF310KA 10 2.6 PLF310KB 10
1.5 3.0 PLF310KA 10 3.7 PLF310KB 10
2.2 4.2 PLF310KA 10 4.7 PLF310KB 10
3.7 6.7 PLF320KA 20 6.1 PLF310KB 10
5.5 9.5 PLF350KA 50 11 PLF320KB 20
7.5 13 PLF350KA 50 14 PLF320KB 20
11 19 PLF350KA x 2P 100 21 PLF335KB 35
15 24 PLF350KA x 2P 100 26 PLF335KB 35
18.5 30 PLF350KA x 2P 100 31 PLF345KB 45
22 37 PLF350KA x 3P 150 40 PLF375KB 75
30 50 PLF350KA x 3P 150 50 PLF375KB 75
37 61 PLF3110KB x 2P 220 61 PLF3110KB 110
45 70 PLF3110KB x 2P 220 73 PLF3110KB 110
55 85 PLF3110KB x 3P 330 98 PLF375KB x 2P 150
75 110 PLF3110KB x 4P 440 130 PLF3110KB x 2P 220
110 --- --- --- 170 PLF3110KB x 3P 330
160 --- --- --- 230 PLF3110KB x 4P 440
185 --- --- --- 260 PLF3110KB x 4P 440
220 --- --- --- 340 PLF3110KB x 5P 550
300 --- --- --- 460 PLF3110KB x 6P 660
9-28
Model Terminal A B C D E F G H Weight
(3G3IV-) (kg)
PLF310KA TE-K5.5 140 100 100 90 70 45 7 x 4.5 dia. 4.5 dia. 0.5
M4
PLF320KA TE-K5.5 140 100 100 90 70 45 7 x 4.5 dia. 4.5 dia. 0.6
M4
PLF350KA TE-K22 260 180 180 160 120 65 7 x 4.5 dia. 4.5 dia. 2.0
M6
PLF310KB TE-K5.5 140 100 100 90 70 45 7 x 4.5 dia. 4.5 dia. 0.5
M4
M4
M4
PLF345KB TE-K22 260 180 180 160 120 65 7 x 4.5 dia. 4.5 dia. 2.0
M6
M6
M8
Dimensions
Noise Filter Connection Example

Input Output
Noise SYSDRIVE Noise
Filter Filter
MCCB IN IN Three-phase
inductive motor
L1 1 4 1 4
L2 2 5 2 5 IM
L3 3 6 3 6
9-29
10 Chapter 10
Appendix
10-1 Notes on Using the Inverter for a Motor
Appendix Chapter 10
10-1 Notes on Using the Inverter for a Motor
Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor

When a standard motor is operated with the Inverter, power loss is slightly higher than when operated
with a commercial power supply.
In addition, cooling effects also diminish in the low-speed range, resulting in an increase in the motor
temperature. Therefore, the motor torque should be reduced in the low speed range.
The following graph shows the allowable load characteristics of a standard motor.
If 100% torque is continuously required in the low-speed range, use a special motor for use with invert-
ers.
Allowable Load Characteristics of Standard Motor

24% ED (or 15 minutes)
Torque (%)
Continuous
Frequency (Hz)
High-speed Operation
When using the motor at a high speed (60 Hz or more), problems may arise in dynamic balance and
bearing durability.
Torque Characteristics
The motor may require more acceleration torque when the motor is operated with the Inverter than
when operated with a commercial power supply. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to
be used with the motor to set a proper V/f pattern
Vibration
The 3G3FV Series uses a high carrier PWM to reduce motor vibration. When the motor is operated with
the Inverter, motor vibration is almost the same as when operated with a commercial power supply.
Motor vibration may, however, become greater in the following cases.
• Resonance with the natural frequency of the mechanical system
Take special care when a machine that has been operated at a constant speed is to be operated in
variable speed mode.
If resonance occurs, install vibration-proof rubber on the motor base or use the frequency jump
function to skip any frequency resonating the machine.
• Imbalanced rotor
Take special care when the motor is operated at a higher speed (60 Hz or more).
10-2
Appendix Chapter 10
Noise
Noise is almost the same as when the motor is operated with a commercial power supply. Motor noise,
however, becomes louder when the motor is operated at a speed higher than the rated speed (60 Hz).
Using the Inverter for Special Motors
Pole-changing Motor
The rated input current of pole-changing motors differs from that of standard motors. Select, therefore,
an appropriate Inverter according to the maximum input current of the motor to be used.
Before changing the number of poles, always make sure that the motor has stopped. Otherwise, the
overvoltage protective or overcurrent protective mechanism will be actuated, resulting in an error.
Submersible Motor
The rated input current of submersible motors is higher than that of standard motors. Therefore, always
select an Inverter by checking its rated output current.
When the distance between the motor and Inverter is long, use a cable thick enough to connect the
motor and Inverter to prevent motor torque reduction.
Explosion-proof Motor
When an explosion-proof motor or increased safety-type motor is to be used, it must be subject to an
explosion-proof test in conjunction with the Inverter. This is also applicable when an existing explosion-
proof motor is to be operated with the Inverter.
Since the Inverter itself is, however, not explosion-proof, always install it in a safe place.
Gearmotor
The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor
manufacturer. In particular, continuous operation of an oil-lubricated motor in the low speed range may
result in burning. If the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than 60 Hz, consult with the manufac-
turer.
Synchronous Motor
A synchronous motor is not suitable for Inverter control.
If a group of synchronous motors is individually turned ON and OFF, synchronism may be lost.
Single-phase Motor
Do not use an Inverter for a single-phase motor. The motor should be replaced with a 3-phase motor.
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains)

If an oil-lubricated gearbox or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism, oil lubrica-
tion will be affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range. The power transmission
mechanism will make noise and experience problems with service life and durability if the motor is oper-
ated at a speed higher than 60 Hz.
10-3
Appendix Chapter 10
Motor Burnout Due to Insufficient Dielectric Strength of Each Phase of

the Motor
Surge occurs among the phases of the motor when the output voltage is switched. If the dielectric
strength of each phase of the motor is insufficient, the motor may burn out. The dielectric strength of
each phase of the motor must be higher than the maximum surge voltage. Normally, the maximum
surge voltage is approximately three times the power voltage imposed on the Inverter.
Be sure to connect a dedicated motor to the 400-V Inverter. A standard motor may burn out if it is con-
nected to the Inverter due to the insufficient dielectric strength of each phase of the standard motor.
10-4
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. I516-E1-05
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision Date Revised content

code
1 September 1996 Original production
2 April 1997 The following constant numbers were added to Section 7: b1-07, C3-05, C5-08, C8-30, E1-11, E1-12,
E1-13, F1-14, F8-01, H5-05
Page 1-2: Inverter model list updated. “3-phase” added.
Page 1-5: Low noise and harmonic countermeasure information clarified.
Page 2-5: Dimensions added for the new models.
Pages 2-12 and 2-13: Terminals and connections changed for the 200-V Class and 400-V Class tables. Notes
added. New models reflected.
Pages 2-16, 2-17, 2-19, and 2-20: New models added.
Page 2-21: New wire sizes and tightening torque added.
Page 2-23: New models reflected in the information for wiring the power terminal of the Inverter.
Pages 2-26 and 2-29: Note added.
Page 2-31: New models reflected in the bottom output diagram.
Page 3-29: Motor selection explanation corrected.
Pages 5-19 and 5-34: Motor selection information corrected.
Page 5-26: New models reflected in the V/f patterns.
Page 5-27: Note 2 reference removed from E1-07 in the table. New models reflected in Note 3.
Page 5-42: New models reflected in Note 2.
Page 6-50: Setting the Carrier Frequency and Inverter Overload “OL2” information added.
Pages 6-50 and 6-51: Note references added to the carrier frequency table. Following note rewritten.
Page 6-58: Setting 16 (Motor 2 Selection) added to the table.
Page 6-70: Settings 1C to 1E corrected and added to.
Page 6-79: Inverter model corrected for each Note 2.
Page 7-16: Note references added to the carrier frequency table. Following notes rewritten.
Page 7-24: Motor 2 Setup: E3 to E5 list added.
Pages 7-26 and 7-27: F9 constant numbers added.
Pages 7-29 and 7-31: Setting values 16 and 1C (motor 2 selection and motor 2 selected) added.
Pages 8-4 and 8-7: High carrier frequency information added to OH and OL2 fault displays and OH minor fault
display.
Page 8-17: Inverter overload information added.
Pages 9-2 to 9-4: Specifications completely updated.
Page 9-11: “Control Unit” corrected to “Braking Unit.”
Pages 9-11 and 9-13: New models added.
Pages 9-21 and 9-23: Noise Filter models added.
Page 10-5: New models added.
R-1
Revision History
Revision Date Revised content

code
3 June 2000 Addition of 3G3FV--CUE, changes accompa- Pages 6-8 and 6-29: Changed descriptions of E2-05
nying 3G3FV software changes, changes to and E2-06.
some display messages, and other changes and Pages 6-12 and 6-34: Added E2-10.
improvements. Specific changes are as follows: Page 6-14: Made corrections to b7-01 and b7-02.
Page 6-30: Added sections 6-3-8 and 6-3-9.
Front matter: Added General Precautions, Warning
Label information, and About this Manual. Model Page 6-36: Added section Setting Operation Source
numbers changed in Checking before Unpacking. Selection (b1).
Changes to information on changing Digital Operator Page 6-37: Added b2-08.
language. Page 6-38: Changed factory settings for b3-02 and
Pages 1-2, 1-6, and 3-13: Changes to information on b3-03.
changing Digital Operator language. Pages 6-41 to 6-43: Added PID control functions.
Page 1-5: Changed second item in Frequency Refer- Page 6-45: Changed end of setting range for b5-01 to
ences. “4.”
Pages 1-10, 2-10, 2-46, 3-2, 5-13, 5-20, 5-34, 6-16, Page 6-54: Added information for settings for second
6-51, 6-59, 6-50, 6-62 to 6-65, 6-71, 6-74, 6-92, and motor.
9-17: Added notes. Page 6-56: Changed information for binary input set-
Page 1-11: Added section on new functions. ting.
Pages 2-4, 2-6, 4-2, and 8-13: Changed warnings. Page 6-56: Made changes to analog monitor card set-
Page 2-10: Added to Multi-function analog input sig- tings.
nal level. Page 6-57: Added F8 and F9.
Page 2-21: Added information on frequence refer- Page 6-58: Added settings 15, 16, 17, 1E, 30, and 31.
ence variable resistor and added graphic and note to Page 6-60: Added information on external baseblock.
bottom of page. Page 6-65: Add setting 1E.
Pages 2-26 to 2-28: Replaced Wiring on Input Side of Page 6-73: Added C and D.
Main Circuit and added information on calculating
inverter input power supply capacity. Pages 6-74 and 6-75: Corrected analog input charac-
teristics.
Page 2-30: Added information on inverter–motor
cable length. Pages 6-76, 6-79, and 6-90: Corrected information on
setting ranges.
Page 2-35: Added setting for L3-04.
Page 7-77: Added information after second bullet.
Page 3-14: Added U1-32 to U1-38.
Pages 3-25, 6-2, 6-9, 6-13, 6-31, and 6-35: Added E2 Page 6-81: Changed factory setting for L3-03 and de-
to E5 and F7 to F9. leted note.
Page 3-30: Added section 3-8. Page 6-82: Added setting 3.
Pages 5-4 to 5-5, 5-8, and 5-10: Changed setting Page 6-89: Changed setting range of L8-02.
range to 0 to 4 and added descriptions and notes. Page 6-90: Changed “10%” to “5%” and added informa-
Pages 5-9: Added information to “2 to 39” setting and tion.
deleted “This setting can’t be used with flux vector Page 6-92: Added sentence and note to o2-03.
control.” Pages 7-2 to 7-48: Added/corrected parameters.
Pages 5-15 and 5-18: Added setting “17.” Page 8-2: Added to introduction.
Page 5-19: Added section section 5-2. Pages 8-5 and 8-5: Added/changed PGO, DEV, OPR,
Pages 5-22 and 5-28: Added “PG Direction,” “Minor EFO, EF8, E-15, BUS, CPF21, CPF22, and CPF23.
Fault,” and “V/f over Setting” to table. Page 8-8: Added/changed PGO, DEV, EFO, ERR,
Pages 5-22 and 5-41: Added setting “2.” CALL, E-15, and BUS.
Page 5-24: Corrected voltage for setting of 7 to “9 V.” Pages 8-9 and 8-10-: Added/changed OPE03, OPE07,
Pages 5-27, 6-6, and 6-27: Changed setting range for OPE08, and ERR.
E1-04. Page 8-15: Information added on vertical axes.
Page 5-28: Added information to introduction. Page 8-17: Information added EF.
Pages 5-30 and 5-44: Added F1-14. Pages 9-7 and 9-9: Diagrams changed and cards add-
Pages 5-33 to 5-34: Added E1-02 ed.
Page 5-38: Added C5-08. Pages 9-13 and 9-14: Diagrams changed and model
Pages 5-39 and 5-48: Added information on 3G3FV-- numbers changed.
CUE/CE. Pages 9-14 and 9-15: Note added and minimum con-
Page 6-5: Added sections 6-1-3 to 6-1-7. nection resistances added to table.
Page 6-6: Added section on startup torque compensa- Page 9-18: Losses added to table.
tion. Page 9-20: “1120” changed to “120” and “182.8”
Pages 6-7 and 6-50: Changed percentage to 100%. changed to “182.5.”
Pages 6-7, 6-12, 6-28, and 6-34: Changed setting Pages 9-22 to 9-25: Models changed.
range for E2-03 and added note. Page 10-5: Model numbers deleted.
04 October 2001 Page 1-4: Changed “Starting drive” to “Starting Page 6-44: Added information on speed search func-
torque.” tion.
Page 1-11: Updated software version information. Page 6-49: Changed diagram.
Page 1-16: Added information on PG speed deviation Page 6-87: Added information on external search.
detection in software version VSG101114. Page 6-101: Added information on stall prevention
Page 5-22: Changed parameter numbers from “H7” to function settings.
“L7.” Page 7-20: Added note to table.
Page 5-28: Added information on flux vector control.
Page 7-25: Added note to table.
Page 5-32: Changed information on PG speed devi-
ation settings. Page 7-33: Changed information in table.
Page 5-38: Changed speed loop diagram. Page 7-37: Changed information in table.
Page 5-48: Changed information on PG speed devi- Page 7-43: Changed information in serial commu-
ation settings. Changed speed loop diagram. nications setup table.
Page 6-9: Added information on flux vector control. Page 7-44: Changed information in table.
Page 6-19: Changed diagram. Changed “servo-lock” Page 8-18: Added and changed information on Input
to “zero-servo.” Noise Filters.
05 May 2006 Page ii : General precautionary notes added to the first page.
Page v : Information on general precautions notation added.
Page xv: Information on liability and warranty added.
R-2

User'S Manual: Sysdrive 3G3Fv

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User'S Manual: Sysdrive 3G3Fv

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

User'S Manual: Sysdrive 3G3Fv

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cat. No.

Items to Check when Unpacking

Has the product been damaged in shipping?

OMRON Product References

Operation and Adjustment Precautions

Maintenance and Inspection Precautions

! WARNING Maintenance, inspection, or parts replacement must be performed by authorized

Checking the Nameplate

Checking the Model

Checking for Damage

Checking the Accessories

Warranty and Limitations of Liability

FV* S0D^>]@8 * 9^]:^>]@8 A1Ć00= 1 **

Chapter 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Chapter 2. Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Chapter 3. Preparing for Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Chapter 4. Trial Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Chapter 5. Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Chapter 6. Advanced Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Chapter 7. Parameter Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Chapter 8. Maintenance Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Chapter 9. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Chapter 10. Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-1

SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Inverter Models

Voltage class Protective structure Maximum applied motor capacity Model

200-V class NEMA1 type

400-V class NEMA1 type

Selection of Modes for Vector Control and V/f Control

V/f Pattern Settings

Speed Control By Feedback

Low Noise (0.4- to 160-kW Models)

Seven-language Digital Operator (from Software Ver. VSG101113)

Harmonic Countermeasures (0.4- to 160-kW Models)

Parameter Hierarchy and Three Types of Access Levels

Initialize mode BASIC QUICK-START b1-03 Stopping method

b2 DC braking b2-01 Zero speed level

Auto-tuning b3 Speed search b3-01 Beginning speed search

Example: 200-V Class Inverter with 0.4-kW Output

Power input Braking Resistor Motor output

DRIVE: Lit when in operation mode.

Two-line LCD that displays data for monitoring,

Execute operations such as setting parameters,

Key Name Function

1-3 New Functions

1-3-1 Software Ver. VSG101040

CompoBus/D (DeviceNet) Communications Card

CompoBus/D Addition to the Frequency Reference Selection (Parameter b1-01)

CompoBus/D Addition to the Run Source Selection (Parameter b1-02)

Communications External Fault Input (Parameters F9-01 to F9-03)

Two-motor Switching Control

Control Mode Setting Second Motor (Parameter E3-01)

V/f Pattern Settings for Second Motor (Parameters E4-01 to E4-06)

Inverter Output Noise Reduction

Default Setting Change for Carrier Frequency (Parameters C6-10 to C6-03)

Inverter Overload Function Change (OL2 Detection)

Operation Selection after Switching to Remote Mode (Parameter b1-07)

PG Disconnection Detection (PGO) Detection Time Setting (Parameter

New Functions for Multi-function Inputs 1 to 6 (H1-01 to H1-06)